Zeyto Card
Made and sold by the Zeyto team
Zeyto makes business software for the UAE and sells its own set-up services, templates, guides and Claude skill packs here. These are sold by Zeyto (Emeron Infospace FZE) itself, not by an independent seller.
Prices are in UAE dirhams. These are sold by Zeyto itself. Marketplace terms
All 13 Zeyto Claude skills in one pack, with a master README, install guide and a which-skill-when chart. US $399 instead of US $1,160 bought one by one (saving US $761, 66%).
The Complete Zeyto Skill Library is the full set of thirteen Zeyto Claude skills in one download, for a small UAE business, accountant, freelancer or agency that wants repeat jobs done the same careful way every time. Each skill is a folder of instructions Claude follows: intake questions, step-by-step workflow, decision rules, output formats, a quality checklist, failure cases and worked examples with real inputs and full outputs. They work in Claude with Skills support (upload the zip for each skill) or in any Claude chat by pasting SKILL.md. The thirteen skills: - Meeting to Actions: notes and transcripts into decisions and tasks: turns pasted meeting notes or a transcript into decisions, owners, due dates and a follow-up email. - Marketplace Listing Writer for Zeyto Sellers: turns what you sell into a Zeyto marketplace listing that fits the field limits. - Brand Voice Builder: interviews you and writes a Voice Guide the other skills reuse. - Invoice Chaser: UAE payment reminders in English and Arabic: drafts payment reminders by days overdue, in English and Arabic, for email, WhatsApp and calls. - Job Post and CV Screener: writes a job post, a scorecard, CV screening notes and interview questions, with fairness checks. - Customer Support Reply Desk: classifies customer messages and drafts replies, with escalation rules and a macro library. - Weekly Business Review from your own numbers, in AED: turns the week's numbers you paste into a one-page review and questions to investigate. - SEO Content Brief Writer: writes search content briefs with intent, outline, FAQ, links and schema ideas. - LinkedIn Post Engine: plans a week of LinkedIn content and drafts posts and comment replies in your voice. - Instagram Reel and Carousel Studio: takes an idea to hooks, script, shot list, on-screen text, caption and carousel text. - Proposal and Quote Builder for UAE services, trading and agencies: scopes the job and writes a proposal or quote with pricing options and assumptions. - Month-End Close Coach: guides a small company through the month-end close with checklists and draft journals. - UAE VAT Query Helper: prepares a UAE VAT question with facts, labelled uncertainty and a question for your accountant. Also in the pack: - A master README that says where to start (build your Voice Guide first, then the writing skills reuse it). - An install guide for the three ways to use a skill: upload to Claude, copy into Claude Code, or paste into a chat. - A which-skill-when decision chart, with combinations that work together and a starter message for each skill. - An index of all 39 worked examples. - An upload-ready zip for each of the 13 skills, and the single business use licence. The saving: bought one by one at the Zeyto list prices on 8 November 2026, the 13 skills add up to US $1,160. The library is US $399. That is US $761 less, or 66% off. Prices can change; these figures are for the day this version was released. What it does not do: none of the skills logs in, posts, sends, files or pays anything on your behalf. You review and publish or send. None promises reach, replies, sales, rankings, hires or tax outcomes. The VAT and month-end skills are explainers and checklists, not tax or accounting advice; the VAT facts in the pack were checked on 8 November 2026 and will age, and e-invoicing is described as being phased in, never as ready. Claude can make mistakes, so check output before you rely on it. Arabic text in the examples is drafted for illustration; have a native speaker read it before public use. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you can paste text. Single business use licence, no resale.
An Excel workbook that turns your sales and purchase invoices for one VAT period into each box of the VAT 201 return, reconciles to your ledger and runs checks before you file. It works with any accounting system.
This workbook helps you prepare the figures for the VAT 201 return from your own sales and purchase lists. You enter each invoice and credit note once. The workbook sorts them into the 14 boxes of the return, shows the amount, VAT and adjustment for each box, compares the result with your ledger and runs a set of checks so that you find problems before you file. What is inside: - Setup sheet for your business name, TRN, period dates, rate and tolerance - Sales and Purchases registers of 500 rows each, with a row check that explains what is wrong in plain words - Purchase types for standard rated, reverse charge, customs import, zero rated, exempt and VAT not recoverable - A VAT 201 Workings sheet with the 14 boxes, including Box 1 by emirate - A Ledger Reconciliation sheet where you type your ledger figures and explain each difference - A Checks sheet that ends in ALL CHECKS PASSED or a list of what to clear - A Worked Example with a fictional quarter and two deliberate errors so you can see the checks work Who it is for: owners, bookkeepers and accountants in the UAE who want a clear second check on a return, or who keep their books in a spreadsheet or in software without a good VAT 201 view. If you use Zeyto, its VAT 201 report maps the tax codes SR5, ZR, EX, OOS and RCM to boxes in the same way. This workbook is independent of Zeyto and of any other software, and nothing is imported: you copy figures across. What it is not: it does not file anything and it does not replace your accountant. It handles the common cases. Tax groups, the profit margin scheme, designated zone special cases, bad debt relief, annual input tax apportionment and capital assets calculations are worked out elsewhere and typed into the adjustment cells. Box 6 is pre-filled by the FTA from customs, so the workbook only helps you compare. The return can change: always compare with the current return in EmaraTax. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
A Claude skill that turns a loose UAE VAT worry into a clear question: facts and assumptions written down, a thinking aid with a confidence label on every line, an invoice field check, likely VAT 201 boxes, and a ready-to-send question for your accountant.
UAE VAT Query Helper is a Claude skill for the questions small businesses ask every week: is this 5%, zero-rated or exempt, what must be on my tax invoice, which VAT 201 box does this go in, do I need to register. It does not answer them with a verdict. It prepares you to get a good answer from your accountant or the FTA, and it is honest about what it does not know. Every statement it makes carries one of four labels: STATED IN SOURCE, LEANS, DEPENDS or OUTSIDE MY FACTS. The facts it treats as stated come from a dated facts file inside the pack (checked 8 November 2026), each with the official page named: registration thresholds, the 5% rate, the 28th-day return deadline, the 14-day tax invoice rule, advance payments, the domestic reverse charge categories, the penalty regime change, and the e-invoicing decisions and timetable as published. Everything outside that file is labelled as outside it. What is inside: - SKILL.md (239 lines) with the intake questions, the workflow, the output format (the VAT Query Brief) and the failure cases. - A facts file with sources, and a list of topics that are always sent to your accountant (free zones, real estate, partial exemption and others). - A classification ladder: is VAT in play, which bucket on the output side, can input VAT be recovered. - A tax invoice field checklist that keeps verified items apart from items you must verify on the FTA page, plus arithmetic checks. - A VAT 201 box map with a row-by-row method, using Zeyto tax codes as one example. - A template and a filled sample for the question you send your accountant. - Three worked examples: a service to a customer in Oman, a pasted invoice check, and a deposit plus a registration threshold question. How it runs: you paste your question and facts, Claude asks up to ten intake questions, restates your facts and assumptions, runs the ladder, says which way the facts lean and what would change the answer, names the page to check, and writes the email to your accountant. What it does not do: it never gives a final tax position, never says an invoice is compliant, never quotes penalty amounts, does not look up current law, does not file or log in to anything, and does not cover corporate tax. E-invoicing is described as being phased in, never as ready. The facts file will age, so the pack explains how to update it. Works in Claude with Skills support, or in any Claude chat by pasting SKILL.md and the facts file. Single business use licence.
Pick the right step and tone for each overdue invoice, then get the email, WhatsApp, call script, dispute reply and payment plan drafted. You review and send.
Invoice Chaser is a Claude skill that helps you chase overdue invoices without damaging the customer relationship. You give it the invoice number, amount in AED, due date, customer, payment terms and what has already been said. It works out the days overdue, shows the arithmetic, and picks the next step in a sequence: before-due reminder, day 1, day 7, day 14, day 30 or day 45 and later. It then chooses a tone rung (friendly nudge, firm reminder, formal notice, final notice before escalation) using a written decision rule that weighs days overdue, relationship value and earlier contact. A final notice is only drafted after set checks: enough earlier messages, a call attempted, no open dispute, and a next step that you have decided. What is inside: - A step-by-step workflow with thresholds and modifiers - Email drafts, subject lines and short WhatsApp versions for every rung, in English and Arabic - A call script and answers to the things customers say on a call - A dispute branch for wrong amount, not received, pending approval, cash-flow trouble and a missed promise - A promise-to-pay tracking table and a payment-plan proposal template - UAE practice notes: WhatsApp as a normal channel, post-dated cheques, approval cycles, Ramadan and Eid timing - Three worked examples with full outputs Who it is for: small UAE businesses, accountants, credit controllers and freelancers who send invoices and chase them by hand. The overdue list can come from any source. Zeyto's receivables and customer statement reports can supply it, and so can any other ERP, accounting package or spreadsheet. What it does not do: it does not send messages, log in anywhere or read your books. It never threatens legal action and never states legal consequences, interest rights or cheque-law points as fact; it tells you to check with a lawyer before mentioning any legal step. It cannot promise that a customer will pay or reply. Arabic drafts should be checked by a native speaker before sending. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste the SKILL.md. The skill drafts and you send.
A 24-lesson course on running a business on Zeyto: ERP set-up, sales, purchases, inventory, UAE VAT and month-end. Course book, workbook with 72 tasks, 144 quiz questions and a completion checklist. No certificate.
The Zeyto Operator Masterclass is a 24-lesson course that teaches you to run a business on Zeyto, from first set-up to a signed-off month-end close. It uses Zeyto as the working example and one made-up company, Marina Office Supplies LLC, so every lesson ties to the next. The six modules, four lessons each: - ERP set-up and foundations: how books, documents and posting fit together; company set-up and guard rails; chart of accounts, opening balances and cut-over; users, roles, approvals, period locks and backups. - Sales: customers, price lists and quotations; delivery notes and the tax invoice; receipts and post-dated cheques; returns, credit notes, statements and receivables ageing. - Purchases: suppliers, purchase orders and goods receipts; the purchase invoice, input VAT and landed cost; paying suppliers, advances and debit notes; payables ageing and bank reconciliation. - Inventory: items, units and warehouses; costing methods and stock movements; counts, batches, serials and negative stock; stock reports tied to the ledger. - UAE VAT: fundamentals, registration and your TRN; tax codes, tax invoices and credit notes; input VAT, reverse charge and the VAT 201 box by box; filing, deadlines, records and the e-invoicing timetable as published. - Month-end: the checklist and Day End; cash, bank and petty cash checks; party, stock, accrual, payroll and asset checks; Trial Balance, corrections, Profit & Loss and Balance Sheet; reports, year-end basics and a capstone that runs a full month. What you get: 24 lessons of roughly 2,200 words each (about 54,000 words, a 160-page course book plus each lesson as its own PDF and Markdown file), a workbook with 72 extended tasks and model answers, 24 quizzes with 144 questions and a full answer key with explanations, and a completion checklist. Each lesson has the concept, UAE specifics, numbered steps with the real Zeyto screen names, a worked example with checked arithmetic, mistakes to avoid, short exercises with answers and key points. A README gives three study plans (eight weeks, four weeks, or by need). Who it is for: bookkeepers, accountants, finance managers and owners who will operate or support Zeyto. No prior Zeyto knowledge is needed. What it is not: it is not a certificate and gives no certificate, and it does not sell exam access. The Zeyto Academy and its certification exams stay free. It is not tax, legal or accounting advice for your case: UAE VAT points follow the Federal Tax Authority material as read in November 2026, and where a rule is not settled the lessons say to check with your accountant or the FTA. E-invoicing is covered only as the Ministry of Finance published timetable and as what Zeyto does and does not do. It does not cover Zeyto Garage, Field Sales, POS or Contracting as separate products. All companies and figures are made-up examples, and no business result is promised. Requirements: a PDF reader and a way to unzip files; Word or a compatible editor for the workbook; access to Zeyto or its demo is helpful but not required. Written November 2026, version 1.0.
A defined 6-week engagement to move your business onto Zeyto: discovery, set-up, data migration, print formats, VAT-ready chart, training and go-live, followed by 90 days of support. Fixed scope, named limits, one invoice.
Outcomes - A short blueprint after two discovery sessions: what Zeyto does for you, the gaps, the plan with dates - One Zeyto company fully configured (up to 3 branches or warehouses, 15 users, 3,000 items, 3,000 customers and suppliers), with a VAT-ready chart and tax codes as you and your accountant decide - Your data moved: Emeron history with the Migration Tool and its certificate, or masters and opening balances from any other system through the Import Center - Up to 6 document types printing in your identity, and a monthly report pack - Your team trained in 5 sessions of 2 hours, with a cut-over day on call - 90 days of support after go-live, including help with your first month-end close What we do - Run two 90-minute discovery sessions, write the blueprint and agree the dated plan with you - Configure and load Zeyto as in our ERP Set-up package, with the larger limits above, and set up the chart and tax codes with your accountant - Migrate data with two rehearsals and a final run (limits: up to 3 financial years and 100,000 documents), and support your accountant through review and sign-off - Set up the print formats and the report pack, then train your people - Stay on call for up to 4 hours on your cut-over day - After go-live: weekly 30-minute check-ins for 8 weeks, up to 12 further specialist hours within the 90 days, and a 2-hour session on your first month-end close What you provide - A named project lead with authority to decide, and your accountant for the decisions that are theirs - A Zeyto licence, a Windows PC or server, and a network that works - Your data on time: Emeron access, or exports in our templates; a signed trial balance, ageing and stock listing at the cut-over date - Staff for every training session, and your sign-off at each milestone within 2 working days Timeline 30 working days from kickoff to go-live (discovery weeks 1 and 2, set-up and data weeks 2 to 4, training and cut-over weeks 5 and 6), then 90 days of support counted from go-live. Go-live must happen within 60 working days of kickoff or the 90 days start on that date. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One legal entity, one country (UAE), one company in Zeyto - Specialist time about 70 hours in total, including the support hours listed - Changes to scope go through a written change note with its own price. Nothing is added without your yes - Remote delivery. On-site visits are quoted separately Not included - Zeyto licence fees, hardware, or network work - Garage Pro or Contracting roll-out (separate packages), custom development or integrations - Tax advice, VAT filing or accounting decisions. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - A guarantee of savings, sales or any business result - Migration histories larger than the limits, or sources other than Emeron replayed document by document Support after delivery - 90 days from go-live: eight weekly 30-minute check-ins, email and WhatsApp answered within 1 working day, up to 12 specialist hours - A weekly written status email during delivery, and a close-out report - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
All 13 Zeyto template products in one zip: VAT 201 workings, invoices, cash flow, budget, receivables, month-end, start-up planning, stock, onboarding, quotations, social media and freelancer rates. $149 against $260 if bought one by one.
The bundle contains every product in the Zeyto templates range, each in its own folder with its own README, plus a START-HERE.txt that lists them and suggests where to begin. Bought separately the 13 products cost $260. The bundle is $149, which saves $111, about 43%. What is inside: - Tax and compliance: UAE VAT 201 Workings Workbook, UAE Tax Invoice Pack, End-of-Service Gratuity Calculator - Cash, budget and the books: 13-Week Cash Flow Forecast, Monthly Budget vs Actual Tracker, Receivables Ageing and Chase Tracker, Month-End Close Checklist Pack, Startup Costs and Break-even Planner - Stock and people: Stock Count Sheets and Reorder Planner, Employee Onboarding Pack - Selling and marketing: Quotation and Proposal Template Set, Social Media Content Calendar (90 days), Freelancer Rate and Profitability Calculator - In total: 11 Excel workbooks with an Instructions sheet and a Worked Example in each, 9 Word documents, 1 printable PDF, 2 sample CSV files and 13 README files The files in the bundle are identical to the individual products. If you already own some of them, the bundle does not discount those: buy the ones you need separately if that costs less. Who it is for: a small business in the UAE that wants a full set of working templates for the books, cash, tax paperwork, stock, hiring and selling, from one download. What it is not: none of the files connects to a bank, accounting software, the FTA or Zeyto. You type or paste figures in. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or HR advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. The VAT 201 workings do not file a return, and the invoice pack does not make you e-invoicing ready: e-invoicing is on the roadmap, with dates that depend on your turnover. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc for the workbooks; Microsoft Word 2016 or later, Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer for the documents.
We configure one Zeyto company end to end in the standard order, load your masters and opening balances from your files, and train your team in three sessions. About 20 hours of specialist time and 30 days of support.
Outcomes - One Zeyto company configured: profile, fiscal years, branches and warehouses (up to 3), chart of accounts (up to 30 new accounts), UAE tax codes, currencies (up to 3 foreign), payment terms and modes - Items (up to 2,000), price lists (up to 3), customers and suppliers (up to 1,500 together) loaded through the Import Center - Opening balances posted from your signed trial balance, ageing and stock listing (up to 300 open bills and 500 stock lines) and reconciled - Up to 8 users with the standard roles and up to 2 custom roles, numbering, document workflow, up to 2 approval rules, backup schedule and a tested restore - A configuration workbook recording every decision, and your team trained in 3 sessions of 2 hours What we do - Check the install and version, then follow the same configuration sequence Zeyto teaches its consultants - Configure the company and settings in a screen-share, deciding with you and your accountant where the choice is yours - Run the Import Center for each list: template, preview, rejects, import, import history; one reload of rejected rows is included - Post opening balances in Accounting, Openings and download the reconciliation; check the Opening Balance ledger (3900) nets to zero - Set one POS till and one receipt printer if your plan includes POS - Train in 3 sessions of 2 hours (sales and POS, accounting and VAT, administration), up to 8 attendees each What you provide - A Zeyto licence or 14-day evaluation, and a Windows PC or server with Zeyto installed (we guide the install if needed) - Your customer, supplier and item lists in the Import Center templates, which we send - Signed trial balance at the cut-over date, ageing by invoice, stock valuation by item and warehouse - A decision maker and your accountant for the decisions listed in the workbook - Staff present for all three training sessions Timeline 14 working days from the day we have the form and the first data files; data usually decides the pace. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One company, about 20 hours of specialist time (set-up 12, training 6, review 2) - Limits as listed above; larger volumes or a second company are quoted - Remote only. On-site visits are quoted separately - Data cleaning beyond 2 hours of our time is extra Not included - Full transaction-history migration from Emeron (see the Emeron to Zeyto Data Migration package) - Zeyto licence fees, hardware or network work - Custom development, integrations, or Field Sales device roll-out - Tax advice, VAT filing or accounting decisions. Your accountant decides; we configure - A second company, or more than 3 branches Support after delivery - 30 days of email and WhatsApp support on what we set up, answered within 1 working day - One extra 60-minute question-and-answer session within those 30 days - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Offline passenger manifest for boat charters: names, age groups, emergency contacts and life jacket sizes per sailing, checked against the boat capacity, with a printable manifest for the skipper and a shore contact sheet. Warns about missing details before departure.
Charter Passenger Manifest is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a fishing or leisure charter. For each sailing you pick the boat, the skipper, the route and a shore contact, then list the passengers with an emergency contact for each. The app counts adults, children and infants, the life jackets of each size and the places left, and refuses a list that is over the capacity you entered. The manifest prints for the skipper, and a shorter sheet prints for the person on shore. The problem it removes: Passenger names and phone numbers are written on paper at the pier, in a hurry. The list is incomplete, nobody knows who to call for a guest, the number of life jackets is counted by eye, and the person on shore has nothing. This app makes the list before the guests arrive and shows what is missing: no shore contact, no skipper, children with no adult, more people than seats. What is inside: - Boats with the registration or licence reference as you enter it and the passenger capacity from your own papers - Sailings with date, departure time, expected return, skipper, route and shore contact - Passenger lines with age group, phone, emergency contact name and number, life jacket size and a needs assistance note - Counts of adults, children, infants, life jackets by size, places left, and a boarded count - Rules: not over capacity, children and infants need an adult, and a sailing cannot be marked Departed until every listed passenger is ticked as boarded - Check list of sailings with missing details, and sailings still out from an earlier day - Printable manifest, and a printable shore contact sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: fishing charters, dhow and yacht operators, speedboat tours and diving boats that carry paying guests and want a clean passenger list and an emergency contact for every guest. What it is NOT: It is an administrative list. It does not decide how many people a boat may carry, does not check licences, weather or safety equipment, and does not replace any report you must file with an authority or a marina. Do not enter passport numbers or medical details. It does not send messages or alert anyone by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (122 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 939 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline harvest and sales log for a small farm: harvest by crop and plot with rejects, sales to buyers with price and payment terms, spoilage and waste by reason, stock on hand per crop, average price, sell-through and who owes you. Prints a delivery receipt.
Farm Harvest, Sales and Unsold Stock Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small farm that sells vegetables, herbs, fruit or dates to hotels, shops, market stalls and walk-in customers. Each crop has its own unit: kilograms, crates, bunches or trays. Harvest entries record what was picked and what was rejected at grading. Sales record the buyer, the quantity, the price and what was paid. Waste entries record what spoiled. For every crop the app shows what is left, how much of the harvest was sold, the average price you got, and the money still to collect. The problem it removes: Harvest numbers sit in one notebook and sales in a chat thread, so nobody can say how much of the tomato crop was actually sold, how much went to waste, or what price it fetched. Credit buyers pay late and the balance is remembered from memory. This app puts harvest, sales, waste and payments for each crop side by side. What is inside: - Crops with their own unit, a usual price and a last harvest date - Harvest log by plot with the quantity picked, the quantity rejected at grading and the good quantity - Sales to named buyers with price, an optional price override for the day, amount paid, due date from the buyer terms and balance - Waste log with reasons: spoiled in storage, damaged in transport, unsold, home use, given away - Per crop: harvested, sold, wasted, stock on hand, share sold, average price and revenue - A check that stops a sale of more than is in stock, and a payment of more than the sale - Overdue payments with a ready WhatsApp message, and a printable delivery receipt - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small farms, greenhouse growers, date and herb producers and farm shops that sell by the kilogram, crate, bunch or tray and want to see harvest, sales and waste together. What it is NOT: It does not track seeds, fertiliser, labour, irrigation or field costs, and it does not give growing advice. It does not convert between units, so a crop sold in crates must be harvested in crates. It is not an accounting system and does not issue tax invoices or work out VAT. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (166 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1866 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline fee and attendance tracker for tutors and tuition centres: students and guardians, monthly fees in one tap, payments with receipts, who owes what, attendance register, WhatsApp reminders and statements. Data stays on your device.
Tutor and Small School Fee and Attendance Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a private tutor, a tuition centre or a small nursery school. You list your students with the guardian's number, add the fees you charge, record each payment, and mark attendance. The app keeps every balance, every attendance percentage and the list of families to message. The problem it removes: Fees are written in a notebook or a chat, nobody is sure who paid last month, and an unpaid balance is only noticed when it is already large. Attendance is remembered rather than recorded, so a conversation with a parent has no facts behind it. This app gives one place for fees, payments and attendance without a subscription. What is inside: - Students with guardian, phone, level, subjects, monthly fee and status (Active, Paused, Left) - Add this month's fees for all active students in one tap, with a check so nobody is charged twice in the same month - Payments with automatic receipt numbers, a printable A5 receipt and a printable A4 statement for each student - Balance owed, last payment date and attendance percentage for the last 30 days, all calculated for you - Attendance register: start today's register in one tap, change the status of whoever was absent, and see a calendar of lessons - Fees dashboard with collected and owed amounts, a WhatsApp reminder list for families with a balance and a list of low attendance - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: private tutors, music and language teachers, tuition centres, nurseries and small schools with up to a few hundred students, who run fees and attendance on paper or in chat today. What it is NOT: It does not send messages by itself: it opens WhatsApp with the message written and you press send. It has no parent login, timetable, grades, report cards or online payment, and it stores no ID copies or medical information. Fees are plain amounts that you enter, with no tax calculation. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (165 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 715 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
7 lessons for UAE freelancers and consultants: choosing a legal route, your numbers, scoping and contracts, invoicing, getting clients without a big budget, running the business and growing. 42 quiz questions, 42 workbook tasks.
A course for people who sell their own skills in the UAE, covering the whole business from the legal route to the invoice to the pipeline. It complements pricing and LinkedIn material rather than repeating it, and it gives no fees or eligibility rules for any licence route: it teaches you how to compare routes and what to ask. What is inside - 7 lessons of 1,200 or more words: choosing your legal route as a decision table with blank fee and timeline cells to fill from quotes, and a warning to check your employment contract if you work while employed; your numbers before your first client (budget, day rate, cash buffer and a VAT threshold watch); scoping, proposals and contracts; invoicing and getting paid; getting clients without a big budget (niche, referrals, subcontracting, partnerships, by-hand outreach); running the business; and growing, with a 90-day plan. - A legal route worksheet and a proposal and agreement outline (Word), the outline marked as a starting point your lawyer should review. - Worked examples with made-up freelancers; every figure, including date arithmetic, is recomputed. - 42 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), 42 quiz questions with an explained answer key, a completion checklist (no certificate) and a 7-day plan of about 16 hours. Facts it states 5% VAT, AED 375,000 and AED 187,500 registration thresholds, the 30-day window, the 14-day tax invoice rule, how advance payments are treated for VAT, and the general five-year record retention point. Corporate tax, insurance and foreign-currency questions are listed as questions for your accountant. Who it is for Freelancers, consultants, trainers, designers and accountants in practice starting out or tidying up their business. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
7 lessons on listings, pricing, fulfilment, returns and tax for UAE marketplace sellers, with fill-in fee tables and a formula-driven profit calculator (6 sheets). No marketplace fee is stated; you enter your own.
An operations course for people who sell physical products on Amazon.ae and Noon. It teaches the arithmetic and the process, and it never states a marketplace fee, commission, return rule or programme condition, because those change and belong in your own seller account. Instead you get fee tables to fill from your current fee schedule, and an Excel calculator that uses your inputs. What is inside - 7 lessons of 1,200 or more words: how the two marketplaces work for a seller and a readiness checklist; choosing and sourcing products with a landed-cost build-up; listings that sell, with checklists and a before and after example; pricing and fees, the full unit-economics build-up, break-even price and price floor; fulfilment and inventory, reorder point and safety stock arithmetic; orders, returns, reviews and account health; and tax, accounting and growth, including reconciling payouts and ACoS and ROAS arithmetic. - An Excel calculator with 6 sheets (Instructions, Worked Example, Fee Tables, SKU Calculator, Payout Reconciliation, Checks) and 285 formulas. Example fees in it are made-up inputs and are labelled as such. - Fee tables and listing checklists as Word forms. - 42 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), 42 quiz questions with an explained answer key, a completion checklist (no certificate) and an 8-day plan of about 17 hours. Facts it states 5% VAT, the registration thresholds and the 30-day window, and the VAT 201 due date. Import VAT, duty, fee VAT and who is the supplier in a marketplace sale are left as questions for your accountant. Product compliance is left as a verify callout. One short Arabic listing line is flagged as needing a native read. Who it is for New and small sellers, and people who sell through both marketplaces and want to know which products make money after fees, returns and advertising. Not affiliated with or endorsed by Amazon or Noon. The names are used only to describe the marketplaces; no logos are used. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader, Word or a compatible editor, and Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (or Google Sheets) for the calculator. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
A skills course, not a prompt list: 6 lessons, 42 exercises (17 with planted errors to find), a 100-point scoring rubric and a notebook template. Privacy first; AI is never the source for UAE rules.
A hands-on course that trains the skill of using an AI chat assistant for finance work, for bookkeepers, accountants, finance managers and owners. It is different from a library of ready prompts: you practise on cases, diagnose weak prompts, find the errors in made-up AI outputs, iterate, verify and score your own work. It endorses no tool and promises no output. What is inside - 6 lessons of 1,200 or more words: what an assistant can and cannot do for finance and a use / use with checks / do not use rule; the anatomy of a finance prompt with weak and strong rewrites; giving data safely (placeholders, structure, formats); checking and iterating; prompting for real tasks (reconciliation matching, variance commentary, accruals, chase emails, policy drafts, spreadsheet formulas, VAT query preparation as questions for your accountant); and your prompt workflow and team policy. - 42 exercises in the workbook (7 per lesson) with model answers: 17 'find the errors' tasks with made-up AI outputs that contain planted errors (arithmetic, a wrong rule, an invented figure, a wrong period), 13 prompt writing and rewriting tasks with a model prompt and what to check in its output, and calculation, judgement and planning tasks. - A 100-point rubric: six criteria with descriptors for every level, a gate rule (a prompt that fails the privacy criterion must not be sent), a score sheet and three worked scoring examples. - A prompt notebook template and a one-page acceptable use policy template, marked as a starting point your lawyer or compliance lead should review (Word). - 36 quiz questions with an explained answer key, a completion checklist (no certificate) and a 7-day plan of about 16 hours. Facts it states UAE VAT points only from well-established sources, each with a note to confirm with the FTA or your accountant. For rules it teaches that the assistant is not the source: the FTA and your accountant are. Who it is for Anyone in a finance role who uses, or is about to use, an AI assistant and must check the result before it is used. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader, Word or a compatible editor, and access to any general AI chat assistant for practice (the course works on made-up data you paste). Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
7 lessons on restaurant P&L, recipe costing, menu engineering, stock, labour, delivery channel margins and daily control, with an 8-sheet formula-driven Excel workbook. No platform commission or rule is stated; you enter yours.
A unit-economics course for owners, managers and investors in UAE restaurants, cafes and cloud kitchens. It teaches how each dish, each shift and each channel makes or loses money, using made-up venues with every figure recomputed. It states no food-safety rule, municipal licence, labour rule or delivery-platform commission: those are blanks to fill from your own contracts and authorities. What is inside - 7 lessons of 1,200 or more words: the restaurant P&L and the numbers that run it (food, prime and labour cost, occupancy, break-even covers); recipe costing and menu pricing with VAT-inclusive prices (5%: net = gross x 100 / 105); menu engineering with a worked 12-item analysis; purchasing, stock and waste with theoretical versus actual usage variance; labour, scheduling and productivity, including an end-of-service gratuity accrual; dine-in, delivery and catering channel economics; and controls, cash-up and decisions, with a 30-day profit plan. - An Excel workbook with 8 sheets (Instructions, Worked Example, Recipe Costing, Menu Engineering, Channel Margin, Break-even, Daily Flash, Checks) and 461 formulas, recalculated and checked. Example inputs are made up and labelled. - Opening, closing, receiving, stock count and cash-up checklists (Word). - 42 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), 42 quiz questions with an explained answer key, a completion checklist (no certificate) and an 8-day plan of about 18 hours. Facts it states 5% VAT arithmetic and the gratuity tiers from the labour law summary (21 and 30 days of basic wage, one-year minimum), with the daily rate described as a choice your accountant confirms. Rules of thumb are labelled as such, not as UAE benchmarks. Who it is for Owners and managers who want to know their real margin per dish and per channel, and investors who want to question a restaurant's numbers. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader, Word or a compatible editor, and Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (or Google Sheets) for the workbook. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
6 lessons on agent income arithmetic, lead handling, follow-up cadence, viewings and negotiation, honest listings and weekly tracking, with 34 scripts and a 7-sheet Excel pipeline tracker. No regulatory claims: verify RERA and DLD.
A business-skills course for sales and leasing agents and small brokerage owners in the UAE. It teaches the discipline that fills a pipeline: income arithmetic, lead response, follow-up, viewings, honest listings and tracking. It makes no regulatory claim of any kind. Every lesson has a callout 'Compliance questions to ask your broker or the regulator', and the course says to verify the current RERA and Dubai Land Department rules, or the regulator in your emirate, before relying on anything. What is inside - 6 lessons of 1,200 or more words: your agent business as numbers (income per deal, split and costs as inputs, the funnel worked backwards from an income goal); lead sources and lead handling; the follow-up system; viewings, negotiation and deal management; listings, content and personal brand with accuracy; and tracking, planning and growing, with a 90-day plan. - 34 scripts for first replies, follow-ups, objections, viewings and re-activation (Word), and a weekly scorecard (Word). - An Excel tracker with 7 sheets (Instructions, Worked Example, Leads, Pipeline, Activity and Funnel, Commission Planner, Checks) and 1,236 formulas, recalculated in Excel with no errors. Commission, split, conversion and probability figures are shaded example inputs for you to replace, never typical or legal values. - 36 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), 36 quiz questions with an explained answer key, a completion checklist (no certificate) and a 6-day plan of about 12 hours. What it does not do It gives no commission rate, fee, form name, advertising rule or transaction procedure, and no market data. It promises no income. Data-protection and consent for client records are questions for your brokerage and a lawyer. Who it is for New and early-career agents, team leads and small brokerage owners. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader, Word or a compatible editor, and Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (or Google Sheets) for the tracker. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
6 lessons on your service standard, first replies, complaint handling, difficult customers, escalation and reviews, and measuring. 28 scripts, an English and Arabic phrase bank (needs a native read) and 36 quiz questions.
A practical course for owners, managers and team leads at UAE small businesses whose staff and customers speak many languages. It is about human skill and process: a service standard you write, scripts you adapt, a complaint log, authority limits you set and a monthly review. It states no consumer-protection, refund or warranty law; where those arise it gives questions for your lawyer or the consumer-protection authority. What is inside - 6 lessons of 1,200 or more words: your service standard (promises, response times, tone, the cost of poor service); first replies and everyday scripts (28 scripts for chat, email and phone); handling a complaint step by step with severity levels and a decision table of what staff may offer; difficult conversations and staying safe; escalation, refunds and public reviews; and measure and improve, with a dashboard and a 30-day roll-out. - A complaint log and one-page service standard template (Word). - A phrase bank of 46 short service phrases in Arabic and English with transliteration. It was drafted by the author and needs a native Arabic read before use with customers; the course says so in the README and wherever Arabic appears. - Worked examples for made-up businesses, with the cost of each remedy and the dashboard arithmetic recomputed. - 36 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), including role-play scoring sheets; 36 quiz questions with an explained answer key; a completion checklist (no certificate); and a 6-day plan of about 12 hours. Who it is for Retail, services, clinics, restaurants, workshops and online sellers with a small front-line team. What it does not do It is not an AI tool and does not replace a lawyer. Authority limits and reply targets are made-up starting points for you to set. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. A fluent Arabic reader to check the phrase bank. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
Six Zeyto products for UAE owners (setup, financial statements, VAT mistakes, corporate tax readiness, credit control, customer service) plus an operating binder. USD 149 instead of USD 204 bought separately.
A bundle for owners and managers of UAE small businesses: six Zeyto catalogue products and a new Owner's Operating Binder that ties them into one system. Bought separately the six cost USD 204 (39 + 49 + 9 + 39 + 39 + 29). The pack costs USD 149, a saving of USD 55 (27%), and it adds the binder, which is not sold separately. The six products - Start a Business in the UAE in 30 Days: Playbook and Week Plan (USD 39): a day-by-day plan, decision tables and 23 worksheets. - How to Read Your Financial Statements: A Course for UAE Business Owners (USD 49): 8 lessons built on one complete set of statements. - UAE VAT Mistakes and How to Fix Them (USD 9): 43 mistakes with correction paths. - UAE Corporate Tax for Small Business Owners: What to Prepare (USD 39): 6 lessons on preparation, with no rate or deadline stated. - Credit Control and Getting Paid in the UAE (USD 39): 6 lessons, 46 scripts and lawyer question lists. - Customer Service and Complaint Handling for UAE SMEs (USD 29): 6 lessons, 28 scripts and a phrase bank that needs a native Arabic read. The Owner's Operating Binder (new, only in this pack) - Chapter 1: which question goes to which product, reading orders for five situations, and a ten-number owner dashboard with formulas and a worked example. - Chapter 2: a 60-minute monthly owner review in six blocks, with triggers, a worked month and a review sheet. - Chapter 3: an annual calendar you fill in (VAT due dates worked out from the 28th-day rule, licence, lease, visas, insurance, items to confirm), an adviser map and a one-page adviser brief. - Chapter 4: a 13-week plan through the six products (about 39 hours), a way to run each week, and a decision log with a 'reverse if' column. - A workbook of 15 tasks with model answers (Word and PDF). What is in the files For each product: the course book or playbook (PDF, with bookmarks for the courses), the workbook (Word), and for the courses the quizzes and answer key (PDF) and the Word extras (templates, script banks, question lists). To keep the pack a manageable size, the lesson-by-lesson text files and the separate workbook PDFs that come with the standalone products are not repeated here. What it is NOT It is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it states no corporate tax rate, threshold or deadline, and it promises no result or income. It leads to no exam or certificate. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. UAE rules change; every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
Offline quote to invoice book for job-based businesses: numbered quotes, a deposit invoice, a final invoice that deducts the deposits already invoiced, payments, an overdue list with WhatsApp messages and a printable customer statement. Data stays on your device.
Quote, Deposit and Final Invoice Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a business that quotes a job, takes a deposit before it starts and bills the rest when it finishes. You write the quote once, raise the deposit invoice from it, and later a final invoice that shows the deposit already invoiced and the balance left. Each customer gets a statement of every invoice and payment. The problem it removes: On a job that takes weeks, the deposit is invoiced in one document, the final bill in another, and somebody forgets to take the deposit off or bills it twice. Accepted quotes sit with no deposit invoice because nobody is reminded. At month end nobody can say what one customer owes across five invoices. This app links the chain from quote to deposit to final invoice to payments. What is inside: - Customers, quotes with lines and a deposit percentage, and a status from Draft to Accepted - Invoices of four kinds: Full, Deposit, Part and Final. A Final invoice takes off the deposit invoices already issued for the same quote - Payments with a check that stops you receiving more than the invoice still owes - Money desk: accepted quotes with no deposit invoice yet, quotes waiting for an answer, overdue invoices with a WhatsApp message, and invoiced by month - Printable quote, invoice (A4 and a short A5) and a customer statement that lists every issued invoice and payment with the balance - VAT is a rate you enter in Settings, shown on quotes and invoices as a separate line - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: contractors, fit-out and joinery shops, signage and printing businesses, event suppliers, repair and installation firms and anyone who quotes a job, asks for a deposit and bills in stages. What it is NOT: It is not a full accounting system and does not post to one. Its invoice layout is an example: it does not claim to meet the invoice rules that apply to you, so check the wording and the VAT rate with your accountant. It does not send messages, take online payments, issue credit notes or keep stock. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (172 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1862 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline app for the person who messages customers on WhatsApp: contact lists with an opt-in record, campaigns with the message text, a send sheet with one tap per person, replies and stop requests tracked, and a rest period so nobody is messaged twice in a row.
WhatsApp Broadcast List Manager is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You keep your customers in lists, write down when and how each person agreed to receive your messages, and run a campaign: the app builds a send sheet of the people who can be messaged, and each row opens WhatsApp with the message already written for that person. You press send in WhatsApp, come back and mark the row Sent, Replied or Opted out. The problem it removes: Customer numbers live in phone contacts and old chats. Nobody remembers who agreed to receive offers, who asked to stop, who was messaged last week and who never answered. The same message goes to the same people twice, a person who said stop gets another offer, and the shop owner copies and pastes for an hour. This app keeps the list, the permission note and the send history in one place. What is inside: - Lists, and contacts with phone numbers saved in one UAE format, a name to use in messages, and a record of when and how they agreed - A status for every contact worked out for you: Ready, Resting, Not opted in, Stopped or Wrong number - Campaigns with a greeting, your message text and a sign-off, linked to one list, with only one campaign running at a time - A send sheet: one button builds the list of ready people for the running campaign, then one tap per person opens WhatsApp with their message written - One-tap results: Sent, Replied, Opted out, Wrong number. An opted out reply stops that person from every later campaign - Printable opt-in register and campaign sheet, and charts of people reached per campaign - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: shop owners, cafe and bakery owners, salon and clinic receptionists, tutors, florists and anyone who sends offers or news to their own customers by WhatsApp and wants a clear record of who agreed. What it is NOT: It does not send messages: it opens WhatsApp with the message ready and you press send. It does not connect to WhatsApp Business, does not verify that anyone agreed, and does not tell you what the rules are for marketing messages, which is for you to check with WhatsApp and the authorities that apply to you. Keep names and numbers only, no sensitive details. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (143 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1173 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for a creator who works with brands: deals from pitch to paid, deliverables on a calendar, payments expected and late, usage and exclusivity notes, commission and a printable deal sheet. Data stays on your device.
Brand Deal and Sponsorship Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a creator, influencer or small content studio that is paid by brands. You list the brands, then each deal with its fee, what it is paid in and the dates. Under each deal you list the deliverables with due dates, and the payments you expect. The app shows what is due this week, which deliverables are late, which payments are late, how much each brand still owes you, and your share after a manager or agent commission. The problem it removes: Deals live in message threads. A deliverable is a day late because it was never in a calendar, a balance is never chased because nobody wrote down that it was due, and nobody remembers what usage rights or exclusivity was agreed with which brand. This app keeps the agreement notes, the deadlines and the money in one place. What is inside: - Brands list with the deals, fees agreed and money still owed per brand - Deal board from Pitching through Confirmed and In production to Paid, with the fee total per column - Deliverables calendar with due dates, status colours and days late - Payments with due date, invoiced and received status, and a WhatsApp reminder for late ones - Fee, free product value, commission and your share, calculated per deal - Usage rights and exclusivity written as agreed, plus a contract signed tick - Printable deal sheet and payments list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: creators, influencers, UGC makers and small content studios who are paid by brands and track deals in chats or a notebook. What it is NOT: It does not review or write contracts and does not check usage rights or exclusivity: those are notes of what you agreed. It is not tax, VAT or accounting software and does not produce invoices. It does not connect to any social platform and does not fetch follower counts or results. It does not send messages by itself: it opens WhatsApp with a reminder ready for you to send. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (156 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 805 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline idea bank and shoot planner for a creator: ideas from Spark to Posted, a pick-next score, series, shoot days on a calendar, shot lists with a tick for each shot, and a printable shot list. Data stays on your device.
Content Idea Bank and Shoot Schedule is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a creator who films their own content. You write every idea down the moment it arrives, group ideas into series and move them along from Spark to Posted. When you decide to film, you plan a shoot day: the date, the place, the gear and a shot list linked to your ideas. You print the shot list, tick shots off on the day, and see how many are left. The problem it removes: Ideas are lost in voice notes and screenshots, the same idea is written three times, and a shoot day ends with missing shots because nobody wrote them down in order. This app keeps one bank of ideas, tells you which to do next, and turns a shoot day into a checked list. What is inside: - Idea bank with series, stage, format, effort and how excited you are, with a pick-next score - Idea board from Spark to Posted - Shoot calendar with date, time, place, crew and gear - Shot list per shoot, linked to ideas, with a tick for each shot - Overview of the next shoots, the ideas ready to shoot and quick wins - Printable shot list and idea brief - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: creators, video makers, photographers and social media managers who film their own content and want ideas and shoot days in one place. What it is NOT: It does not hold any ready-made ideas, scripts or trends: the bank starts with your own ideas. It does not edit video, store pictures or videos, or connect to any platform. Permission to film at a place is something you check yourself. It does not send reminders by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (165 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 850 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline monthly report sheet for a social media freelancer or agency: type each account's figures once a month, see the change from last month, write the summary and print a one page report per client. Data stays on your device.
Social Media Client Monthly Report Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for someone who reports to several clients every month. You list each client and their accounts. Each month you type the figures from the platform insights: followers, posts, reach, engagements, clicks and enquiries. The app works out the change from last month, engagement per 100 reached and the totals per client. You add a few sentences, and print a report for the client. The problem it removes: Report day means opening every account, copying numbers into a slide or a spreadsheet, working out last month's difference by hand and writing the same layout again for each client. Numbers get mixed up between months and clients. This app keeps one row per account per month and builds the report from them. What is inside: - Clients and the accounts you report on - One row per account per month with followers, posts, reach, views, engagements, clicks, enquiries and ad spend - Change in followers and reach from the month before, and engagement per 100 reached - Report per client and month with totals and your own summary, what went well, what did not and next steps - Printable monthly report and a figures list - Charts of followers and reach by month and which clients still need last month's report - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: freelance social media managers and small agencies who send monthly reports to clients and type figures in from the platforms' own insights. What it is NOT: It does not connect to any platform and does not fetch figures: you type them from the platforms' own insights. It does not judge whether a result is good or bad, does not predict results and does not compare against other businesses. Platforms define reach and views differently, so it does not add or compare reach between platforms as if they meant the same thing. It is not an ad manager and does not send the report by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (140 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1361 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline social media planner: month and week calendar, idea to posted board, caption bank with variables, hashtag sets, per-client workspaces, pillar balance and a printable month. It posts nothing. Data stays on your device.
Social Media Content Planner is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a freelancer, a small agency or a business that posts on several platforms. You give each client a workspace, then plan every post on a calendar: the title, the platform, the date and time, the caption, the hashtags, the picture notes and a six point checklist. Captions and hashtag sets you reuse live in a bank, with variables such as the brand name or a price that fill in per client. It counts characters against limits you set yourself and prints or exports the month for approval. The problem it removes: Posts are planned in a spreadsheet, captions live in phone notes, hashtags are pasted from an old post, and nobody can tell which client has nothing planned next week. A caption goes out with a placeholder still in it. This app keeps the plan, captions, hashtags and approvals for every client in one file. What is inside: - Month and week calendar with status colours, a tray for undated posts, quick dates and a pick a day move that needs no dragging - Status board from Idea through Draft, Approved and Scheduled to Posted, with back and next buttons - Post form with a live character count against the limit you set, a hashtag counter, a warning for variables that are still empty, and a six point checklist - Caption bank with hooks, captions, calls to action, replies and story text, using variables such as {brand}, {phone} and {price} - Hashtag sets with a Copy all button, repeat and cap warnings and a Tidy tool for pasted lists - Per-client workspaces, content pillars with a target share and a mix and balance page, campaigns with progress, a Today page with copy buttons, and a repurpose helper that makes draft copies for other platforms - Monthly calendar print, an approval sheet, a WhatsApp approval message, and text, CSV and calendar file (.ics) exports - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: freelance social media managers, small agencies, in-house marketers at small businesses and creators who post for more than one brand and want the plan, the captions and the approvals in one place. What it is NOT: It does not post to any platform, does not connect to any account and does not pull in numbers: reach and engagement are typed by you from the platform's own insights. It does not write captions or suggest hashtags. It stores no pictures or videos, only notes about them. The caption limits and hashtag caps it shows are starting values that you can edit, not facts about any platform, so check the platform before you rely on them. It sends no reminders by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (239 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1148 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Design a business card once, type your staff into a list, and print ten cards to an A4 sheet with crop marks. Front and back, QR contact code, UAE 90 by 55 mm or CR80 size.
Business Card Maker is an offline app in one HTML file. Choose one of ten original card designs, change the colours and words, add your logo from your device, and the app fills each person from your staff list. The sheet printer puts ten cards on an A4 page with crop marks, mirrors the back sheets so they line up when the paper goes back in, and can print one person per sheet or a mix. A QR code on the card holds the person's contact details as a vCard, made by an encoder that was checked against a reference encoder. The problem it removes: Ordering cards for a new hire takes days and a minimum run, so staff go without. Making them by hand in a word processor gives crooked cards, and every person is a new copy of the file. A change of phone number means a rebuild of all of them. What is inside: - Ten original card designs with a front and a back, in UAE 90 by 55 mm, CR80 85.6 by 54 mm or 3.5 by 2 inch size - A staff list with name, title, phone, email, website and address, and a copies number for each person - A QR contact code on the card, made from the person's details, with a short version that is easier to scan - A4 sheets with crop marks, mirrored backs for two sided printing, one person per sheet or a mixed sheet, or one card per page - Your own logo from your device, undo and redo, colour sets with a readability warning, and a saved designs library - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A small company, shop or agency that prints cards in small runs on its own printer or at a quick print shop, and wants one design for everyone, filled from a list. What it is NOT: It is not for professional offset printing: no bleed, no CMYK and no colour profile. It does not include stock photos or brand logos. It does not send the cards to a printer service. Arabic text is untested. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (88 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and no calculated fields to cross-check. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Pick a certificate style, set the wording and signature lines, add your names, and print every certificate with its own number. A4 landscape, nine original designs, offline.
Certificate Maker is an offline app in one HTML file. Choose one of nine original certificate designs, change the wording, colours and signature lines, add your logo from your device, and keep a list of names with the award and reason for each. The batch printer puts one certificate on each page, numbers them one after another and remembers the next number, so the next batch carries on. Names and details can be typed, pasted from a CSV file or imported. The problem it removes: Certificates for a class, a course or an event are made one by one in a word processor, the names are retyped, the border moves and nobody keeps count of the numbers. A reprint after a spelling mistake means finding the right file again. What is inside: - Nine original landscape designs on A4 or A5, with borders, ribbons and patterns drawn in the app - A names list with award, reason and date for each person, importable from a CSV file - Automatic numbering with a prefix and a first number, remembered after each batch - Two signature lines with names and roles, and the issuing name from Settings - Your own logo from your device, undo and redo, colour sets with a readability warning - Print all in one go, one certificate per page at the exact page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A school, training centre, club, nursery or event organiser that hands out certificates in batches and wants them to look consistent and be numbered. What it is NOT: It does not issue official or accredited certificates and makes no claim that any authority accepts them. It has no digital signatures, no verification page and no seal from any body. It does not include logos. Arabic text is untested. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (88 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and no calculated fields to cross-check. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Make a sale poster, a notice, an opening hours sign, a hiring flyer or an Eid greeting in minutes. Twenty nine original templates, five sizes, your own colours and logo, saved in this browser.
Poster and Flyer Maker is an offline design page in one HTML file. Pick a template, click any words on the page to change them, change the colours or the size, add your own text, boxes, lines and a logo from your device, and move things with the mouse or the arrow keys. Your designs are saved in the browser and can be duplicated, so next month's offer starts from last month's. Download a PNG at 1x, 2x or 3x, download an SVG, or print to the real page size (A5, A4, A3, or a 1080 pixel social post or story). The problem it removes: A small business needs a poster today and does not have a designer or the time to learn a design program. Word processors make crooked posters, and online design sites ask for an account and keep your work on their servers. The same offer is retyped from scratch every month and the colours never match the shop. What is inside: - Twenty nine templates: sales and offers, announcements, events, opening hours, hiring, menu specials, Ramadan and Eid greetings, new arrivals and thank you - Five sizes: A5, A4, A3, 1080 by 1080 pixel post and 1080 by 1920 pixel story, with the design rebuilt to fit when the shape changes - Click to edit text with size, weight, colour, alignment and line spacing, plus add text, shape, pattern, line and picture items - Twelve colour sets and your own colours, with a warning when text is hard to read against what is behind it - Undo and redo, arrow key nudging, snapping to the page and to other items, and a saved designs library with a design file you can move to another device - PNG at 1x, 2x or 3x, SVG, and print to the page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A shop owner, cafe manager, clinic receptionist, school office or salon owner who makes a notice, offer, menu special or greeting every week and wants it to look tidy without a designer. What it is NOT: It is not a full design program: no photo editing, no freehand drawing and no layers panel for hundreds of items. It does not make files for professional offset printing (no bleed, no CMYK). It does not post to social media, and it does not include stock photos or brand logos. Arabic text is untested. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (67 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and no calculated fields to cross-check. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Type a listing, choose up to three photos from your device, pick a layout and print an A4 brochure with the key facts, the description, the features and the agent contact. Four original layouts, offline.
Property One-Page Brochure Maker is an offline app in one HTML file. Choose one of four original A4 layouts, change the colours, add your logo, and fill listings with title, price, status, location, type, bedrooms, bathrooms, area, reference, description, features and the agent contact. Up to three photos per listing are picked from your device and shrunk to a small size. Print one page per listing, or save a PNG or SVG. The problem it removes: A brochure for each listing is rebuilt in a word processor, the photos are the wrong size, the facts are typed again and the agent details are out of date. A listing sheet for a viewing takes half an hour. What is inside: - Four original A4 layouts: big photo on top, colour header, photo gallery and text with photos - A listings table with price, status, location, type, bedrooms, bathrooms, area, reference, description and features - Three photo slots per listing, chosen from pictures you add from your device and kept small - An agent strip with name, phone and email, from the listing or from Settings - Your own logo from your device, undo and redo, colour sets with a readability warning, and a saved designs library - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A small agency, a property manager or a landlord who prints one page per listing for viewings and notice boards. What it is NOT: It does not publish listings to any portal, check that a listing is lawful or that a licence number is valid, or hold property records. It does not include stock photos or brand logos, and the sample pictures are plain colour blocks. Arabic text is untested. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (90 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and no calculated fields to cross-check. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Type your products and prices once, pick a sign design, and print a sheet of shelf signs with cut marks. Was and now prices and the amount saved are worked out for you.
Shelf Talker and Offer Sign Maker is an offline app in one HTML file. Choose from six original sign designs (bold price, was and now, new arrival, save banner, simple label and promo burst) in three sizes, add your colours and logo, and the product list fills each sign. The amount saved is worked out from the old and new price. The sheet printer packs signs onto A4 with cut marks, with the number of copies you set for each product. The problem it removes: Offer signs are made by hand in a word processor, prices are retyped for each sign, the old price and the saving are worked out on a phone, and a price change means redoing the sign. A sign with the wrong price on the shelf is a customer argument. What is inside: - Six original shelf sign designs in three sizes: 95 by 65 mm, A6 landscape and A6 portrait - A product list with name, price, old price, unit, a note and copies for each product - The amount saved worked out from the old and new price, for example SAVE AED 2.50 - A4 sheets with cut marks, as many signs per sheet as fit, or one sign per page at sign size - Your own logo from your device, undo and redo, colour sets with a readability warning, and a saved designs library - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A grocery, pharmacy, gift shop or hardware store that changes shelf signs every week and wants them consistent and correct. What it is NOT: It does not connect to a till or stock system, it does not check that a price is allowed or lawful, and it does not print barcodes. It does not include stock photos or brand logos. Arabic text is untested. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (88 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and no calculated fields to cross-check. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Design a tent card once and print a whole set: table numbers, reserved signs and QR menu cards. Each card prints as a folding unit with both faces upright, packed onto A4.
Tent Card and Table Number Maker is an offline app in one HTML file. Choose one of six original designs in three sizes, add your colours and logo, and list the cards you need: table 1 to 20, Reserved, a QR menu card. The fold sheet prints each card as two faces joined at a fold line, the top face turned upside down so both sides read upright when the card stands, with dashed cut and fold lines. The app picks portrait or landscape A4 to fit the most cards. The problem it removes: Table numbers and reserved signs are made one at a time in a word processor, the top face is the wrong way up after folding, and a new event means doing it all again. Setting up 30 tables takes an afternoon. What is inside: - Six original tent card designs: big number, number in a circle, reserved sign, scan for the menu, patterned corners and minimal - Three face sizes: 100 by 70 mm, A6 landscape and A5 landscape - A card list with a big text, two small lines, a note, a QR code text and a number of copies for each - A fold sheet with the top face upside down, a dashed cut line and a dotted fold line, packed on A4 - QR codes made inside the app, your own logo from your device, undo and redo, colour sets with a readability warning - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A cafe, restaurant, event organiser or office that needs a set of numbered or labelled tent cards, and wants both faces to print the right way up. What it is NOT: It does not make menus, seating plans or guest lists. It does not include stock photos or brand logos. It does not laminate or cut: you fold and trim by hand. Arabic text is untested. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (114 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and no calculated fields to cross-check. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline cheque printing for your own cheque book: design a layout in millimetres with a live ruler preview, calibrate each printer, print single or batch cheques with amount in words in English and Arabic, and keep a register that never reuses a number.
Cheque Printer with Layout Designer, Calibration and Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You measure your own cheque leaf, set its width and height, and drag the date, payee, amount in figures, amount in words, crossing and signatory line to where they belong. A printer profile holds the offsets, scale, feed direction and page size for each printer. Print one cheque or a whole batch from a payee table or a CSV, then say what happened to each leaf so the register is always true. It goes further than a plain amount in words writer: it adds a layout designer, printer calibration, a register with statuses, batch printing and void rules that never reuse a number. The problem it removes: Cheques are written by hand, so spelling the amount in words takes time and invites mistakes, and a typewriter or a one off template in a word processor drifts by a few millimetres every time the printer or the paper changes. A spoiled leaf gets thrown away and the number is forgotten, so the cheque sequence and the books no longer agree. This app puts the layout, the printer offset, the words and the register in one place. What is inside: - A layout designer for any leaf size, with rulers in millimetres, a 10 mm grid, drag and drop plus nudge buttons and exact number boxes for every field - Date as one line of text or one digit per box, payee, amount in figures, amount in words in English and Arabic, an account payee only crossing and a signatory line - Printer profiles with offset, scale, rotate, mirror and page size, and a calibration page with two crosses that works out the correction from your ruler readings - Single and batch printing, from a payee table with standing amounts or from a CSV, with a clear question afterwards: printed, spoiled or nothing printed - A cheque register with sequence numbers, statuses Issued, Cleared, Void and Stopped, post-dated dates and stale cheque warnings, and a voucher stub you can print - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: An office manager, landlord, small trading company or accountant who writes a regular run of cheques on pre-printed cheque books and wants them printed neatly and recorded. You should be happy to measure a leaf with a ruler and test on plain paper. What it is NOT: It does not supply cheque stock, a MICR line, a signature or a bank logo, and it does not claim that any layout matches any bank or that any bank accepts machine printed cheques: ask your bank. It does not talk to a bank, does not reconcile a bank statement, and does not give legal or tax advice. The Arabic wording needs a native read before you rely on it. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (201 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 695 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline donation book for a community group: numbered acknowledgements on A5, funds with running totals, donors with their giving, in-kind gifts kept apart from cash, a void status that keeps the number, and a donor summary page to print.
Donation Receipt Book for Community Groups is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the volunteer who looks after the donations of a club, parents' group, mosque or church hall committee, or a small charity. Each gift gets a numbered acknowledgement, goes into a fund, and is added to the donor's total. Gifts of goods are recorded as in-kind with a description and never mixed into the cash total. The problem it removes: Donations arrive as cash in an envelope, a transfer with no name, a cheque and a box of food. They are noted on paper or in a chat, the treasurer asks at the end of the year who gave what, and a donor asks for a letter that nobody can produce. This app records each gift once, numbers it and answers those questions. What is inside: - Donations numbered DN with the year, with donor, fund, payment kind, received by and a Void status that keeps the number - Funds with a running total and an optional target, so you see how much each appeal has raised - Donors with their total, number of gifts and last gift date, and anonymous gifts allowed - In-kind gifts recorded with a description and your own estimated value, kept out of the cash total - A5 acknowledgement, a donor summary to print for a donor who asks, and a printable donations list for any period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A volunteer treasurer or secretary of a community group who handles a modest number of donations by hand and wants a clear record and a printed acknowledgement. One person at one computer. What it is NOT: It is not a tax receipt and does not claim any registration, approval or authorisation for your group. It does not check or advise on whether your group needs permission to collect donations: ask the relevant authority. It does not take payments, does not value goods for you, and keeps names and giving history only. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (132 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 560 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline helper for reconciling issued cheques: matches statement lines to your cheques by number, flags amount differences, lists cheques outstanding as at the statement date and shows chequebook leaves missing from the register.
Issued Cheque Reconciliation and Outstanding Cheque List is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the person who reconciles the company's bank account each month. You list the cheques you issued, type or import the cheque lines from the statement, and the app does the matching: a cleared date for every cheque that appears on the statement, an amount difference where the two disagree, a statement line that has no cheque behind it, and the outstanding total as at the statement date. It prints the outstanding list for your reconciliation file. The problem it removes: Reconciling cheques is done by ticking a statement against a list, and the same questions come back every month: which cheques are still outstanding at the statement date, which cleared for a different amount, which cheque number is missing from the book, and which old cheque is now stale. This app does the matching and keeps the answer. What is inside: - Issued cheques per account with number, date, payee, amount and status Issued, Cleared, Void or Stopped - Statement lines matched to cheques by number: a cleared date for every match, and a flag for an amount difference, a cheque not in the register, or a line that cleared although the cheque is void or stopped - Outstanding cheques and their total as at the statement date of each account, and the statement balance less outstanding cheques to compare with your own books - Stale and post-dated flags using a number of days you set, and chequebook leaves that are missing from the register - A printable outstanding cheque report per account for the reconciliation file - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A bookkeeper, accountant or finance clerk who issues cheques from one or more accounts and reconciles them against monthly statements by hand or in a spreadsheet. One person at one computer. What it is NOT: It does not connect to a bank or read a statement file by itself: you type or import the cheque lines. It is a reconciliation helper, not an accounting system: it does not post anything and does not give accounting advice. It is for cheques you issued, not for cheques you receive or post-dated cheque deposit handling. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (139 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2049 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline custody book for an office that holds clients' original documents: a numbered receipt that lists each item, partial returns, a return slip, an overdue list with a WhatsApp reminder, and a count of items still held. Data stays on your device.
Original Document Custody Receipt Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an office that keeps clients' original papers for a while: a typing centre, a PRO or visa services office, an agent, an accountant. Each time a client hands over documents you write one custody receipt with a line per item. The client signs, you sign, the receipt is numbered. When items go back you tick them off and print a return slip. The app always knows what is still with you. The problem it removes: Originals are put in a drawer with a note on an envelope. Nobody can say quickly which passports or deeds are still in the office, which were returned and when, or which client has been waiting for weeks. A disagreement with a client about what was handed over has no written record. This app gives every handover a numbered receipt and every return a date. What is inside: - Custody receipts numbered DC with the year, one line per item: passport, ID card, deed, contract, certificate, cheque book or other - Return dates per item, so a part return is recorded and the receipt shows Held, Part returned or Returned - A5 custody receipt with signature lines for the client and for your staff, and a separate return slip for what was collected - Desk page: items held now, receipts overdue for return with a WhatsApp reminder, and returns this month - A reference field limited to six characters so nobody types a full document number by habit - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: An office manager or counter staff member who receives clients' original documents and wants a signed, numbered record and a list of what is still held. One person at one computer. What it is NOT: It does not make your office responsible for, or protect, anyone's documents, and it is not a legal custody agreement or advice on one. It does not store scans or photographs of documents, and it should not hold full identity or passport numbers: the reference field accepts six characters at most. It does not send reminders by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (105 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 284 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline permit desk for a building or compound: numbered parking permits with plate, bay and validity dates, a clash check that stops two active permits on one plate or bay, one day gate passes, window sticker sheets, and a list of permits expiring soon.
Parking Permit and Gate Pass Printer is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the person who hands out parking permits at a building, compound, school or warehouse. You enter the holder, the plate and the dates once. The app numbers the permit, prints it on A5 landscape, prints window stickers on an A4 sheet, refuses a second active permit on the same plate or bay for overlapping dates, and shows which permits expire in the coming days. The problem it removes: Permits are written by hand or copied from an old document, the same plate ends up with two permits, a bay is promised to two people, and nobody notices that a permit ran out last week until the guard asks. Visitors and delivery vehicles get a scrap of paper at the gate with no record. This app keeps one list and prints from it. What is inside: - Permits numbered PK with the year, holder, unit, plate, vehicle, bay, type and validity dates - A clash check: no two active permits on the same plate or the same bay for overlapping dates - Valid, Not started, Expired, Revoked and Returned shown for every permit, with the days left - A5 landscape permit and A6 gate pass to print, and a sheet of window stickers with an offset you can adjust - Gate desk page: permits expiring soon with a WhatsApp reminder, expired permits still not returned, and passes today - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A building manager, security desk, school office or warehouse supervisor who issues permits to residents, staff and contractors and passes to visitors, and wants a clean printout and a record. One person at one computer. What it is NOT: It does not read number plates, control a barrier, check a vehicle registration or fines, or send anything to a traffic authority. It does not decide who is entitled to park: that is your rule. It is not an access control system, and it keeps names and plates only, not identity documents. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (115 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 160 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline receipt book: numbered receipts that print on A5, a void status that keeps the number, a daily summary, a cash book list, and a cash in hand figure that subtracts what you banked. Data stays on your device.
Receipt Book with Auto Numbers and Cash in Hand is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for anyone who still writes receipts in a carbon book. Each receipt gets the next number by itself, prints on A5 with a place to sign, and can be voided without losing its number. A second list records the cash you took to the bank, so the app can show how much cash should be in the drawer. The problem it removes: Paper receipt books skip numbers, get a page torn out, and nobody can say how much was taken on Tuesday or how much cash should be in the drawer. Entering the same receipts in a spreadsheet afterwards doubles the work. This app numbers, prints and adds up in one step. What is inside: - Receipts numbered RC with the year and a running number, assigned when you save and never reused - Payment method, reference, received by, and a Void status that needs a reason and keeps the number in the list - A5 receipt with a signature line, and a printable cash book list for any period with a total - Today page: receipts and takings today and this month, by payment method, and the latest receipts - Bank deposits list and a cash in hand figure: cash receipts minus cash banked - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A small business, club, landlord, tutor or workshop that takes payments in cash, by cheque or by transfer and hands out a receipt each time. One person at one computer. What it is NOT: It is not a tax invoice or a VAT return and does not claim to meet any authority requirement for receipts. It does not write the amount in words, does not take card payments and does not connect to a bank. It cannot be shared between two computers at the same time. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (106 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 226 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline badge desk: numbered visitor, contractor and staff badges with a photo you pick from a file on your own computer, printed on CR80 cards (10 per A4) or A6, with a validity date and a sign in and sign out log.
Visitor Pass and ID Badge Printer is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a reception or security desk. You add a person once, choose a photo from a file on your computer, and the app numbers the badge, draws it with the name, company, host and validity dates, and prints it on CR80 card stock (ten to an A4 sheet), on A6, or four A6 badges to an A4 sheet. A log records when each person signed in and out, and badges that expired but were not returned are listed. The problem it removes: Badges written by hand or typed into a template one at a time look different every day, have no number, are never recorded, and nobody knows which are still out. This app keeps one list, draws every badge the same way and prints a sheet in one go. What is inside: - Badge holders numbered VB with the year, kind, company, host, access note, validity dates and status - A photo chosen from a file on your computer, cropped and shrunk on the device and stored with the record, never uploaded - CR80 card sheet with ten to an A4 page and cut marks, A6 one per page, and four A6 to an A4 landscape sheet - A start position for a part used sheet and a shift setting for printers that drift - Sign in and sign out with the time, a list of who is inside now, and badges expired but not returned - A button that removes the photos from badges that are finished - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: A receptionist, security officer, office manager or site clerk who issues visitor, contractor, delivery and staff badges and wants a clean printed badge and a record. One person at one computer. What it is NOT: It does not scan or read an ID document, does not check anyone against a list, does not open a door or program a card, and does not drive a plastic card printer: it prints pages that you cut or put into a card holder. It does not make a badge secure, because paper can be copied. It does not decide who may enter. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (104 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 299 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline record sheet printer for kitchens: monthly fridge and freezer temperature sheets and cleaning records on A4, blank for handwriting or filled from the readings you typed, with editable limits per unit and out of limit readings shaded. Data stays on your device.
Kitchen Fridge Temperature and Cleaning Record Sheet Printer is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You list your fridges, freezers and displays with the limits you set, and your cleaning tasks. Then print a monthly temperature sheet for each unit or a monthly cleaning record, either blank to fill in by hand or filled from the readings and initials you typed in the app. Readings outside the limit are shaded on the sheet and listed in a warning. The problem it removes: Temperature sheets are drawn by hand each month, limits are forgotten, a missed check is noticed weeks later, and a reading far outside the limit is buried in a page of numbers. This app prints a tidy sheet for each unit with its limit on it, shows which checks are missing, and flags readings that are outside the limit. What is inside: - Units list with a type, a location, a lower and an upper limit you set, and 1, 2 or 3 checks a day - Monthly temperature sheet, one A4 page per unit, with the limit and the check times printed on it - Blank sheets for handwriting, or sheets filled from the readings and initials you recorded - Readings outside the limit shaded, with the action you wrote shown, and a warning listing them - Missing checks counted for the month so far - Cleaning tasks with how often, and a monthly cleaning record on A4 landscape, blank or filled from what you recorded - Print through the browser or download a PDF at exact page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small kitchens, cafes, bakeries, caterers and food stalls that keep a paper or printed record of fridge temperatures and cleaning and want it laid out the same way every month. What it is NOT: It does not say what limits or checks you must keep, and it makes no claim that a printed sheet satisfies any inspection, audit or food safety rule. The limits are numbers you set. It does not read a thermometer, send alarms or log automatically. Ask the authority that applies to you what records you must keep. The PDF file holds Latin letters only: Arabic text prints through the browser's own Print and Save as PDF. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (122 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 464 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline label printer for food sellers: ingredients you type, the allergen words you mark shown in bold with a Contains line, made and best before dates, batch codes, a batch log, and editable A4 sticker sheet grids with a test page. Data stays on your device.
Ingredient and Allergen Label Printer is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You keep each product's ingredients, the allergen words you want emphasised, the net weight, the storage line and the shelf life. Pick a product and a made date, and the app prints sticker labels with the ingredients, the allergen words in bold, a Contains line, the dates and a batch code, or saves a PDF at exact size. The problem it removes: Food labels are retyped for every batch, the date arithmetic is done in your head, the allergen words are bolded by hand and sometimes missed, and last month's ingredients end up on this month's jar. This app keeps the wording of each product in one place, applies your allergen marking the same way on every label, and warns when an allergen word you listed does not appear in the ingredients. What is inside: - Product list with ingredients, allergen words, net weight, storage line, made in line, shelf life and batch prefix - Allergen words you type are shown in bold in the ingredients, and added to a Contains line - Words you wrap in asterisks in the ingredients are bold too - Made date, best before or use by date worked out from the shelf life, and a batch code from the date - Batch log of what you printed, with days left to the date - Six common A4 sticker sheet grids you can edit, with a test page and offset calibration - Warnings when text does not fit, shrinks too small, or an allergen word is not found in the ingredients - Print through the browser or download a PDF at exact page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: home kitchens, small bakeries, caterers, market stalls and shops that make their own food and print their own labels on sticker sheets. What it is NOT: It is not a labelling rulebook and not an allergen database. It does not know what is in your food: the ingredients and the allergen words are what you type, and it makes no claim that a label meets any food labelling law or inspection. Check the labelling rules that apply to you with the authority that applies to you. It does not work out nutrition values. The PDF file holds Latin letters only: Arabic text prints through the browser's own Print and Save as PDF. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (129 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 532 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline label designer and printer for A4 sticker sheets: text lines, QR codes, Code 128 and EAN-13 barcodes, batch lists, serial number ranges, editable sheet grids with a test page and offset calibration, and a PDF at exact size. Data stays on your device.
Label and QR Code Printer for Sticker Sheets is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) that lays labels out on the sticker sheets you already buy. You describe a label once, with text lines and a QR code or a barcode, fill it from a list or a number range, and print it or save a PDF whose labels sit on the die cuts. The problem it removes: Shelves, bins, cartons and equipment are labelled by hand, or in a word processor where the grid drifts, numbers repeat and the code is pasted in as a picture. Every sheet size needs its own template, and a small shift in the printer ruins a sheet of expensive stickers. This app keeps the sheet sizes, the label designs and the numbering in one place, with a test page to line the printer up first. What is inside: - Label designer: up to four text lines with merge fields, a QR code, Code 128 or EAN-13, placed left, right, top or bottom, with a border and padding - Eight common A4 sticker sheet grids you can edit, with a check that the grid fits the paper - Batch list with copies per item, batch names, and CSV import and export - Serial number ranges with a prefix, padding, step and suffix - Test page with a 100 mm ruler and offset buttons in 0.1 mm steps to line the print up with your stickers - Start at any label position to reuse a part-used sheet, and an outline mode for trials on plain paper - Print through the browser or download a PDF at exact page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: warehouse and shop staff, facilities teams, small makers and offices that label bins, cartons, products and equipment and want a QR code or a barcode on each label without a design tool. What it is NOT: It does not register barcodes: an EAN-13 number is the one you type and the app does not check that it was allocated to you. It does not scan or read codes, has no photo or logo layout, and does not connect to a printer or a stock system. The sheet grids are common sizes, not a promise that any maker's sheet matches. The PDF file holds Latin letters only: Arabic text prints through the browser's own Print and Save as PDF. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (129 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 668 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline price tag maker: a product list with price, was price, unit price and barcode; shelf, sale and compact tag layouts on editable A4 sticker sheets; a reprint list that flags changed prices; PDF at exact size. Data stays on your device.
Price Tag and Shelf Label Maker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You keep your products with the price, the old price, the pack size and a barcode number, choose a tag layout and a sticker sheet, and print tags or save a PDF whose tags sit on the die cuts. The app remembers the price on every tag you printed, so a price change shows up on a list of tags that are now wrong. The problem it removes: Shelf tags are typed again every time a price changes, the old price and the percentage off are worked out by hand, unit prices are skipped, and nobody knows which shelf still shows last month's price. This app turns one product list into tags and keeps track of which tags are out of date. What is inside: - Product list with price, was price, pack quantity, unit price, barcode, offer dates and copies, with the percentage off worked out for you - Three tag layouts: shelf edge, sale tag with an offer band, and compact - Four ways to show a price, including big dirhams with small fils - Reprint list: tags never printed, or printed at an older price, with a button to mark tags as printed - Seven common A4 sticker sheet grids you can edit, with a test page and offset calibration - Barcode on the tag as EAN-13 or Code 128, verified by decoding - Print through the browser or download a PDF at exact page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small shops, groceries, gift and craft stalls and market sellers who print their own shelf tags and offer tags on sticker sheets or plain paper. What it is NOT: It does not sell, scan or count stock and does not post prices to a till or a shop screen. It does not check that a price display follows any local pricing or consumer rules, so check those yourself. The unit price is calculated from the pack quantity you type. Barcode numbers are the ones you type and the app does not allocate or look them up. The PDF file holds Latin letters only: Arabic names print through the browser's own Print and Save as PDF. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (112 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 942 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline menu maker: sections, dishes and prices become a printed A4 or A5 menu, and a QR code for the menu link you supply goes on table cards and posters. The app hosts nothing. Data stays on your device.
QR Menu Maker with Table Cards is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You type your menu sections, dishes and prices, choose one or two columns and a colour, and print the menu or save a PDF. For the QR side, you type the address of an online menu you already have, and the app prints table cards and posters with a QR code that opens it, with the table number if you want one. The problem it removes: Menus live in a word processor that shifts when a price changes, sold out dishes stay on the printed page, and table QR codes are pasted in from a website one at a time. Here the menu is a list, the price change is one edit, a dish marked not available drops off the print, and the table cards are numbered in one go. What is inside: - Menus with sections, dishes, descriptions, prices and your own marks such as Vegetarian or Spicy - Printable menu on A4 or A5, one or two columns, four colours, with a QR code in the header - Dishes marked not available are left off the print without deleting them - Table cards on A6 (four per sheet), A5 (two per sheet) or an A4 poster, with a table number range - Optional table number added to the link, for a menu page that reads it - The link printed under the QR code so guests can see where it goes - Print through the browser or download a PDF at exact page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: cafes, small restaurants, food stalls and home kitchens that print their own menus and want QR table cards pointing at a menu page they already host. What it is NOT: It does not host a menu, take orders or payments, or show your menu online: the QR code opens the link you type, and that link must already work. It does not check any allergen or ingredient information: the marks such as Vegetarian or Contains nuts are only what you choose to print. The PDF file holds Latin letters only: Arabic dish names print through the browser's own Print and Save as PDF. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (130 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 115 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline sheet maker for payment links you supply: counter cards on A6, A5 or A4, sticker sheets on editable A4 grids, the link printed in words under every QR code, and checks on the links. It does not process payments. Data stays on your device.
QR Payment Link Sheet and Counter Card Maker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You list the payment links your payment provider gave you, with a name, an optional amount and a payee line, then print counter cards for the shop desk or QR stickers for invoices, delivery bags and receipts. The app only prints the QR code of the link you type. The problem it removes: Payment links get pasted into a word processor one at a time, the QR code ends up a different size on every card, the link itself is not shown so customers cannot check where it goes, and nobody notices a link with a typo until a customer scans it. Here the links live in one list, every card and sticker is laid out the same way, and each link is checked for the obvious mistakes before you print. What is inside: - List of payment links with a name, optional amount, payee, reference line and note - Counter cards on A6 (four per sheet), A5 (two per sheet) or an A4 poster, four colours - QR stickers on eight editable A4 sticker sheet grids, with test page and offset calibration - The link printed in words under every QR code, so customers can see where it goes - Checks for a missing link, a link with spaces, a link that does not look like a web address, http instead of https, and very long links - Copies per link, and the sheet start position for part-used sticker sheets - Print through the browser or download a PDF at exact page size - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: shops, salons, clinics, tutors, market sellers and home businesses that already have payment links from a payment provider and want a clean counter card or sticker for them. What it is NOT: It does not process, collect, hold, send or record payments. It does not create payment links, check that a link works, check who owns it or follow it. It does not know whether a customer paid. Create and test the link in your own payment provider's account first. The PDF file holds Latin letters only: Arabic text prints through the browser's own Print and Save as PDF. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (104 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 444 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline duty roster maker for fixed posts. Define shift patterns like 5 on 2 off once, put each person on a post with a pattern, and the month roster draws itself with cover gaps, rest and days-in-a-row checks, swaps, leave and a printable A4 roster. Data stays on your device.
Duty Roster Maker for Fixed Posts and Weekly Patterns is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a supervisor who repeats the same pattern of shifts and days off for every post and redraws the roster each month. You define shift types and patterns once, give each person a roster line (a post, a pattern and the date the cycle starts), and the app generates the month roster for every person and post. You change single days by hand and the rest stays on the pattern. The problem it removes: The same pattern of days off and shifts is redrawn every month in a spreadsheet or on paper, a leave request leaves a post thin, and a person ends up with seven days in a row or a night shift followed straight by a morning shift without anyone noticing until it happens. This app builds the month from the pattern and shows the gaps and the tired spots before the roster goes out. What is inside: - Pattern builder: a cycle of 1 to 28 days, each day a shift or a day off, with quick starts such as 5 on 2 off and 4 on 2 off, and paid hours per week worked out for you - Roster lines: a person, a post, a pattern and the date the cycle starts, with a start and an optional end date so people can move between posts - Month roster grid per person grouped by post, with day, hours, a cover table by post and shift, and flags where a rule check needs a look - Cover needed: how many people each post needs on each shift, optionally only on some weekdays, with the gaps counted for every day - Checks against limits you enter: days in a row, days off in any 7 days, hours in any 7 days and rest between shifts, including night shifts that cross midnight. A limit left blank switches that check off - Swaps, leave, sick days and one-day shift changes that override the pattern, with a preview of what a swap does to the checks and an Undo - Printable A4 landscape roster with the shift legend, cover gaps and signature lines - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: supervisors and managers of guard posts, building services, reception desks, restaurants, clinics and shops who keep a repeating pattern of shifts and days off and need to see cover and rest problems before they publish the month. What it is NOT: It does not know any labour law, rest rule or working time limit: every limit is a number you enter in Settings from your own contract or rules, and the example numbers are only examples. It does not publish the roster to staff, take requests, record attendance or clock-ins, or calculate pay. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (187 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 186 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline guest list and seating planner for one event. Seat guests without dragging, mark keep together and keep apart pairs, see conflicts, check guests in with a big search box, and print the seating chart and place cards. Data stays on your device.
Event Guest List with Table Seating and Check-in is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the person organising one event. You list the guests with the size of each party, group them by family or team, and add the tables with their seats. A table map shows each table filling up, and a tap on a table or a name seats people there. You mark pairs that must sit together or apart, and the app warns when the plan breaks one. On the day, check-in mode finds a guest as you type and records how many in the party have arrived. The problem it removes: Seating plans live on a spreadsheet and a sheet of paper, someone is forgotten, two people who must not sit together end up at the same table, a table has nine people for eight seats, and on the day the door team scrolls a long list looking for a name. This app keeps guests, tables and rules together, counts the seats, flags the conflicts and finds guests quickly at the door. What is inside: - Guest list with party size (guest plus extra people), group, reply (Invited, Confirmed, Maybe or Declined), dietary notes and phone - Table map with each table's seats used and free, the names seated, and a tap to seat people, with a warning before a keep apart pair or a full table is saved - Keep together and keep apart pairs, and groups that should share a table, with the conflicts listed - Suggest seating for people with no table: groups stay together when a table has room and keep apart pairs never share one, shown as a preview before anything is saved - Check-in mode with a large search box, counters for arrived, still to come and expected, arrivals by table, partial arrivals for a party, and a walk in button - Checks for conflicts, split groups, tables over capacity, guests who declined but have a table, and arrivals with no table - Printable seating chart, place cards and an entrance guest list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: event organisers, wedding planners, restaurant and hotel banquet teams, company administrators and families planning a seated event with a guest list of up to a few hundred people. What it is NOT: It does not send invitations, collect replies online, sell tickets, scan codes or connect to any guest list website. It records what the person using it types. It does not know your venue's fire or safety limits: the seats on each table are numbers you enter. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (138 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 194 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline duty roster and attendance sheet for guard posts. Say how many people each post needs on each shift, assign names to each day, see short posts in red, mark attendance on a day sheet, and print the duty roster and the monthly attendance grid. Data stays on your device.
Guard Post Duty Roster and Monthly Attendance Grid is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a site supervisor or control room. You list posts and shifts and say how many people each post needs on each shift. You then assign named people to each post and shift on each date. A cover board shows, for every post and day, people assigned over people needed, with the short ones in red. A day sheet lists today's duties with one-tap attendance marks, and a monthly grid collects the marks for printing. The problem it removes: A post is found short only when it is already short, a person is put in two places at once, someone marked on leave is still on the roster, and at month end the attendance sheet is rebuilt by hand from memory and scraps of paper. This app shows the shortfall while the roster is being made and keeps the attendance marks in one grid. What is inside: - Cover needed: how many people each post needs on each shift, optionally only on some weekdays - Cover board: a grid of posts and shifts against the days of the month showing people assigned over people needed, short cells in red, with a tap to choose who is on duty - Copy a week of duties to another week with a preview, then change only the days that differ, with Undo - Duty roster by person: each person against the days of the month with the shift code and post, and overlapping duties outlined - Day sheet: today's duties by post and shift with one tap Present, Late, Absent, Leave, Sick or Off marks, and a button to mark everyone left as present - Monthly attendance grid with a count of each mark per person, days with a duty but no mark, and the share of marked days present or late - Checks for short posts, short posts once absences are counted, overlapping duties, and people on duty while marked absent, leave, sick or off - Printable A4 landscape duty roster and monthly attendance grid with signature lines - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: site supervisors, security company control rooms, facilities and building services managers, and anyone who must keep named people on posts around the clock and keep a monthly attendance record for them. What it is NOT: It records who is rostered and what a supervisor marks. It does not clock people in, track locations, calculate pay or overtime, apply any labour law or contract rule, or send the roster to staff. Print it or save it as a PDF and share it yourself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (186 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 186 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline table reservation book for a restaurant. A floor grid of tables against time slots, bookings that only fit a free table of the right size, a waitlist, today's service list, find a table by time and party size, and a confirmation text you copy. Data stays on your device.
Restaurant Table Reservation Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the person who answers the phone and keeps the book. You enter the tables with their seats once. For each booking you type the guest, date, time and party size, and the app lists only the tables that are free for that sitting and large enough. A grid shows every table across the service so the gaps are easy to see. Guests who cannot be seated go on a waitlist, and the app tells you when a table frees up for them. The problem it removes: The book is a paper diary or a chat history, two parties get the same table at the same time, a party of two sits at a table for eight, and nobody is sure which table to offer when someone rings at the last minute. This app keeps one book for the floor, refuses a double booking, suggests the right table and shows the nearest free times. What is inside: - Floor of tables with seats, an optional smallest party, and an area such as Window or Terrace - Service grid for one day: every table across the time slots, a bar for each booking, and a plus on a free slot to add a booking there - Booking form that lists only the tables that are free for the sitting and fit the party, and refuses a double booking when saved - Find a table: choose date, time and party size and see the free tables, or the nearest times with a free table - Waitlist for a day with a one tap button to book a table that has freed up - Status for each booking: Booked, Confirmed, Seated, Completed, No show, Cancelled, with covers and the most covers at one time for the day - Confirmation message text with the guest name, date, time and party filled in, ready to copy and send yourself - Checks for double bookings, party size that does not fit its table, bookings with no table, unconfirmed bookings for today and tomorrow, past bookings never closed, and bookings outside the opening hours you set - Printable reservation sheet for the day - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners, hosts and managers of small restaurants, cafes, lounges and private dining rooms who take bookings by phone, message or at the door and want one clear book for the floor. What it is NOT: It does not take online bookings, send messages or reminders, take deposits or card details, or connect to any booking website or phone system. It records what the person using it types. Table sizes and the length of a sitting are numbers you enter and nothing here knows your venue's safety or capacity limits. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (107 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and no calculated fields to cross-check. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline class timetable and booking sheet for studios. Set your weekly classes with capacity, book members into dated classes, keep a waitlist that moves people in when a seat frees, mark attendance on a register, and watch package credits count down. Data stays on your device.
Class Timetable and Booking Sheet for Studios is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small studio that runs the same classes every week. You enter each class once with its weekday, time, length, instructor and number of seats. You then book members into a class on a date. When a class is full the next person goes on a waitlist, and a button moves them in when someone cancels. Each class has a register for attendance, and each package (a 10 class pass, for example) shows its credits used and left. The problem it removes: Bookings live in chat messages and a notebook, a class gets one person too many, a cancelled seat is never offered to the person waiting, and nobody knows how many credits a pass has left until the member argues about it. This app keeps one booking sheet per class, counts the seats, remembers the waitlist and counts the credits. What is inside: - Weekly timetable grid with seats taken over seats available for every class, full classes marked and a waitlist count, switching to a day by day list on a phone - Classes with weekday, start time, length, instructor, room, seats and optional start and end dates for a course - Bookings for a dated class with a seat count that refuses one booking too many, a waitlist in order, and a button that moves the first person in when a seat frees - Register for each class with Here and No show marks, a printable register sheet and a printable timetable - Packages with credits bought, used and left, a validity date, and an optional rule that a booking needs a package - Cancel a class on one date: everyone booked is set to Cancelled and their credits come back, with Undo - Checks for past classes with no attendance recorded, free seats while someone waits, members booked into two classes at once, and packages that are overdrawn, expiring or expired - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and front desk staff of small yoga, pilates, dance, barre, spin and fitness studios and community classes who run weekly classes with limited seats and sell class packages. What it is NOT: It does not take online bookings, send reminders, take payments or card details, or connect to any booking website. It records what the person using it types. Prices are only a note beside a package and nothing is charged. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (155 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 525 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline walk-in queue for a barber shop. Each customer gets a printed ticket with a day number and a wait guide. A board tracks Waiting, Called, In chair, Done and Left, each chair shows who is being served, and the day ends with a count and takings.
Barber Walk-In Queue is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the front desk or the owner of a barber shop. You add a ticket for each walk-in with the service they want and, if they ask for one, a barber. The ticket prints on a small slip with the customer's number for today and a guide to the wait. The board moves each customer along until they are done. The problem it removes: Walk-in customers wait with no order, so arguments start about who came first, someone asks for a barber who is busy, and people give up and leave without anyone counting them. At the end of the day nobody can say how many were served, how many walked out or what each chair took. This app gives every customer a number and keeps the day's count. What is inside: - Ticket printed per customer with a day number that restarts every morning, the service, people ahead and an estimated wait - Queue board with Waiting, Called, In chair, Done and Left columns for today, moved with one tap - Chairs page showing who each barber is serving now, how many are waiting for that barber, and the count and takings so far today - Rules that stop two customers in one chair and a customer put In chair or Done with no barber chosen - End of day figures: customers served, walked out, takings, and arrivals by hour over the last 30 days to show your rush hours - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: barber shops, men's salons and grooming lounges that serve walk-in customers with two to six chairs and want a fair, visible queue and a clear daily count without a booking system. What it is NOT: It does not take bookings, send automatic messages, display a number on a screen, or know the time by itself: arrival times are typed. The wait estimate is the service minutes of the customers ahead divided by the barbers on duty, a guide and not a promise. It is not a payment or commission system. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (131 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1310 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline class register. Start the day's register for every pupil in one tap, change the few who are late or absent, print an absence notice with a slip for the parent to sign, and keep a list of absences with no note yet, plus attendance percent per pupil and per class.
Class Attendance Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a school office or a class teacher. You list your classes and pupils, then each morning press one button to mark everyone Present and change the exceptions to Late, Absent or Excused. The app keeps the register by date, blocks marking on days you have set as closed, works out attendance for the last 30 days and prints a notice for the parent of each absent pupil. The problem it removes: Attendance sits on paper registers, and absence notes are retyped every time. The office cannot say how many pupils are out today, which absences still have no note from the parent, or who has missed a fifth of the month. This app puts the register on screen, lists the missing notes and prints the notice and slip in a few seconds. What is inside: - Daily register with one tap to start the day, then Present, Late, Absent or Excused for each pupil, with the arrival time for late pupils - Rules that stop two marks for one pupil on one day, a register on a weekend or holiday you have set, and a Late mark with no arrival time - Today page: who is in, who is out, who has not been marked yet, with a WhatsApp message written for the parent of each absent pupil - Absences without a note list, and a low attendance list based on your own percentage - Absence notice for the parent with a slip to fill in and sign, printed from the register row - Class summary with attendance percent per pupil over the last 30 days, and a printable register list for any period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: school offices, class teachers, nurseries, training centres and holiday clubs with up to a few hundred pupils who want a clear daily register and a quick way to chase absence notes. What it is NOT: It is not a report card, timetable or grade book, and it has no parent login, automatic messages or biometric check-in. The wording of the printed notice is yours to adjust: it does not claim to meet the attendance or reporting rules of any authority, which you must check yourself. Keep only names and a contact number, not medical details. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (158 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1787 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline equipment book for a gym. Each machine has its own service tasks with an interval in days, the app works out the next due date and flags the overdue ones, a due date calendar shows the month, and an Out of order tag and repair log record each fault and its cost.
Gym Equipment Service Schedule is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the owner or manager of a gym. You list your machines and the service companies you call, set the tasks each machine needs and how often, and log each service when it happens. The app works out when every task is next due, who to call, which machines are out of order today and what each machine has cost you in the last 12 months. The problem it removes: Machines are serviced late because nobody tracks the dates. A treadmill belt runs dry, a cable frays, the annual electrical test is forgotten and nobody can say when a machine was last looked at or whose job it was. When something fails a member is hurt or annoyed, and the repair bill arrives with no history behind it. This app puts every due date, every fault and every cost for each machine in one place. What is inside: - Service plan per machine: tasks such as belt lubrication, cable inspection or an annual electrical test, each with its own interval in days - Automatic next due date and a status for every task: Overdue, Due soon, OK or Paused, with the number of days to go - Today view with overdue tasks, machines out of order, open repairs, warranties ending soon and service contracts ending soon, with WhatsApp messages written for your service company - Due date calendar for the month, coloured by status, so you can book visits together - Out of order tag to print and stick on a machine, plus a repair log with days down and cost - Service history per machine on one A4 page, and cost per machine and per service company over the last 12 months - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: gym owners, studio managers and club operators with ten to a hundred machines or safety items who want to stop services being missed and want to see which machines keep costing money. What it is NOT: It does not know which inspections the law or your insurer requires, and it does not make any machine safe or certified. It is an administrative record: you decide the intervals, and the due dates are only as good as the entries you type. It does not order parts, take payments or connect to machines. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (174 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1670 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline membership book for a gym or studio. Each membership gets a last day from the plan and any freezes. Renewals lists who is about to lapse, lapsed lately or stopped coming, with WhatsApp messages. The door check refuses expired or frozen members.
Gym Membership Renewal, Freeze and Expiry Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the front desk of a gym or fitness studio. You set up your plans, enter each membership with the start date and what was paid, record freezes, and log check-ins. The app works out the last day, the status of every member and the money still owed. The problem it removes: Memberships lapse and nobody calls the member in time, so the revenue is lost quietly. A freeze is promised on a chat and the end date is never moved, or a member freezes for longer than your rule allows. People walk in on an expired card because the front desk cannot see the end date. This app puts the last day and the status beside every name. What is inside: - Plans with months, price and the most freeze days you allow, and memberships with start date, discount, payment and what is still owed - Last day per membership: start date plus the plan months, minus one day, plus every freeze day recorded - Freeze records with a rule that stops overlapping freezes and more days than the plan allows - Member status: Active, Expiring soon, Expired, Frozen or No membership, with days left - Renewals page: expiring soon, expired recently and not seen lately, each with a WhatsApp message, plus the renewal rate of memberships that ended in the last 90 days - Door check: a check-in is refused if no membership covers that date or the member was frozen, unless the owner box is ticked - Printable membership receipt, member card and call sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: gym managers, fitness studio owners and front desk staff who sell monthly and longer memberships and track end dates in a notebook, a chat or a spreadsheet that nobody keeps current. What it is NOT: It does not read membership cards, open doors, take card payments or send messages by itself. It does not know your freeze policy: you enter the maximum freeze days per plan. It stores no health or medical information. It is a membership record, not a class booking system. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (175 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1285 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline colour room book for a salon. Store each client's formula as shade lines with grams, log each colour visit, and the app takes the grams from product stock, shows product cost per visit against the charge, lists what to reorder and who is due back. Prints the formula card.
Hair Colour Formula Cards and Product Usage Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the colour room. You list your tubes, developers and lighteners with pack size and pack cost, write each client's formula as lines of grams, and log a visit each time the formula is used. Stock on hand, product cost per visit and cost against the charge are calculated for you. The problem it removes: The formula that worked last time is on a paper card or in a stylist's head, so a repeat client gets a different shade when that stylist is off. Product is poured by eye, nobody knows what a full colour really costs in product, and a tube runs out in the middle of a service. This app keeps the formula, the stock and the cost in one place. What is inside: - Formula cards per client with shade lines and grams, technique notes and the cost of the mix - Colour visits that use a formula times a batch size (1, 1.5 or half a batch for a touch-up) - Stock per product from opening grams, packs received, waste and stock count corrections, minus what visits used - Reorder list of products at or below the level you set, with packs left - Product cost against the charge for each visit, and by month - Clients due back for colour with a WhatsApp message, and an optional patch test date check using your own salon rule - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: hair salon owners, senior stylists and colourists who mix colour for repeat clients and want the formula, the stock and the cost per client in one offline file instead of cards, notebooks and guesses. What it is NOT: It does not decide shades, strengths or safe mixes, and it gives no advice about hair or skin: it records what your stylists mixed. It does not scan barcodes, does not take payments and does not manage the appointment diary. The patch test check only compares dates against the number of days your salon enters. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (182 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1949 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline lesson log for a home tutor who bills by the hour. Each lesson has a time, rate and travel fee, late cancels are charged by your own percentage, tutor cancellations become make-up lessons owed, and each month prints as an invoice listing every lesson.
Home Tutor Lesson Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a private tutor who travels to students. You enter each student with the parent's number and an hourly rate that can change from a date, then log every lesson with its date, start time and length. The app prices each lesson, applies your cancellation rules, keeps the running balance after payments, and prints a monthly invoice with every lesson on it. The problem it removes: A tutor who invoices from memory gets the lesson count wrong, and a parent who remembers fewer lessons disputes the whole month. Rates change, lessons are moved, some are cancelled at the door, and the tutor owes a make-up lesson that nobody wrote down. This app records each lesson as it happens, shows the parent the date and time of every lesson on the invoice, and keeps track of what is paid and what is still owed. What is inside: - Lesson log with date, start time, length and a status: Planned, Held, Make-up, Late cancel, No answer at door, Cancelled in time or Cancelled by tutor - Hourly rate and travel fee per student with a start date, so a rate rise in September never changes August - Late cancel and no answer charges worked out with your own percentages, and make-up lessons owed after a tutor cancellation - Monthly invoice that lists every lesson with its date, time and charge, the amount brought forward, payments and the amount due - Month view with lessons, hours, billed, collected, who owes money, who needs last month's invoice and a week calendar of planned lessons - One button to make last month's invoices for every student who had lessons, plus payment receipts and a clash check on your own diary - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: private tutors and small tutoring teams who teach at the student's home, bill by the hour and want parents to see exactly which lessons they are paying for. What it is NOT: It is not the monthly flat fee and attendance register for a tuition centre (the Tutor and Small School Fee and Attendance Tracker covers that). It has no grades, no parent login, no online payment and no tax calculation. It does not send messages by itself: it opens WhatsApp with the text written. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (173 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 4640 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline nursery book. Log arrival, meals, nap, changes, mood and a note for each child, print or WhatsApp the daily sheet to parents, and keep an authorised pickup and emergency contact list that the app checks every time a child is signed out.
Nursery Daily Sheet and Authorised Pickup Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a nursery office or room leader. You list children and, for each, the people allowed to collect them and the emergency contacts. Each day you start the sheet, record arrival, meals, nap and notes, and when a child goes home you choose who collected them. The app refuses a person who is not authorised for that child. The problem it removes: Parents ask what their child did and staff answer on chat all afternoon, while at the door staff need to know at once who may collect each child. Both live in notebooks and memory. This app keeps the day on one sheet per child that can be printed or sent, and keeps the list of who may collect each child where the person at the gate can check it, including people authorised for a few days only. What is inside: - Daily sheet per child with arrival and collection time, breakfast, lunch and snack, nap minutes, changes, mood, activities and a note for parents - Start today's sheet in one tap for every active child, then fill in the day - Authorised people per child with relation, phone, pickup right, emergency contact order, valid from and until dates and the date ID was last seen - A check that stops a child being collected by anyone who is not on that child's list, or whose authorisation has not started or has ended - Today page: children in, waiting to be collected, children with no authorised person, authorisations ending soon, sheets not yet sent and late collections, with WhatsApp messages written for you - Printable daily sheet, a contact card per child, a gate list of everyone who may collect today and an emergency contact list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: nurseries, day care centres and early years rooms with ten to a hundred children where staff want a tidy daily update for parents and a clear collection list at the gate. What it is NOT: It does not replace your safeguarding policy, the checks you must do on who collects a child, or any record you must keep by law. It is not a medical record: the care alert is a short reminder, and allergy plans stay with your nurse. It has no parent login, no photos and no automatic messages: it opens WhatsApp with the text written. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (150 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1274 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline family account book for a nursery. One button charges every child's monthly fee, takes sibling discount off by joining order, handles part months, extras, credits and part payments, and prints one statement per family.
Nursery Fee Statement with Sibling Discounts is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the nursery office. You set your fee plans and your sibling discount percentages, list families and their children, and press one button each month to charge every active child. The app takes the sibling discount off the second and later children, lets you add registration, extras, late pickup fees and credits, records part payments and prints a statement for the family. The problem it removes: Fee statements with sibling discounts and part payments are worked out by hand. Someone checks which child joined first, takes off the right percentage, remembers the half month for the child who started mid-month and then tries to match a half payment from last month. One slip and the statement is argued about. This app does the discount and the balance from the same figures every month and prints them in order. What is inside: - Fee plans with a monthly fee and children linked to a plan, with the order they joined within the family working out the sibling discount - Your own sibling discount percentages in Settings: one for the second child and one for the third and later children - Add this month's fees in one tap for every active child, with the discount percent saved on each charge so old statements never change - Part month charge with days charged out of days in the month, plus registration, extras, late pickup fees and credits - Payments per family with receipts, part payments, a running balance and a credit when a family has paid ahead - Monthly statement per family listing every child's fee, discount, extras and payments, with the balance brought forward and the amount to pay - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: nursery and day care offices with ten to a few hundred children where several families have two or three children and pay in parts. What it is NOT: It is not a daily log or pickup register, a tuition fee instalment tracker or a payroll tool. It does not add VAT, late fees or government subsidies, and it takes no card payments. The discount rule is by order of joining only: other schemes need you to edit the percent on a charge. It does not give tax or legal advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (192 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2049 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline pack book for a personal trainer. A pack of sessions per client, a session diary that refuses double booking and booking beyond the pack, your own rule for late cancels and no-shows, sessions left, expiry, and income earned so far against pack money received.
Personal Trainer Session Pack Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You sell a pack (for example twelve one to one sessions valid for twelve weeks), then book each session with a date and time. A session that is done, a late cancel or a no-show uses a session according to the rule you set. The app shows sessions used, booked ahead and left. The problem it removes: A client buys twelve sessions and months later neither of you can say how many remain. Late cancellations are argued about, a pack runs past its end date, and a client with sessions left has nothing booked and drifts away. This app keeps the count and the diary together so the answer is one glance. What is inside: - Packs with sessions, price, amount paid, start date and weeks of validity, with the last valid day worked out - Session diary with Booked, Done, Cancelled in time, Late cancel and No-show; the app refuses a session beyond the pack, after the last day or at the same time as another - Two settings for your policy: whether a late cancel and a no-show use up a session - Today page with one tap Done, Late cancel and No-show, and a month calendar of sessions - Pack balance: used, booked ahead, left and still available to book, with status Active, Low, Expiring soon, Expired or Used up - Income earned so far at the per session rate, money still to give on live packs, and a WhatsApp list of clients with nothing booked ahead - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: independent personal trainers, small fitness studios and yoga or pilates teachers in the UAE who sell packs of sessions and track them in a notebook or in chat messages. What it is NOT: It does not set programmes, record health information or measurements, take payments, send messages by itself or issue tax invoices. Earned income is a simple share of the pack price per session, not an accounting treatment: ask your accountant how to record prepaid packs. Pair and group packs are one pack per paying client. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (149 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2566 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline mark book for a school. Enter each pupil's mark per subject and term, set your own grade bands once, and the app grades every mark, checks no mark is above its maximum or missing, and prints a report card with the overall grade, comment and attendance.
Report Card and Mark Sheet Maker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a class teacher, head of year or school office. You list subjects with their maximum marks, type in your school's grade bands, add pupils and enter marks term by term. The app turns every mark into a percentage and a grade, adds up the term, shows who still has marks missing and prints the report card and a mark sheet. The problem it removes: Teachers type each report card by hand, and grades drift: one teacher rounds up at 79, another does not, and a pupil's card is printed with a subject still blank. This app grades every mark by the same bands, refuses a mark above its maximum, lists the pupils with marks still missing and prints the cards from the numbers you entered. What is inside: - Grade bands you set yourself: the lowest percentage for each grade and the words that go with it, applied to every mark and to the overall result - Marks per pupil, subject and term, with a different maximum for a short paper - Checks that stop a mark above its maximum, two marks for the same subject and term, and a report card with marks missing unless you allow it - Marking page for the current term: marks missing, pupils ready for a card, marks below your pass mark, and average by subject - Report card with every subject, mark, percentage and grade, the overall result, attendance, teacher comment, signature lines and the grade key - Mark sheet and class results lists to print, using the filters on the Marks page - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: class teachers, heads of year and school offices that issue term report cards for a few classes up to a few hundred pupils and want consistent grading without retyping. What it is NOT: It does not decide your grading policy: the bands, the pass mark and what counts as a pass are yours to set. It has no weighting of tests within a term, no timetable, no parent login and no official transcript format, so it does not claim to meet any authority's reporting standard. Keep to names and marks, not health or behaviour records. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (165 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 3201 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Front desk balance book for prepaid packs of visits. Sell a pack, log each visit, see sessions left and the end date at once, refuse a visit past the balance or the end date, message clients whose pack is ending, and print a pack card with every visit listed.
Salon Prepaid Package and Visit Balance Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You set up your pack types once (a facial pack of six, a manicure pack of five), sell them to clients, and record every visit against the pack. The app keeps sessions used, sessions left, the end date, the amount still to be paid for the pack and the value of sessions you still owe. The problem it removes: Clients buy a pack and the front desk loses count. A stamped card goes missing, a visit is given after the pack ran out, a pack silently expires with sessions unused and the client is upset, or nobody calls the client whose last session is coming. This app makes the balance the first thing you see when a client arrives. What is inside: - Pack types with sessions, price and months of validity, and packs sold with an optional free bonus session and discount - Visit log with a running balance after each visit; a visit beyond the sessions sold or after the end date is refused unless you tick the owner approval box - Status per pack: Active, Expiring soon, Expired or Used up, with sessions left and days left - Front desk dashboard: packs ending soon, packs with one session left, packs not used for a while, each with a WhatsApp message - Value of unused sessions on live packs, and the value that lapsed on expired packs, at the price paid - Printable pack card with every visit and printable pack receipt - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: salon, spa, beauty clinic and nail studio owners and front desk staff who sell packs of visits for facials, manicures, blow dries, massage or similar, and track them on cards, in chats or in a notebook. What it is NOT: It is not a booking diary, does not take payment, does not split commission between staff and does not calculate VAT. The Excel workbook for salon package and commission tracking covers month-end sales and commission; this app is the front desk visit balance with checks at the moment of the visit. Value left is a simple share of the price paid, not accounting advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (158 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1727 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline diary for a salon with several stylists. It blocks two clients at the same time with one stylist, bookings on a stylist's day off or leave, and bookings after closing. Shows today by stylist, prints each stylist's day sheet and lists tomorrow's clients to message.
Salon Stylist Diary with Clash Check is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a salon where bookings arrive on WhatsApp and each stylist works their own column. You enter stylists with their weekly day off, your services with their minutes, and then bookings. The app works out the finishing time from the service, and refuses a booking that clashes. The problem it removes: A paper diary or a chat thread cannot tell you that Maha is already with a client until 11:30, that Joy is on leave on Thursday, or that a long colour would run past closing. Double bookings are found when both clients are at the door. This app checks every booking against the same stylist, the same day and the same hours before it is saved. What is inside: - Today by stylist: every booking of the day grouped under the stylist in time order, with Arrived, Done and No-show in one tap - Clash check: finishing time is start plus the service minutes, and two bookings for one stylist cannot overlap - Day off and leave check: weekly day off per stylist, plus a leave table with from and to dates - Opening hours check using the opening and closing time you set - Deposit rule: after the number of no-shows you choose, a client's next booking needs a deposit entered - Tomorrow list with a WhatsApp reminder per client, printable day sheet per stylist and a booking slip - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and receptionists of hair salons, beauty studios and barber shops with two or more people taking appointments, who today keep a paper diary or WhatsApp chats and find double bookings only when the clients arrive. What it is NOT: It does not send reminders by itself, it only prepares the WhatsApp message. It has no online booking page for clients, no takings or commission (the Salon and Clinic Appointment and Client Visit Book covers takings and receipts), and it does not look for free gaps for you: you see the day in order and the clash check refuses overlaps. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (191 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1681 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline fee plan book for a tuition centre. Each plan splits a course fee into instalments, works out what is overdue and for how many days from the payments received, ranks late parents, keeps a chase log with promised dates and writes the WhatsApp reminder for you.
Tuition Centre Fee Instalment Plans is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the owner or accountant of a tuition centre. You list your courses and fees, give each student a plan with a number of instalments, a first due date and a gap in months, and record payments as they arrive. The app works out the instalment amount, what should have been paid by today, what is overdue, how late it is and who to chase first. The problem it removes: Parents pay in parts, and nobody can say quickly who is behind, by how much and since when. Chasing the late ones is manual: someone scrolls a payments sheet, remembers who promised to pay on Thursday and sends the same message by hand. This app does the arithmetic from the payments you enter, shows the late parents in order, and keeps a log of every chase and promise. What is inside: - Fee plan per student and course: the fee, a discount, the number of instalments, the first due date and the months between them - Automatic instalment amount, amount due by today, amount overdue, next due date and days late for every plan - Status for every plan: Paid in full, Up to date, Just due, Promised, Late or Seriously late, with your own grace days and limit - Collections page with overdue totals, the late parents longest first, instalments due in the next seven days and promises to check, each with a WhatsApp message written for you - Chase log for calls and messages with the date the parent promised, so a broken promise shows as late again - Due date calendar, payment receipts, a fee statement per plan and a printable list of overdue plans - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: tuition centres, language institutes and academies with ten to a few hundred students where fees are split into instalments and the office chases late payments by hand. What it is NOT: It is not an attendance register, timetable or report card, and it has no parent login, card payment or automatic reminders: it opens WhatsApp with the text written and you press send. It does not add VAT or late fees, and it does not give legal advice on collecting debts. Amounts are the plain amounts you agree with parents. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (174 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2543 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline fleet sheet for a small car rental: cars grouped by class, a free-car finder for any dates, weekly and monthly rates, km allowance and excess km, late returns that clash with the next booking, and enquiries lost for lack of a car. Data stays on your device.
Car Rental Availability by Class is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small rental company whose customers ask for a class of car, not a plate. You set your classes with daily, weekly and monthly rates and a km allowance. You enter the dates a customer wants and the app lists the cars of that class that are free for those dates. Bookings cannot overlap on one car, and the total is priced from the rates. The problem it removes: A customer phones for an SUV from Thursday for four days and the answer comes from memory or a scroll through a chat. The same car is promised twice, a late return blocks the next booking without anyone noticing, and a long rental is charged at the daily rate by mistake. Excess km are forgotten at the return. Enquiries that could not be served are never counted. What is inside: - Classes with daily, weekly and monthly rates, km allowance per day, excess km rate and standard deposit - Cars with plate, class and status, and for each car whether it is free today, free until when, and when it is next out - Free-car finder: save the dates and class a customer asks for and see the free cars, and who has the busy ones - Availability by class: cars, free today, out now, pickups and returns in the next 7 days - Bookings that cannot overlap on one car, with weekly and monthly pricing, late days, excess km and extras - Late returns that clash with the next booking, and a record of enquiries lost for lack of a car - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and counter staff of small car rental companies with a fleet of 5 to 60 cars in a few classes, who take bookings by phone and WhatsApp and need to answer "is an SUV free from Thursday" at once. What it is NOT: It does not check licences, insurance, fines or tolls, and it keeps no ID copies. It takes no online bookings or card payments, does not find substitute cars by itself and does not message customers by itself. The agreement is sample wording that you must replace with your own terms. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (196 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2758 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline handover and return checklist for a car rental: ten areas checked at handover and at return, fuel and km, accessories, charges found, and a printed settlement showing the deposit to refund. Flags damage charged with no change recorded.
Rental Handover and Return Checklist is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a car rental counter. Before the car leaves you record the condition of ten areas, the fuel, the km and the accessories, and print the checklist for the renter to sign. At return you record the condition again. The app shows which areas changed, adds fuel, late days, missing accessories and the charges you enter, and prints a settlement against the deposit. The problem it removes: A damage dispute starts when the condition at handover was never written down, or was written and nobody can find it. The fuel shortfall, the missing child seat and the late day are then added up from memory, and the deposit refund becomes an argument. This app puts the handover and return side by side and turns the differences into a deposit settlement. What is inside: - Vehicles with their known existing marks, so every handover starts from what is already recorded - Ten areas checked at handover and at return, with a list of the areas that changed - Fuel level out and in with the shortfall in quarters, km out and km in, and photos-taken ticks - Accessories such as spare key and child seat, given and returned, with a replacement cost for each one not returned - Charges found at return, late days at your fee per day, and a deposit settlement: deducted, refund due or amount still owed - A warning for damage charged when no change in condition was recorded, and a printed handover checklist and return settlement - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small car rental companies, van and bike hire shops and chauffeur-free hire counters that hand over vehicles with a deposit, and want a written record of the condition that both sides sign. What it is NOT: It does not store photos: it records whether photos were taken, and they stay on the phone. It does not decide who is at fault, estimate repair costs or claim from insurance. Fees and the sample wording are yours to set and check with your adviser. It is not a legal document. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (122 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1608 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline sheet for a car wash: each wash is logged with its service, worker and payment, commission per worker is worked out per car, and a daily cash close compares the cash counted with the cash the washes and advances say should be in the till.
Car Wash Daily Cash Close is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a hand car wash or a small detailing shop. You list your services with their price and the commission each car earns, and your workers. Every wash is one line: plate, service, worker, discount and how it was paid. At the end of the day you count the till and the app tells you whether it matches. The problem it removes: At the end of the day the owner adds up commission per worker from scribbled tallies, argues about who washed what, and cannot tell whether a short till is a mistake or a theft. This app works out commission per car as the washes are logged, and gives the expected cash for the day so the difference is visible the same evening. What is inside: - A service list with the price and the commission paid per car for each service - Workers, with cars washed and commission for today and for the month - A wash log with service, worker, discount, tip, and cash, card or account payment - Cash outflows for the day: advances to workers and small purchases paid from the till - A daily cash close: expected cash, cash counted, and the difference, with a note that must be written when the till does not match - A printed day sheet with the washes and totals, and a printed monthly commission slip per worker - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and cashiers of hand car washes and small detailing shops with up to ten workers, who pay commission per car and count the till every evening. What it is NOT: It does not run a card terminal, track subscribers or book appointments. Account payments are only recorded as not in the till. Commission is a fixed amount per service, optionally reduced when a discount is given. It does not hold payroll or deduct advances from salary. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (166 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1605 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for a car wash that sells monthly wash packages: subscribers by plate, washes used and washes left, expiry dates, unpaid packages, a wash log that refuses a wash after expiry or when none are left, renewals in one tap and WhatsApp reminders.
Car Wash Package Subscriber Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a car wash that sells packages such as eight washes in thirty days. You list your packages once and add each subscriber with the plate, the start date and what they paid. Every wash for a subscriber is a line in the wash log, and the app counts down what is left. The problem it removes: Subscribers claim washes that were already used, come back after the package expired, or never renew because nobody calls them. The counts live on a card in the cashier's drawer. This app counts washes used against the package, refuses a wash that is not allowed, and lists who is about to expire or has run out. What is inside: - A package list with the number of washes, the price and the number of days it lasts - Subscribers with plate, start date, amount paid, expiry date, washes used, washes left and a status - A wash log that refuses a wash when none are left, before the start date or after the expiry date - A balance owed per subscriber and a list of packages not yet paid in full - One button to create renewals for expired or used up packages, and a WhatsApp reminder list for expiring ones - A printed subscriber card and a printed expiry list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of car washes and detailing shops who sell prepaid wash packages to regular customers and want an accurate count without a card in a drawer. What it is NOT: It does not sell a package online, take a card payment or recognise a plate by camera. It does not carry unused washes into a new period unless you add them to the new package. The expiry is the start date plus the number of days you set for the package. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (127 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 726 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for a cleaning company with monthly contracts: a visit log per contract, visits still owed this month, an option to credit visits the company missed, one button to create last month's draft bills, invoice numbers, unpaid ageing and a printed visit statement.
Recurring Cleaning Contract Visit and Monthly Billing Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a cleaning company with monthly contracts such as offices, clinics and building lobbies. Each contract has a monthly fee and a number of visits a month. You log every visit as Done, Missed by us, Client cancelled or Rescheduled. At month end the app makes the draft bills from the visit log. The problem it removes: Monthly visits are billed from memory. Some are missed and nobody notices until the client complains, and a missed visit is billed in full. This app shows how many visits each contract still owes this month, credits the visits you missed if the contract says so, and lists the contracts that have not been billed for last month. What is inside: - Contracts with client, site, monthly fee, visits per month, start and end dates, status and a credit-missed-visits option - A visit log with status Done, Missed by us, Client cancelled or Rescheduled, the crew and a note - Visits still owed this month for each contract, and a warning when few days are left in the month - One button that creates last month's draft bill for every active contract that has not been billed yet - A bill with visits planned, done and missed, a credit for visits missed by us, the amount, the invoice number and the paid date - A printed visit statement per bill, a list of unpaid bills with a WhatsApp reminder, and a printable bills list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and office staff of cleaning companies who clean offices, clinics, buildings and villas on a monthly contract and raise one bill a month. What it is NOT: It does not plan crews and hours: use the crew calendar for that. It does not make the invoice document or post to accounts: the invoice number is only a reference you type. Contract renewal reminders are not tracked. Check the credit rule against what each contract says. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (136 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1265 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline scheduler for a cleaning company: jobs with a crew, a start time and hours, a rule that refuses a job overlapping another job of the same crew, a travel gap setting, an overloaded day flag, a calendar, jobs to confirm with WhatsApp, and a printed crew sheet and job card.
Cleaning Job Schedule and Crew Assignment Calendar is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a cleaning company with a few crews. You list your crews and your client sites. Each job has a date, a start time, a number of hours, a crew and a site. The app refuses a job that overlaps another job of the same crew, and shows each day on a calendar. The problem it removes: The schedule lives on a whiteboard and in chats, so one crew is told to be at two sites at the same hour, a long job is followed by another one with no time to travel, and the client who was never confirmed is the one who finds no one at the door. This app checks every job against the crew's other jobs and lists the jobs that still need confirming. What is inside: - Crews with a leader, mobile and size, and client sites with an area, a contact number and access notes - Jobs with a date, start time, hours, crew, site, type, status and price - A rule that refuses a job overlapping another job of the same crew, with a travel gap in minutes as a setting - A flag on days where a crew is booked for more hours than its maximum day - A calendar of jobs by day, and a list of jobs to confirm with a WhatsApp message to the site contact - A printed crew sheet for today and tomorrow, a job card per job and a printable jobs list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and supervisors of cleaning companies with two to ten crews who schedule villas, offices and move-out jobs by phone and WhatsApp. What it is NOT: It does not plan routes, find the nearest crew or track a crew's position. It does not know how long a job really takes: the hours are what you enter. It does not bill: use the contract billing tracker for monthly contracts. Do not store gate codes or ID numbers. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (140 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1263 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline inspection scorecard for cleaning supervisors: one weighted checklist, a score per inspection, a grade from pass and warning marks, comparison of sites, failed items with comments, sites overdue for inspection, and a printed blank form and inspection report.
Cleaning Site Inspection Scorecard is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a cleaning company whose supervisors check sites. You write the checklist once, with a weight for each item. For each inspection you pick the site and score each item as Pass, Partly, Fail or Not applicable. The app works out the score, the grade and how the site compares with the others. The problem it removes: Quality checks are done on paper and filed. Nobody can say which site has the worst scores, which item fails most, or which site has not been inspected for a month. A failure noted on a form is forgotten by the next visit. This app scores every inspection the same way and lists failed items and sites that are overdue. What is inside: - A checklist of items with an area and a weight, so toilets can count for more than glass - Inspections with a site, date, supervisor and status, and one scored line for each item checked - Pass, Partly, Fail and Not applicable results, a comment that must be written for a Fail, and a score out of the weighted total - A grade from your pass mark and warning mark, an average and last score per site, and a list of sites not inspected within your days limit - Failed items from the last 30 days with their comments, and the checklist items that fail most - A printed blank checklist for the visit, a printed inspection report and a printable list of inspections - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: supervisors and owners of cleaning companies who inspect villas, offices and buildings and want one consistent score they can compare between sites and over time. What it is NOT: It does not take photos, GPS-stamp a visit or send the report to the client. The weights, marks and grades are yours: the app does not define what is a good clean. A supervisor can score the same item twice, and the app flags it but does not stop it. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (139 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1964 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline stock sheet for the supplies a cleaning company issues to its sites: items with a reorder level, receipts, issues by site and write-offs, on hand and days of cover from recent use, a reorder list with a WhatsApp message to the supplier, and cost of supplies by site.
Cleaning Supplies Usage and Reorder Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a cleaning company that buys chemicals, bags, cloths and gloves in bulk and issues them to sites. You list the items with a reorder level and a target level. Every receipt, issue and write-off is one line, and the app keeps the stock on hand and tells you what to order. The problem it removes: Chemicals run out at a site before anyone notices, a crew is sent without gloves, and the store room is counted once a quarter. Nobody knows which site uses the most. This app keeps the count as items go out, lists what is at or below its reorder level with a suggested order size, and shows the cost of supplies by site. What is inside: - Items with unit, pack size, unit cost, supplier, reorder level and target level - A movements log: Receive, Issue to a site, and Write off with a reason - Stock on hand, issues in the last 30 days, days of cover and stock value for every item - A reorder list with a suggested quantity rounded up to whole packs and a WhatsApp message to the supplier - A rule that refuses an issue or write off that would take an item below zero on that date - Cost of supplies issued by site this month, and a printable reorder list and site usage sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: cleaning companies and facilities teams with a small store room and a few sites, who buy supplies in packs and want to stop running out and over-ordering. What it is NOT: It does not place orders, compare supplier prices or scan barcodes. It is not an accounting stock ledger and does not post to accounts. Costs are the unit cost you type for each item. A stock count is entered as a write off or a receipt with a note. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (132 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1506 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline fleet due-date tracker: registration, insurance, permits and test dates per vehicle, service by km or months, overdue and due-soon lists with WhatsApp to the responsible person, a calendar, and one tap to create next year's renewal.
Fleet Registration, Insurance and Service Due Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a company that runs a handful to a few dozen vehicles. You list the vehicles with the person responsible, enter each renewal with its due date and cost, and log services with the km. The app shows what is overdue, what falls due within your warning days and which vehicles are near their next service. The problem it removes: Renewal dates are kept in one person's head or on scraps of paper, so an insurance policy lapses on a van that is out on the road and a registration is paid late. Service is done when someone remembers. This app puts every due date in one list, sorted by what is most urgent, with a message ready for the person responsible. What is inside: - Vehicles with type, responsible person, current km and service interval in km and in months - Renewals with type, reference, due date, cost and provider: registration, insurance, annual test, permits, tyres and battery - Overdue and due-in-your-warning-days lists with days left, and a WhatsApp message ready for the responsible person - Service log with km and cost, and for each vehicle the km to the next service and the next service date - One button to create next year's renewal for every renewal marked done, so a due date is never left empty - Calendar of due dates, cost of renewals falling due, and a printable vehicle file and due list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: office managers, fleet supervisors and small business owners who run delivery vans, sales cars, trucks, buses or bikes and need a single list of what to renew and service next. What it is NOT: It does not know any authority's rules or fees: every due date, interval and cost is what you type. It does not connect to any registration, insurance or fines system, track vehicle location or send messages by itself. A date in this app is a reminder, not proof of a valid document. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (135 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1152 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline round planner for a laundry that collects and delivers: stops grouped by area and window, a printed driver sheet with a tick column, not-home stops moved to tomorrow in one tap, and a check of the cash each driver collects against what they hand in.
Laundry Pickup and Delivery Round Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a laundry that sends drivers to customers. You list your areas, drivers and customers once. Each pickup or delivery is a stop with a date, a time window, a bag count and any cash to collect. The app groups the stops by area, prints one sheet per driver, and compares the cash collected with the cash handed in. The problem it removes: Pickup and delivery requests arrive by chat in any order, so the driver gets one mixed list and drives across town twice. Customers who were not home are forgotten, and nobody can say whether the cash in the driver's pocket matches the deliveries. This app puts the stops in area groups and closes each round with a cash check. What is inside: - Customers with area, building and notes, and a list of areas with a default driver - Stops for pickup or delivery with a date, a morning, afternoon or evening window, bag count, ticket number and cash to collect - A list of stops that have no driver planned for their area, so nothing is missed - One button to create tomorrow's rounds for every area that has stops, and one tap to move a not-home stop to tomorrow - A printed A4 driver sheet per round, grouped by morning, afternoon and evening, with a column to tick each stop - Cash check per round: cash to collect, cash collected, cash handed in and the difference - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and dispatchers of laundries and dry cleaners with one to five drivers, who take pickup and delivery requests by phone or WhatsApp and hand the driver a list on paper. What it is NOT: It does not draw a map, find the shortest route, track a vehicle or message customers by itself. A round is one driver for one area on one day. It does not hold the laundry tickets themselves: the ticket number is only a reference you type. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (161 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 939 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline ticket book for a laundry or dry cleaner: priced pieces per ticket, a count confirmed with the customer, a printed ticket, a board from Received to Collected, and an ageing list of ready orders nobody has collected, with WhatsApp reminders. Data stays on your device.
Laundry Ticket Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a laundry or dry cleaning counter. You set the price of each item for wash and iron, iron only and dry clean. At the counter you add the pieces to a ticket, the app prices them and prints a ticket with the piece count, and the order moves along a board until the customer collects it. The problem it removes: The ticket is handwritten, the piece count is argued over at collection, and nobody counts how long finished orders have been sitting on the rack. Money is owed on ready orders, the shelf fills up, and the customer who never answers the phone is forgotten. This app fixes the count at drop-off and keeps a ready list that grows an age. What is inside: - Price list by item for wash and iron, iron only and dry clean, with a special price on a line when you agree one - A ticket with lines, a piece count, an express surcharge in percent, a discount, an advance payment and the balance - A rule that stops an order moving along until the count is confirmed with the customer, and stops collection while money is owed - Board from Received to In process, Ready and Collected, with one tap buttons for Ready and Collected - Unclaimed list: ready orders by days waiting, in bands, with the money still owed and a WhatsApp message per customer - Printable A5 ticket with a count confirmation line and a printable list of ready orders - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and counter staff of neighbourhood laundries, dry cleaners and pressing shops, with one to a few counters, who write tickets by hand today and lose track of orders that are finished but not collected. What it is NOT: It does not scan tags, track each garment, run a delivery route or take card payments. It sends no messages by itself: it opens WhatsApp with the message ready. Liability for lost or damaged items is your own policy: the printed wording is a sample you must replace. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (146 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1660 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline parts quote builder for a workshop: a parts list with cost and a markup by category, quotes with lines, discounts and agreed prices, VAT as a setting, the margin on each quote, a minimum margin that needs an approval name, a customer quote and a margin sheet.
Spare Parts Quote and Margin Calculator is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a workshop or a parts counter that quotes parts to customers. You keep a parts list with the supplier cost, and a markup for each category such as filters or brakes. A quote picks parts, quantities and discounts, and shows the price and the margin before it goes to the customer. The problem it removes: Parts are quoted on a guessed markup, a discount is given at the counter, and nobody knows the margin until the month is over. A quote at cost goes out because the supplier price changed. This app prices from cost and a category markup, shows the margin on every line and every quote, and asks for an approval name when the margin is below your minimum. What is inside: - Categories with a markup percent, and a parts list with the supplier cost and the list price worked out from it - Quotes with lines: part, quantity, discount percent and an optional agreed price that replaces the list price - Margin per line and per quote, in AED and as a percent of the parts sold, with labour and VAT kept separate - A minimum margin setting: a Sent or Accepted quote below it needs the name of the person who approved - Statuses Draft, Sent, Accepted and Declined, with a quote shown as expired after its validity days - A printed customer quote, an internal margin sheet and a printable price list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: workshops, tyre shops and small parts counters that quote parts and labour to customers and want to know the margin before the quote goes out. What it is NOT: It does not hold stock, order from suppliers or fetch prices. It is not a job card or an invoice: use the Zeyto garage job card pack for the job itself. Labour has no cost, so margin is worked out on the parts only. Check the VAT rate before you rely on it. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (139 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1821 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline fine recovery log for a rental company: fines by plate and date, matched to the rental that covered that date, an admin fee setting, part recoveries from the deposit or by card, disputed and written-off fines, ageing, and a printed recovery statement per rental.
Traffic Fine Recovery Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a company that rents out vehicles. You enter each rental with the plate and its dates, and each fine as it arrives with the plate and the date of the offence. The app shows how many rentals cover that plate on that date, lets you attach the fine to the right rental, and tracks what you billed, what you recovered and what is still open. The problem it removes: Fines arrive weeks after the rental ends, with only a plate and a date. Someone has to work out who had the car, the answer sits in a chat, the deposit has already been returned, and a fine paid by the company is never recovered. This app finds the rental by plate and date, and keeps every fine on a list until it is recovered, disputed or written off. What is inside: - Rentals with plate, renter, phone, dates and the deposit held - Fines with plate, date, time, place, reason, amount, date received and date the company paid - A match count per fine: how many rentals cover that plate on that date, with the rental number suggested, and a rule that stops a fine being attached to a rental whose dates or plate do not fit - An admin fee per fine as a setting, recoveries entered as the money comes in from the deposit, cash, card or transfer, and the amount still outstanding - Statuses To match, Billed, Recovered, Disputed and Written off, with a dispute that needs a written reason - Ageing of fines the company has paid and not recovered, a WhatsApp message for the renter, a printed recovery statement per rental and a fine notice - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small rental companies, leasing offices and fleet owners who receive traffic fines for plates they rent out, and want to know who had the car and how much has been recovered. What it is NOT: It does not look up fines, connect to any traffic authority or payment system, or decide who is liable. The match is by plate and dates you entered, so a wrong date gives a wrong match. The fine notice wording is sample text you must check with your adviser. It is not legal advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (131 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1121 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline reminder sheet for a workshop: each vehicle's last service gives the next due date by months or by estimated km, a Remind now list with WhatsApp messages, a log of who was reminded and who booked, and a month calendar of services due. It does not hold job cards.
Workshop Next Service Reminder Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a garage that wants repeat business. You keep a short list of vehicles and one line per service visit. The app works out when each vehicle is next due and lists the customers to message today, leaving out those you already reminded or who have booked. The problem it removes: Customers forget their service until the car breaks, and the workshop never calls because nobody knows who is due. The service stickers and the job cards are in the drawer. This app turns the last visit date and km into a list of who to message this week, and records the answer so nobody is nagged twice. What is inside: - Vehicles with owner, mobile, make and model, and a service interval in months and in km - A service visit log: date, km, work done and amount, one line per visit - Next due date from the last visit by months and by estimated km, with status Overdue, Due soon or Later - A Remind now list with a ready WhatsApp message, leaving out vehicles reminded recently, booked, or opted out - A reminder log with outcome No answer, Call later, Booked or Do not remind, and the booked date - A month calendar of services due, a printed due list and a printed reminder card - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small garages, tyre shops and mobile mechanics who want customers to come back for the next service and do not need a full job card system. What it is NOT: It does not make job cards, estimates or invoices: use the Zeyto garage job card pack for that. It does not know the real odometer, so the km due date is an estimate from the km per month you enter. Reminders are not sent automatically. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (131 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1379 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline quote builder for event packages: price grows with the guest count, add-ons per event, guest or hour, a discount limit, VAT and deposit, a printed quote and a calendar of confirmed dates that stops double booking. Data stays on your device.
Event Package Quote Builder with Add-ons and Confirmed Dates is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a planner, caterer or venue that sells events as packages. You list your packages and add-ons once with their prices. For each enquiry you pick the package, enter the guest count and tick the add-ons, and the app works out the extra guest charge, the add-on total, the discount, VAT, the total and the deposit. When the client says yes the event goes on the calendar. The problem it removes: Package pricing is worked out again for every enquiry on a calculator or an old spreadsheet. The extra guests are forgotten, a per guest add-on is priced as a flat fee, the discount drifts, and a date is promised to two clients because nobody looked at the calendar. This app prices every quote the same way from your own price list, prints it with the same layout, and refuses to confirm a date that is already taken. What is inside: - Packages with a base price, included guests and a price for each extra guest, so the quote follows the guest count - Add-ons priced per event, per guest or per hour, with an optional price for one quote only - Quote with discount percentage, a limit you set for the discount that flags quotes above it, VAT from Settings, deposit percentage and amount, and a valid until date - Quote states Draft, Sent, Accepted and Declined, with Expired shown for quotes that were not answered in time - Calendar of accepted events, a rule that stops more confirmed events on a date than you allow, and a warning on other quotes for a date already taken - Today page with quotes to chase (with WhatsApp links), deposits not yet received, events in the next 30 days and a printable quote and event confirmation - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: event planners, wedding and party organisers, caterers and venue managers who sell fixed packages with optional extras and answer enquiries by phone and chat. What it is NOT: It does not send quotes, take payments or hold contracts. It has no supplier cost, margin or staff scheduling, no guest list or seating and no online booking page. It does not decide what VAT applies: you enter the rate. Cancellation and refund terms are your own text on the printed quote. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (147 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1945 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline run sheet for events: cues with start time, duration and owner, a check that stops one person being given two jobs at once, a status board for the day, a crew list with call times, a version number and a time-sorted printable run sheet. Data stays on your device.
Event Run Sheet and Timeline Printer with Version Control is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an event manager. You list your team once. For each event you add a crew list with call times and a run of cues: the time, how long it takes, where, and who owns it. On the day the Today board shows each cue as Pending, Done or Delayed. Each time the plan changes you issue a new version and print again. The problem it removes: The team works from different versions of the timeline. A cue is moved by ten minutes in a chat and the stage manager never sees it. One person is given the sound check and the guest welcome at the same time, and nobody notices until the day. This app keeps one timeline, checks it for clashes and prints it in time order with a version number on it. What is inside: - Events with date, venue, team call time, a version number, the date it was last revised and a note of what changed - Run items with start time, duration, calculated end time, area, owner, phase and status, with a rule that stops one person having two overlapping cues - A rule that stops a cue being given to someone who is not on the crew list of that event - Crew list per event with role on the day, call time and phone, printed on the cover sheet - Today page and a status board (Pending, Done, Delayed) for the cues of the day, plus a count of cues with no owner - Run sheet list sorted by date and time with filters by event, owner and phase, printed from one button, and a cover sheet for each event - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: event managers, wedding and corporate event planners and venue operations teams who run events with a crew and a minute by minute plan, and want one printed version of it. What it is NOT: It does not send the run sheet to the team or notify anyone about a change. It has no guest list, seating, budget or supplier payments, no drag and drop timeline and no clock that moves cues by itself. The cover sheet does not replace contracts or safety plans. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (148 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1082 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for group trips paid in instalments: your own payment milestones, fares by passenger type and room, payments and refunds, the amount each passenger should have paid by today, a seat limit and WhatsApp reminders for those behind. Data stays on your device.
Group Trip Passenger Instalment and Balance Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for someone who organises group trips. For each trip you enter the fares, the number of seats and the payment milestones: a deposit at booking, a share by a date, a bigger share by a later date and the full amount by a final date. You add the passengers and record each payment. The app shows what every passenger should have paid by today, how much they are behind, and what is still owed overall. The problem it removes: Group travellers pay in parts, in cash, by transfer and sometimes through a relative, and the organiser keeps the balances in chat messages and a notebook. Nobody knows on a given day who is behind, how much the group has collected, or whether a seat is really free. This app keeps one payment schedule for the trip and measures every passenger against it. What is inside: - Trips with fares for adult, child and infant, a single room supplement, a seat limit and four payment milestones as percentages by date - Passengers with age band, room type, discount, status and a fare worked out from the trip - Payments and refunds with date, method and reference, and a printable receipt - For each passenger: fare, paid, balance, the amount due by today from the schedule, the amount behind and a state (On schedule, Behind, Paid in full, Overpaid, Cancelled) - A seat limit rule that stops booking more passengers than the trip has seats, and cancellation fees that turn into amounts owed or to refund - Today page with total collected, balances, passengers behind with WhatsApp links, and a printable passenger statement and group balance sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: organisers of group tours, school or club trips, community outings and travel agents who sell group trips and collect payments in several parts. What it is NOT: It does not take card payments, issue tax invoices or hold passports and visas. It does not decide your cancellation terms: you type the cancellation fee for each passenger. It has no rooming list, flight manifest or itinerary, and it does not send messages by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (141 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1598 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline gear register for a photographer: serial numbers and values, a lending log that stops one item being lent twice, overdue returns with WhatsApp links, kits for each shoot type, and a packing list for each job that flags gear lent out or in repair.
Photo Gear Lending Log and Shoot Packing List is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a photographer or small studio. You list every item with its serial number and replacement value. When an item is lent or rented out you log who has it and when it is due back; the app stops you lending an item that is already out and shows what is overdue. You build kits for each shoot type, add your jobs, and print a packing list that shows which items are not available today. The problem it removes: Gear is forgotten at a shoot, or lent to a friend or second shooter and not returned, and nobody remembers who has the second lens. Serial numbers are needed for insurance and for repairs and are never at hand. This app keeps one register, one lending log and one packing list per job, so you know before you leave what is missing. What is inside: - Gear register with category, serial number, replacement value, service due date and a status of Available, In repair or Retired - Lending log with borrower, phone, dates out and due back, condition on return and a rule that stops an item being lent while it is already out - Where each item is today: Available, Lent out, In repair or Retired, and the days overdue for late returns - Kits for each shoot type (wedding, portrait, corporate, product) with the items and quantities, and a count of items not available - Jobs with a kit, and a printable packing list with serial numbers and a column to tick when packed - Today page with overdue returns and WhatsApp links, jobs in the coming days with unavailable gear, service due and gear value out - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: wedding, portrait and event photographers, videographers and small studios that own several cameras, lenses and lights and lend gear to second shooters or friends. What it is NOT: It does not insure gear, value it for insurance or track depreciation. It does not book gear for dates in advance: availability is as it stands today. It has no barcode scanning, no photos of the items and no sync across devices. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (156 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 821 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline booking tracker for a photographer: stages from enquiry to delivered, deposit and balance for each shoot, a rule against double booking a date, delivery items with deadlines worked out from the package, WhatsApp reminders and a printed booking confirmation.
Photographer Booking, Deposit and Delivery Deadline Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a working photographer. You list your packages with their price and the days you promise for delivery. Each enquiry becomes a booking that moves across a board: Enquiry, Quoted, Booked, Shot, Editing, Delivered. The app works out the deposit, tracks every payment, adds delivery items such as the online gallery and the album with a deadline each, and warns when a deposit is missing or a delivery is late. The problem it removes: Deposits, dates and delivery promises are scattered across chat messages. A date is promised twice, a deposit is never chased, the gallery is two weeks late and nobody remembers what was promised in the package. This app keeps one record per shoot, with the money, the date and the deliverables together, and shows what needs attention today. What is inside: - Packages with price, hours, the number of photos promised and the days promised for delivery - A board of bookings by stage and a calendar of shoots, with a rule that stops two confirmed shoots on the same date - Price with an optional price for one booking, extras and discount, a deposit worked out from Settings and a balance from the payments - Payments with kind, method and a printable receipt - Delivery items for each booking (gallery, edited photos, album, prints) with a deadline from the package and a count of days late - Today page with deposits missing, balances unpaid, deliveries late or due soon and WhatsApp links to the client, plus a printable booking confirmation - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: wedding, portrait, family, newborn and event photographers who work alone or with a small team and take bookings by phone and chat. What it is NOT: It does not hold photos or galleries, edit images or sell prints online. It does not decide your deposit, refund or copyright terms: you set the deposit percentage and write your own terms. It does not send messages or take payments. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (168 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1160 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline register for a security contractor: card, medical and training dates per guard with an expired and due soon list, uniform issued per guard with return and loss, a clearance sheet for leavers and WhatsApp reminders. Data stays on your device.
Guard Card Expiry and Uniform Issue Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a security contractor who keeps card dates in one notebook and uniform issue in another. You list your guards, enter each document with its expiry date, and record every uniform item issued. The app shows what has expired, what expires soon and who still holds uniform. The problem it removes: A guard card lapses on a post and nobody noticed because the date was in a drawer. A guard resigns and leaves with two uniform sets and a jacket, and the value is only worked out weeks later from memory. Dates and uniform are kept in different places, so no one sees a guard whole. What is inside: - Guards with status (active, on leave, left), post and phone, and the next expiry date across their current documents - Documents per guard (guard card, medical or fitness certificate, training certificate, visa, other) with an expired, due soon or OK flag and a warning window you set - A rule that stops two current documents of the same type for one guard, so a renewed card never hides behind the old date - Uniform items with a replacement value, issued per guard with size and quantity, returned and lost quantities, what is still held and its value - Today page: expired documents, documents due soon with WhatsApp reminders, leavers still holding uniform, and uniform due for replacement - Printable uniform issue receipt (A5) and a guard clearance sheet (A4) listing items still held and current documents - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and office staff of small and mid sized security contractors who manage a few dozen guards and want dates and uniform in one record they can search and print. What it is NOT: It does not know which documents the law or your client requires, and it does not check that a card is real or valid: it records the dates you type. It does not calculate or advise on any deduction from pay, which depends on your contract and the rules that apply to you. It keeps no ID numbers, no scans and no photos. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (149 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1324 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline incident and handover book for security supervisors: numbered incident reports with follow-up dates, open and overdue lists, shift handover sheets that count equipment handed over and received, and printable A4 reports. Data stays on your device.
Security Incident Log and Shift Handover Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a supervisor or contract manager who keeps incidents and handovers in a notebook. You list your sites and guards once. Each incident gets a number, a severity and a status. Each handover lists the equipment passed from one guard to the next and flags anything that does not add up. The problem it removes: Incidents sit in a notebook that nobody can search, so a repeat problem at one site is not noticed and a follow-up promised to a client is forgotten. At handover, radios, keys and torches are passed on by word of mouth, and a missing item is found days later with no way to tell which shift lost it. What is inside: - Incident register with an automatic number, severity, category, status, follow-up due date and a closed date that is required before an incident can be closed - Today page: open incidents, follow-ups overdue, high severity still open, incidents this week, handovers with missing items and handovers waiting for a signature - Shift handover sheets with item lines (handed over, received, condition) and a count of items that do not match - Rules that stop real mistakes: a high severity report with no action written, a follow-up with no date, a signed handover with missing items and no explanation - Search across every field of every incident, with filters by site, category, severity and status - Printable A4 incident report and handover sheet with signature lines, and a printable incident list for a period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: security supervisors, contract managers and facilities teams who run guards at several posts and want incidents and handovers recorded in a form that can be searched and printed, without buying a platform. What it is NOT: It is not a police report, an insurance claim or a licensing record, and it does not decide what must be reported to anyone. It has no photos, no GPS patrol tracking, no live alerts and no multi-user sign in: one browser holds one copy. Keep the notes factual and do not store ID numbers, medical details or card numbers. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (156 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 982 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline ledger for a travel agent: bookings with commission due from the supplier, an expected pay date after travel, supplier payments split across bookings, an overdue list with WhatsApp reminders and a printable claim sheet for each supplier. Data stays on your device.
Travel Booking and Supplier Commission Ledger is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small travel agency. For each booking you record the client, the supplier, the travel dates and the sale amount. The commission due is worked out from the supplier rate, or from a rate you type for that booking. When the supplier pays, you record the payment once and share it across the bookings it covers. The app shows what is still owed and what is late. The problem it removes: Commission is paid by suppliers weeks or months after the client has travelled, often as one lump sum for many bookings. Without a ledger, the agent cannot say which bookings were paid, which are late, and how much a supplier owes in total. Cancelled trips and negotiated rates make it worse. This app keeps one line for every booking and matches each supplier payment against the bookings it paid. What is inside: - Suppliers with a usual commission rate and the days they normally take to pay after the client returns - Bookings with sale amount, rate, commission due, commission received, outstanding amount and a state: Travel ahead, Due, Part received, Overdue, Received - A rate for one booking only, and the commission kept when a booking is cancelled - Supplier payments with allocation lines to bookings, so one transfer can settle many bookings, and a check for money not yet allocated - Today page with outstanding and overdue commission, commission falling due soon, and an overdue list with WhatsApp links to the supplier - Printable commission claim sheet for each supplier and an outstanding commission list for a period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small travel agencies and tour sellers who book hotels, flights, tours, cruises, insurance and visa services with suppliers who pay commission after travel. What it is NOT: It does not issue tickets, hold client payments or invoices, or calculate VAT on commission. It does not read supplier statements: you enter the payment and the bookings it covers. Rates and payment terms are the ones you type, and the app does not check them against your supplier agreements. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (139 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1062 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline itinerary builder for a travel agent: trips with day by day lines (flights, hotels, transfers, activities), a confirmed tick for every booking, a traveller documents checklist, readiness for each trip, WhatsApp reminders for missing documents and a printable itinerary.
Trip Itinerary Printer with Day Plan and Traveller Documents is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a travel agent who plans trips for clients. For each trip you add day lines: the day, the time, what it is, the supplier and the booking reference. You tick each booking once it is confirmed and track the documents each traveller must hand over. The itinerary prints from the same data, so nothing is retyped in a word processor. The problem it removes: Itineraries are rebuilt in a word processor for every client, and the agent loses track of which flights and hotels are confirmed and which traveller has not sent a passport copy. Two days before departure the file is half confirmed. This app keeps one plan per trip, shows what is still unconfirmed or missing, and prints the day by day plan on request. What is inside: - Trips with client, destination, dates, number of travellers and status from Enquiry to Done - Day lines with day number, time, type, supplier, booking reference and a confirmed tick, with the date worked out from the trip start - A check that flags a day line that falls after the end of the trip - Traveller documents checklist (passport copy, visa, insurance, tickets) with status and due date - Today page with trips leaving soon, unconfirmed bookings and documents to chase with WhatsApp links to the client - Printable day by day itinerary, a documents checklist for the client and a departures list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small travel agencies, tour planners and corporate travel desks that build itineraries by hand and need to see what is still missing before departure. What it is NOT: It does not book flights or hotels, check availability, calculate prices or hold client payments. It does not know visa rules: you decide which documents each traveller needs. It does not send the itinerary: print it or save it as PDF and send it yourself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (136 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 774 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline wedding budget for planners: budget lines with estimate and agreed price per vendor, deposits and instalments with due dates, overdue and next payments, over budget warnings per wedding, and printable budget and payment schedules. Data stays on your device.
Wedding Budget and Vendor Payment Schedule Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a wedding planner or a couple. Each wedding has a total budget. Each budget line has an estimate, the agreed price once the vendor quotes, and a schedule of deposits and instalments. The app adds it all up and shows what is paid, what is due next and what is overdue. The problem it removes: Budgets and deposits live across chat threads, a vendor is paid twice or not at all, and the final payment date is found out when the vendor calls. Nobody can say quickly whether the wedding is over budget now that three quotes have come in above the estimate. What is inside: - Weddings with a budget, event date and days to go, with planned total, remaining budget, paid so far, balance still to pay and overdue amount, all calculated - Budget lines by category and vendor with an estimate, the agreed price, status and a count of what is paid and what is left - Payment schedule per line: deposit, instalments, final payment and refunds received, each with a due date and a paid tick - Today page: payments overdue, payments due soon with a WhatsApp reminder to the couple, weddings over budget and agreed prices with no payment dates yet - Rules that stop mistakes: scheduled payments that add up to more than the agreed price, a booked line with no agreed price, marking a line paid in full when it is not - Printable budget summary and payment schedule for a wedding, and a vendor statement across weddings - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: independent wedding planners, small planning studios and couples who plan with many vendors and pay in deposits, and want to see budget and payment dates in one place. What it is NOT: It does not pay vendors, hold money or send reminders by itself. It is not a contract and does not hold vendor terms or cancellation rules: it records the amounts and dates you type. It has no guest list, seating or invitations. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (158 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1501 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline sheet for a photographer: a shot list with names for each family group, ticked off on the day, then the photo numbers the client chooses for the album, prints and retouching, checked against the album capacity, with a printed album order. Data stays on your device.
Wedding Photo Shot List, Client Selection and Album Order Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a photographer. Before the wedding you build the shot list from a library of standard shots, add the real names of each group and print it for the day. After the shoot you record the photo numbers the client chooses, with what each one is for: album, print or retouch. The app checks the choices against the pages of the album and prints the order sheet for the lab. The problem it removes: Family group shots are forgotten because the list is in someone's head, and the photographer asks the relatives on the day who is who. Later the client sends photo numbers in chat messages, some twice, some changed, and the album order is rebuilt from scrolling. This app keeps the shot list with names, then one record for every chosen photo, and shows when the album is over or under its capacity. What is inside: - A library of standard shots by category, ready to reuse for every wedding, and your own extra shots for each job - Shot list for each shoot with who is in the shot, priority and a done tick, printed in order for the day - Selection list with the photo number, what it is for (album, print, both, retouch, maybe, not wanted), album page and print size - A rule that stops the same photo number being entered twice for a shoot, and one that stops an album page beyond the pages of the album - Album capacity from the number of pages, a count of photos chosen and a warning when the client has chosen more than fits - Today page with shoots coming up and their shot lists, clients who have not chosen photos after the deadline with WhatsApp links, and a printable album order sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: wedding, engagement and family photographers who take group shots on the day and have the client choose photos for an album afterwards. What it is NOT: It does not hold or display photos, so photo numbers are the file numbers you give. It does not lay out the album, order from a lab or take payments. It has no booking, deposit or pricing: use it beside a booking tracker. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (153 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 933 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline batch scaler for food sellers: recipes written for one batch, production runs scaled to the portions you need, peel and trim loss in the cost, cost per portion against your food cost target, and one shopping list in packs for all planned runs. Data stays on your device.
Batch Recipe Scaler is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a home kitchen, caterer or small food maker. You write each recipe once, for the batch you normally make. When an order comes in for forty portions you add a production run, and the app prints the scaled quantities for the cook, works out the cost of the run and the cost of one portion, and adds the run to a shopping list that covers everything you planned. The problem it removes: A recipe for ten portions has to be made for forty, then for fifteen, then for sixty. The scaling is done on a phone calculator, one ingredient wrong spoils a batch, peeling and bone loss are forgotten so the real cost is higher, and the shopping list is rebuilt from memory. This app scales every ingredient the same way and costs the batch from the pack prices you pay. What is inside: - Ingredients with pack size, pack price and the share you can use after peeling or trimming, giving the true cost of what goes in the pot - Recipes written for one batch, with the number of portions it makes and the price you sell a portion for - Production runs: choose a recipe and the portions you need, and every line is scaled, with kilograms and litres shown when the amount is large - Cost of the run, cost per portion, food cost percentage against the target you set, and recipes that are over target - One shopping list for all planned runs: quantity needed, stock you have, packs to buy and what they cost - Printable production sheet for the cook and a recipe cost sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: home kitchens, meal sellers, caterers, bakers and small food producers in the UAE who cook the same recipes in different batch sizes and want to know what each portion costs. What it is NOT: It does not know your recipe is good, does not set a safe shelf life, does not give nutrition or allergen advice, and does not track stock movements: the stock you enter is a number you type. Scaling is simple proportion, so strongly flavoured items such as spices and salt may need your taste. Prices are the pack prices you enter, without VAT. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (148 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1689 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline bouquet costing for florists: bunch price and loss to cost per usable stem, bouquet recipes with labour and overhead, price that reaches your margin after VAT, peak season uplift, and stems to order for planned bouquets. Data stays on your device.
Bouquet Costing is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a florist who prices bouquets by feel. You enter what you pay for a bunch, how many stems come in it and how many you lose. You build each bouquet as a recipe of stems. The app works out the cost of one bouquet, the price that reaches the margin you want after VAT, rounds it to a price you can quote, and tells you which bouquets are priced below target. The problem it removes: Wholesale prices move, a bunch of twenty roses does not give twenty good stems, and the ribbon, water and time are never counted. So bouquets are priced by guess, and the busy days sell at a loss without anyone noticing. This app prices from the real cost of the stems you use and tells you how many bunches to order for the bouquets you plan to make. What is inside: - Stem and material list with bunch price, stems per bunch and the share you lose, giving the cost of one usable stem - Bouquet recipes of stems and quantities, with labour minutes and an overhead percentage you set - Cost of one bouquet, the price that reaches your target margin after VAT, rounded up to your price step, and the actual margin at the price you charge - Peak pricing switch: raise all stem costs by the percentage you are being charged at the wholesale market - Price change log on every stem and a list of bouquets that are now below target - Planned bouquets turn into stems needed and bunches to order, less the bunches you already have - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of small flower shops, home florists and market stalls in the UAE who buy by the bunch, make hand bouquets and arrangements, and want to know whether each one earns its margin. What it is NOT: It does not track stock day by day, does not read supplier invoices, does not know your real wastage unless you enter the share you lose, and does not set prices for you: the margin, labour rate, overhead and rounding are numbers you choose. VAT is a rate you enter. It is not tax or accounting advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (148 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1936 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline closing count for a cafe display case: made, sold, reduced, staff, donated, binned and kept for each product, pieces unaccounted for, cost of waste, other losses, weekly waste against food sales and a suggested bake quantity for tomorrow. Data stays on your device.
Cafe Closing Count is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a cafe or bakery that makes a fixed number of pieces each day and throws away what does not sell. At closing a staff member presses Start today count, types how many pieces of each product were sold and where the rest went, and the app prices the waste. Other losses such as spilt milk go in a second list. A weekly report puts waste next to food sales, and tomorrow bake plan is calculated from what sold on the same weekday. The problem it removes: Food thrown away is never counted, so its cost stays hidden inside the cost of sales. The croissants are baked to the same number every morning, three are binned every evening, and nobody sees that the seasonal tart loses money every day. A piece that was neither sold nor binned nor given away has simply vanished. This app makes the count a two minute closing habit and shows what the bin costs per week. What is inside: - Start today count: one row for every product on your list, with the usual number made, ready to complete - Each product: made, sold, sold reduced, staff meals, donated, binned and kept for tomorrow, with the pieces left unaccounted for flagged - Cost of the bin, cost of giveaways and sales value lost, from the cost and price you enter for each product - Other losses with a reason: dropped, wrong order, expired, prepared too much. The reason Other needs a note - Weekly report: bin cost plus other losses against the food sales you enter, compared with your own waste target - Tomorrow bake plan from the average demand on the same weekday over the last eight weeks, plus the buffer you set - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and supervisors of cafes, bakeries, sandwich bars and restaurants with a display case or a daily made batch, who want waste to be counted and priced rather than guessed. What it is NOT: It does not weigh anything, does not read your till, and does not know how many pieces you sold: you type the sold quantity from your till report. It is not a stock control system and does not track ingredients. It does not give food safety advice, and it does not tell you what is safe to donate or keep. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (153 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 3101 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline order book for custom cakes: deposit required before an order is confirmed, minimum notice per cake type, a limit of cakes per day, inscription and allergy notes, payments and balance, pickup calendar, bake list and WhatsApp reminders. Data stays on your device.
Custom Cake Order Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a baker who takes cake orders by message. You list your cakes with serves, price and the notice each one needs. Each order records the flavour, the writing on the cake, any allergy request, the pickup date and time, the extras, and every payment. The app will not confirm an order until the deposit is in, and will not take a cake for a day that is already full. The problem it removes: Cake orders and deposits are scattered across chats. A three tier cake is accepted with two days notice, five cakes are promised for one Friday, the deposit is never chased, and a customer arrives for the balance nobody wrote down. This app keeps the order, the deposit and the balance together and stops the bookings you cannot bake. What is inside: - Cake list with serves, price and minimum notice days per cake, flavours and a place for the inscription and design notes - Allergy note and a nut-free tick on every order, printed on the bake sheet - Deposit rule: an order cannot be confirmed until the deposit percentage you set has been paid - Minimum notice rule per cake, with a rush tick when you agree to shorter notice, and a limit on cakes per pickup day - Payments log (deposit, part payment, final payment, refund) with balance, and no collection until the balance is paid - Pickup calendar, bake board, bake list for today and tomorrow, deposit reminders and pickup messages on WhatsApp - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: home bakers, small cake shops, dessert makers and sellers of party treats in the UAE who take custom orders by message and bake in small numbers. What it is NOT: It does not take online orders or card payments, does not send messages by itself (it opens WhatsApp with the text ready), does not scale recipes or cost the ingredients, and does not handle food safety records or licences. The cancellation wording is sample text you replace with your own. Allergy fields record what the customer told you: they are not a safety system. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (153 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1262 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline order book for a florist: delivery calendar, busy day limits that refuse one order too many, recipient and card message on every order, driver sheet, gift card print, unpaid list and WhatsApp updates. Data stays on your device.
Florist Order Book with Delivery Calendar and Busy Day Limits is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a flower shop that takes orders on WhatsApp, by phone and at the counter. Each order records who is buying, who receives the flowers, the address, the delivery slot, the card message and what was ordered. The calendar shows the week, the Today page shows what to make and what to deliver, and the driver sheet prints the day. The problem it removes: On a busy gifts day orders live on sticky notes and chat threads. A card message is lost, a recipient phone number is the buyer phone number, the same slot is promised to too many people, and nobody knows which orders were never paid. This app puts every order in one book and refuses an order on a day you have marked as full. What is inside: - Orders with buyer, recipient, address, delivery zone and fee, slot, occasion, card message and items with prices - Busy day list: you set how many orders you can make on a day, and the app refuses the next order for that day - Today page: what to make, what to deliver by slot, pickups, unpaid orders and the next busy day - Calendar and a workshop board from New to Delivered for the coming week - One tap status changes, and a WhatsApp message ready for the buyer when the order is out - Printable driver sheet for a day, A5 order slip with the total and balance, and a gift card message to print - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and staff of small flower shops and gift flower sellers in the UAE who take orders by message, call and walk-in, and make and deliver them with one or two people. What it is NOT: It does not take online orders or card payments, does not send messages by itself (it opens WhatsApp with the text ready and you press send), does not plan driver routes, and does not track stems or stock. Delivery fees come from the zone list you enter. It does not claim any approval from any authority. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (172 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1301 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline register for gift cards, promo vouchers and store credit: numbered cards, redemptions refused above the balance, expiry flags, top-ups and the total still owed. Prints a card and a balance statement. Data stays on your device.
Gift Card and Voucher Balance Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a business that sells or gives out gift cards on paper or by message. Each card gets a number, a value, an optional expiry and a holder. Every use is written to a log, so the balance of any card is one search away, and the total you still owe in unused gift cards is always on the front page. The problem it removes: A card is sold, used in two visits, then used a third time for more than it had left, because nobody wrote down the balance. A customer returns after a year and no one knows if the card was ever used. At the end of the month nobody can say how much gift card money is still out there. This app keeps one balance per card and refuses to redeem more than it holds. What is inside: - Cards with an automatic number, kind (gift card, promo voucher, store credit), value, how it was paid, holder and phone - Redemption log with a quick Redeem form: a redemption larger than the balance is refused, and so is one before the card was issued - Expiry from a validity period you set, or a date you enter for one card, with Expiring soon and Expired lists - A card that has expired is refused unless you tick that you honoured it, so exceptions are written down - Top-ups and write-offs, balance of each card, and the total owed on paid cards separated from free promo vouchers - Printable card (A6) and a balance statement showing every use, plus a list of balances as of today - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of salons, cafes, florists, boutiques, studios and shops who sell gift cards or give store credit and today track them in a notebook or a chat. What it is NOT: It does not connect to a till or card machine, does not stop a card being used at another branch, and has no online redemption. It does not say how long a gift card must stay valid: the validity period is a number you choose, and any rule about gift card expiry is something to check with your adviser. It is not accounting advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (123 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 792 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline weekly order sheet for a meal prep business: a menu per week, each customer own meals, portion caps, kitchen totals to cook, avoid-word flags per customer, packing tickets, delivery list and unpaid balances. Data stays on your device.
Meal Prep Weekly Order Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a meal prep seller or home chef who cooks to order once a week. You enter the menu for the week. Each customer orders their own meals, with notes such as no onion. The app adds every order into the kitchen list of portions to cook, prints a packing ticket for each customer, and prints the delivery list with the balance to collect. The problem it removes: Every weekly customer wants a different mix, orders arrive by message through the week, and the kitchen list is rebuilt by hand on Thursday night. One portion too few is a disappointed customer, one allergy word missed is worse, and nobody can say who has not paid for the last two weeks. This app adds the orders up for you and puts the customer avoid word next to every meal that contains it. What is inside: - A menu for each week, with price, main ingredients and an optional portion cap that refuses an order for more than you can cook - Customers with their delivery details, standing delivery fee and one word they avoid, such as peanut - Weekly orders with meal lines and notes, delivery date and window, discount and payments - Kitchen totals per meal: ordered, spare portions you set, and portions to cook, plus a printable kitchen list - A flag on every order line whose ingredients contain the word the customer avoids, and a flag on late orders and on lines taken from another week - Printable packing ticket for each order and a delivery list by day, with the balance to collect - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: meal prep sellers, healthy meal subscription kitchens, home chefs and small catering kitchens in the UAE who cook once or twice a week from a weekly menu and deliver to a list of regulars. What it is NOT: It does not take online orders or card payments, does not plan routes, does not cost the ingredients, and does not manage a subscription billing cycle. The avoid word flag only matches the one word you type against the ingredients text you type. It is a prompt to check, not an allergen control, and it does not replace reading the ingredients or asking the customer. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (155 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2214 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline supplier ordering for a kitchen or small shop: par levels and counts give the quantity to order per supplier, with minimum order checks. At delivery you enter received, rejected and invoice figures and see the claim value per supplier. Data stays on your device.
Supplier Order Sheet by Par Level is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the person who orders stock for a cafe, restaurant or shop. Each item has a supplier, a par level, a price and the pack step you must order in. After you count the shelf, the app shows how much to order from each supplier, net of what is already on its way, and prints the supplier order sheet. When the delivery arrives you tick it off line by line and the app compares what you ordered, what arrived, what you rejected and what the invoice charges. The problem it removes: Ordering is done from memory, so the same item is ordered twice when a delivery is late, or forgotten until the shelf is empty. Deliveries are signed for without checking, and the invoice carries a short delivery, a rejected tray or a price that moved. Nobody adds up what was lost, so the supplier is never asked for it. This app keeps one order list per supplier and puts a figure on every difference. What is inside: - Items with supplier, unit, par level, on hand count, agreed price and the pack step to order in - Quantity to order calculated from par, on hand and what is already on order, never below zero - Supplier order sheet to print, and a WhatsApp button for each item to order - Purchase orders with lines, a block on a sent order below the supplier minimum, and Mark sent and Mark delivered buttons - Delivery check: received, rejected with a reason, and the invoice quantity and price per line - Claim value per line and per supplier, a claim sheet to print, and a list of claims not yet sent - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: cafe owners, kitchen managers, shop managers and store keepers who order from three to ten suppliers and want a simple check at the back door. What it is NOT: It does not count stock for you: you type the on hand number after you count. It does not post accounting entries, does not read supplier invoices and does not send orders by itself. It is not a recipe or menu costing tool. It does not give food safety advice, and what to reject is your decision. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (184 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 3325 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for an AC maintenance company: annual contracts with visits included, every unit at every site, visits booked from the due list, units serviced on each visit, fee payments, and contracts about to end. Prints the contract and the visit report.
AC Maintenance Contracts, Unit Register and Service Visits is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small AC maintenance company or a freelance technician with annual maintenance contracts. You enter each site and its units, then each contract with the number of visits it includes. The app works out when each contract is due its next visit, lists the contracts that are overdue, books the visit in one press, and keeps the service history of every unit. The problem it removes: An annual contract promises four visits a year, but nobody is told when a visit is due. Visits are missed until the customer complains, nobody can say when a given split unit was last cleaned, and the contract fee is chased from memory. This app turns the contract into a visit schedule and a due list you open each morning. What is inside: - Today page: contracts with an overdue visit, visits booked for today, contracts ending soon, unpaid contract fees and units not serviced for too long - Contracts with start date, term, visits included, fee, payments and balance, and a calculated next visit due date and state (On track, Due soon, Overdue, Booked) - Unit register per site: type, model, capacity, refrigerant, installed year, last service date and a service state for each unit - One press Book due visits creates a visit for every contract that needs one, with Undo - A visit lists the units serviced and the work done, and refuses a unit that belongs to another site - Two active contracts for the same site on overlapping dates are refused - Printable contract page with the unit list, and a visit report to sign at the site - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small AC maintenance companies, villa and building service contractors and freelance technicians who sell annual maintenance contracts with a set number of visits and look after tens or hundreds of units. What it is NOT: It does not know any manufacturer service interval: the number of days before a unit shows as due is a setting you enter. It does not diagnose faults, track spare parts or stock, send reminders by itself, or take payments. The contract wording is sample text that you must replace with your own terms. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (185 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2056 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline log of client calls and meetings with two kinds of follow-up: what the client owes you (documents, approvals, content) and what you owe them. Shows late client items to chase, work blocked by waiting, calls with no recap sent, and prints a recap or a next-call agenda.
Client Call Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for consultants, agencies and freelancers whose projects stall because a client has not sent something. You log each call with a short summary and the decisions. Every follow-up is either owed by you or owed by the client, with a due date, and the client items you cannot work without are marked as blocking. A chase list shows which client items are late and when you last chased, and a recap list shows calls where you have not yet sent the summary. The problem it removes: The work stops because the client has not sent the content, the approval or the statements, and nobody remembers who promised what on which call. You wait, you chase from memory, and the delay becomes your problem. Meeting notes tools list actions for a team. This keeps the client side separate: what the client still owes you, how long you have waited, and when you last chased. What is inside: - Follow-ups page: client items overdue, items that block your work, your own items due soon, and calls with no recap sent - Every follow-up is owed by Us or by the Client, with a due date, who it belongs to and a tick for work blocked by waiting - Chase list: late client items with days waiting, number of chases, last chase date and a ready WhatsApp message - One press Chased records today and counts the chase; one press Done closes an item - Recap tracking: a call shows Recap due or Recap overdue until you tick that the summary was sent - Printable call recap and a next-call agenda per client listing what each side still owes - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: independent consultants, marketing and web agencies, designers, bookkeepers and anyone whose work depends on a client sending information and who runs several client conversations at once. What it is NOT: It does not record calls, transcribe them or send messages by itself. It is not a team meeting minutes tool and has no agendas with voting. It does not track hours or money. The recap and chase messages are templates you edit and send yourself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (132 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1084 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for retainer clients: one billing row per retainer per month, hours used against the hours included, extra hours charged at your rate, months that were never billed, invoices unpaid and overdue, and a printable monthly retainer invoice. Data stays on your device.
Client Retainer Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a freelancer, small agency or consultant who bills clients a fixed amount every month. You set up each retainer with its monthly fee, the hours included and the rate for extra hours. At the start of each month one press adds a billing row for every active retainer. You enter the hours used, the app works out the extra-hours charge, and a printable invoice page is ready. It tells you which months were never billed and which invoices are late. The problem it removes: A retainer is billed every month, so it is the easiest invoice to forget. A month is skipped when the work gets busy, extra hours over the included time are never charged, a price rise is not applied from the right month, and nobody notices that a client has not paid for six weeks. This app turns every retainer into a monthly to-do row and a list of months with nothing billed. What is inside: - Retainers page: monthly value of active retainers, rows due to invoice, invoices unpaid and overdue, and retainers with months that were never billed - Two buttons: Add this month's rows and Add last month's rows create a billing row for every retainer that needs one, with the fee copied so a later price change does not rewrite old months - Hours used against hours included, with the extra hours and their charge worked out for you - A month cannot be added twice to the same retainer, and an invoiced row must carry an invoice number and date - Payment terms in days, due dates, days overdue and a WhatsApp reminder message for each late invoice - Printable monthly retainer invoice page with VAT at the rate you enter, and a retainer statement list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: freelance designers, developers, marketers, bookkeepers, consultants and small agencies with three to thirty clients on a monthly fee for social media, website care, support hours, bookkeeping or advisory work. What it is NOT: It does not send invoices, take payments or run a timer. Hours used are typed by you at month end. The invoice layout is an example, not a promise that it meets the invoice rules that apply to you. It does not decide a fair retainer price or pay any tax. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (131 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1396 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline utilisation tracker for a small consultancy: a day log per consultant, engagements with days sold, days delivered, days left and the pace needed to finish, monthly capacity with leave taken out, utilisation against a target, and the revenue gap at standard day rates.
Consultant Utilisation Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a consultancy of one to twenty people that sells time in days. You list your consultants with a standard day rate and a target utilisation, then each engagement with the days sold and the sold day rate. You log days as they are worked: billable against an engagement, or internal, business development, training, leave or public holiday. The app compares days billed with days available, shows which engagements are behind pace or over their days, and puts a value on the gap to target. The problem it removes: A consultancy sells days but nobody compares the days billed with the days available. One engagement has run past its days without anyone noticing, another has twelve unused days and an end date three weeks away, and the partner cannot say whether the team was 60 percent or 75 percent utilised last month. This app answers those questions from a simple day log. What is inside: - Utilisation page: team utilisation last month against target, billable days so far this month, engagements behind pace, over-sold engagements and unused days at risk - Day log per consultant: a day cannot be logged for more than 1 day in total, and billable days need an engagement - Engagements with days sold, sold day rate, days delivered, days left, percent used and the days per week still needed against the pace of the last four weeks - Monthly capacity per consultant with leave and public holidays taken out of the days available - Utilisation against target per consultant and month, days short of target and the revenue gap at the standard day rate - One press adds this month's capacity rows, and days logged by month and by kind are charted - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: boutique consultancies, advisory and training firms, design and engineering studios and independent consultants with associates, who sell days or fixed packages and want to know how busy their people really are. What it is NOT: It does not track money received or invoices, timesheet approval, costs or profit, and it does not forecast sales. The target utilisation and standard day rates are numbers you enter, not advice on what to charge or what is a good utilisation. It does not know your public holidays: you log them as a day kind. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (152 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2707 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline project tracker for freelancers: log hours and recharged costs per project, compare hours with the budget, see what a fixed fee pays per hour, and group work into billing batches so unbilled work is never missed. Prints a work statement to attach to your invoice.
Freelance Project Budget Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a freelancer or small studio that works on several projects: some by the hour, some for a fixed fee, some by the hour up to a cap. You log hours and out-of-pocket costs against the project. The app shows how much of the hours budget is used, what a fixed fee works out to per hour, how much is capped and written off, and what is still unbilled. When you invoice, you group the work into a billing batch and print a work statement. It is not an invoicing tool: you issue the invoice in your own invoicing tool and type its number here. The problem it removes: Hours are logged against a project but nobody compares them with the budget, a fixed fee quietly pays less per hour than you thought, a cap swallows the last twelve hours, recharged costs are forgotten, and the invoice is made from memory. This app keeps one running answer to: how much work is done, how much is billed, and what is left to bill. What is inside: - Projects page: unbilled fees and costs per project, hours against budget, effective hourly rate on fixed fees, and amount written off over a cap - Three billing types: hourly, fixed fee, and capped hourly with a cap in AED - Time log with a billable tick, and recharge costs such as stock photos or printing that can be billed on - Billing batches: tick time and costs to a batch, then print a work statement that lists exactly what was billed - Fixed fee instalments that cannot add up to more than the fee, and a warning when work is ticked to the batch of another project - Warnings: near or over the hours budget, below the lowest hourly rate you accept, finished project with work still unbilled - Work statement to attach to the invoice, and an unbilled work sheet per project - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: freelance designers, developers, writers, photographers and consultants who run three to ten projects at a time, some by the hour and some for a fixed price, and invoice from their own invoicing tool. What it is NOT: It does not create invoices with tax lines, take payments or send messages. Amounts are before VAT: enter and add VAT in your invoicing tool. It does not run a timer, so you type hours after the work. It is not advice on what to charge: the rates and warnings are numbers you enter. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (166 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2128 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline job book for a handyman or small maintenance firm: a price list with your cost and selling price, job quotes and invoices, shop receipts matched to each job so unbilled materials show up, payments, and the profit and margin of every job. Prints the quote or invoice.
Handyman Job Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a handyman, a small maintenance company or a fit-out subcontractor. You keep a price list of labour and materials with what each costs you and what you charge. A job is built from price list lines, shop receipts are recorded against the job, and the app shows whether everything you bought was billed, what the job earned and what the customer still owes. The problem it removes: Jobs are priced from memory, a customer is billed for the labour but the fan, the cable and the second door lock bought at the shop are forgotten, and nobody knows which jobs earned money. This app compares what you bought for a job with what you billed, and shows the margin of each job. What is inside: - Today page: jobs booked for today, done jobs not yet invoiced, jobs with materials bought but not billed, unpaid invoices and margin this month - Price list with your cost, your selling price, the markup you actually make and a warning when a price is below your cost or below your target - Jobs with lines picked from the price list, an optional special price, discount, VAT at the rate you enter, payments and balance - Shop receipts recorded against each job: the app shows the value of materials bought that are missing from the bill - Profit and margin per job, with a Low margin flag against a limit you set - Board from Quote to Invoiced, a calendar of booked jobs, and a printable quote or invoice and an internal cost sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: handymen, small maintenance and renovation firms, painters, electricians and plumbers working alone or with a helper who quote by the job and buy materials at shops for each customer. What it is NOT: It does not keep a stock of materials, pay your workers or track working hours. The markup and margin limits are numbers you enter, not advice on what to charge. The invoice layout is an example, not a promise that it meets the invoice rules that apply to you. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (188 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2239 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for a small property agency: enquiries with a next follow-up date, viewings that cannot clash for a property or an agent, feedback after each viewing, budget checks against the asking price and a printable feedback page for the owner.
Property Enquiry, Viewing and Follow-Up Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an agent or small agency that arranges viewings over WhatsApp and calls. Each enquiry records who asked, where it came from, what they want and their budget. Each viewing links one enquiry to one property with a date, time and agent, and the app refuses a booking that clashes with another viewing of the same property or the same agent. After the viewing you record the outcome and what the viewer said. The first page lists who to call today, who has not been contacted and which viewings are still waiting for an outcome. The problem it removes: Enquiries arrive from the portal, the website, the signboard and walk-ins. Viewings are arranged in chat and the feedback stays in someone's head, so the owner asks how the viewings went and nobody can say. Leads go quiet because nobody set a day to call again. Two viewers are booked at the same flat at the same time, or an agent is booked at two places. This app keeps one list of enquiries with the next call date, one list of viewings with their outcome, and one page of what to do today. What is inside: - Today page: follow-ups overdue and due today, new enquiries not yet contacted, viewings today and tomorrow, viewings still without an outcome and listings that have been available too long - Enquiries with source, budget, bedrooms wanted, agent, status, last contact and next follow-up, with a board by status - Viewings with date, time, agent, outcome, interest level and feedback, and a calendar - Rules that stop a clashing viewing of the same property or agent, a viewing of a let or withdrawn property, a viewing for a closed enquiry and a rent enquiry booked on a sale property - Budget check on every viewing against the asking price with a tolerance you set - Properties with agent, status and number of viewings, a printable viewing feedback page for the owner and a printable viewing sheet for each agent - WhatsApp buttons that open a message ready to send for follow-ups and viewing reminders - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: independent agents, small brokerages and property management offices who list and show flats, villas and offices, and want every enquiry followed up and every viewing recorded. What it is NOT: It does not publish listings, collect enquiries from portals automatically, send messages for you, handle contracts, commission or deposits, or hold documents. The tolerance and follow-up gap are numbers you enter. Fictional example data only. Check any licensing or registration rule that applies to your agency with the authority. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (174 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1753 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline key register for a property management office: key sets per unit, a handover log with who took how many keys and when they are due back, a printable receipt, overdue and short-return lists, and safe counts checked against what the log says should be there.
Property Key Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an agency or property manager who hands keys to viewers, contractors, cleaners, tenants and owners. Each key set belongs to a unit and records how many keys it has. Every handover records who took how many keys, why, and the date they are due back. The app refuses to give out more keys than the safe holds, shows the keys that are overdue or came back short, prints a key receipt to sign, and compares each safe count with the number the log says should be in the safe. The problem it removes: Keys leave the office with a viewer, a plumber or a tenant and nobody writes down who has them. When a contractor does not return a key, or a tenant moves out with the parking remote, the office finds out months later. This app keeps a simple log of every key that leaves and returns, so you can say who holds which keys today. What is inside: - Today page: keys out now, handovers overdue or due today, keys that came back short, long-term keys held after a unit became vacant and key sets whose count is due - Key sets per unit with tag, kind, number of keys, where it is stored, and the keys in the safe - Handover log with holder, phone, purpose, keys given, due date, ID seen, signed, return date and keys returned - Rules that stop giving out more keys than the safe holds, giving out a lost or retired set, and a return before the handover - Safe count log that compares the keys you counted with the keys the log says should be there on that date - Printable key receipt for each handover and a printable key card for each unit - WhatsApp reminder for overdue keys, opened with the message ready to send - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: property management offices, letting agencies, building managers and small developers who hold keys for units they do not live in. What it is NOT: It does not control access, open doors, or replace a key cabinet with locks. It does not store copies of identity documents: it only records that ID was seen. The receipt wording is a simple example, not legal advice. Fictional example data only. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (158 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1428 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline dispatch board for a small service company: log each call, assign a technician and time, get refused when a technician would be double booked or over their daily limit, follow the status on a board, collect call notes and print a day sheet per technician.
Service Call Dispatch Board is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the person who answers the phone at a small repair or maintenance company. Every call becomes a job with a customer, an address, a problem and a priority. You assign it to a technician for a date and time, and the app checks that the technician is free and not over their limit for the day. A board shows what is new, assigned, on the way, in progress and done, and each technician gets a printable day sheet. The problem it removes: Jobs are sent to technicians by chat. Two jobs land on the same technician at the same hour, an urgent call sits unassigned, yesterday's job is never closed, and customers phone to ask where the technician is. This app gives every call a status and an owner, and refuses a double booking. What is inside: - Dispatch page: calls to assign, urgent calls still open, jobs left open from earlier days, return visits, and each technician's load today - A call needs a technician and a date before it can move past New, and a technician cannot be booked for overlapping times on the same day - A daily job limit per technician: the app refuses the job that would go over it - Board with seven columns from New to Done, and a calendar of booked jobs - Call notes with date and time: customer phoned, part ordered, customer not home - Day sheets generated for today or tomorrow, with the jobs, estimated minutes and the cash the technician should hand in - Printable day sheet per technician and a job slip for the customer to sign - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small AC, plumbing, electrical and general repair companies, facility service teams and dispatchers who take calls by phone or WhatsApp and send two to ten technicians out each day. What it is NOT: It does not track vehicles on a map, work out routes, send messages by itself or take payments. It does not keep stock or spare parts. Technicians use their own phones or the printed sheet: there is no technician login and no sync between devices. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (172 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1008 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline deadline calendar for an accounting office. You enter each client's due dates. The app shows them on a calendar, flags overdue dates, missing documents and work that is behind, warns about dates on your weekend, and rolls filed repeating jobs forward.
Accounting Client Deadline Calendar and Risk List is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an accounting or tax office with many clients. You enter every client's deadline with the date, the kind of work and whether you have the documents. The calendar shows the month, the Upcoming page ranks what is at risk, and one tap creates the next deadline of a repeating job after the previous one is filed. The problem it removes: Filing dates for dozens of clients sit in several diaries, phone reminders and one partner's memory. A date is noticed when the client calls, the documents are found missing on the last day, and a recurring job is forgotten because nobody created the next one. This app puts every date you enter on one calendar and ranks them by what is actually at risk, not just by date. What is inside: - Month calendar of every deadline, coloured by work status, that becomes an agenda list on a phone - Deadlines with client, kind of work, due date, documents received, work status, filed date and reference - Risk flag per deadline: overdue, documents missing, behind on work, start now or on track, from your own settings - Upcoming page with counts, the at risk list with WhatsApp messages to clients whose documents are missing, and dates on your weekend - Roll forward: one tap creates the next monthly, quarterly or yearly deadline for every filed repeating job - Printable client schedule of open deadlines and a printable deadline list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: accounting and bookkeeping offices, tax agents and corporate service providers who keep many clients' filing and renewal dates and want one place to see them and the work behind them. What it is NOT: It does not know any filing date or rule: every date is typed by you from your own sources, and it gives no legal or tax advice. It does not file anything, connect to any authority or send reminders by itself. Weekend days and the risk windows are settings you choose. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (92 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 686 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for the documents an accounting firm needs from clients each month. Standing lists, one request per client, document and month, a chase log with promised dates, a Chase today list with WhatsApp messages, and a printable list of what is missing.
Accounting Firm Client Document Chase Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a bookkeeping or accounting office that waits every month for bank statements, sales invoices, purchase bills and payroll sheets. You set each client's standing list once. One tap creates the month's requests, the chase log records every message and promise, and the Chase today list shows who to contact now. The problem it removes: The books cannot be closed because three clients have not sent their documents, and nobody remembers who was chased on which day or who promised a date. Chasing is done from memory and phone chats, so slow clients are chased too late and polite ones too often. This app keeps one record per document per month, spaces the chases for you and shows which clients are habitually late. What is inside: - Clients with contact, phone, service type, handler and status, plus the share of their documents that arrived late - Standing document list per client with frequency and the day of the month it is due - One tap creates this month's requests for every active client, without duplicating ones already made - Chase log with channel, outcome and the date the client promised to send, so a promise is not chased before it is due - Chase today list with a ready WhatsApp message for each request, plus promised, due soon and repeat offender lists - A printable letter to the client listing the documents still needed, and a printable request list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: accounting and bookkeeping offices, tax agents and corporate service providers that collect documents from many small clients every month and chase them by phone and WhatsApp. What it is NOT: It does not store the documents themselves, read email or send messages: WhatsApp opens with the message written and you press send. It does not know filing deadlines or tell a client what they must keep, and the due dates are the dates you enter. It is not an accounting system. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (116 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1426 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline work board for a bookkeeping practice. One job per client per month moves from Waiting for documents to Delivered. Each job carries hours, fee, extras and invoice and payment status, and the app shows the fee earned per hour for each client.
Bookkeeping Monthly Work Board and Fee Billing is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a bookkeeper or small firm that does monthly work for a list of clients on a fixed monthly fee. One tap opens the month's jobs, the board shows where every client's books stand and who has them, and each job holds the hours, the fee, any extras and the invoice number. Billing lists show what is ready to invoice and what is unpaid. The problem it removes: In a small practice the status of each client's month lives in one person's head: who is waiting for documents, whose books are with review, which reports went out. Fees are invoiced when someone remembers, so delivered work sits unbilled, and nobody knows which fixed-fee client takes the most hours. This app shows every client's month on one board and every fee on one billing list. What is inside: - Clients with monthly fee, default person responsible, and status, plus fee earned per hour worked and unpaid fees - One tap opens last month's job for every active client, with the fee copied from the client and a deadline you set - Work board by stage with the person on each card, days in the current stage and late jobs marked - Hours, extras and the invoice number, date and payment status on each job, with rules against an invoice without a number or a payment without a date - Billing page: ready to invoice, invoiced but unpaid, late jobs and the clients who pay the least per hour - Printable fee note for a job and a printable work status sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: bookkeepers, accounting practices and tax agents with a list of monthly clients on fixed fees who track work on paper, a shared sheet or chat. What it is NOT: It does not record any client's accounting entries, store documents, or issue tax invoices. The fee note it prints is an internal note and not a tax invoice. It has no timer, no multi-user login and no payroll. VAT on your fees is handled in your own invoicing system. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (107 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1145 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline register of clients' original documents. Each original gets a receipt number and a printed receipt, every move to a runner, counter, bank or court is logged with who holds it, and the Today page lists originals out of the safe, past their return date or held too long.
Client Original Document Receipt and Movement Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an office that holds clients' original papers while it works on them. You record each original when it arrives, print a receipt for the client, and log every hand-over: to a runner, a government counter, a bank, a court, an attestation office, and finally back to the client. The app shows where every original is now and for how many days. The problem it removes: Originals are tracked on a notebook or in memory until the client asks for them. Then nobody knows if the passport is in the safe, with the runner or still at a counter, and the client waits while the office searches. This app gives every original a receipt, a current place worked out from the log, and a list of what is overdue to come back. What is inside: - Receipt for each original with a number, the client, the type, who handed it over, who received it and the expected return date - Movement log: each hand-over with the date, the place, who holds it, and a note - Current place of every original, worked out from the last logged move, and who it was handed to - Rules: nothing can be logged after an original is returned to the client, and a return needs the name of the person who collected it - Today page: originals out of the safe, past their expected return date, held in the office longer than a number of days you set, with a WhatsApp message to the client - Printable receipt on hand-over, return receipt and a statement of originals held for a client - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: PRO and document clearing offices, typing centres, accounting firms and law offices in the UAE that hold passports, licences, title deeds, contracts and certificates in original form for a short time. What it is NOT: It is not a vault or a legal custody record, and it stores no scans of documents. Do not type full passport, identity or account numbers: a short description or the last four digits is enough. It does not know any government process or time and every date is entered by the user. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (132 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1264 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline app for shops that sell at a fixed shelf price. Record every new supplier cost, and see which items now earn less than your target margin, which sell below cost, the price that restores the margin, and a printable list of shelf prices to change.
Cost Rise Margin Alert and Reprice List is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the selling side of a shop. You list your items with their shelf price, then log each new cost a supplier gives you. The app keeps the cost history, works out the margin at today's cost and shelf price, compares it with your target, and suggests the price that restores the target margin, rounded up to the step you choose. The problem it removes: A supplier raises a cost by a few percent, the invoice is paid, and the shelf price stays the same for months. Nobody notices that the margin on a fast item has fallen below target or turned into a loss, because costs live in invoices and prices live on shelf tags. This app puts both side by side and tells you which tags to change, and what the missed margin is each month. What is inside: - Items with supplier, shelf price, monthly units sold and an optional target margin per item - Cost history per item: each new cost with its date, the previous cost, the change in percent and the extra cost per month - Margin at today's cost and shelf price, with VAT treated the way you set it (shelf prices with or without VAT) - Alerts page: items below target, items selling below cost, recent cost rises and the margin missed each month - One tap to log the suggested new price for every item below target, with Undo, and a printable shelf price change sheet - Reprice log that keeps every old and new shelf price with its date - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: mini-markets, household and electronics shops, gift and fashion sellers and any shop that sets its own shelf prices and gets new costs from suppliers by invoice, message or phone call. What it is NOT: It does not read supplier invoices, compare suppliers (it is about your selling price, not about finding a cheaper supplier) or change prices in any till or stock system. It does not know your competitors' prices. Targets, VAT treatment and rounding are settings you enter, and nothing here is accounting or tax advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (109 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2197 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline case file index and hearing diary for a law office. File numbers, clients, court case numbers, the lawyer in charge and where the file is kept, plus one diary of hearings and filing dates with clash checks, adjourned hearings to re-book and files that have no next date.
Law Office Case File Index and Hearing Diary is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the administration of a law office. You index each case file with its client, forum, case number, lawyer and shelf, and you enter every hearing and filing date in one diary. The calendar shows the month, the Week page lists what is today and this week, and the app flags adjourned hearings that were never given a new date. The problem it removes: Hearing dates are held in each lawyer's own diary, on phone reminders and in the secretary's notebook. A hearing adjourned in the morning is not re-entered, a lawyer is booked in two places at the same hour, and nobody notices that an open file has no future date at all. This app keeps one diary for the office and lists the entries that need attention first. What is inside: - Case file index with file number, client, forum, court case number, other party, lawyer in charge, status and where the paper file is kept - One diary for hearings, filing dates, meetings and mediations, with time, place and the lawyer attending - Clash check: the same lawyer cannot be booked for two scheduled entries at the same date and time - Week page: today, the next 7 days, past entries still marked scheduled, adjourned hearings without a new date and open files with no next date - One tap re-books every adjourned hearing on the new date the court gave, with the details copied - Month calendar, a printable file cover sheet and a printable diary sheet for a period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: law offices, legal consultancies and in-house legal teams in the UAE where a secretary or lawyer keeps the diary and the file index, and where the same few people need the same list every morning. What it is NOT: It gives no legal advice and does not know any court rule, time limit or fee. Every date is a date the user enters from the court notice or the lawyer. It does not file anything, connect to any court system, store case documents or hold privileged notes: the free text fields are for administration only. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (122 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 619 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline time and disbursement statement for a law office. Lawyers log minutes against a file at their own hourly rate, costs paid for the client are recorded, and one tap prepares a statement per file with fees, discount, costs, VAT rate you set and payments received on account.
Law Office Time Entry and Disbursement Statement is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the billing administration of a law office. Each lawyer has an hourly rate, each time entry takes the minutes and a short narrative, and each cost paid for a client is recorded with a note. Work stays unbilled until a statement with a cut-off date covers it, and the Today page shows what is ready to bill and what has not been billed for too long. The problem it removes: Time is remembered at the end of the month from diaries and chat, costs paid at the counter are forgotten and never recharged, and a long file is billed late or not at all. Retainers received on account are tracked on a separate sheet. This app keeps minutes, costs, statements and payments for each file together and shows what is unbilled today. What is inside: - Time entries in minutes with the lawyer, a short narrative, an optional rate for that entry and billable or not billable - Disbursements: court fees, courier, translation, travel and other costs, with a choice to charge them to the client and a VAT choice per cost - Statements per file with a cut-off date: all time and costs up to the cut-off that earlier statements did not cover are included, with a discount line - Payments and retainers received on account, with the balance owed or held for each file - Today page: unbilled work by file, files not billed for a number of days you set, time above an agreed cap, overdue statements - One tap prepares a draft statement for every file that has unbilled work - Printable statement of fees and disbursements, a receipt and a billing summary sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: law offices, legal consultancies and small in-house legal teams in the UAE who bill by the hour, or record hours against agreed fees, and want time, costs and payments on account in one place. What it is NOT: It gives no legal or tax advice, does not know any fee scale or court fee, and the statement it prints is an administrative statement, not a tax invoice. The VAT rate is a setting you enter. It has no timer, no trust accounting rules and no multi-user login. Do not type privileged notes in the narrative. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (174 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2984 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline expiry sheet for a PRO officer who looks after many client companies. Documents per client with expiry dates, a reminder ladder you set, a log of every reminder sent, the renewal fee quoted, a daily list of who to message and one tap to create the next renewal.
PRO Office Client Document Expiry Reminder Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an officer or office that tracks the licences, cards, tenancy contracts and policies of many client companies and wants to be the one who renews them. Each document has an expiry date, a renewal fee you quote, a status and a reminder log. The Today page lists the reminders that are due today, using the reminder steps you set, with a WhatsApp message to the client contact. The problem it removes: Expiry dates for dozens of client companies sit in a notebook, a shared sheet and the officer's memory. A client is reminded once or not at all, nobody notes what was quoted, and the client renews with someone else or lets the licence lapse. This app shows which client is due a reminder today, how many reminders each document has had, what the office expects to earn from renewals, and which documents expired without a renewal. What is inside: - Client companies with a contact person, mobile number and the officer who looks after them - Documents per client with the type, a description, expiry date, renewal period in months, renewal fee quoted and status - A reminder ladder: at 60, 30 and 14 days before expiry by default, which you can change in Settings - Reminder log with the date, channel and the client's answer, so a document is not reminded twice at the same step - Today page: reminders due today with a WhatsApp message, expired documents not renewed, quotes waiting for an answer and renewal fees expected by month - One tap creates the next renewal for every renewed document, with the new expiry date counted from the old one - Calendar of expiries, a printable notice to a client listing their documents and a printable 60 day list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: PRO officers, corporate services providers and small consultancies in the UAE who look after the licence, card, tenancy and insurance renewals of several client companies and want the renewal work for their own office. What it is NOT: It does not know any renewal rule, grace period, fine or fee: all dates and fees are entered by the user. It is for the many client companies of one office, not for one company's own documents and not for an employer's staff files. It does not connect to any government system, store scans or send messages by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (128 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1431 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline transaction tracker for a PRO office. Each transaction keeps the charges paid for the client apart from the office fee, advances are matched against charges paid, and a client statement and a list of clients the office is paying out for are one tap away.
PRO Office Transaction Tracker with Fee and Charge Split is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an office that processes visas, labour papers, licence renewals and attestations for client companies. Each transaction has a stage, a due date and a handler. The money is kept in two parts: charges the office paid for the client, recorded with the receipt number, and the office's service fee. Advances from clients are recorded and the client statement shows charges, fees, VAT at the rate you set, and the balance. The problem it removes: A PRO office pays government and other charges out of its own cash for many clients, then bills them later together with its own fee. In a notebook or one spreadsheet the pass-through charges and the fee are mixed, nobody knows how much of the office's money is sitting with each client, and a client's advance is spent without a record. This app keeps each transaction's charges and fee apart and shows who the office is paying out for. What is inside: - Transactions with a service, a stage, a due date, a handler, a reference you type and an optional fee different from the service default - Charges paid on behalf of the client, with the kind, receipt number, who paid and whether to recharge it to the client or absorb it - A catalogue of services with the default service fee for each - Advances, payments and refunds for each client, with the balance owed or held - Today page: transactions past due, stuck at a stage, ready to bill, and clients the office is paying out for beyond a limit you set - Work board by stage, a printable client statement that shows charges and fees apart, and a receipt - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: PRO offices, typing and document clearing centres and corporate services providers in the UAE that pay charges for clients and bill them later with a service fee. What it is NOT: It does not know any government fee, rule or process: every charge and fee is entered by the user. VAT is a rate you enter and applies only to the service fee. The statement it prints is an administrative statement, not a tax invoice. It does not connect to any government system and does not store scans. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (155 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2107 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline register for items a shop sets aside against a deposit. Each reservation shows paid, balance, shelf location and hold end date. Flags thin deposits, holds ending soon, fully paid items to hand over, and deposits to give back after a cancellation.
Shop Layaway and Reserved-Item Deposit Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a shop that sets items aside for customers who pay a deposit now and the rest later. Each reservation records the item, the price, where it is held, the hold end date and every payment. The app works out the balance, checks the deposit against your own minimum, and tells you who is overdue and who is owed money back. The problem it removes: Items are set aside with a deposit written on a slip or in a chat. Between shifts nobody knows which shelf holds what, how much was paid, or when the hold ends, so a held item is sold to someone else or sits for months. When a customer cancels, the deposit to keep or return is decided from memory. This app keeps one record per reservation and one list of what needs action today. What is inside: - Reservations with item, price, shelf location, hold end date and status (Holding, Collected, Cancelled, Expired) - Deposits, part payments and refunds with automatic receipt numbers and a printable A5 receipt or refund voucher - Balance, percent paid and a deposit check against the minimum deposit you set - Today page: ready to hand over, ending within 7 days or overdue, deposits to give back, deposits below your minimum - Cancellation handling: the amount the shop keeps, the amount still owed back and a refund voucher - A5 reservation slip for the customer with the item, price, balance, hold end date and your own terms - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: boutiques, furniture and electronics shops, gift and toy shops, jewellers and any counter that sets goods aside against a deposit and has no system that remembers it between shifts. What it is NOT: It does not count stock, so a held item is not taken off your stock list anywhere else. It does not take card payments, issue tax invoices or tell you what you may keep after a cancellation: you enter the amount kept according to your own written terms. Nothing is sent automatically. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (97 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1177 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline app for shops that pay sales staff an incentive. Enter daily sales and returns for each person, set monthly targets and your own incentive bands, and see achievement, pace and incentive. Print a month statement for each person to sign.
Shop Staff Sales Target and Incentive Statement is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a shop owner or manager. You enter each person's sales and returns by day, set a monthly target for each person and a table of incentive bands, and the app works out net sales, the achievement percent, the band reached and the incentive. Each month has a statement that you approve, print and have signed. The problem it removes: Incentives are argued about at month end because nobody kept the daily totals, returns were remembered differently by each side, and the band a person reached was worked out on a phone calculator. This app keeps one dated entry per person per day, deducts returns, works the band from your own table, and prints a statement that lists every day behind the figure. What is inside: - Staff with role, status and a monthly target, plus a table of incentive bands you set (achievement percent and the rate it pays) - Daily sales and returns per person, with a check against future dates and empty entries - Monthly statements: target, net sales, achievement, pace for the current month, band rate, incentive and an adjustment line - One tap to start this month's statement for every active person, with a check so nobody gets two for the same month - This month page: standing of each person, who is behind pace, who is close to the next band - Printable A4 statement listing the daily entries behind the figure, with signature lines, and a printable monthly league sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: shop owners and managers of mobile, electronics, fashion, furniture, optical and jewellery counters who pay sales staff an incentive on a monthly target and need the numbers on paper. What it is NOT: It is not payroll and does not know about salaries, leave, deductions or end of service. It does not decide whether an incentive is lawful or fair, and it does not pull sales from a till. The bands and rates are your own numbers, the incentive is a calculation on what you enter and nothing here is accounting or legal advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (116 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1156 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline loyalty register for a small shop. Points or one stamp per visit from each purchase, rewards you define, a check that nobody redeems more than they have, who is ready for a reward, who is close, and who has not been seen for a while. WhatsApp messages are opened for you.
Shop Stamp Card and Loyalty Points Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) that replaces paper stamp cards. You list your members, define your own rewards and the points they cost, and record each purchase. The app works out points, keeps every balance, refuses a reward the member cannot afford, and shows who is ready to claim, who is a few points away and who has stopped coming. The problem it removes: Paper stamp cards are lost, stamped twice, stamped without a purchase or claimed from memory. The shop cannot say how many points are owed to customers, who is close to a reward, or which regular has not visited for months. This app keeps a single balance per member that staff can check at the counter, with every point traced to a dated entry. What is inside: - Members with numbered cards, phone, join date, spend, visits, points balance and days since the last visit - Two ways to earn, set in Settings: points per AED spent, or one stamp per visit above a minimum spend - Rewards you define, each with its own points cost, which can be switched off when withdrawn - Point entries for purchases, rewards claimed, bonuses and corrections, with rules that stop a reward the balance cannot pay for - Today page: rewards ready to claim, members a few points away, and members not seen for the number of days you set - Printable loyalty card with the balance and the reward list, and a printable points statement for a member - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: cafes, bakeries, salons, barbers, gift shops and any small business that gives stamp cards or points to repeat customers and wants a balance it can trust. What it is NOT: It does not read a till, scan cards or link to online orders: a person enters each purchase. Points do not expire by themselves, and it does not set the value of a point or the terms of your scheme. It sends nothing automatically and is not a customer database for marketing consent. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (103 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 726 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline fabric roll log: every roll with its length and cost, each cut logged by job in metres and pieces, roll checks that show what was really left, adjustments for flaws and samples, a reorder list per fabric, stock value and a printed roll card. Data stays on your device.
Fabric Roll Stock and Metres Used Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a tailor or fabric shop that buys cloth by the roll. Each roll starts with its length. Every cut is logged in metres against a job, flaws and samples are logged as adjustments, and when you measure a roll the app takes your measured length as the truth and shows how far the books were off. Metres left, stock value and the fabrics to reorder come from that. The problem it removes: Nobody knows how much is left on a roll until the cutter unrolls it, so orders are accepted for fabric that is not there and rolls are reordered too late or too early. This app keeps the running balance of every roll and corrects it whenever someone measures. What is inside: - Fabrics with a reorder level and supplier, and rolls with received date, length, cost, cost per metre and rack - Usage log: date, roll, job, metres and pieces, with metres per piece, and a rule that refuses a cut longer than what is left on the roll - Roll checks: the measured length replaces the book figure from that day, and the app shows expected, measured and the difference - Adjustments for flaws cut out, sample cuts, damaged ends, returns and remnants sold, kept separate from job cuts - Today page: fabrics below their reorder level with a WhatsApp message to the supplier, nearly finished rolls, rolls not measured for 60 days, and stock value - Roll card with its whole cutting history, stock list and usage log for printing - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: tailors, boutiques, curtain makers and small fabric shops that buy fabric by the roll and cut it to order. What it is NOT: It does not price jobs, hold customer orders or pay workers (see the separate tailor order book and piece rate apps). Lengths are in metres, one decimal of precision is realistic. It does not read barcodes and does not send messages by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (134 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1871 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline booking book for a pet boarding business: run types with capacity, bookings that refuse to exceed it, a waiting list, a calendar, arrivals and departures today, watched busy dates, deposits, extras, the bill and a printed boarding sheet. Data stays on your device.
Pet Boarding Bookings and Kennel Space Calendar is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a boarding kennel or cattery that takes bookings by message. You list your run types, how many of each you have and the nightly rate. Each booking shows on the calendar for every night it lasts. When a run type is full on any of those nights the app refuses to confirm the booking, and the booking can go on the waiting list instead. The problem it removes: At school holidays and long weekends the kennels are promised twice, the waiting list is in a chat, and nobody knows on the morning who arrives, who leaves and who has not paid a deposit. This app counts the space for every night, refuses a booking that does not fit, and puts the day on one page. What is inside: - Run types with capacity and nightly rate (large dog run, small dog suite, cat room, small pet cage), and the rule that a booking cannot be confirmed when the type is full on any night - Statuses Enquiry, Waitlist, Confirmed, In kennel, Checked out and Cancelled, with one tap buttons; only Confirmed, In kennel and Checked out hold space - Month calendar with every booking across its nights, and a Busy dates list showing booked, free and waiting for the dates you watch - Today page: who is in, arriving, leaving, free space tonight, deposits not paid, vaccination cards not seen, and mismatched run types, with WhatsApp messages - Extras such as walks and baths, discount, deposit, balance at checkout, printed boarding sheet and bill - Pet and owner records with an emergency contact and feeding notes, kept administrative only - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of small boarding kennels, catteries and pet hotels who take bookings on WhatsApp and phone and want to see the space left for every night before they say yes. What it is NOT: It is not a veterinary or medical record: it keeps names, dates, a tick that a vaccination card was seen and short care notes, and gives no health advice. Do not enter medical conditions, medication or any sensitive detail. It does not take online bookings or payments and does not send messages by itself. Space is counted per run type, not per numbered kennel. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (147 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1870 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline grooming diary: appointments by groomer and hour that refuse a clash, a due-back list worked out from each pet's last groom with ready WhatsApp messages, a register of dates owners were given, receipts and a day sheet. Data stays on your device.
Pet Grooming Appointments and Repeat Visit Reminders is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a grooming salon. Each pet has a repeat interval in weeks. The app finds the last finished groom, works out when the pet is due back, and lists the regulars who are due and have no booking, with a WhatsApp message already written. The diary refuses to put two jobs on the same groomer at overlapping hours. The problem it removes: Regular clients drift away because nobody remembers to ask them back, and the diary on the wall has two dogs on one groomer at the same hour. This app keeps one list of who is due this week and who has not been reminded yet, and it will not accept a clash. What is inside: - Appointments by groomer, date and start hour with the length from the service, and a rule that refuses overlapping jobs or a job that runs past closing time - Pets with a repeat interval in weeks, last groom, next due date and a state: Booked, Overdue, Due soon, Not yet or No visit yet - Due back list with a WhatsApp message and a one tap Mark reminded, so the same owner is not asked twice in a week, and owners who asked for no reminders are kept off it - A register of dates the owner was given (for example a vet visit date they told you), shown as Overdue, Due soon or Done, with WhatsApp links - Today page with the diary, tomorrow's confirmations, money taken, no shows, and grooms by month - Receipt for a finished groom, printable day sheet and printable due list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of small grooming salons, mobile groomers and pet shops with a grooming corner who book by phone and WhatsApp and want regular customers to come back on time. What it is NOT: It is not a veterinary record. It stores names, dates and a short note, and gives no health or care advice: do not enter medical conditions, medication or any sensitive detail, only the date the owner was given. It does not send messages by itself, does not take online bookings or card payments, and counts time in whole hours. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (155 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1837 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline pharmacy shelf check: batches with expiry dates, expired and near-expiry lists, the last day each supplier takes stock back, and discounts and write-offs logged with their value. Product names, batch numbers and dates only. Data stays on your device.
Pharmacy Shelf Expiry and Write-Off Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a pharmacy or health shop. You enter each product batch with its expiry date and the units counted on the shelf. The app shows what has expired, what expires soon, how much stock value is at risk, and for each batch the last date your supplier will accept a return. Every discount, supplier return and write-off is logged with its value. The problem it removes: Stock is found expired on the shelf, near-expiry stock is noticed after the supplier return window has closed, and write-offs are tossed in a bin with nothing recorded about how much they cost. This app puts each batch on a dated list, shows the return deadline, and records what was lost. What is inside: - Batches with batch number, expiry date, units counted, cost per unit and place (shelf, fridge, dispensary, display or back store) - Supplier return terms: you enter how many months before expiry each supplier takes stock back, and every batch shows its return by date - Today page: expired on the shelf, expiring in your urgent days, near-expiry stock, return windows closing, and the stock value at risk - Discount, supplier return and write-off log with quantity, reason and value, and a rule that a discount price must be lower than the shelf price - Printable near-expiry list for a shelf walk, write-off record per entry and a monthly loss report - CSV import for your product and batch lists - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: pharmacists, pharmacy managers and health shop owners who count stock by batch and want expiry dates, supplier return deadlines and write-off values in one place. What it is NOT: It is not a patient or prescription system and is not a drug database: it has no dosing, no interactions, no medical content, and it stores product names, batch numbers and dates only. Do not enter patient names or prescription details. It is not full inventory: it does not record sales, so the unit count is the count you type at each shelf check. It does not follow supplier credit notes. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (119 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1509 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline tracker for stock a pharmacy sends back to suppliers: return notes with lines, collection date, credit expected, credit notes received, what is still outstanding, which suppliers are overdue and a WhatsApp chaser. Product names and money only. Data stays on your device.
Pharmacy Supplier Return Notes and Credit Note Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a pharmacy that sends stock back to suppliers. You make a return note with its lines and print it for the supplier rep to sign. Later you enter each credit note that arrives. The app shows the credit expected, the credit received and the balance for every return and every supplier, and lists the ones that are overdue. The problem it removes: Returned stock leaves the shop and the credit is never matched. Nobody remembers which return a credit note belongs to, partial credits hide a shortfall, and a supplier who owes a few thousand dirhams is never chased. This app records what went back, what was credited, and what is still owed, supplier by supplier. What is inside: - Return notes with lines (product, batch, expiry, quantity, cost, reason) and the credit expected calculated from them - Stages: Prepared, Collected by supplier, Refused, Closed, with one tap buttons, and a board by stage - Credit notes entered against a return, with partial credits adding up and a balance outstanding - A rule that stops a return being closed with money outstanding unless you write the reason, and a rule that needs a collection date once stock has left - Today page: credit overdue by supplier terms, stock prepared but not collected, refused returns, and returns fully credited and ready to close - Printable return note with signatures and a supplier credit statement for chasing - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: pharmacy managers, buyers and owners who send expired and near-expiry stock back to a few suppliers and want to be sure each return ends in a credit note for the right amount. What it is NOT: It does not find what to return: it does not track expiry dates or stock counts, you type the lines from your shelf check. It does not know supplier terms or fees, you enter them. It stores product names, batch numbers and money only: no patient or prescription information, and no drug database or medical content. It does not post to accounts or send messages by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (116 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 821 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline job tickets for a repair shop: a two copy condition form signed at the counter, a status board from Received to Collected, a quote the customer must approve, deposits, balances, ready-not-collected chasers on WhatsApp and a printed receipt. Data stays on your device.
Phone and Device Repair Job Ticket is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small repair shop. At the counter you record the device, what was left with it, and the condition of the screen, back, frame, buttons, port and camera. The customer signs two copies. After that the ticket moves along a board, the quote is approved before work starts, and the shop cannot hand the device back until the balance is paid. The problem it removes: Devices are mixed up, customers phone to ask for status, repairs start before the quote is agreed, finished devices sit on the shelf for weeks, and when a customer says the screen was not scratched before, nobody has a signed record. This app gives every device a ticket number, a signed condition record and a board. What is inside: - Intake form with device, serial or IMEI, accessories left, fault in the customer words and a six point condition check; the screen, back and frame must be set before the ticket saves - Printed intake sheet in two copies (customer copy and shop copy), with your own terms wording and signature lines - Status board: Received, Diagnosing, Waiting approval, Waiting parts, Repairing, Ready, Collected, with one tap buttons - Quote as parts and labour lines, a rule that stops work starting before the customer approves, and a rule that stops handover with a balance due - Today page: due today, late, waiting for approval and ready but not collected, with a WhatsApp message ready for each customer - Printed repair receipt with deposit, balance and what was paid on collection - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and counter staff of small phone, tablet, laptop and console repair shops who write devices into a notebook or chat and want a signed condition record and a clear board without buying shop software. What it is NOT: It does not hold parts stock or work out the cost of parts against the price. It does not store passcodes, ID copies or customer files: it only records whether a passcode was handed over. It does not send messages by itself, takes no card payments, and the terms printed on the form are sample wording that you replace with your own. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (102 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1156 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline task sheet for a PRO or typing office that sends runners to counters, banks and offices: today's tasks by runner, a status board, overdue deadlines, expenses and cash given and returned, and a printed sheet per runner. Data stays on your device.
PRO Runner Daily Task Sheet and Status Board is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for an office that sends runners out with client papers. You enter tasks as they arrive by chat, assign each to a runner, and the app keeps the board, the deadlines, the expenses and the cash each runner took out and brought back. The problem it removes: Tasks arrive on WhatsApp and are given to runners by voice. By afternoon nobody is sure which task is at a counter, which is waiting for the client, which has a deadline tomorrow, or how much cash a runner still holds. This app puts each task on a board, prints a sheet per runner and reconciles the cash at the end of the day. What is inside: - Tasks with client, runner, planned day, deadline, place, the papers being carried, priority and a one tap status: Assigned, Out, At counter, Waiting for client, Done, Returned - Today page: tasks out now, overdue deadlines, tasks waiting on a client, runners with too many tasks, and cash not yet settled - Runner day sheet: one press makes today's sheet for every active runner, and each sheet prints as an A4 page with the tasks, the cash given and a signature line - Expenses per task (fee receipts, taxi, parking, typing) with a Receipt kept tick, and the cash balance each runner owes back or is owed - WhatsApp messages ready to send to a runner with the task details, or to a client who must bring or sign something - A done-but-no-receipt list that catches tasks closed without a reference number - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: PRO officers, typing centre owners and small clearing offices with two to ten runners who take instructions by message and want one place that shows what is open, what is late and who holds cash. What it is NOT: It does not connect to any government system or portal and cannot see the real status of an application: the office types the status. It has no GPS tracking, no runner login and keeps no passport or ID copies. Government fees are entered by you, the app knows no fee list. It does not send messages by itself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (136 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 882 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline parts stock and job costing for a repair workshop: parts bought, parts used on each job, stock left and reorder flags, the cost of parts against the price charged, margin per job and the jobs that lost money or forgot to record a part. Data stays on your device.
Repair Parts Stock and Job Margin Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a repair bench. You record each purchase of parts, then the parts used on each job. The app keeps the count of every part, flags what to reorder, works out the average cost of each part and shows the margin on every job: what you charged for parts and labour minus what the parts cost you. The problem it removes: The cost of a part is known when it is bought and forgotten when the repair is priced. Parts run out without warning, a part used on a job is never written down, and at month end nobody can say whether the repairs made money. This app matches the part cost to the repair charge job by job. What is inside: - Parts list with shelf bin, reorder level, average purchase cost, stock on hand, stock value and an Out, Reorder or OK flag - Purchases (stock in) and stock corrections (damaged, lost, count corrected) so the count follows what is on the shelf - Jobs with parts charge, labour charge, other direct cost, parts cost taken from the parts used, margin in AED and as a percent - A rule that stops you using a part that is not in stock (you can switch it off), and a rule that stops closing a job with no price - Today page: parts to reorder, jobs under your target margin, and finished jobs where a part was charged but never recorded - Printable job costing sheet and reorder list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of small phone, tablet and laptop repair workshops who buy parts from a few suppliers, price repairs by feel, and want to know the true margin and when to reorder. What it is NOT: It does not handle customers, tickets, receipts or warranty: it is the parts and costing side only. It is not a full inventory or accounting system, it has no barcode scanning, and it does not know supplier prices or compatibility: you enter them. The cost of a part is the average of your purchases, not a batch by batch cost. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (126 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1419 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline warranty register for a repair shop: expiry dates from your own plans, an in warranty or expired answer by phone or IMEI, a claim log with decisions and costs, and which repair types come back most. Prints a warranty card. Data stays on your device.
Repair Warranty Register and Claim Check is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a repair shop. You define your own warranty plans (for example Screen replacement, 90 days). Each finished repair gets an expiry date and a clear state: In warranty, Expires soon, Expired or No warranty. When a customer comes back you search by phone or IMEI, see the answer in seconds, log the claim and record the decision and what it cost you. The problem it removes: Customers return saying the repair is under warranty and nobody can check the date, the scope or whether it is the same fault. The shop either argues from memory or repairs it free to avoid a row. This app gives every repair an exact expiry date, keeps the claim history, and shows which repair types are costing you the most in free re-repairs. What is inside: - Warranty plans you set yourself: name, number of days and what is covered, with the claim rate and warranty cost of each plan calculated - Repair register with expiry date, days left and a state of In warranty, Expires soon, Expired or No warranty - Claim log with fault, decision (Open, Accepted, Goodwill, Rejected), remedy and the cost to you - A rule that stops you accepting a claim after expiry or for an uncovered fault by mistake (goodwill is a separate decision), and a rule that asks for a reason when you reject - Today page: warranties ending soon, claims waiting for a decision, warranty cost this month and the claim rate by plan - Printable warranty card and claim decision slip - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and counter staff of repair shops who give a warranty on parts or labour and want to answer a returning customer with a date and a record instead of an argument. What it is NOT: It does not hold repair tickets, quotes, parts stock or payments: you enter one row per finished repair. It does not decide whether a fault is covered, you tick that after looking at the device. The warranty terms are yours: the app only counts days. The printed card carries sample wording that you must replace with your own terms. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (111 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 970 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline order book for a tailor: measurement sets per customer, orders that refuse an impossible promised date or an overloaded tailor, fitting tracking, a ready and uncollected list with WhatsApp messages, balances, order slip and measurement card. Data stays on your device.
Tailor Order Book with Measurements and Delivery Dates is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a tailoring shop. Each customer keeps dated measurement sets, and every order points to the set it was cut from. The app checks the promised date against how long the garment takes and how many pieces each tailor can finish in a day, then shows what is due, what is late, what is ready and what nobody has collected. The problem it removes: Measurements are on paper slips that get lost, the wrong slip gets used, and the promised date is given to please the customer, then missed. Ready garments sit on the rack for weeks. This app keeps the measurements with the customer and the dates honest. What is inside: - Customers with dated measurement sets (chest, waist, hip, shoulder, sleeve, length, neck, inseam, with waist and length always required) with sensible limits, so a mistyped 1000 is refused - Orders with garment, quantity, tailor, fabric source, promised date, fitting, price, deposit, balance and stage from Ordered to Delivered - Rules that stop real mistakes: measurements of another customer, measurements over a year old, a promised date shorter than the garment takes unless marked Rush, a tailor given more pieces than he finishes in a day, delivery before the balance is paid, or ready while a fitting is still needed - Today page: due this week, late orders, fittings, ready and uncollected with WhatsApp messages, and balances to collect - Calendar of promised dates coloured by stage - Order slip with the measurements, a measurement card, a workshop list and a printable collection list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of tailoring and alteration shops, kandura and abaya makers and boutiques that stitch to order and take orders by walk in, phone and WhatsApp. What it is NOT: It does not track fabric rolls or worker pay (see the separate fabric and piece rate apps), does not send messages by itself and does not take payments. Measurements are in centimetres and kept per customer, not per garment pattern. It is a working tool, not tax advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (147 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1469 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Not tested: Safari and Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline piece-rate pay book: rates per garment and operation, daily piece entries that refuse an impossible quantity, rejects not paid, advances recovered, a pay statement per worker and period, and a warning if an entry changes after payment. Data stays on your device.
Tailor Piece-Rate Pay Sheet and Pay Statement is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a workshop that pays by the piece. You list each operation with its rate and the most a person can finish in a day. Each day the pieces done by each worker are entered. For a pay period the app builds one statement per worker: pieces times rate, rejects not paid, bonus, fines and advances recovered, with the net pay and a signature line. The problem it removes: Workers paid per piece are totalled by hand from a notebook, a 30 typed instead of 3 goes unnoticed, rejected pieces are argued about, advances are forgotten, and an entry changed after payday leaves the books and the pay out of step. This app does the totals and warns on all of these. What is inside: - A rate list: garment, operation, rate per piece and the most pieces one person can finish in a day - Daily piece entries per worker with pieces done and pieces rejected, and a rule that refuses more than the daily limit or more rejects than pieces - Pay periods and one pay statement per worker per period, created for everybody in one tap, with earned, bonus, fines, advance recovered and net pay - Advances and cash repayments per worker, a running balance, and a rule that refuses to recover more than is owed - Statuses Draft, Approved and Paid, and a warning when an entry dated inside a paid period is changed afterwards, so the paid amount no longer matches - Today page, printed pay statement with every entry, a pay summary for the period and a piece log - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and supervisors of tailoring workshops, garment makers, embroidery and finishing units who pay workers per piece and keep the book by hand. What it is NOT: It is not payroll software: it does not calculate leave, overtime rules, end of service, insurance or any statutory amount, and it does not file anything. It does not pay anyone: it prepares the statement and you pay by your usual method. It does not track fabric (see the separate fabric roll app) or customer orders. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (186 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1594 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline proof log for a print shop: every proof round with date, channel and outcome, a checklist the customer confirms, and a printable approval sheet with a signature. A job cannot be marked approved or sent to print until the approved round and the checklist are on file.
Artwork Proof Approval Sheet and Round Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the design and prepress desk of a print shop. Each job has a log of proof rounds: which version was sent, how, and what the customer answered. When the customer is happy, the job records who approved, on what date, and which five things they confirmed: text and spelling, phone numbers and prices, size, colours and quantity. The approval sheet prints with a signature line, and a round slip prints with the changes the customer asked for. The problem it removes: A job is printed after a voice note that said "looks good". Later the customer says a phone number is wrong, or the colour is not what they expected, and nobody can show what was approved, by whom, or which version. This app makes the approval a record: no approved round, no confirmed checklist, no approved name, and the job cannot move to approved or sent to print. What is inside: - Jobs with product, size, quantity, colour mode, material and a status from Preparing to Sent to print - A proof round log: round number, date sent, channel, outcome, changes asked for and who answered - A five point checklist the customer confirms: text, contact details and prices, size, colours, quantity - Rules: a job cannot be approved or sent to print without an approved round, the ticked checklist and a name and date - Desk page: jobs waiting for the customer, jobs to chase, changes to make, and approved jobs not yet sent to print - Printable approval sheet with signature lines and a printable proof round slip listing the changes asked for - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: print shops, design desks and signage makers that send proofs by WhatsApp, email or in person and want a clear record of what the customer approved before printing. What it is NOT: It does not store or display artwork files or proofs: it records the file name or version you enter. It does not send proofs, give legal protection, or replace your own terms. The approval wording is sample text that you must replace with your own wording. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (122 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 415 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline booking calendar for a small boat charter: no double booking of a boat and slot, passengers checked against capacity, deposit and balance per trip, cancellation refunds by your own notice days, and a list of trips postponed for weather. Prints a trip confirmation.
Boat Charter Booking Calendar is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a fishing or leisure charter with one boat or a small fleet. Each boat has a price for a half day, a full day and an extra hour. A booking takes a boat for a slot on a date, works out the price, and tracks the deposit and the balance. If a trip is cancelled, the app compares the notice given with your free cancellation days and tells you whether the deposit is to be refunded or kept. If the weather stops a trip, it goes on a list until you give it a new date. The problem it removes: Trips and deposits are managed from chat. The same boat gets promised twice for the same morning, a confirmed trip turns out to have no deposit, and after a weather cancellation nobody remembers which customers still need a new date. At month end it is hard to say who paid, who owes a balance and whose deposit is to be returned. What is inside: - Boats with capacity, half day price, full day price and extra hour price - A month calendar of trips by boat, colour coded by status from Enquiry to Completed - A booking is refused if the boat is already taken in that slot, or if there are more passengers than the capacity you entered - A confirmed trip needs the deposit: the percentage is a setting you enter - Payments with deposit, balance and refund, and a balance owed per trip - Cancellations: days of notice compared with your own free cancellation days, giving deposit to refund or deposit kept - Today page: trips today with a WhatsApp reminder, enquiries waiting for a deposit, trips postponed for weather, balances to collect - Printable trip confirmation and a printable day sheet - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of fishing charters, dhow cruises, speedboat and yacht hire and small marine tour operators who take bookings by phone and WhatsApp and want deposits and double bookings under control. What it is NOT: It does not check weather, licences, crew rest or sea rules, and it does not decide how many people a boat may legally carry: the capacity is a number you enter from your own papers. It does not take online payments or send messages by itself, and the terms printed on the confirmation are sample wording that you replace with your own. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (138 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1158 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline profit log for small boat charters: record fuel litres, crew and extra costs for each trip, see the margin per trip, the profit per boat this month after fixed costs and maintenance, and which engines are due for service by engine hours. Prints a trip cost sheet.
Boat Trip Fuel, Maintenance and Profit Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the owner of one or several charter boats. For each trip you enter the income, the engine hours, the litres of fuel and the crew cost, and add extra costs such as ice, bait or marina fees. The app shows the margin on the trip. Each boat carries a fixed monthly cost and a service interval in engine hours, so the Boats page shows this month in full: income, trip costs, maintenance, fixed costs and profit, and how many engine hours are left before the next service. The problem it removes: Whether a trip made money is never worked out. Fuel is bought in cash, crew are paid from the till, repairs are paid when something breaks, and the berth fee comes every month, so at the end of the month there is money in the drawer and no idea which boat or which kind of trip earned it. Engine services are remembered by feel, until an engine fails. This app puts income, costs and engine hours for every trip in one place. What is inside: - Boats with a monthly fixed cost, a service interval in engine hours and the engine hours at the start of your log - Trips with income, engine hours, fuel litres at your fuel price, crew cost and any number of extra cost lines - Margin per trip and per engine hour, and a loss flag when costs are higher than income - Maintenance entries with cost and the engine hour reading at an engine service - Per boat this month: income, trip costs, maintenance, fixed costs and profit - Engine hours since the last service and hours left, with Due soon and Overdue states - Printable trip cost sheet and a printable trips list for any period with totals - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of fishing boats, dhow and speedboat charters and small boat tour operators who keep their money in a notebook and want to know which trips and which boats earn a profit. What it is NOT: It is not an accounting system. It does not know your tax position, does not post to any ledger, and does not give you maintenance rules: the service interval is a number you enter from your own engine manual or mechanic. It does not read engine meters, track fuel stock, or split income between boats on a shared trip. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (139 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1322 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
A 57-page playbook with a day-by-day 30-day plan, route decision tables, a cost and runway worksheet, 23 fill-in worksheets and a 66-question bank for consultants, banks and landlords. No fees or timings invented.
A first-time founder's playbook for setting up a company in the UAE in a planned 30 days, written as a week-by-week plan with decision tables and worksheets. '30 days' is a planning target that you test against real quotes, not a promise: approvals and timelines vary by emirate and authority, and the playbook says so. What is inside - 57 pages in 10 chapters: test the idea and set your limits; the first decisions (activity, customers, owners, name, location); mainland, free zone and other routes as decision tables; applications and approvals in a general sequence with a tracker; bank account, visas, insurance and company documents; accounting and tax set-up; money before revenue; first customers and the first invoice; your compliance calendar; and the 30-day plan with a slip plan. - A day-by-day table for days 1 to 30, with a task, an owner and the evidence to keep for each day. - Cost worksheet, six-month cash plan and runway arithmetic, with a worked example for a made-up start-up. - 23 fill-in worksheets with model answers (Word and PDF): idea test, afford-to-lose, quote comparison, route scoring, bank readiness, VAT watch, price floor, compliance calendar and decision record. - A bank of 66 questions grouped by who you ask: licensing consultant, bank, landlord, accountant, lawyer and insurer (Word). - 'Verify the current rule' callouts that name who to ask: the authority, your PRO, the FTA, your accountant or your lawyer. Facts it states Only well-established VAT points: 5% VAT, the AED 375,000 mandatory and AED 187,500 voluntary registration thresholds, the 30-day window to apply, the 28th-day return deadline and the 14-day tax invoice rule. For corporate tax it says only that a federal tax exists and is administered by the FTA. It gives no government or free zone fee, capital figure, visa quota or processing time. Every such number in the examples is a made-up figure or a blank for you to fill from a quote. Who it is for Founders, people leaving employment to start a business, and owners restructuring. No accounting knowledge is needed. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
A 6-lesson preparation course: a fact file, records that hold up, tagging items for your adviser, a set-aside method for a bill you cannot yet calculate, and 60 adviser questions. It states no rate, threshold or deadline.
A preparation course for UAE small business owners who know corporate tax matters and do not know what to do about it. It is deliberately not a rules course. It never states a rate, a threshold, a relief, a deadline, a form, a free zone treatment or a penalty, because these are set by law and decisions that change, and the answer for your business depends on facts only you and your adviser hold. It gets you ready so that when the FTA or your accountant gives you an answer, you can act on it in days. What is inside - 6 lessons of 1,200 or more words: what to confirm first and where to check; your fact file; books and records that hold up; from accounting profit to taxable profit (the adjustment questions an adviser will ask, tagged in your books); cash and calendar; working with your adviser and staying audit-ready. - Every lesson has a worked example for a made-up company, mistakes to avoid, three exercises with answers and key points. Arithmetic is checked. - A set-aside method that uses a variable rate R and a sensitivity table at three assumed rates, with the sentence that the three rates are not a statement of the UAE rate. - A fact file of 32 items to collect and a bank of 60 adviser questions in six groups (both as Word forms). - 36 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), 36 quiz questions with an explained answer key, a completion checklist (no certificate), and a 7-day study plan of about 14 hours. What it states as fact Only the VAT and records points set out in the README, for example that VAT 201 is due on the 28th day after the period end. For corporate tax it says that a federal tax exists and the FTA administers it, and nothing more. Who it is for Owners, managers and bookkeepers of UAE businesses of any size who want to be ready for questions from an accountant. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
8 lessons on reading a profit and loss, balance sheet and cash flow statement, with one worked company, ratios, red flags and a 12-step method. 48 quiz questions, 48 workbook tasks with answers.
A course for owners and managers who receive statements from an accountant or software and do not know what to look at or what to ask. It uses one running example, a made-up building-supplies trader, with a complete and internally consistent set of statements for two years in AED. Every figure is built from raw numbers and recomputed, so the balance sheet balances and the cash flow ties to cash. What is inside - 8 lessons of 1,200 or more words: the three statements and how they connect; reading the profit and loss; reading the balance sheet; reading the cash flow statement and the profit-to-cash bridge; ratios that matter for an SME (margins, current and quick ratio, receivable, inventory and payable days, debt to equity); spotting problems in a second company with planted red flags; budgets, management reports and talking to your bank; and a 12-step method to read a full set in 20 minutes, with a practice case. - Each lesson has a worked example, mistakes to avoid, three exercises with answers and key points. Ratio thresholds are labelled 'a common rule of thumb, not a UAE benchmark'. - 48 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), including 'your own numbers' templates and ratio calculations from given statements. - 48 quiz questions, one correct answer each, with an answer key that explains every option; many are calculations. - A ratio cheat sheet (text) and blank statement templates (Word), a completion checklist (no certificate) and an 8-day study plan of about 18 hours. Who it is for Owners and managers of UAE small businesses, and bookkeepers who want to explain statements to an owner. No accounting training is needed. What it does not cover Tax computation, audit, valuation or lender criteria. Corporate tax and the reporting framework your company uses are questions for your accountant, and the course says so in callouts. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. A calculator helps. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
A 42-page repair manual covering 43 common VAT mistakes, each with how to spot it, what it costs in general terms, a correction path and a control. Worked examples, a 25-point month-end review and a workbook. No penalty amounts quoted.
A diagnosis-and-repair guide for UAE businesses that file VAT. It is organised by mistake, not by topic: you look up what you think went wrong, see how to confirm it in your records, and follow a correction path or a list of questions for your accountant or the FTA. It is not a VAT primer; one short refresher chapter sets the facts. What is inside - 42 pages in 9 chapters covering 43 mistakes: how errors arise and the five questions before you correct anything; registration; tax invoices (missing particulars, TRN errors, late issue, simplified invoice reliance, credit notes, advances); output tax (wrong code or rate, zero-rated versus exempt, free supplies, reverse charge, date of supply); input tax; VAT 201 return boxes; filing and payment; records and systems; and a repair toolkit. - For every mistake, the same blocks: what it looks like, why it happens, how to spot it, why it matters, the correction path, and prevention. - More than 30 of the mistakes have a worked example for a made-up company with the wrong figure, the right figure and the difference on the return; 5% arithmetic is recomputed. - A 25-point month-end VAT review and a decision guide for an error found before filing, after filing, or by the FTA. - 20 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF): a 25-question VAT health check, an error log with an example, a correction memo template and figure-based exercises. Facts it states 5% VAT, thresholds of AED 375,000 and AED 187,500, the 30-day application window, the 28th-day deadline, the 14-day tax invoice rule, the simplified invoice change under Cabinet Decision 100 of 2025, the domestic reverse charge categories, and the published e-invoicing timetable (as published; confirm for your business). It never quotes a penalty amount; it names the change of regime under Cabinet Decision 129 of 2025. Where a correction route depends on a rule outside those points, it gives questions for your accountant and a verify callout. Who it is for Owners, bookkeepers and finance staff of VAT-registered UAE businesses, and anyone preparing to register. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
Offline register for a charity or community group: record money and goods received by campaign, record what you give out to each household, and see the balance of every campaign and the stock of every item. Prints receipts and handout slips.
Charity Collection and Distribution Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small charity, mosque committee, residents group or school fund that collects money and goods for campaigns such as winter blankets, food baskets or school bags. Money received and goods received are recorded against a campaign. Money paid out and goods given out are recorded against a household. The app stops you paying out more money than the campaign holds and giving out more of an item than is in stock. Large payouts need the name of the person who approved them, and you can ask the app to refuse a second handout to the same household in the same campaign. The problem it removes: Donations arrive in cash, by transfer and as boxes at the door, and handouts go out over weeks. The committee cannot say how much of the winter fund is left, whether the rice in the store is already promised, or whether one family received twice while another received nothing. This app keeps receipts and handouts together so the balance is always there. What is inside: - Campaigns with a target and a live balance of money received less money paid out - Donors, who may be anonymous, with phone and kind - Items such as blankets, rice bags and school bags with received, given out and stock - Money received and goods received, each with an automatic receipt number - Households you help, with a code, area and household size - Money payouts and goods handouts with a check on balance and stock, an approver name above a limit you set, and an optional one-handout-per-household rule - Today page with campaign balances, items in stock and households not yet helped - Printable receipts, handout slips for the household to sign, and a campaign report - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small charities, community groups, mosque and church committees, school funds and residents associations that collect and give out money and goods. What it is NOT: It is not an accounting system and does not issue tax receipts. It does not decide who qualifies for help, does not check identity or eligibility, and makes no statement about what a registered charity must keep or report. The approval limit is a number you choose. Names of households are personal data, so keep your device and backups safe. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (262 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 816 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline round checklist for a building supervisor: start today's round in one tap, mark each check point OK or Issue found, keep open issues on a list until fixed, sign off the day and print the daily or month sheet. Data stays on your device.
Building Round Checklist and Daily Inspection Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the supervisor, security or technical staff who walk a building every day. You list your check points once, with the area, the round (morning, afternoon, night) and what to look for. Each day you press Start today's round, mark every point, and the app keeps every issue open until someone marks it fixed. A supervisor signs the day off, and the sheets print for the file. The problem it removes: Daily rounds are ticked on paper that is never reviewed, so a skipped check or a small leak is only noticed when it is a big problem. This app shows what was not checked today, keeps every issue on a list with the number of days it has been open, and will not let a day be signed off with critical checks still unticked unless the supervisor writes why. What is inside: - Check points with area, round, what to look for, an active switch and an optional weekday for weekly checks - Start today's round: one line per active point for today, created once even if pressed twice - One tap results (OK, Issue found, Not possible) with the inspector and time, and a required note when something is wrong - Open issues list with days open, fixed tick and fixed date - Daily sign-off with checks done, issues and missed checks counted, and a rule that stops sign-off while critical checks are unticked unless a reason is written - Printable daily round sheet and a month sheet list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: building supervisors, security and technical teams, property managers and owners associations who walk a building on a regular pattern and today keep the results on paper or in a chat group. What it is NOT: It does not make anyone do the round, and it cannot tell whether a check was really done: it records what staff enter. It has no photos, no GPS or tag scanning, and no alarms. It does not claim that your checks satisfy any regulation or insurer requirement. Repairs and vendor jobs are tracked elsewhere. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (135 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1566 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline desk for a coworking space: members on plans, who sits where, when each renewal is due, deposits held, and which access cards, lockers and keys are out. Receipts and a move-out sheet print from it. Data stays on your device.
Coworking Member, Desk, Card and Locker Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the person who runs the front desk of a coworking space or serviced office. You list your plans and desks, add each member, record each payment with the months it covers, and log every card, locker or key you hand out and take back. The app works out when each member is paid up to, who is overdue, which desks are free, how much deposit you hold and what a member who leaves still has to return. The problem it removes: Plans, desks and renewal dates live in a spreadsheet that nobody trusts, so a renewal is noticed late and two members end up promised the same desk. Cards and lockers are handed out on a nod, and when a member leaves nobody can say what is still out. This app keeps one row per member, one row per desk and one line per item handed out, and refuses the double bookings. What is inside: - Plans with price, deposit and meeting room hours, and members who can have their own agreed price - Desks and offices with seats, so a full desk cannot be given to a second member and a hot desk plan cannot be given a fixed desk - Paid until date for every member, worked out from the months each payment covers, with Paid up, Renews soon and Overdue flags - Deposits taken and returned from the payment list, with a deposit held figure per member - Cards, lockers, mailbox keys and parking tags with an issue and return log that refuses to issue the same item twice - A front desk page with renewals, overdue members, members who left with items still out, and free desks - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: managers and front desk staff of coworking spaces, serviced offices and shared studios with roughly ten to a few hundred members, who run renewals and access cards from a spreadsheet and chat today. What it is NOT: It does not control any door, lock or card reader, and it does not take online payment or send messages by itself (it opens WhatsApp with the message ready). It does not bill automatically, issue tax invoices or keep room booking calendars. Receipts are simple receipts, not tax invoices. Do not store ID copies or card numbers. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (191 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1299 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline lesson booking sheet for a small driving school: instructors and their cars, students with their gearbox, lessons by date and time that cannot overlap, a calendar, a waiting list and printable day sheets. Data stays on your device.
Driving Lesson Booking Sheet by Instructor and Car is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small driving school. Each instructor has a car, a daily lesson limit and an on leave switch. Each student has a gearbox. When you book a lesson the app refuses a clash: the instructor already teaching at that time, the student already booked, a manual student with an automatic car, an instructor who has reached their limit for the day, or a car that is in the workshop. Every morning the Front page lists today and tomorrow, lessons nobody marked as done, students with nothing booked, and the waiting list with how many instructors of the right gearbox still have room today. The problem it removes: In a small school the bookings live in a notebook or a messaging group. The same instructor ends up with two students at the same hour, a student gets an automatic car for a manual course, a lesson is never marked done, and people who asked for a slot are forgotten. This app keeps one sheet that refuses the clash when you type the booking and prints each instructor's day. What is inside: - Instructors, each with a car, a daily limit and an active switch, plus cars with gearbox, status and registration date - Students with gearbox, stage and status, showing lessons booked, lessons done, last lesson and missed lessons - Lessons by date, start and end time that refuse overlaps for the instructor and the student, a gearbox mismatch, a full day and a car in the workshop - Calendar by day with each lesson in its time slot, coloured by status - Front page: today, tomorrow, lessons to mark, students with nothing booked, repeat no shows and the waiting list with WhatsApp messages you check and send yourself - Waiting list with how many instructors of the right gearbox have room today - Printable day sheets for today, tomorrow and the next seven days, one per instructor - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small driving schools, individual instructors who run a diary for several colleagues, and school office staff who book lessons by phone. What it is NOT: It does not take payments, track lesson packages or fees, record test results or book official tests, and it makes no claim about what a licence authority requires. It does not send messages by itself. Fees and packages are in the sibling app for student balances. Lesson length is whatever start and end time you type. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (174 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1175 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline log of fuel fills and workshop bills for a driving school's training cars. It works out litres per 100 km between full tank fills, the cost per 100 km including service, and flags a car whose latest fill uses more than its own average. Data stays on your device.
Driving School Vehicle Fuel and Service Cost Log is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the owner of a small driving school or an individual instructor. You enter each fill with the odometer reading, litres, amount and whether the tank was filled. The app measures the distance between full fills, adds up the litres and money of every fill in between, and shows litres per 100 km and cost per 100 km for that stretch. Services and repairs go in a second list. For every car you see the fuel economy, the running cost per 100 km, the spend this month, and whether the latest stretch is worse than the car's own average. The problem it removes: Fuel and workshop money disappears into the school's general costs. Nobody knows what one car costs to run per 100 km, a leaking tank or worn tyres only show up as a bigger fuel bill, and a wrong odometer typed at the pump spoils every figure after it. This app checks the odometer against the dates, keeps full and partial fills apart, and shows each car's economy against itself. What is inside: - Cars with plate, instructor, status and the odometer at the start of the log - Fuel fills with odometer, litres, amount and a full tank tick, with price per litre worked out - For every full fill: distance since the last full fill, litres per 100 km and cost per 100 km, counting partial fills in between - Services and repairs with kind, cost, workshop and the distance since the same kind of work last time - Per car: average litres per 100 km, latest stretch, running cost per 100 km with services, spend this month and last fill date - A Check flag when the latest stretch is above the car's own average by the percentage you set - Front page, a monthly spend chart, a printable car cost sheet and a fuel list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small driving schools, instructors who own their training car, and school owners who pay the fuel and workshop bills for several cars. What it is NOT: It does not track registration, insurance or service reminders: use the Fleet Registration, Insurance and Service Due Tracker for dates and due services. It does not read fuel cards, connect to a car or a pump, track location or tell you what a normal consumption is. Every figure comes from the odometer, litres and amounts you type. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (123 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2205 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline ledger for a driving school: each student buys lesson packages and fees, every lesson taken is counted, and the app shows lessons left, lessons taken beyond the package, the balance owed, and prints receipts, statements and lesson cards. Data stays on your device.
Driving Student Lesson Package, Fee and Balance Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small driving school. It keeps four lists: students, charges (packages, file opening, test fees, extra lessons and credit notes), lessons taken and payments. For every student it works out lessons bought, lessons taken, lessons left, any lessons taken beyond the package at the extra lesson price you set, the amount billed, the amount paid and the balance. The Front page shows who is running low on lessons, who owes money, who has not been seen for a while and who holds a credit. The problem it removes: School owners lose track of how many lessons a student has left and who still owes what. A student keeps driving after the package ran out and nobody charges the extra lessons, a refund is written in a notebook, and a receipt is copied by hand. This app keeps the packages, the lesson count and the money in one place and works the balance out the same way every time. What is inside: - Students with start date, gearbox and status - Charges: package with the lessons it includes, file opening, theory course, test fee, extra lessons and credit notes for unused lessons - Lesson log where one row can hold several lessons, handy for entering a paper card - Payments and refunds by cash, card, bank transfer or cheque - Per student: lessons bought, taken and left, extra lessons charged at your price, billed, paid, balance, credit held and last lesson - Front page with low on lessons, balances owed, gone quiet and credit held, with WhatsApp messages you check and send yourself - Printable receipt or refund voucher, student statement and lesson card - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small driving schools, individual instructors who sell lesson packages, and school office staff who take payments at the desk. What it is NOT: It does not book lessons or stop clashes: use the sibling booking sheet for that. It does not process card payments, issue tax invoices, calculate VAT, record test results or claim to meet any licensing requirement. Prices are what you type in. The receipt is a simple record and not a tax invoice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (158 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1012 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline register of a building's supplier contracts: end date, the last day to give notice, annual cost against last year, rival quotes, and the recurring service visits with a calendar and an overdue list. Data stays on your device.
Facilities Supplier Contracts, Renewals and Service Visit Calendar is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a building manager, supervisor or owners committee. Each yearly contract goes in once with its supplier, term, cost, last year's cost and the notice days it needs. The app shows which contracts need a decision now, which notice dates have already passed, and how much each one went up. For contracts with recurring visits (monthly pest control, twice a year tank cleaning) it plans the next visit and keeps the ones that were missed. The problem it removes: Annual contracts renew silently because nobody remembers the notice date, and the price goes up without anyone comparing it to last year or to another quote. Recurring visits such as pest control and water tank cleaning are missed because they live in someone's head. This app puts every contract, notice date, quote and visit in one place and shows the overdue ones first. What is inside: - Suppliers and contracts with start, end, annual cost, last year's cost, notice days and an auto renews tick - Last day to give notice, days left, and a state of Running, Decide now, Notice date passed, Expired or Ended - Cost change since last year as a percentage, with your own limit for what to flag - Rival quotes per contract with the best quote and the possible saving - Service visits per contract: plan the next visit in one tap, mark it done or missed, see them on a calendar - Printable visit sign-off sheet, contract renewal sheet and annual cost report - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: building and facilities managers, property management offices, owners committees and managers of small estates who run several yearly service contracts and recurring visits. What it is NOT: It does not read contracts or know any legal notice period: you enter the days from your own contract. It does not decide whether to renew, give legal advice or negotiate. It does not send reminders by itself and it does not pay suppliers or keep invoices. Quotes are numbers you type in, not checked offers. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (161 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1168 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline collection tracker for an owners association: raise each quarter's demands for every unit in one tap, record payments, see who owes what with ageing of 30, 60 and 90 days, log chases and promises, and print receipts, statements and reminders. Data stays on your device.
Owner Contribution Collection Tracker by Unit is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the treasurer or manager of an owners association or building committee. You list the units with the regular contribution each pays. At the start of each quarter you press one button to raise a demand for every unit, record each payment as it arrives, and the app shows every unit's balance and how old the unpaid amount is. A chase log keeps what each owner promised, and statements and reminders print for any unit. The problem it removes: Which units have paid is found out by calling, and the treasurer cannot say how much is overdue or for how long. Part payments, advance payments and promises are remembered by one person. This app keeps a demand line and a payment line for every unit, clears the oldest demand first, and lists the units to chase with the amount, the age and the last promise. What is inside: - Units with owner, mobile, regular contribution and a not billed switch - Raise this quarter's demands for every billed unit in one tap, once only per unit and quarter, with the due date set from your own number of days - Special levies and other demands, entered one by one with a period label such as Roof repair - Payments with automatic receipt numbers, part payments and advance payments shown as a credit - Overdue amount per unit split into 1 to 30, 31 to 60, 61 to 90 and over 90 days, with payments applied to the oldest demand first - Chase log with promised dates, a broken promise list with WhatsApp messages, unit statements, receipts and reminder letters - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: treasurers, secretaries and property managers of owners associations, residents committees and small buildings who collect service charges and special levies from a few dozen to a few hundred units. What it is NOT: It does not work out what each unit should pay: you enter the amounts (a budget split tool does that step). It does not add late fees or interest, take payment online, or send messages itself (it opens WhatsApp with the message ready). It gives no advice on what you may charge or how to recover money, and its reminders are plain reminders, not legal notices. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (171 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1764 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline meeting pack for an owners association or committee: units with voting weight, attendance with proxies, agenda items, one vote per unit, quorum and results worked out for you, action list and printable notice, ballot sheet and minutes. Data stays on your device.
Owners Association Meeting Pack is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the secretary or chairman of a building owners association, residents committee or small community. You list the units with the voting weight each carries under your own rules, plan a meeting with its agenda, record who attended in person, online or by proxy, and record each unit's vote on each motion. The app adds up the weighted For, Against and Abstain, checks the quorum and shows a result, then prints the notice, a ballot sheet and the minutes with the action list. The problem it removes: Meeting agendas, attendance, votes and results are scattered over chat messages, paper and memory, so a result is argued about afterwards and an action is forgotten. This app keeps the agenda, the attendance, every unit's vote and the follow-up actions in one place and refuses a vote from a unit that is not recorded as present. What is inside: - Units with owner, mobile and a voting weight you set, plus a tick for units your committee has decided do not vote - Meetings with date, venue, kind and status, and an agenda of numbered items marked Information or Vote - Attendance by unit as In person, Online or Proxy, with the name of the person holding the proxy - One ballot per unit per motion, only from units present, with weighted For, Against and Abstain added up - Quorum and result for every motion: Passed, Not passed, No quorum or Not voted yet, using the percentages you enter in Settings - Action list with owner and due date, an overdue list, and printable notice, ballot sheet and minutes - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: secretaries and chairmen of owners associations, residents committees, small community boards and managing agents who run a few meetings a year and need a clean record of who voted and what was decided. What it is NOT: It does not know your constitution, building rules or any law, so the quorum, the passing percentage and each unit's weight are numbers you enter. It does not decide who may vote, run online voting, send notices or hold proxies legally. It records and adds up what you enter. It is not legal advice and the minutes it prints are a working record, not a certified document. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (183 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1282 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline log for a building manager or committee: every resident report or suggestion gets a number, a priority and a status on a board, duplicates are linked, slow and silent reports are listed, and a reply goes to the resident on WhatsApp. Prints a report sheet and a summary.
Residents' Common Area Reports and Suggestions Board is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the manager, secretary or security desk of a residential building. Each report from a resident (a complaint, a safety concern or a suggestion) is logged once with its place, category and priority. You move it along a board from New to Resolved, add dated progress notes, link repeat reports to the first one and message the resident. The app shows what is slow against your own target days and what has had no update for a while. The problem it removes: Residents' reports about the lift, the lobby or the pool are lost in chat groups, the same leak is reported five times as five problems, and nobody can say how old a report is or whether the resident was ever answered. This app gives every report a number and an age, links the repeats, and lists the ones that are slow or silent. What is inside: - Report entry with number, date, kind (Complaint, Suggestion, Safety concern), category, location, resident and unit - Priority with target days you set yourself, and a days over target figure for every open report - Status board: New, Acknowledged, In progress, Waiting on supplier, Resolved, Closed without action - Repeat reports tied together by an issue label, and a count of how many residents raised the same thing or back a suggestion - Dated progress notes with a tick when the resident was told, and a list of open reports with no update lately - WhatsApp replies written for you, a printable report sheet for the management company, and a summary list for the committee - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: building managers, committee secretaries, concierge and security desks of apartment towers and communities who receive resident reports by phone, chat and in person. What it is NOT: It does not receive reports by itself, there is no resident login or app, and it does not send messages by itself (it opens WhatsApp with the message ready). It does not track repair costs or supplier jobs, and the target days are only your own goals. Do not use it for reports about a named person's private conduct. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (114 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 833 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline register of safety equipment: one line per extinguisher, light, kit or reel, the inspection dates your staff enter, the next due date from your own interval, an overdue list and tag labels to print. Records dates only. Data stays on your device.
Safety Equipment Inspection Date Register and Tag Sheet is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a building supervisor or facilities manager. You list each piece of safety equipment with its type and location, and you set how many months apart its inspections should be according to your own schedule. Every time someone inspects it you add a line with the date and result. The app works out the next due date, shows what is overdue or due soon, and prints tag labels with the last and next dates. The problem it removes: Inspection dates for extinguishers, emergency lights and first aid kits are kept in memory or on old paper, so a visit is missed until someone notices a faded tag. This app keeps one line per item and one line per inspection, shows every overdue and failed item on the first page, and prints fresh tags and a history sheet per item. What is inside: - Equipment types with the inspection interval in months, entered from your own schedule - One line per item with location, floor, serial number, installed date and status (In service, Out of service, Removed) - Inspection lines with date, result (Passed, Passed with note, Failed, Not accessible), who did it and the report number - Next due date, days to due and a state of OK, Due soon, Overdue, Failed or No date, calculated for every item - Front page with overdue, due soon and failed lists, and a printable due list - Tag labels on a sheet with copies and a start position, and an A4 history sheet for each item - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: building supervisors, facilities managers, owners associations and small property companies who track extinguishers, emergency lights, first aid kits and similar items by hand and want one list of dates. What it is NOT: It records dates and results that your staff or contractor enter. It does not know any regulation, does not say how often an item must be inspected, and does not claim that your register satisfies any authority, insurer or contract. It does not perform or certify inspections, and it does not send reminders by itself. Pressure, weight and test readings are not stored. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (132 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 648 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline quote, invoice and time tracker for freelancers and small consultancies: log hours, price quotes, turn work into invoices, record payments, see unbilled time and overdue invoices, and message clients on WhatsApp. Data stays on your device.
Freelancer Quote, Invoice and Time Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a one-person studio or small consultancy. You log hours against clients, write quotes with line items, raise invoices, record payments and see at a glance what is unbilled, what is unpaid and what is overdue. Quotes and invoices print as clean A4 pages. The problem it removes: Hours are written in a notebook, quotes live in a word processor, invoices in a spreadsheet and payments in a chat thread. Nobody can say how much time is still unbilled or which invoice is two weeks late. This app keeps the whole chain, from hours to quote to invoice to payment, in one place. What is inside: - Client list with unbilled time, invoiced total and what each client still owes - Time log with hours, an optional special rate, a billable tick and the invoice it was billed on - Quotes with line items, a validity date and a status from Draft to Accepted - Invoices with line items, discount, VAT at the rate you enter, due date, payments and balance - Overdue list with a ready WhatsApp reminder, and unbilled time per client - Printable quote, invoice and timesheet pages with your payment details - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: freelancers, designers, developers, photographers, consultants, tutors and small studios who price by the hour or by the job and want to see unbilled and unpaid money at a glance. What it is NOT: It does not file tax returns, and the invoice layout is not a promise that it meets the invoice rules that apply to you. Check the wording and the VAT rate with your accountant. It does not send messages or take online payments, and it keeps data only on this device, so back it up. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (180 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1649 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline rental calendar for a small car, bike or equipment rental: bookings that cannot overlap, deposits taken and returned, extras, returns due today, late returns, balances owed and WhatsApp messages. Prints agreement and receipt. Data stays on your device.
Car and Equipment Rental Booking Calendar is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small rental business that runs bookings from WhatsApp and a notebook. You list what you rent and what it costs per day. Each booking shows on a calendar across all its days, the app refuses a double booking of the same item, and it tracks the deposit, the extras, the payments and the balance until the item is back. The problem it removes: Two customers are promised the same car for the same weekend, a late return is noticed a day too late, and nobody can say how much deposit money is sitting in the drawer. Extras such as delivery and fuel are added from memory. This app puts the diary, the deposits and the money owed in one place. What is inside: - Fleet list with daily rate, standard deposit and status, plus what is out now, the next pickup and the income of each item - Month calendar where a booking is shown on every day it lasts, and a rental board from Reserved to Out to Returned - A booking that overlaps another booking of the same item is refused, with a clear message - Days, rental total, extras added on the booking, discount, payments, balance owed and days late, all calculated - Deposit taken, deposit returned and deposit still held, per booking and in total - Today dashboard: pickups, returns due, late returns and balances, with a WhatsApp message ready for each customer - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners of small rental businesses: cars and vans, bikes and scooters, cameras, tools, party and event equipment, who take bookings by message and want a calendar they can trust. What it is NOT: It does not check driving licences, insurance or fines, and it keeps no ID copies: there is only a box to tick that you checked. It does not take online bookings or card payments, does not send messages by itself, and the agreement is sample wording that you must replace with your own terms. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (155 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1444 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline appointment book for a salon or small clinic: month diary, today board, client history with spend and last visit, WhatsApp reminder list for tomorrow, win-back list and daily takings. Prints receipts. Data stays on your device.
Salon and Clinic Appointment and Client Visit Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a salon, beauty clinic or small practice that takes bookings on WhatsApp and writes visits in a notebook. You enter your services and team once, add bookings, and the app keeps the diary, the client history, the list of people to remind tomorrow and the day's takings. The problem it removes: Bookings live in chat threads, the day ends in double bookings and no-shows nobody tracked, and the takings are added up from memory at closing. A client who has not been back for months is never contacted because nobody can see who they are. This app puts all of that in one place without a subscription. What is inside: - Month diary and a Today board (Booked, Confirmed, Arrived, Done, No-show, Cancelled) with a status you change in one tap - Clients with phone numbers normalised to UAE format, visits, total spent, last visit and days since the last visit, all calculated - Bookings with price from the service list, add-on lines (products, nail art), a discount, a deposit or payment, and the balance - Reminder list for tomorrow with a WhatsApp link per client, and a win-back list of clients not seen for your chosen number of days - Takings dashboard: today, this month, outstanding balances, takings by month, by payment method and by team member - Printable A5 receipt per booking and a printable takings list for any period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and receptionists of salons, barbers, beauty clinics, physiotherapy and dental practices with a handful of staff, who want a clear diary and client record without buying a booking platform. What it is NOT: It does not send reminders by itself: it prepares a WhatsApp message that you open and send. It stores no medical records, has no online booking page for clients, does not split commission, and takes no card payments. VAT is a rate you enter and the receipt shows the VAT included in the total at that rate. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (171 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1181 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
6 lessons on credit policy, invoices that get paid, a collection calendar with copy-ready scripts, ageing and DSO, disputes and cheques, and escalation. 46 scripts, lawyer question lists, 36 quiz questions.
A training course in the judgement and routine of credit control for owners, finance staff and credit controllers of UAE small businesses with late-paying customers. It teaches the process (policy, calendar, scripts, disputes, escalation) and does not state any law on cheques, debt recovery or interest. Wherever those topics arise it gives a list of questions to put to your lawyer, and it teaches only the commercial and record-keeping side. What is inside - 6 lessons of 1,200 or more words: credit policy and a scoring sheet; invoicing that gets paid; the collection calendar; ageing, priorities, DSO and cash targets; disputes, part payments, payment plans and cheques (process and records only); escalation, stop-supply rules, write-offs and a monthly credit review pack. - A script bank of 46 emails, WhatsApp texts and phone scripts in English (Word). Arabic versions should be written or checked by a native speaker. - Question lists for your lawyer (terms and conditions, cheques, payment plans, recovering a debt) and for your accountant on write-offs (Word). - Worked examples with made-up companies: DSO before and after, cash released by collecting 10 days faster, expected-loss and cost-benefit arithmetic. Every figure is recomputed. - 36 workbook tasks with model answers (Word and PDF), 36 quiz questions with an explained answer key, a completion checklist (no certificate), and a 7-day plan of about 14 hours. Facts it states 5% VAT and the tax invoice rules (issue within 14 days of the date of supply; the required particulars) from well-established sources, and the published e-invoicing timetable as published with a note to confirm for your business. VAT on a written-off debt is a question for your accountant. Who it is for Owners and finance people who sell on credit. It complements, and does not duplicate, a tracker spreadsheet or a chasing tool. What it is NOT: it is not legal, tax, immigration or accounting advice, it does not tell you what any rule, fee or deadline is for your case, it promises no result, and it leads to no exam or certificate. UAE rules change, so every rule outside a small set of well-established VAT and employment points is sent to the official source or your adviser. All companies and figures are made up. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any government body, bank or platform. Requirements: a PDF reader and Word or a compatible editor. Version 1.0, written November 2026. Single business use.
Offline task calendar for farms and nurseries: set how often each plot is watered, fed, scouted or pruned, log the work done, and see what is due today, due soon or overdue, with a message to the person on the plot.
Irrigation and Fertiliser Task Calendar by Plot is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a farm, greenhouse or nursery that repeats the same jobs on every plot. You define the task types once, such as drip cycle every 2 days or feed every 14 days, then attach them to each plot. Each time someone does a job you log it, and the app works out the next due date from the last log. The Today page lists what is overdue, due today and due in the next days, and a calendar shows the coming weeks. The problem it removes: Field jobs repeat on different cycles for different plots, so the schedule lives in the farm manager head or on a whiteboard that is wiped. A feed is missed because nobody noticed it was last done five weeks ago. This app keeps one line per plot and task, shows the last time and the next time, and flags what has slipped. What is inside: - Plots with crop, area, water source, the person who looks after it and their phone - Task types with a category and a repeat interval in days, such as drip cycle, feed, foliar spray, pest walk - A schedule line for each plot and task with its own interval if the plot differs, a first due date and a pause switch for fallow plots - A work log with date, who did it and the amount used - Last done, next due, days overdue and a status of Overdue, Due today, Due soon or OK for every line - Today page, calendar of coming tasks, and a WhatsApp message to the plot worker for overdue jobs - A printable plot task card and a printable task list for a period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: farm managers, greenhouse growers, date palm grove owners and nurseries with several plots, houses or beds that each need regular watering, feeding and checks. What it is NOT: It does not measure soil moisture or weather, does not tell you how much water or fertiliser a crop needs and gives no agronomy advice. It does not control irrigation equipment. A task is scheduled by a fixed number of days after the last time it was logged, not by season or crop stage. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (156 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1144 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline room booking sheet for offices, business centres and community halls: book by room, date and half hour, block clashes and overfull rooms, work out the hourly charge with day cap, member discount, extras and VAT, and print a confirmation and a client statement.
Meeting Room Booking Sheet with Hourly Rates and Charges is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for anyone who hires out meeting rooms by the hour: a business centre, a coworking space, a hotel meeting floor, a community hall or a training centre. Each room has an hourly rate, an optional day cap, a capacity and a minimum booking. A booking takes a date, a start and an end time and the number of people. The app refuses a booking that overlaps another booking in the same room, that has more people than the room holds, that is shorter than the minimum, or that falls outside your opening times. The charge is worked out on the booking itself, with the member discount, extras and VAT. The problem it removes: Room bookings arrive by phone, chat and email and sit in a paper diary or a shared calendar that does not stop a clash. The charge is worked out afterwards from memory: member rate, the projector, tea for ten, a long day that should have been capped. This app calculates the charge as the booking is made and keeps a balance for each client. What is inside: - Rooms with capacity, hourly rate, optional day cap and minimum hours - Clients with a member switch that applies your member discount - Bookings by half hour with status Tentative, Confirmed, Completed, Cancelled or No show - Checks for overlap in the same room, over capacity, under the minimum booking, outside opening times, and completed before the date - Charge worked out from hours, rate, day cap, member discount, extras, other charges and VAT, with a price override - Paid and balance on every booking, and balances to collect - Calendar by room with the time of each booking, and a Today page with the day sheet - Printable booking confirmation, client statement and monthly charges list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: business centres, coworking spaces, small hotels, training centres, clubs and community halls that rent rooms by the hour and want to stop double bookings and charge correctly. What it is NOT: It does not take online bookings or payments and does not send messages. It does not allow for a cleaning or changeover gap between bookings, so add that time to the booking. It is not an accounting system or a tax invoice: VAT is a rate you set in Settings and you should check the current rate and your own invoicing duties. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (149 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1418 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline stock and sales register for a plant nursery: stock by variety and pot size, growing batches that become ready on a date, losses by reason, retail and trade prices, sales receipts, low stock list and credit sales. Stock goes down with every sale and loss.
Plant Nursery Stock and Sales Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small plant nursery or garden centre. Each variety in each pot size has its own line with a retail price, a trade price and a cost. Batches record plants potted or bought in, and the date they will be ready for sale. Plants count as stock only from that date. Sales take plants out of stock, losses such as dead or damaged plants take them out too, and the app shows what is low, what is out, and what is coming ready soon. The problem it removes: Plants are counted by eye, so a customer is promised twenty plants and the benches hold twelve. Trade customers get one price, walk-in customers another, and nobody remembers which. Plants die in the heat and the loss is never written down, so the stock number and the real number drift apart. This app keeps one number per variety and size that goes down with every sale and every loss. What is inside: - Plant lines by variety and pot size with retail price, trade price, cost and a reorder level - Growing batches with a ready date: only plants past their ready date count as stock for sale - Sales with lines, a retail or trade price chosen for you, a discount, and paid or on credit - Losses by reason (died, pests, heat damage, handling) and a recount that adds or removes plants - Stock, growing, sold and lost per line, stock value at cost, and Low or Out states - A check that stops a sale line that would take stock below zero (you can turn it off) - Printable sales receipt, stock list and sales list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: small plant nurseries, garden centres, landscaping suppliers and farm shops that sell potted plants, trays and trees to walk-in customers and to trade customers. What it is NOT: It does not track seeds, compost, pots or chemicals, plant ages or pesticide records, and it does not give growing advice. It does not take card payments, issue tax invoices or work out VAT: prices are as you enter them. It does not read a barcode or run on two counters at once. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (155 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1479 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Price a bill of quantities in your browser: sections and items, a reusable rate library, preliminaries, contingency, overheads and profit mark-ups, a summary by section and an A4 tender print with spread rates. Works offline; your data stays on your device.
BOQ Estimator is a single-file app for contractors and estimators who price tenders and do not want to rebuild a spreadsheet each time. You add sections and items (description, unit, quantity, rate), pick rates from a library you build up over projects, set your mark-ups, and read the tender total. What is inside: - Sections and items with quantity x rate amounts rounded to two decimals - A rate library you can search and reuse, with CSV import and export - A mark-up chain applied in a fixed, stated order on the running total: preliminaries, contingency, overheads, then profit, plus a VAT setting you can switch off - A summary by section and the full build-up from direct cost to tender total - An A4 tender print in two layouts: spread rates (mark-ups folded into each rate, with the last line absorbing rounding so the lines add exactly to the total) or full breakdown - A 25-item office fit-out example, Export and Import (JSON and CSV), and a notes and exclusions box printed under the BOQ Who it is for: small and mid-size contractors, fit-out and MEP subcontractors and freelance estimators in the UAE. What it does not do: it does not apply any standard method of measurement, read drawings, price from a database of market rates or produce a programme or cash flow. Every rate and percentage is yours. VAT is a setting to confirm with your accountant. How it differs from the Zeyto Excel product Contractor BOQ, Cost Estimate and Cash Flow Workbook: that one is a spreadsheet with a cash-flow view. This one is a reusable rate library, a mark-up chain and a printed tender layout in a single offline HTML file, with no cash-flow sheet. They overlap in pricing a BOQ, so choose the format you prefer. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 900 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Offline quote calculator for a small print shop: enter your paper, machine and finishing rates once, then price flyers, cards, posters and booklets by quantity. Works out sheets with wastage, cost, margin and price, and prints the customer quote and an internal costing sheet.
Print Job Quote Calculator is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a small digital or offset print shop. You enter what a sheet of each paper costs, how many pieces of each finished size fit on a sheet, what each machine charges per side, and what each finishing step costs. A quote line then works out the sheets to print including wastage, the cost, your mark-up and a selling price. Quotes print as a clean A4 page for the customer, and a separate costing sheet shows your own cost and margin. The problem it removes: Each quote is worked out by hand or from memory, so the same job gets two prices depending on who answers the phone. Wastage and finishing are forgotten, and nobody sees the margin until the job is done. This app keeps one rate table, does the sheet and cost sums the same way every time, and refuses a line priced below your cost unless you allow it. What is inside: - Rate tables: paper by sheet size and cost per sheet, finished sizes with pieces per sheet, machines with a rate per side, finishing steps priced per sheet, per piece or per job - Quote lines that work out sheets with wastage, paper cost, print cost, finishing cost, mark-up, price and margin - A check that the paper sheet size matches the layout, and that a line is not priced below cost - Quotes with delivery, discount, VAT at the rate you enter, validity date, status and a ready WhatsApp follow-up - Printable customer quote and an internal costing sheet that shows cost and margin per line - Desk page: quotes waiting, value waiting, sent quotes past their date and lines under your target margin - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and counter staff of small print shops, digital print studios, copy centres and sign makers who quote flyers, cards, brochures, posters and booklets from a rate list and want every quote priced the same way. What it is NOT: It does not lay out a sheet for you: you enter how many pieces fit on a sheet after checking your own layout. It does not know your real machine wastage, bleed or trimming, does not do large format by square metre, does not send quotes by itself, and the quote wording is sample text. VAT is a rate you enter. It is not an accounting system. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (190 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1823 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Five matching business documents in six designed trade styles: tax invoice, quotation, delivery note, receipt and statement. Word files to edit, plus print-ready PDFs as a filled example and a blank. Visual layouts only: they do not calculate or number anything.
Most small UAE businesses send paperwork that looks like five unrelated files: an invoice from one template, a quotation from another, a handwritten delivery note. This set gives you the whole paper trail in one matching, designed style, so the customer sees one brand from the quotation to the statement. What is inside - Six trade styles: Workshop, Studio, Trading, Fresh, Contractor and Clinic. Each has its own colours, header treatment and table design. - Five documents per style: tax invoice, quotation, delivery note, payment receipt and customer statement of account, one A4 page each. - Six editable Word files (.docx) with real tables, a header block, grey bracket placeholders and a logo box. Add rows with Tab in the last cell. - Twelve print-ready PDFs: a FILLED-EXAMPLE and a BLANK per style, five pages each, to see the finished look and to print on pre-printed stock or carbonless pads. - A 3-page START-HERE guide: the six styles side by side, how to edit and print, and a checklist of tax invoice particulars to confirm with the FTA or your accountant. The tax invoice page carries the particulars the FTA lists on its tax invoice page: the words Tax Invoice, supplier name, address and TRN, a sequential or unique number and the date of issue, with 5 percent VAT shown per line. It is a layout, not a compliance claim. Confirm required fields with the FTA or your accountant. A tax invoice must be issued within 14 days of the date of supply (Federal Decree-Law 8 of 2017, Article 67): check the current rule with the FTA. How it differs from other Zeyto products The UAE Tax Invoice Pack is an Excel workbook that calculates VAT and checks required details. This set does not calculate: the Word tables are typed by hand. It is about how your paperwork looks as a matching set. The Quotation and Proposal Template Set is plain text templates for pricing and scope. Use it for the wording, and this set for the design. What it is NOT It is not accounting software, it does not number your documents, and it is not an e-invoice or connected to any e-invoicing platform (UAE e-invoicing follows a published timetable: ask your accountant what applies to you). There is no simplified tax invoice layout, because the simplified invoice rule was amended by Cabinet Decision No. 100 of 2025: check the FTA and the Ministry of Finance. All names, amounts and the TRN in the examples are fictional (the TRN is 15 zeros). No Arabic, no bank, card or government logos. Checked by re-opening every Word file in code and rendering every PDF page in a browser. The Word files were not opened in Microsoft Word before release, so print one copy first. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
5 offline apps for UAE cafes, shops and kitchens in one zip. Separately AED 325, bundled AED 139. Each opens by double-click and keeps your data on your device.
5 working offline apps in one zip, each in its own folder with its own README and example data. Bought separately they come to AED 325; the bundle is AED 139, a saving of AED 186 (about 57 percent). Each app is a single HTML file: double-click index.html, no installation, account or internet. Your data stays in your browser on your device, with Export backup and Import backup, and a Load example data button so you can see each one working first. What is inside: - Retail Markdown, Promotion and Bundle Calculator - Reorder Point and Safety Stock Planner - Barcode Generator and Label Sheet - Expiry Date and FEFO Batch Tracker - Goods Received (GRN) Check and Supplier Score Each app is the same product as the one sold on its own, version 1.0, so read its listing for what it does, how it was tested and what it does not do. In short: every calculation was compared with an independent Python implementation on randomised data, and the screens were driven with scripted browser tests in Chromium and WebKit, with no console errors. Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested. What it is not: not tax, legal, accounting or food-safety advice, not an accounting or POS system, and not connected to the FTA, banks, marketplaces or any government system. Example data is invented. Single business use, do not resell or redistribute. Support: support@zeyto.app
Offline clinic diary: bookings by doctor that cannot overlap or fall outside working hours, the reminder list for tomorrow, a missed-visit count per patient and a recall list. Administrative only. Data stays on your device.
Clinic Appointment Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You enter your doctors with their working hours, your treatments with the minutes they need, and your patients. Each appointment is checked when saved: the doctor must be free, inside working hours, and the slot long enough for the treatment. The desk shows today, tomorrow's patients to remind, patients who missed appointments before, and patients who are due back. The problem it removes: Bookings arrive on the phone and on WhatsApp and the day ends in double bookings, patients who did not come, and empty chairs. Nobody counts who misses appointments again and again, and patients who needed a six month check-up are only remembered when they happen to call. This app checks each booking against the doctor's time and keeps the count and the recall list for you. What is inside: - Doctors with room and working hours, and treatments with the minutes they need and a flag for a recall interval - Appointments that refuse an overlap with the same doctor, a slot outside working hours or shorter than the treatment needs - A diary calendar, a Front desk page with today, tomorrow's reminder list and WhatsApp links - A missed appointment count per patient: after the limit you set, a new booking needs a note on who confirmed it - No-show rate by doctor and by month, and a printable list of missed appointments - A recall list: patients whose last completed visit was longer ago than their recall interval, with a reminder link, and not already booked - Printable appointment slip (A5), day list and recall list - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: front desk staff and practice managers in small clinics who book by phone and WhatsApp and keep the diary on paper or in a spreadsheet. What it is NOT: It is not a medical record and has no place for diagnoses, notes or images: do not type medical details. It does not send messages, it opens WhatsApp with the message ready. It does not bill patients or claim from insurers, and it does not know what your clinic or its licence allows. Working hours and limits are what you enter. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (166 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1232 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Work out monthly interim payment certificates from cumulative work done and materials on site: retention with an optional cap, advance recovery, previous certificates, VAT as a setting, a register and a printable certificate. Offline; data stays on your device.
Interim Payment Certificate Calculator is a single-file app for contractors who certify or claim progress payments and want the arithmetic done the same way every month. You enter the contract terms once, then for each certificate the cumulative work done and materials on site to date. What is inside: - Contract terms: original sum, approved variations, retention percentage and an optional cap as a percentage of the adjusted sum, advance paid and how it is recovered (pro rata or a fixed percentage), and a VAT setting - Certificates entered as cumulative figures, with other additions and deductions and retention released to date - Automatic net to date, less the previous certificate, giving the amount of this certificate, with VAT on the amount of the certificate - A printable certificate sheet with the build-up and signature lines, and a register of every certificate - A worked example and Export and Import (JSON and CSV) Who it is for: main contractors claiming from clients, and subcontractors or consultants certifying subcontractors. What it does not do: it does not know your contract. Retention percentage, cap, advance recovery method and VAT treatment are settings you enter from your own contract, and your accountant should confirm how VAT applies to retention and advances. It does not file anything or connect to any system. How it differs from the Zeyto subcontractor tracker: this app calculates certificates on any contract, including a main contract, and prints a certificate. The Subcontractor Payment, Retention and Statements App tracks a ledger across several subcontractors with payments and due dates. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 980 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Keep one register of variation orders, cost claims and time claims: statuses, claimed and approved cost and days, running contract value, pending and rejected totals, revised completion date, late response flags and a printable VO form. Works offline.
Variation Order and Claims Log is a single-file app that replaces the VO tracker spreadsheet most site offices keep. Each entry has a number, type, status, dates, claimed and approved cost and days. The summary shows where the contract value stands today. What is inside: - A register of variation orders, omissions, cost claims, time claims and combined claims, with a status for each - Contract summary: original sum, approved additions and omissions, net change and percentage, current contract value, pending and rejected amounts - Time: approved extension days and the revised completion date - A running contract value after every entry in number order, and flags for responses that are past the response period you set - A printable variation or claim form with prepared, checked and approved lines, and a printed register - Example data, and Export and Import (JSON and CSV) Who it is for: contract administrators, quantity surveyors and project managers on contractor or subcontractor teams. What it does not do: it does not decide whether a variation is valid or when it takes effect, because that depends on your contract. An entry counts in the contract value only when it is Approved or Partially approved. It is not connected to any other system and does not store attachments. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 743 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Write the daily site report in a form: weather, manpower by trade, equipment, work done, deliveries, safety observations, toolbox talk, stoppage hours and photo references. A weekly roll-up adds up man-days, hours, incidents and stoppages. A4 print per report. Offline.
Site Daily Report is a single-file app for site engineers and supervisors who write the same report every day. Fill in the form once, print or save it as a PDF, and let the weekly roll-up do the adding. What is inside: - Daily reports numbered with your own prefix, with weather, temperature, work stopped (hours) and the reason - Manpower by trade and equipment lines with quantities and hours, work done, deliveries and safety observations, first-aid cases, near misses and lost-time incidents, toolbox talk and topic - Photo reference numbers (the photos themselves are not stored) - A weekly roll-up for any week, with a week start day you choose: man-days, man-hours, equipment hours, incidents and stoppage hours, by trade - An A4 printable report, example reports and Export and Import (JSON; CSV for the reports and manpower tables) Who it is for: site engineers, foremen and project managers on UAE building and fit-out sites. What it does not do: it does not store photos, send reports, record sign-in or connect to any authority. Heat and working-hour rules that apply to your site come from your authority and contract; none is built in. Note: the CSV export covers the reports and manpower tables. Equipment, work and observation lines are included in the JSON backup. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 1950 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
A payment ledger for each subcontract: cumulative certificates, retention and cap, advance recovery, back-charges applied to certificates, retention releases, payments, due dates from terms, overdue and 30-day buckets, and printable statements. Offline.
Subcontractor Payment, Retention and Statements App keeps the money side of your subcontracts in one place. For each subcontract you enter the value, retention terms and payment terms. You then add certificates, back-charges, retention releases and payments, and the app shows what you owe, what is overdue and what falls due. What is inside: - One row per subcontract: value, retention percentage, optional cap, payment terms in days and defects liability end date - Certificates entered as cumulative amounts, with retention, advance recovery and back-charges applied to a certificate, VAT as a setting - Retention releases as payable items with their own due date, and payments recorded against a certificate or on account - A schedule of what is overdue, due within 7 days and due within 30 days, with alerts for retention releases coming due - A printable statement per subcontractor with certificates, retention held, back-charges, payments and balance - Example data and Export and Import (JSON and CSV) Who it is for: main contractors and construction managers who pay several subcontractors. What it does not do: it does not decide whether a deduction is allowed under your subcontract. It applies the percentages and days you enter. How it differs from the Zeyto Excel product Subcontractor Payment and Retention Tracker: that is a workbook. This is a single offline HTML file with per-subcontractor printable statements, back-charges applied to certificates, payments against a certificate or on account, and 7 and 30 day due buckets. Both track subcontractor retention, so they overlap; choose the format you prefer. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 2500 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Eight take-off calculators in one app: concrete, blocks and mortar, tiles, paint, plaster, flooring, skirting and rebar. Every row feeds one quantity sheet by material, with pack sizes, your rates and a total cost. Waste and constants are settings. Offline.
Material Take-off Calculators turns dimensions into quantities you can order. Add rows in each calculator, let the quantity sheet combine them by material, enter pack sizes and your rates, and read the cost. What is inside: - Concrete (rectangular and circular), blocks and joint mortar with cement, tiles with adhesive and pattern waste, paint by coats and coverage, plaster, flooring, skirting and rebar by weight - Rebar weight uses the standard formula diameter squared over 162 (kg per metre, diameter in millimetres), with count or spacing mode - A quantity and cost sheet that groups rows by material, shows total, buy quantity rounded up to the pack size, rate and cost, with an Include tick for each line - A settings page for cement per cubic metre, bag size, mortar waste, adhesive per square metre and default waste, all labelled as typical values to adjust to your supplier data - A project print, example project and Export and Import (JSON and CSV for each calculator) Who it is for: estimators, site engineers, fit-out contractors and homeowners' project managers who measure from drawings. What it does not do: it does not read drawings or know your supplier's coverage or yield. The constants are typical placeholder values, not standards. Check quantities against drawings, specifications and supplier data before you order. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 3300 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Track hired equipment: day, week or month rates, on-hire and off-hire dates, standby days, minimum charge and mobilisation, with cost to date, forecast to off-hire, utilisation, overrun and off-hire alerts and cost by project and supplier. Offline.
Equipment Hire and Utilisation Tracker shows what hired plant is costing you today and what it will cost if it stays. Enter each hire, and the dashboard flags machines still on site past their planned off-hire date. What is inside: - Each item with supplier, project, rate type (day, week or month), on-hire, planned and actual off-hire dates, standby days, minimum days and mobilisation and demobilisation charges - Settings that match your hire agreement: inclusive or exclusive day counting, days in a hire month, standby charge percentage and alert windows - Cost to date, forecast to the planned off-hire date, utilisation percentage, and alerts for overrun, off-hire due soon and low utilisation - Totals by project and by supplier, a printable hire register and an off-hire list - Example data and Export and Import (JSON and CSV) Who it is for: site managers, plant coordinators and quantity surveyors who hire cranes, excavators, generators, scaffolding and similar equipment. What it does not do: it does not replace the supplier invoice. Hire terms differ by supplier, so set the options to match your agreement and compare the result with the invoice. It does not read telematics or connect to suppliers. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 1450 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Log snags by location, trade and contractor with severity and due dates, see open and overdue items, ageing buckets and counts by severity, trade, location and contractor, and print a snag report for one location or one contractor. Offline.
Snag List and Defects Tracker keeps handover snagging under control. Add each snag as you walk the building, give it a severity, and the app works out the due date, the age and what is overdue. What is inside: - Snags with number, location, trade, responsible contractor, severity, status (Open, In progress, Ready to re-inspect, Closed), dates and photo reference numbers - Days allowed to fix for each severity as settings, which set the due date of new snags - A dashboard with open, closed, overdue, critical still open, average days to close, ageing buckets and tables by severity, trade, location and contractor - Filters and search, and an A4 printable snag report for one location or one contractor, with signature lines - A 30-snag example and Export and Import (JSON and CSV) Who it is for: site engineers, project managers and developers' representatives handling snagging and defects. What it does not do: it does not store photos (write the file names in the photo reference box), and the severity scale and days allowed are your own, not a standard. It does not send snags to contractors. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 2380 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
One log for requests for information and submittals: numbering, due dates from your response periods, overdue flags, submittal revisions that supersede earlier ones, response time by discipline, and printable RFI and transmittal forms and registers. Offline.
RFI and Submittal Log gives a project team one place to see what has been asked, what has been sent for approval and who is slow to answer. What is inside: - RFIs and submittals numbered with your prefixes (for example RFI-001, SUB-003 Rev 2), with discipline, drawing or specification reference, reviewer and status - Due dates worked out from the date sent and a response period you set, or typed over, with overdue flags and days waiting - Submittal revisions: press New revision and the earlier revision is marked superseded and left out of current counts - A dashboard with RFIs open, answered and closed, submittals awaiting review, approved and returned, average response time and a table by discipline, plus RFIs flagged as affecting cost or time - A printable RFI form or submittal transmittal, and a printable register of what is waiting or everything - Example data and Export and Import (JSON and CSV) Who it is for: document controllers, project engineers and consultants' site teams on building and fit-out projects. What it does not do: it does not store attachments (list the file names in the description), and response periods and numbering follow your own project procedure, not a rule. It does not send items to anyone. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 1820 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Forecast the final cost and profit of a contract from budget, committed, spent and percent complete by cost line. Shows CPI, SPI, forecast margin, over or under billing, a plain-language reading, a chart and monthly snapshots. Offline.
Cost-to-Complete and Profit Forecast answers the question a contractor asks every month: where will this job finish? Enter each cost line, say how far along it is, and the app forecasts the final cost and profit and explains the result in plain language. What is inside: - Cost lines with budget, committed, spent and percent complete, and a forecast method per line: remaining budget, current rate, committed only or manual - A forecast that is never lower than what is committed, with earned value, planned value, CPI, SPI and TCPI - Forecast final cost, cost still to come, forecast profit and margin against budget, earned revenue and over or under billing - A What this means section in plain sentences, a bar chart of budget, spent and forecast by line, and the biggest forecast overruns - Monthly snapshots with a forecast profit trend chart, a printable report and Export and Import (JSON and CSV) Who it is for: contractors, commercial managers and finance managers who need a monthly job forecast without building an earned value model. What it does not do: percent complete is your own estimate and every forecast figure depends on it. Earned revenue here is contract value x cost progress, a simple measure that may differ from how your accountant recognises revenue. It is a management forecast, not an accounting or audit tool. Tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests that compare the app's numbers with an independent calculation (about 1750 numeric checks), at phone width (375 px) and desktop width (1280 px). It was not tested in Safari or Firefox, and the real print dialog was not exercised (print layout was checked as a PDF). Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
All ten Zeyto construction apps in one zip: BOQ estimator, payment certificates, variations and claims, daily reports, subcontractor payments, take-off, equipment hire, snagging, RFIs and cost-to-complete forecast. AED 329 instead of AED 780 separately, a saving of AED 451.
This bundle contains all ten Zeyto offline construction apps, each of which is also sold on its own. Each runs in your browser without internet, keeps its data on your device and has its own README with the settings to check and the limits. The ten apps: - BOQ Estimator with Mark-ups, Rate Library and Tender-Style Print - Interim Payment Certificate Calculator with Retention and Advance Recovery - Variation Order and Claims Log with Contract Value and Time Impact - Site Daily Report and Weekly Roll-up App - Subcontractor Payment, Retention and Statements App - Material Take-off Calculators with a Costed Quantity Sheet - Equipment Hire and Utilisation Tracker - Snag List and Defects Tracker with Ageing and Printable Reports - RFI and Submittal Log with Revisions and Response Times - Cost-to-Complete and Profit Forecast with CPI and SPI The real saving: bought separately the ten apps cost AED 780. The bundle is AED 329, which is AED 451 less, about 58 percent. How to use it: unzip, double-click the index.html in the top folder, which lists the ten apps, and open the one you need. Each app also works directly from its folder under apps. What the apps do not do: they are independent and do not share data with each other, so a variation approved in the log is not carried into the forecast; you copy figures across yourself. Constants, retention and VAT rules, response periods and similar values are settings you enter and must check against your contract, specification and supplier data. Nothing here is legal, tax or engineering advice. All ten were tested in Chromium (Chrome and Edge engine) with scripted browser tests against independent calculations, at 375 px and 1280 px. They were not tested in Safari or Firefox. The BOQ Estimator overlaps with the Zeyto Excel product Contractor BOQ, Cost Estimate and Cash Flow Workbook, and the Subcontractor Payment, Retention and Statements App overlaps with the Excel Subcontractor Payment and Retention Tracker; the apps are single offline HTML files, the other two are workbooks. Zeyto also sells a separate contracting ERP. This app is standalone: it does not connect to it and nothing is imported between them.
Six matching stationery styles: A4 letterhead, DL compliments slip, DL envelope and a plain email signature. Edit in Word, send the PDFs to a printer, or edit the SVGs in a vector editor. Placeholders in grey brackets, no logos supplied.
A letter on a blank Word page, an envelope written by hand and an email with no signature tell the customer you are a one-person operation. This set gives a small business four pieces of stationery that look like one brand, in six styles. What is inside - Six styles: Corner, Stripe, Arch, Dotline, Frame and Wave. Each is a different look, from a diagonal corner block to a wave footer. - For every style: an A4 letterhead, a DL compliments slip (210 x 99 mm), a DL envelope (220 x 110 mm) and a text-only email signature. - 18 editable Word files. The letterhead has a real header and footer so it repeats on every page, with grey bracket placeholders for name, address, phone, TRN and a licence line. - 18 SVG files, one per piece, with live text, for a designer or a free editor such as Inkscape. - Three print PDFs (letterheads, compliments slips, envelopes), each with one page per style, for a print shop. - Six email signatures as plain HTML tables (paste into Gmail or Outlook) plus one Word file with all six to copy from. No images, so they survive most mail apps. - A one-sheet preview PDF showing all six styles together. Who it is for A shop, workshop, consultancy or trading company that needs stationery in an afternoon, not a branding project. What it is NOT It supplies no logo and no brand identity; you add your own. The licence or registration line is a grey bracket: put in what your licensing authority requires you to show, as this pack does not say what to print. The Word versions are simplified: full-page backgrounds and edge-to-edge colour cannot be done in a normal Word header, so the PDFs and SVGs hold the full design. Office printers cannot print to the paper edge, so side and corner designs show a white margin unless a print shop prints them. No bleed is included: ask your printer whether it needs 3 mm. Checked by rendering every PDF and SVG in a browser and re-opening every Word file in code. The Word files were not opened in Microsoft Word before release. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
Print-ready A4 label sheets for a UAE shop: shelf labels, strips, hang tags, wobblers and sale, new and info tags, in three colour themes. Type your products into the offline Label Sheet Filler and print, or edit the SVGs. Includes an alignment test page.
Handwritten price tags and marker-pen shelf edges lose sales, and re-typing every price into a label template is slow. This set gives a UAE shop finished label sheets and a small offline tool that fills them for you. What is inside - Four label sheets on A4: shelf labels (3 x 8), shelf strips (2 x 7), hang tags (4 x 3) and round wobblers (2 x 3), each in three colour themes (ink, coral, forest). Prices show a large dirham figure with a small fils figure, an optional was price, a unit and an item code. - Write-in sheets for SALE, NEW, CLEARANCE, OFFER, REDUCED and NEW ARRIVAL tags, and a product information tag, to fill by hand with a pen. - Label Sheet Filler: one index.html that opens in your browser and works offline. Type one product per line or load the example CSV, pick the sheet and theme, nudge the print by 0.1 mm if your printer is slightly off, and print. Use Start at label to reuse a part-used sticker sheet. Your list stays in your own browser on your device and nothing is sent anywhere. - An alignment test PDF that draws every label outline so you can check your printer against your label stock before using expensive sheets. - 12 filled example pages and every sheet as an editable SVG (filled example and blank). Who it is for Grocery and gift shops, boutiques, hardware and trading counters, pharmacies and market stalls that print their own shelf labels. What it is NOT It does not know about VAT, offers, stock or a barcode scanner: you type the prices and the code field prints as text. No barcodes are generated. The label sizes follow common A4 sticker layouts (for example 63.5 x 33.9 mm 24-up and 99.1 x 38.1 mm 14-up) and different brands differ by a millimetre or two, so always run the alignment test first. Printers cannot print edge to edge, so wobblers and full-bleed tags keep a safe margin. The Label Sheet Filler was tested in Chromium only (Chrome or Edge), not in Firefox or Safari, and was not tested on a printer. Check every printed price before it goes on a shelf. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
Five designed menu styles for a restaurant, cafe or takeaway: A4 menu, A3 cafe board and a DL and A5 takeaway flyer with front and back. Edit in PowerPoint or Word, or send the print-ready PDFs to a printer. Sample dishes in AED.
A menu typed in Word with a clip-art border says 'we did this ourselves'. A designer costs more than a small kitchen wants to spend. This pack gives a UAE restaurant, cafe or takeaway five finished menu designs to edit in an afternoon. What is inside - Five styles: Slate and Brass (fine dining), Souk Spice (family and Arabic kitchens), Garden Cafe (cafes and juice bars), Modern Mono (specialty coffee and brunch) and Sunset Street (street food and delivery). - Four pieces per style: an A4 restaurant menu, an A3 cafe board, and a takeaway flyer in DL (99 x 210 mm) and A5 with a front and a back. - Five Word menus (A4) where prices sit on a right-aligned dotted tab, so they stay in a column when you change dish names. - Four PowerPoint files, one per piece, with one slide per style. Every dish, price and heading is a text box, and the slide size equals the paper size. - Four print PDFs of the same pieces with sample dishes, one page per style, flyers with front then back. - A one-sheet style overview with fonts and colours. Who it is for Restaurants, cafes, juice bars, cloud kitchens and takeaways that print their own menus, boards and delivery flyers. What it is NOT The dishes, prices and descriptions are fictional examples in AED: replace them. Nothing here is a halal, health or allergen claim, so add your own allergen notice as your licence and authority require. Prices are plain text and nothing calculates or connects to a system. The QR box on the flyers is a placeholder: no QR code is generated. The Word menus are simplified versions of the design (backgrounds and corner shapes stay in the PowerPoint and PDF files), and the PowerPoint slides are drawn shapes, not master layouts, so duplicate a slide to add a page. If you add dishes, text may run past its box: reduce the font size or move the box before printing. Checked by rendering every PDF page in a browser and re-opening the Word and PowerPoint files in code. Not opened in Word or PowerPoint before release. For menu pricing and food cost, see the Restaurant and Cafe Food Cost and Menu Pricing Workbook: this pack is design only. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
Four matching styles of staff ID badge, visitor pass and access card with front and back, in CR80 and A6. Photo and QR placeholders, A4 print sheets with crop marks, single-card PDFs for a print shop, and editable PowerPoint and SVG.
Staff without ID look unofficial to customers, and a visitors' book on a clipboard does not stop anyone walking through. This set gives an office, shop, school or site four matching badge styles you can print in house or hand to a print shop. What is inside - Four styles: Corporate Blue, Bold Yellow, Clean Mono and Warm Maroon. - Four card types per style, front and back: staff badge CR80 portrait (54 x 86 mm), access card CR80 landscape (86 x 54 mm), visitor pass CR80 portrait and visitor pass A6 (105 x 148 mm) with fields for visitor, host, date, pass number and time in and out. - Photo box and QR box placeholders, an ID number and valid-until field, and a return-address back with a signature line. - Four A4 print-sheet PDFs (one per card type, 8 pages each: front sheet then back sheet for every style) with crop marks. The back sheet is mirrored so the backs line up when you print on both sides, flipping on the long edge. - Four single-card PDFs at exact card size for a print shop or card printer. - 32 SVG files and four PowerPoint files (8 slides each) to edit the text, drop in a photo and paste your own QR code. - A one-sheet style overview. Who it is for Offices, clinics, schools, workshops, building sites and small hotels that issue staff and visitor passes. What it is NOT The ID number, dates, access levels, QR codes and photos are placeholders. The files do not create a QR code, do not link to a door or access-control system and do not program a card. The access card is a printed design only; the dark bar on the back marks a magnetic stripe area for reference, so delete it if your cards have none. CR80 cards carry no bleed (ask your print shop if it needs 3 mm), and A6 passes fill the A4 sheet to the edge, so they need a printer that prints edge to edge or a print shop. Staff photos and visitor details are personal data: decide who may see them and how long you keep them under the rules that apply to you. This is not data protection advice. Checked by rendering every sheet and card page in a browser and re-opening the PowerPoint files in code. Not tested on a card printer or an office printer. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
Four certificate types in six landscape A4 styles each: training completion, employee of the month, appreciation and attendance. Word files to type into, plus editable PowerPoint and SVG and print-ready PDFs. Grey bracket placeholders, no logos supplied.
A certificate typed in a plain Word page with a clip-art border is the first thing a trainee or employee pins to a wall. This set gives a company, school, training centre or event organiser 24 finished certificates to fill in and print in minutes. What is inside - Four types: Certificate of Completion, Employee of the Month, Certificate of Appreciation and Certificate of Attendance. - Six styles of each: Classic Gold Frame, Modern Side Panel, Geometric Corners, Minimal Line, Tessellate Border and Midnight and Gold. All landscape A4. - 24 Word files. The design is one shaded table inside a page border so it prints with the colours you see, with grey bracket placeholders for recipient, reason, date, signers and certificate number, a logo box and a seal box. - Four PowerPoint files (one per type, six slides each) and 24 SVG files, which match the PDFs most closely. - Four print PDFs (one per type, six pages each, one per style). - A one-sheet preview of all 24 designs. Who it is for Training centres, HR teams, schools, clubs, community groups and event organisers. What it is NOT The certificates make no claim that a course is accredited or approved: do not use the words accredited or certified unless you are entitled to, and check the rules of the body that regulates your training. The Word versions are simplified: triangles and the side panel cannot be drawn exactly in a Word table, so Geometric Corners becomes a two-colour frame and Tessellate Border uses a gold page border, while PowerPoint, SVG and PDF hold the full designs. Office printers cannot print to the paper edge, and Midnight and Gold uses a lot of ink. There is no Arabic wording in the certificates; Arabic names type in right to left in Word and PowerPoint, but check the layout and have a native reader check any Arabic wording you add. Word may add a blank second page where the table fills the page: if so, reduce the space after the last line. This was not checked in Word. Checked by rendering every PDF page in a browser and re-opening every Word and PowerPoint file in code. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
30 designed templates sharing one look and carrying no brand: 18 square posts and 12 stories for announcements, offers, quotes, hiring, events and testimonials. Editable SVG and PowerPoint, PNG previews, colour swaps. Placeholders only.
Most small businesses post a phone photo with a line of text and wonder why the feed looks messy. This kit gives a shop, salon, cafe or service business a consistent set of 30 designs to retype and post, without hiring a designer for each one. What is inside - 18 square posts (1080 x 1080 px): now open, new product, opening hours, holiday closure, thank you, percent off, buy one get one, flash sale, bundle price, free delivery, two quote designs, two hiring designs, event invitation, workshop and two testimonial designs. - 12 stories (1080 x 1920 px): now open, new arrival, percent off, flash sale with countdown boxes, weekly offers list, quote, hiring, event, opening hours, testimonial, a this or that question and a closed notice, with key text kept toward the middle so app buttons do not cover it. - 30 SVG files with live text, 30 PNG previews at half size, and two PowerPoint files (18 square slides, 12 story slides) with every item as a text box or shape. - A COLOUR-SWAPS.txt sheet: the eight colours used and three alternative sets, to re-colour all 30 files with Replace in Files in any text editor. - An overview PDF of all 30 designs with their file names. Who it is for A business owner or a part-time social media helper who wants posts to look consistent in one afternoon. What it is NOT It is unbranded: no logos, photos, slogans or fonts you cannot redistribute (system fonts Georgia and Arial). All text, dates, prices, offers and quotes are placeholders. Testimonial designs are blank on purpose: post only real comments, with the customer's permission, and the kit has no star ratings, customer counts or awards. The name field on the second testimonial shows Arabic words for customer name as an example, and these need a native read before use. If you advertise a discount, make sure it is accurate and that you can honour it. Image size rules for each app change, so check the current sizes where you post. The SVGs may open as flat pictures in Canva, so use the PowerPoint files or Figma for editing; this was not tested in Canva. It does not schedule or post anything. Checked by rendering every design as a PNG in a browser, parsing every SVG as XML and re-opening the PowerPoint files in code. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
One designed visual system for winning work: a 12-slide PowerPoint (cover, agenda, numbers, timeline, team, pricing, case study, contact) and a matching Word proposal document. Use it as a proposal, company profile or capability statement. Placeholders only.
A proposal sent as a plain Word file loses to one that looks prepared. This set gives a small UAE service firm, contractor or consultancy a proposal deck and a matching Word document in one design, so the pitch and the paperwork agree. What is inside - A 12-slide PowerPoint deck (16:9): cover, agenda, section divider, text and image, three pillars, numbers, timeline, team, pricing table, case study, capabilities grid and contact. - The same 12 slides as SVG files, a slide notes file and a 12-slide preview PDF. - A matching Word proposal document (A4 portrait): cover, about us, your needs, our approach, scope, timeline, investment table, terms and an acceptance block. It uses Heading 1 and Heading 2 styles, bullet lists, tables and page numbers, so Word's navigation pane and table of contents work. - Grey bracket placeholders, a logo circle, photo boxes and a QR box. Fonts are Georgia for headings and Segoe UI for body, both system fonts on Windows. How it differs from other Zeyto products The Quotation and Proposal Template Set is plain Word templates for pricing and scope wording. This set is the design: a visual deck and a styled proposal document. Use the wording from that set and drop it into these layouts if you want both. What it is NOT The slides are finished slides made of shapes and text boxes, not PowerPoint master layouts, so they will not appear in the New Slide menu: duplicate a slide to reuse a layout. The pricing tables do not add up, so type the totals. Prices are in AED, and VAT at 5 percent is shown where it applies to you: confirm with your accountant how VAT applies to the work you quote. The terms section is a starting list, not legal advice. Nothing claims a licence, certification, client, result or award: add only what is true and that you can prove, and use figures on the numbers slide that you can prove. On a Mac or phone, Word and PowerPoint substitute a close font. Checked by rendering the slides in a browser, re-opening the Word and PowerPoint files in code and an approximate Word render. Not opened in PowerPoint or Word before release. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
Eight ready-to-print signs in A4 and A3: opening hours, payment methods accepted (text only), wet floor, CCTV, queue, thank you, returns policy and be right back. Print as is and write in the details, or edit in PowerPoint.
Hand-written notices taped to a door look temporary and get ignored. This set gives a shop, cafe, salon or office eight designed signs you can print today and fill in with a marker or in PowerPoint. What is inside - Eight signs: opening hours (a seven-day table), payment methods accepted (tick boxes, text only), caution wet floor, CCTV in operation, please queue here, thank you, returns and exchanges policy (blank lines for your own policy) and be right back (a clock to write the time on). - Each sign in A4 and A3 portrait. Two print PDFs (A4 and A3), one sign per page, so you can print only the pages you need. - One PowerPoint file with eight A4 slides and 16 SVG files (A4 and A3). Change the slide size to A3 in PowerPoint to scale up. - A one-sheet overview of all eight signs. Who it is for Retail shops, cafes, salons, clinics, offices and workshops that need clear notices at the door, counter and floor. What it is NOT The CCTV sign is a notice layout only: this set does not say whether you need a sign, what it must say, or how recordings must be handled. Check with your landlord, your licensing authority and the authority that applies to your premises, and do not assume copied wording is enough. The returns sign has blank lines for your own policy: make sure it is fair and follows the consumer rules that apply to you. This is not legal advice. The payment sign has no card scheme or bank logos: tick only what you accept. Arabic lines appear under the English headings on seven signs and are set right to left: these Arabic phrases need a native read before you print them. Office printers cannot print to the paper edge, so coloured borders show a white margin unless a print shop prints them, and the CCTV sign uses a lot of dark ink. Checked by rendering every PDF page in a browser, reading back A4 and A3 page sizes, parsing every SVG as XML and re-opening the PowerPoint file in code. Not tested on a printer. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
Product card layouts, catalogue covers and a profile photo in three colourways, plus an A4 price list in five styles with a fill-in table, as Word and PDF. Includes eight WhatsApp message templates. Design and wording only, not connected to WhatsApp.
Customers on WhatsApp ask 'send me your price list', and many small businesses answer with a phone photo of a handwritten sheet. This kit gives a seller proper product cards, covers and a printable price list that look the same across the chat, the catalogue and the counter. What is inside - Four square product card layouts (1080 x 1080 px: photo on top, full photo with price badge, split photo left, text only) in three colourways each: 12 SVG files and 12 PNG templates with a photo box, product name and AED price. - Six catalogue and collection covers (catalogue, new, best sellers, offers, gifts, prices) and a 640 px profile photo with a circle-safe logo area, each in three colourways: 21 SVG and 21 PNG files. - An A4 price list in five styles (Grid, Bold, Soft, Line and Dark): five Word files with a 22-row fill-in table, one five-page print PDF, five PNG previews and five SVG files. Three sample rows show how to fill it. - Eight short WhatsApp message templates: sending the price list, new arrivals, an offer, order received, item not available, delivery update, thank you and an after-hours reply. - A one-sheet overview of everything. Who it is for Home businesses, boutiques, food sellers, traders and wholesalers who sell through WhatsApp Business and Instagram. What it is NOT It is design and wording only. It is not made by or connected to WhatsApp and does not use its name or logo as a design element. The Word table does not calculate and is not linked to any catalogue, stock or accounting system. The PNG cards are blank templates: add your photo and text in an SVG editor or in PowerPoint over the PNG. Image requirements differ between apps and change, so check the current ones before uploading. State whether prices include VAT in the notes line, and confirm with your accountant how VAT applies to your prices. Follow WhatsApp's business policy and any rules for marketing messages before you message many people. This is not legal advice. Checked by rendering every PNG and PDF in a browser, parsing every SVG as XML and re-opening the Word files in code. Not opened in Word, Figma or WhatsApp before release. Version 1.0, November 2026. Single business use, no resale or redistribution. Support: support@zeyto.app.
A 10-sheet Excel system that builds a 13-week bank balance from your receivables, payables and recurring items, re-runs it under five scenarios, flags the first week cash drops under your minimum, and rolls forward every Monday with actuals.
Most small businesses forecast cash on one sheet with one hopeful line, and the first warning is a returned cheque. This workbook builds the 13 weeks from the invoices and bills you actually have, shows what happens if customers pay late or suppliers tighten terms, and tells you which week cash falls under your minimum and by how much. What is inside - Settings: week 1 start (a Monday), opening bank balance, minimum cash, undrawn facility, number of closed weeks and a five-row scenario table (Base, Slow collection, Delayed supplier, Suppliers tighten terms and a case of your own). - Receipts and Payments: up to 200 rows each, dated when you honestly expect the cash to move, including post-dated cheque clearing dates. - Recurring: up to 40 repeating items such as payroll, rent, loan instalments, VAT return payments, insurance and retainers. Enter the next due date and the workbook repeats it. - Forecast: the 13 weeks, week by week, from opening balance to closing balance, with the minimum-cash test on every week. - Scenarios: collection delay in days, share never collected, supplier payment shift and a recurring-receipts scale, with all five cases side by side and a chart. - Actuals: type last week's real receipts, real payments and real bank balance, then raise 'weeks closed' by one. Closed weeks use actuals, the next week opens on the real balance, and accuracy percentages show where your assumptions were too hopeful. - Dashboard (two native charts) and a Checks sheet that confirms the lists tie to the forecast. How it is deeper than the cheaper 13-Week Cash Flow Forecast template: that one is a single-case grid. This one adds the recurring-item engine, the five scenarios, the facility and minimum-cash logic and the weekly actual versus forecast roll-forward that keeps the forecast honest after week 1. Facts and settings: figures are cash, so keep VAT inside invoice and bill amounts and enter your VAT return payment as a recurring row. The Instructions sheet notes the FTA guide timing for VAT returns and tells you to confirm your own period and date. Corporate tax is not modelled: add its payment date as a one-off recurring row. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: the workbook was recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 104 outputs (weekly balances, scenario results, alerts) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: weekly buckets only (no daily view), the dates and amounts are the ones you enter, and it does not forecast sales for you.
A 12-sheet Excel control workbook for the monthly close: owners and working-day due dates, sub-ledger tie-outs, accruals and prepayment schedules, bank reconciliation, flux explanations and a sign-off page that stays BLOCKED until every gate is closed.
Month-end close usually lives in a checklist plus the memory of one accountant. Tasks are late without anyone seeing it, a control account differs from its report, a bank reconciliation has stale items, and a large movement has no explanation until the auditor asks. This workbook turns the close into gates you can see: who owes what by which date, what does not tie, and what is still unexplained. Sign-off stays BLOCKED until every gate is closed. What is inside - Setup: period end, status date, weekend code and holiday list, flux thresholds, tie-out tolerance and your team names. - Checklist: the standard task list with owner, working-day due date, status, completion date, days late and a flag. Due dates use WORKDAY.INTL with your own weekend code and holidays. - TB: paste this month's and last month's closing trial balance (up to 150 accounts). Profit and loss accounts take a comparison movement. - TieOuts: each control account against the balance from its sub-ledger or report, with a tolerance you set. Prepayment and accrual rows link themselves. - Accruals and Prepayments: schedules with support flags, monthly charge, months expensed and remaining balance. - BankRec: up to six bank accounts, bank-side and book-side reconciling items, stale-item flags and the difference to the ledger. - Flux: every large movement is flagged and needs a written explanation of a minimum length, so 'ok' does not pass. - SignOff and Dashboard (three native charts) and a Checks sheet. The example copy deliberately leaves a few items open so you can see the gates working. How it is deeper than the cheaper close checklists (the Month-End Close Checklist Pack and the bookkeeping calendar): those list tasks to tick. This workbook checks the numbers behind the ticks, with tie-outs, reconciliations, flux gates and a sign-off that refuses to clear while anything is open. Facts and settings: accounting treatment is yours. Prepayment months, thresholds and tolerances are settings, and the sign-off is a control aid, not an audit opinion. Check treatment with your accountant or auditor. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 278 outputs (tie-outs, schedules, bank reconciliation, flux flags, gates, dashboard series) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference. The due dates use WORKDAY.INTL, which the independent engine could not evaluate, so those dates were checked against an Excel-rule working-day loop in Python but not by the engine, and the checked copy used fixed due dates. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: it posts nothing and does not connect to your accounting system, you paste figures in. Examples show a trading company, so rename tasks for your business.
A 13-sheet Excel pack: paste the monthly trial balance movements, map accounts once, and get month and YTD variances with red, amber and green lights, a department view, commentary prompts, a full-year forecast and a one-page A4 board report.
A budget tracker that you retype from the ledger every month stops being used by April. The real work is turning the trial balance into the same report lines as the budget, deciding which variances matter, and getting a short written reason from the budget holder. This pack does the mapping once, then each month you paste the export and read the result. What is inside - Setup and Lines: financial year, first month of the year (so non-January years work), reporting month, amber and red thresholds, a minimum amount below which variances are ignored and the report lines and departments. - Mapping: map every ledger account to a report line once (up to 200 accounts). Balance sheet accounts map to '(Not in P&L)'. - Budget: approved budget by line, department and month, entered as positive numbers. - Import: paste movements as period, account, department and debits minus credits, up to 1,000 rows. Add each new month below the last. - Pack and Dept: month and year-to-date actual, budget and variance, with favourable always positive, plus a department view and a full-year forecast of year-to-date actual plus remaining budget. - Trend, Commentary and Board: monthly trend, an auto-written prompt for each variance that needs a comment (with a minimum comment length), and a board page with two native charts. - Checks: unmapped accounts, unknown departments and totals that do not tie to the import. How it is deeper than the cheaper Monthly Budget vs Actual Tracker and the Departmental Budgeting Workbook: the tracker is a typed grid and the departmental workbook builds the budget. This pack takes the actual side straight from your trial balance by mapping, and adds the lights, commentary discipline, forecast and board page. Facts and settings: lines, thresholds and treatment are yours to set. The pack reports management figures, not statutory accounts. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 362 outputs (mapped actuals, month and YTD variance, lights, department split, forecast, trend and board series) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: one budget version, one reporting currency, and the example covers seven months of an invented trading company.
A 36-month linked profit and loss, balance sheet and cash flow driven by about forty assumptions, with three scenarios side by side, an automatic revolving facility and a balance check on every month. No circular references, no macros.
Lenders, investors and partners ask three questions: will it make money, will it balance and how much cash does it need. A revenue line copied forward answers none of them. This model links profit and loss, balance sheet and cash flow, balances them by construction and shows how much borrowing each scenario needs. What is inside - Assumptions: revenue start and growth for two streams, seasonality, cost ratios, staff, rent, depreciation, receivable, inventory and payable days, a term loan, dividends and tax settings. All in AED excluding VAT. - Opening: your last closing balance sheet, with retained earnings as the balancing figure. - Scenarios: growth, cost and working-capital changes for Base, Upside and Downside, which you can rename and change. - Model_A, Model_B and Model_C: three full 36-month models, one per scenario, so you compare cash, profit and borrowing side by side. - A revolving facility that draws automatically when cash would fall below your minimum and repays when cash allows, with a facility limit and a funding-gap line when the limit is not enough. Interest is charged on the previous month's balance, so there is no circular reference to switch on. - Annual: three years for one model. Dashboard: all three scenarios compared with charts. Checks: the balance check for every month and every scenario. How it is deeper than the cheaper Business Plan Workbook, 3-Year Forecast: that workbook is annual or driver-light. This is a monthly integrated model with a working capital engine, a debt and revolver schedule, a tax payment lag and three scenarios running at once. Facts and settings: the corporate tax rate and the profit band are settings you enter. Verify the current rule with the FTA or your adviser before showing a lender a tax line. VAT cash timing, deferred tax, leases, multiple loans, foreign currency and payroll detail are not modelled. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 3,531 outputs (every monthly statement line for the three scenarios, the revolver, tax, annual and dashboard figures) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference, and the balance sheet balanced in every month. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: it is a planning model, not an audit-ready forecast, and it does not replace a lender's own format. It suits a trading or services company, not a manufacturer with bills of materials or a group.
A 7-sheet Excel lab for up to 12 products: contribution margin, break-even units and revenue at your sales mix, margin of safety, the price change that reaches a profit target with and without a volume response, and sensitivity tables. No goal seek or data tables.
'What price do I need?' is usually answered with a guess or a one-product calculator. Real businesses sell a mix, carry card fees and commissions as a percentage of price, and know that a higher price loses some volume. This lab shows break-even at your actual mix and solves for the price change that reaches your profit target. What is inside - Inputs: target profit, an elasticity estimate, capacity, and per-product price, discount, variable cost, variable percentage (card fees, commission) and monthly units, plus up to 15 fixed costs. - Mix: contribution per unit, weighted contribution, break-even units and revenue at your mix, margin of safety and the product-level split. - Pricing: the uniform price change that reaches the target. With a volume response the profit becomes a quadratic in the price change, which the sheet solves with the quadratic formula. Section 3 gives the price per product. - Sensitivity: profit under price and volume moves, and break-even under price and fixed-cost moves. - Dashboard with three native charts, and Checks. How it is deeper than the cheaper Startup Costs and Break-even Planner and the Pricing and Margin Calculator Suite: they work one product at a time. This lab works on a sales mix and models the volume response to price instead of holding volume fixed. Facts and settings: elasticity is your estimate and is the same for every product. Fixed costs are held constant at every volume, so add a step cost if you pass capacity. Taxes are not modelled and prices are excluding VAT. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 248 outputs (contribution, break-even, margin of safety, required price change, per-product prices, sensitivity grids and chart series) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: the mix is held fixed, one elasticity for all products, and results are a guide for discussion, not a forecast.
A 9-sheet Excel workbook that turns one list of subscribers into a monthly MRR waterfall, logo and revenue churn, net MRR retention, CAC, LTV, payback, cohort retention tables and a plan breakdown, with three reconciliations built in.
Subscription businesses are usually judged on one MRR number, while the questions that decide survival are how much revenue leaks each month, what a customer costs to win and whether cohorts stay. Billing exports do not answer those. This workbook does it from a plain customer list. What is inside - Settings: first month of data, months of data (up to 24), gross margin, the averaging window and your plan list. - Customers: one row per customer (up to 600) with start date and MRR at start. Add one change date and MRR after change for an upgrade or downgrade, and an end date for a churned customer. - Spend: sales and marketing spend by month, which drives CAC. - MRR: the monthly waterfall of opening, new, expansion, contraction, churn and closing MRR, with logo churn, revenue churn and net MRR retention. - Cohorts: retention by start month, for logos and for revenue. - Segments: which plans carry the revenue and the churn. Dashboard (four native charts) and Checks. - Reconciliation: the waterfall against a recomputation from customer rows, the cohort tables against the waterfall and the plan table against total MRR. How it is deeper than the KPI Dashboard Workbook for UAE Business Owners: that one tracks KPIs you type in. This one derives the subscription KPIs from customer-level rows, so every number can be traced back to who started, changed and left. Facts and settings: MRR is the monthly equivalent you enter, in AED excluding VAT. LTV uses gross margin you set divided by the average monthly logo churn over the window, so a short history gives an estimate, not a guarantee. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 2,488 outputs (monthly waterfall, churn, retention, CAC, LTV, payback, cohort tables and plan table for 180 invented customers over 24 months) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: one change event per customer, no annual prepayments, usage fees, discounts, refunds or taxes. Customers who joined before the window count as the opening base and are left out of cohort averages.
An 8-sheet Excel workbook that values closing stock and cost of goods sold from your movement log under both weighted average and FIFO, shows the difference, reconciles to your ledger and physical count, and tests net realisable value per item.
At year end someone has to explain why stock on the ledger is not stock on the shelf, and which cost method moves profit. Stock count sheets answer the first half. This workbook values the stock under both methods from the same movement log and shows the gap, the count variance and the write-down. What is inside - Settings: period dates, the method you want in the headline figure and your ledger balance. - Items: up to 100 items with opening quantity, opening unit cost, counted quantity and, if you want the write-down test, the net realisable value per unit. - Movements: up to 1,000 receipts, issues and adjustments, oldest first, with a Problem column that flags missing items, bad dates and issues that exceed stock. - Valuation: per item, the weighted average cost recalculated after every receipt and the FIFO cost of each issue, with closing value and cost of goods sold under both methods, the difference between them, the count variance and the NRV write-down. - Reconcile: the roll-forward from opening to closing and the comparison with your ledger balance. - Dashboard (three native charts) and Checks. How it is deeper than the cheaper Stock Count Sheets and Reorder Planner: that product counts and reorders stock. This one values it, with a true moving weighted average and a closed-form FIFO layer calculation that needs no macros. Facts and settings: weighted average here is the perpetual (moving) average, not a periodic average. Net realisable value is your own estimate. Add landed costs into the unit cost before you paste. Choose the method with your accountant and follow your accounting standards. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 407 outputs (per-item weighted average and FIFO cost of goods sold and closing value, count variance, NRV write-down, reconciliation and chart series for 24 invented items) were compared with a separate Python model that simulates the FIFO queue and the moving average, with no difference. Because the 1,000-row workbook is very slow to evaluate with that engine, the check was run on a copy with 420 movement rows built from identical formulas, and the shipped file has 1,000 pre-built rows. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: one cost per receipt line, no batches, expiry, serial numbers or multiple warehouses, and returns are entered as Adjust in or Adjust out. Calculation can feel slow in Google Sheets with all 1,000 rows used.
A 10-sheet Excel tracker for up to 30 projects: budget by cost category, costs and billing to date, percent complete, earned revenue, over and under billing, forecast margin from estimate to complete, loss provisions, a stress test and a portfolio view.
Project businesses often learn a job lost money only after the final invoice. Billing ahead of the work hides a problem, and work done but not billed hides an asset. This tracker shows for every project where it stands at your report date: what it has earned, what it has billed, what it will make and which projects need attention. What is inside - Settings: report date and the flag thresholds for margin erosion, overrun, underbilling and the stress percentage. - Projects: one row per project with contract value, approved variations, budget by cost category, percent complete method and estimate to complete. - Costs and Billing: paste project costs (date, project, category, amount) and invoices (date, amount, cash received). Rows dated after the report date are ignored, so you can roll back to any month end. - WIP: for each project the percent complete, earned revenue, over or under billing, forecast profit and margin, profit recognised to date, loss provision and a stress test. - CostControl: cost against budget by category for each project. - Portfolio and Dashboard (three native charts): totals, flag counts, the five lowest margins and monthly cost and billing. - Checks: unregistered projects, bad dates, receipts above invoices and ties between each view and the logs. How it is deeper than the cheaper Quotation Profitability and Job Costing Workbook: that product costs a job before and after. This tracker runs the whole portfolio at any month end with over and under billing and loss provisions. It is a portfolio tool, not a per-project earned value app. Facts and settings: it uses cost-to-cost percent complete or a percentage you enter. Variations must be approved before you include them. It does not replace your revenue recognition policy under IFRS 15 or your auditor's view. Retention, advances, claims and multi-currency are not modelled. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 522 outputs (every project line, category view, portfolio total, flag count and chart series for 12 invented projects) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: the estimate to complete is your judgement and drives the answer, so the tracker is only as good as that estimate.
An 11-sheet Excel calculator for up to 30 reps and three plans: five marginal or retroactive tiers, attainment gates, caps, quota credit by category, split deals, adjustments, clawbacks by age, a payout curve and a printable statement for every rep.
Commission disputes start when the rule lives in a spreadsheet nobody dares to touch: tiers, quotas, split deals, a cancelled deal three months later. This calculator keeps the rules on one sheet and shows each rep exactly how the payment was built, and lets you test a plan design before rolling it out. What is inside - Plan: period dates, up to three plans with five tiers, rates, a minimum attainment gate, an optional cap and the choice of marginal or retroactive, credit percentages by deal category (for example renewals at 40%) and the clawback schedule by days since the deal. - Team and Deals: up to 30 reps with plan and quota, and up to 1,500 deals. Mark a team deal as split and list each rep's share (up to 200 split rows). - Adjustments and Clawbacks: bonuses and corrections (up to 60) and cancelled deals with the commission already paid (up to 100). - Calc: attainment, tier reached, bands, commission by method, gate, cap, accelerator, net commission, balance due and any carry-forward, for every rep. - Statements: pick a rep and print the calculation, deals, adjustments, clawbacks and balance due on one page. - Plan payout curve: how each plan pays from 0% to 200% attainment, plus a Dashboard (three native charts) and Checks for split totals, unknown reps and tier order. How it is deeper than the cheaper Salon Spa Commission Tracker and the Real Estate Agent Commission tracker: those apply one flat rate per person. This one handles tiered plans, accelerators, caps, team splits and clawbacks over the lifetime of a deal. Facts and settings: commission is not a payroll calculation and has no end-of-service or WPS logic. Have your plan reviewed by HR or legal: employment law and contract terms govern what you may claw back. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and 341 outputs (credited bookings, attainment, bands, both methods, gates, caps, clawbacks by age, balances, the payout curve, one statement and the top-12 chart data for 12 invented reps) were compared with a separate Python model, with no difference. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts and print layout were not viewed on screen. Limits: one quota per rep per period with no proration for part periods or leave, no multi-period accelerators or draws recovered over time, no currency conversion, and a statement prints one rep at a time showing the first 15 full-credit deals.
An 11-sheet Excel workbook that turns your invoice lines into profit by customer and product: discount against list, gross margin, rebates, cost to serve and cost of waiting for payment, with ABC classes, Pareto charts, a leakage waterfall and a discount-cap test.
Your biggest customer may be your least profitable. Revenue rankings hide discount depth, rebates, small drop-size orders and 90-day terms. This workbook shows, from your own invoice lines, which customers and products actually earn money after those costs, and what a discount cap would change. What is inside - Settings: period, target gross margin, cost of capital, the A and B thresholds for ABC and the discount-cap test (the cap and the share of that volume you expect to lose). - Customers and Products: up to 100 each, with payment days, rebate percentage, cost per order and cost-to-serve percentage per customer and standard cost per product. - Sales: up to 2,500 invoice lines with date, invoice, customer, product, quantity, list price and net price. Credit notes are negative quantities, and a unit cost override is allowed per line. - CustomerAnalysis and ProductAnalysis: revenue, discount against list, gross margin, rebate, cost to serve, cost of waiting for payment, contribution, class A, B or C, and flags such as LOSS AFTER COSTS and BELOW TARGET GM. - Pareto: customers and products ranked by revenue with cumulative share and a chart for each. - Leakage: the bridge from list-price revenue to contribution, gross margin by discount band, the cap what-if, the ten customers with the biggest margin gap and the ten products with the most discount given. - Dashboard (four native charts) and Checks. How it is deeper than the cheaper Marketplace Price and Margin Calculator and the Multi-Channel Profit and ROAS app: those look at channel and listing margin. This workbook looks at who buys and on what terms, going beyond gross margin to the costs of serving and waiting for each customer. Facts and settings: cost to serve is a simple allocation you set, not activity-based costing. Unit costs are standard or overridden, not batch costs. Sales taxes are excluded. The cap what-if ignores competitors and customer reaction beyond the volume loss you enter. Use it to find questions to ask, not as proof. What it is NOT: it is a calculation tool, not accounting, tax or legal advice. It is not connected to your bank or accounting system, it is not an FTA-approved system and it is not an e-invoicing tool (e-invoicing is on the Zeyto roadmap only). Where a rule matters it is a setting you enter, with a note to confirm it with the FTA, your accountant or your auditor. Two workbooks: an EXAMPLE copy filled with invented data so you can see every sheet working, and a BLANK copy with the same formulas ready for your own data. Formulas only: no macros, no volatile functions, no add-ins. Input cells are coloured, formula sheets are protected without a password, and a Checks sheet turns green only when every list ties out. How it was checked: recalculated with an independent Python formula engine and compared with a separate Python model, 1,038 outputs in all, for 36 invented customers and 20 products (every customer and product line, ABC class, Pareto order, bridge step, discount band, cap what-if and top-ten list). Because the 2,500-line workbook is slow to evaluate with that engine, the check was run on a copy with 1,000 invoice-line rows built from identical formulas, and the shipped file has 2,500 pre-built rows. There is no Excel or LibreOffice on the build machine, so it was not opened in them and the charts were not viewed on screen. Limits: the numbers are only as good as the cost-to-serve and rebate percentages you set, and a customer who loses money may still be worth keeping for reasons the workbook cannot see. The example data has no customer that loses money after costs, so the LOSS flag appears only when your own data produces one.
Offline app that counts leave days (weekends, holidays, half days), keeps a balance per employee from rules you set, runs approvals and shows a team calendar. Prints a leave record per person. Works by double-click, data stays on your device.
Leave Manager is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for UAE companies that still track leave in WhatsApp messages, paper forms or a spreadsheet someone recalculates by hand. You enter your leave rules once as settings, add your people, and the app counts the days, keeps a balance per employee, runs approvals and shows who is off on a team calendar. The problem it removes: the monthly argument over "how many days does she have left?" and two people in one team being off together by surprise. Counting leave by hand across weekends, public holidays, half days and a mid-year joining date is slow and easy to get wrong. What is inside: - Requests with approve, reject and cancel, a decision note, and an overlap check (a morning half and an afternoon half on the same day are allowed) - Balances per employee and leave type to any date: entitlement, carried forward, accrued to date, approved, pending, balance now, left for the year - Entitlement and accrual as settings: monthly accrual by completed month or whole entitlement upfront, rounding, a carry-forward cap, a leave year starting on the 1st of any month - Leave types you define: paid or unpaid, a yearly limit or none, working days or calendar days - A public-holiday list you type or import; weekend days you choose (Saturday and Sunday, Friday and Saturday, one day, any pattern) - A team calendar by month with a count of who is off each day, department filter and print - A printable A4 leave record per employee (or all, one page each) with balances, leave taken and signature lines - CSV import of people (name, department, join_date as DD/MM/YYYY) and holidays with a preview and line-numbered errors; CSV export of requests and balances - Example data, example CSV files (one with deliberate errors), JSON backup and restore, Clear everything Rules are settings, not built in. A fresh install leaves entitlements blank and says so. The example data shows 22 days of annual leave and 5 days of compassionate leave as example values only. Check the real entitlements, accrual, carry-over and sick-leave rules for your case with MOHRE, your PRO or your lawyer. Who it is for: owners, HR officers and office managers of companies from about 5 to a few hundred staff who want a clear leave record without buying an HR system. What it is NOT: legal advice, a payroll tool, or connected to any government system. It sends no reminders, does not calculate leave pay or end-of-service amounts, and the leave year starts on the 1st of a month, not on each person's anniversary. Sick leave is tracked by days only. The Employee Leave and Absence Tracker is an Excel workbook with absence-pattern scoring; this is a separate offline app with approvals, accrual by completed month, validation, imports, a calendar and printable records. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted browser tests in Chromium (36 checks through the real screens: leap-day joiners, month ends, DD/MM/YYYY parsing, two weekend patterns, a changed leave year, overlaps, half days, approvals, CSV import with errors, backup and restore, print preview and PDF output) and an independent Python (datetime and Decimal) recalculation of 80 balance rows from 40 random cases, zero mismatches. The test also passed in WebKit (35 checks, PDF step skipped). Firefox could not be launched in our test environment, so it is untested. Not tested on a real phone, in Edge or in desktop Safari; layout was checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app: weekly timesheets, overtime, rest-day and public-holiday hours from rules you set, pay-hours and overtime pay per person, payroll CSV export and printable forms. Works by double-click, no internet, data stays on your device.
Timesheet and Overtime Calculator is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for UAE businesses that collect in and out times on paper, WhatsApp or loose spreadsheets and then rebuild regular, overtime, rest-day and public-holiday hours by hand every month. You enter or import the times once; the app classifies every day, shows the hours per person and period, works out weighted pay-hours and overtime pay, and exports a payroll CSV. It also prints blank and filled weekly timesheets for signature. The problem it removes: month-end overtime counting. Doing it by hand or with fragile formulas costs hours, and one wrong week (an overnight shift, a holiday that fell on a weekend, a break forgotten) becomes a payroll dispute. Here the rules are settings you enter once and every day follows them. What is inside: - Weekly sheet: pick a person and a week, type in / out / break for seven days; net hours, day type and the regular / overtime / rest-day / holiday split update as you type - Rules as settings: regular daily or weekly hours, daily or weekly overtime method, multipliers for overtime, rest days and public holidays, rounding to 5, 10, 15 or 30 minutes, an alert for over-long days, weekend days, week start day - Public-holiday list you type or import; a holiday beats a rest day beats a working day - Overnight shifts, leap-day dates and DD/MM/YYYY entry with clear error messages - Pay-hours summary per person for any period, weighted pay-hours, overtime pay due per person from an hourly rate or monthly basic divided by your monthly-hours divisor, all in exact whole fils - CSV import of staff and of timesheet entries with a preview and line-numbered errors before anything is applied; payroll CSV and entries CSV export - Printable A4: blank weekly timesheet forms for all staff, filled timesheet, period summary - Example data, example CSV files (including one with deliberate errors), JSON backup and restore, Clear everything Rules are settings, not built in. Fresh installs leave regular hours, overtime method and multipliers blank on purpose, and the app warns wherever a result depends on them. UAE working-hour and overtime rules depend on your emirate, free zone, sector and contracts and change: verify every value with MOHRE / your PRO / your lawyer. The example data uses example values only. Who it is for: office managers, HR officers, shop, warehouse, clinic and restaurant managers and small payroll teams. What it is NOT: legal or payroll advice; not a WPS file generator; not a biometric or time clock (people or you type the times, or import a CSV); not connected to any government system. Night-shift premiums, tiered overtime bands and one-person split rows per day are not built in. The existing Staff Attendance, Overtime and Shift Planner is an Excel workbook; this is a separate offline app with import, validation, exact integer maths and printed forms, and does not replace payroll software. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted browser tests in Chromium (45 checks through the real screens, including date, leap-year, week-boundary, weekend-setting, rounding, CSV import, export, backup and print flows) and an independent Python (Decimal and datetime) recalculation of 150 random staff-period summaries (hours by category, weighted pay-hours and amounts) with zero mismatches. The test pass also ran in WebKit (43 checks). Firefox could not be launched in our test environment, so it is untested there. Not tested on a real phone or in Microsoft Edge or desktop Safari; layout was checked at 375 px and 1280 px widths.
Offline app: type or import the month's payroll, issue auto-numbered A4 payslips with net pay in words, batch print one or two per page, and reconcile the month against your payroll total. Works by double-click, no internet, data stays on your device.
Payslip Generator is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for UAE businesses that still build payslips one by one in Word or Excel, copy the wrong month's figures, or cannot say which payslip numbers they have issued. You enter or import the month's amounts once; the app adds up gross, deductions and net exactly, gives every issued payslip its own number, prints single payslips or the whole month as a batch, and checks the month's totals against your payroll sheet. The problem it removes: payslip month-end. Retyping figures per person invites mistakes and duplicate or missing numbers. Here the payroll is one grid, each number is assigned once and never reused, and the batch prints in one go. What is inside: - Payroll grid: one row per employee, one column per pay component, live gross, deductions and net per person and column totals; copy last month into empty rows - Pay components are yours: rename, add, remove and reorder earnings and deductions (defaults are only generic names) - Payroll CSV import with a preview: amounts like 1,250.50 or AED 800, an optional period column, new columns offered as new components, and every problem listed by line number before anything is applied - Issue with auto-numbering such as PS-2026-10-0001: assigned once, kept when you reopen and reissue, voided numbers stay in a register and are never reused; a negative net needs your confirmation - Printable A4 payslips: header with your company details, employee block, earnings and deductions tables, gross, total deductions, net pay and net in words in English (Ten thousand six hundred dirhams and fifty fils only), optional signature lines, account shown as last four characters only; print one, ticked ones or all issued, one or two per page - Reconciliation: totals per component, headcount, a control total with the difference, and a checks list (missing bank details, negative net, active staff with no row, duplicate codes); payroll and number register CSV export - Employees tab with CSV import; example data, example CSV files (including one with deliberate errors), JSON backup and restore, Clear everything Everything you type is yours: the app only adds and subtracts the amounts you enter. It does not calculate salaries, overtime, absences or gratuity, and fresh installs carry no pay figures of their own. Check the content of your payslips and your record keeping with MOHRE / your PRO / your accountant. Who it is for: owners, office managers, HR officers and accountants of UAE businesses that pay staff monthly. What it is NOT: it does not produce a WPS or SIF file and does not connect to a bank, payroll system or government system; it is not legal, tax or payroll advice; payslips are printed or saved as PDF by your browser, not emailed; Arabic and bilingual layouts are not in this version. The existing WPS Payroll Workbook is an Excel workbook aimed at the WPS file side; this is a separate offline app for numbered payslips, batch printing and reconciliation with exact integer maths, and it does not replace payroll software. Data stays in your browser on this device: back it up with Export after issuing payslips. Verified by us: scripted browser tests in Chromium (48 checks through the real screens, including numbering across issue, void and reissue, PDF page counts, CSV import problems, backup and restore) with the same flows run in WebKit (45 checks, PDF counting is Chromium only), and an independent Python (Decimal) recalculation of 40 random payroll tables (129 imported rows, tricky number formats) and 106 amounts in words with zero mismatches. Firefox could not be launched in our test environment, so it is untested there. Not tested on a real phone or in Microsoft Edge or desktop Safari; layout was checked at 375 px and 1280 px widths.
Offline app that turns role templates into dated task lists for every joiner and leaver. Owners, due dates, completion %, overdue alerts, a printable exit clearance form with sign-offs and an asset return list. Runs in your browser, data stays on your device.
A new hire or a leaver needs the same twenty small things done by five different people, and the list usually lives in someone's head or in a WhatsApp thread. When one item is missed, the laptop is not returned, the access card stays active or the employee turns up on day one with no login. This app keeps the lists, dates them from one anchor date and shows who is late. How it works: you keep templates by role (office, sales and field, warehouse and driver, standard exit, exit with visa steps). Each task has an owner role (HR, Line manager, IT, Finance, PRO/Admin, Employee), a category and a due offset in days from the anchor date. Start a case for a person, type the start date (onboarding) or last working day (offboarding) as DD/MM/YYYY, and every task gets its own due date. Optionally a due date that falls on your weekend moves to the next working day. What is inside: - Five editable example templates (starting lists, not legal requirements) plus your own, with reorder, duplicate and CSV import of tasks - Cases with owner names, notes, done ticks, completion % and overdue counts per person - Dashboard: open cases, overdue tasks and tasks due in the next 7 days grouped by owner role, with a filter by role or owner name - Offboarding clearance form for A4: sign-off lines for HR, IT, Finance, Line manager and Admin, asset return table, final settlement checklist with no amounts, signature lines - Asset list per case (item, tag or serial, issued, returned, condition) with a warning for items not yet returned - Batch print of every open checklist, one page each; CSV export of tasks and assets; JSON backup and restore - Example data you can load and clear, and an Instructions page inside the app Who it is for: owners, HR officers and office managers of small and mid-size UAE companies who onboard and offboard staff a few times a month and want nothing to slip. What it is NOT: the task lists are examples to edit, not a statement of what UAE law or MOHRE requires. Permit, visa, Emirates ID and labour card steps are listed only as items to handle with your PRO. It does not calculate or pay a final settlement, does not send reminders, and does not connect to any government system or payroll. Your data lives in this browser on this device, so export a backup regularly. Neighbour: Zeyto's Employee Onboarding Pack is a set of documents. This is a working app with dates, owners, progress tracking and a clearance form. Verified by scripted Chromium tests (38 UI assertions across templates, dated cases, leap days, weekend variants, CSV import with bad rows, printing to PDF, backup and restore) and an independent Python model that matched 341 task due dates, completion percentages and overdue counts across 60 random cases. A WebKit run of the same flow passed; Firefox could not be launched in the test environment, so it was not tested. Not tested in Microsoft Edge or on a physical phone.
Offline app that turns joining dates and contract dates into a monthly action list: probation reviews, confirmation decisions, last day to give notice, renewal decisions and anniversaries. Month-end safe dates, printable lists. Rules are your settings.
Probation ends are easy to miss. A new hire joins in March, nobody diarises the review, and the end date passes with no decision. A contract end creeps up and the date by which notice or a renewal decision was due has already gone. This app holds the dates and tells you each week who needs action. You enter each employee's joining date, probation months and contract dates once, and the rules you follow as settings: default probation length, how the end date is counted, review reminder offsets (for example 30, 14 and 7 days before the end), confirmation decision lead, notice period days, renewal lead. The app then builds every milestone date, handling month ends and leap days correctly (31/08 plus 6 months is 28/02, or 29/02 in a leap year). What is inside: - Needs action dashboard: pick any month and see everything overdue or due by the end of it, tick items done, with KPIs for overdue items, probations ending this month and contracts ending within 90 days - Review reminders list for the next N days you choose - Milestones per person: mid-point check-in, review reminders, review due, confirmation decision due, probation end, last day to give notice, renewal decision due, contract end, yearly anniversary reviews - Extensions with a log, outcome tracking (in probation, extended, confirmed, employment ended) and a warning if an extension is longer than the maximum you set - Optional weekend rule that moves reminder dates to the previous or next working day (probation end and contract end never move) - Printable A4: actions this month, a blank probation review form per person, and a contract and probation schedule for everyone - CSV import of employees with line-numbered errors, CSV export of milestones, JSON backup and restore, example data, and an Instructions page inside the app Who it is for: owners and HR officers of small and mid-size UAE companies who manage a handful to a few hundred staff and want one place for the dates. What it is NOT: it does not know or state any UAE rule on probation, notice or contracts. A fresh install has no rules filled in on purpose and shows a warning until you enter them from your contracts and MOHRE, your PRO or your lawyer. It sends no reminders or emails, does not connect to MOHRE, WPS or payroll, and the review form is an internal record, not a legal document. Data stays in your browser on this device, so export backups. Neighbours: Zeyto's wave 2 HR spreadsheets and the Staff Performance Review Pack cover reviews on paper or in cells. This app is the date engine that tells you when each one is due. Verified by scripted Chromium tests (37 assertions: settings validation, month-end and leap-day dates, weekend variants, extensions, CSV import with bad rows, printing, backup and restore) and an independent Python model that matched 691 milestone dates, action lists and counts across 60 random cases. WebKit passed the same flow except the PDF step, which Playwright supports only in Chromium. Firefox could not be launched in the test environment, so it was not tested. Not tested on a physical phone.
Offline app that tracks every staff document's expiry (passport, visa, Emirates ID, labour card, insurance, licences), colours it by days left, forecasts renewal cost month by month for 12 months, and prints a per-employee file index.
A passport that expires in a client's busy season, a visa found expired on the day of a site visit, a renewal bill nobody budgeted. This app keeps every employee document in one place, shows what is expiring, and tells you what the renewals will cost and when to start them. You list your employees, then add each document with its type, number, expiry date and where the paper or file is kept. The app colours each one by days left, with a word on every badge as well as a colour (for example Critical in 5d, Expired 20d ago). You enter the default renewal cost and the lead time per document type once, and the app builds a 12 month cost forecast, in exact fils, split by month and by document type. What is inside: - Dashboard: counts by status (expired, critical, warning, coming up, OK), the list that needs attention now, and the AED you should be spending now on renewals already due - Status windows you set (they start at 30, 60 and 90 days, inclusive at the edges), filter and sort by status, type and department, search by name, code, document number or file location - Editable document types: passport, residence visa or permit, Emirates ID, labour card or work permit, medical insurance, driving licence, professional licence, other, and any you add. Default cost and start-renewal lead per type, optional cost per document - Renewal cost forecast for 12 months from any month: cost lands in the month of expiry minus lead days (or the expiry month, your choice), with an overdue row, a later row, totals, and a Needs renewal now box - Renewed button: enter the new expiry and the old number and dates stay in the document history. Mark renewals in progress - Printable A4: a per-employee file index that lists missing standard documents as MISSING, an expiring soon list for any window you choose grouped by department, and the forecast - CSV import of employees and documents with line-numbered errors and unknown document types created for you, CSV export of documents and the forecast, JSON backup and restore, example data, and an Instructions page inside the app Who it is for: owners, HR officers and PROs of small and mid-size UAE companies who look after anything from a handful to a few hundred staff. What it is NOT: it does not know which documents UAE law requires for a person, what the fees are, or how long a renewal takes. A fresh install has no costs or lead times filled in on purpose and shows a warning until you enter them from your own quotes and your PRO. Example data uses illustrative figures only. It does not read scans, store the document files themselves (only where you keep them), connect to any government or insurer system, or send reminders, so open it weekly. Data stays in your browser on this device, so export backups. Neighbours: the Employee Visa and Document Expiry Tracker is an Excel workbook for the same job in cells, and the Licence and Document Expiry Tracker covers company licences. This app adds the cost forecast, document history, per-employee file index and print lists. Verified by scripted Chromium tests (93 assertions: window boundaries, leap-day and month-end cost dates, DD/MM/YYYY parsing, filters, renewal history, inactive staff, CSV imports with bad rows, printing with PDF page counts, backup and restore) and an independent Python model that matched statuses, cost dates, the 12 month forecast, the needs-now bucket and the expiring soon lists on 50 random cases (1,349 documents, 234 of them exactly on a window edge). Firefox could not be launched in the test environment, so it was not tested. Not tested on a physical phone.
Offline weekly rota app: pick a shift code per cell, see hours, coverage gaps by role and time, rest-gap and days-in-a-row conflicts, then print an A4 rota. Limits are your own settings.
Shift Rota Builder is an offline app for managers who still build the weekly rota on paper, in WhatsApp or in a spreadsheet and only find out about a thin shift, a short turnaround or a seventh day in a row when it has already happened. You define shift codes and staff once, pick a code in each cell of the week, and the app counts hours and checks the rota against the rules you enter. What it does: - Weekly grid with a keyboard-friendly selector in every cell (no dragging, works on a phone), a second selector for split shifts, fill a row, copy last week, clear a week, go to any week by typing a date as DD/MM/YYYY - Shift codes with start, end and unpaid break; overnight shifts such as 22:00 to 06:00 are handled; OFF, AL and SL for days away - Coverage rules by day, role and time window ("at least 2 baristas present from 07:00 to 15:00"), checked minute by minute with overnight shifts counted on both days; the first short window is shown for every day - Conflict checks: rest gap between shifts (also across weeks), shift too long, too many days in a row, weekly hours over your maximum, overlapping shifts, leave and a shift on the same day; click an issue to jump to the week - Hours per cell, per person per week against contracted hours, and per day (people on shift and staff hours) - A4 landscape print for one week or a batch of weeks, with legend, coverage summary and conflicts; CSV export of the rota and of the conflicts; staff CSV import with line-numbered errors; JSON backup and restore The problem it solves: a thin shift or a tired team found out on the day. Instead of re-reading the grid by eye, you see the shortfalls and conflicts as you build the week. Rules are settings. Minimum rest, maximum shift length, days in a row and weekly hours start blank, with a warning, and the checks for a blank limit stay off. You enter the values that apply to you; the example data uses example numbers only. Verify with MOHRE / your PRO / your contract. What it is not: it does not publish the rota to staff, take swaps or requests, record clock-in times, calculate pay or know any labour law. It is not connected to any government system. For a spreadsheet-based attendance and overtime planner see the separate Staff Attendance, Overtime and Shift Planner; this app is a working offline tool with validation, imports and tested checks. Verified by driving the real app in headless Chromium: 45 scripted checks (dates, week starts across year end and the leap day, validation, CSV import, backup round trip, print preview and a 3-page landscape PDF) and 50 random rotas (2,868 cells, 858 coverage checks, 756 conflicts) compared with an independent minute-by-minute Python model with zero mismatches. The scripted flows also ran in WebKit. Firefox could not be launched on the test machine, so it was not tested there. Not tested in Microsoft Edge or on a physical phone (the layout was checked at 375 px wide).
Offline org chart app: list your people and who reports to whom, and it draws the chart for you. Print on A4, export SVG or PNG, collapse branches, see headcount and span of control.
Org Chart Builder is an offline app for owners and HR managers whose organisation chart lives in a PowerPoint slide that nobody dares to touch, because moving one box means nudging twenty others. You enter people once (name, job title, department, who they report to) and the app draws and re-draws the chart for you: every manager is centred above their team, levels line up, and nothing overlaps. What it does: - People list with department colours (automatic, editable), optional location, email and phone, and vacant positions drawn with a dashed box that are not counted as headcount - Automatic tidy tree layout, top to bottom or left to right, three box sizes, several top-level people side by side, zoom and fit to width - Collapse or expand any branch with the number badge, highlight one department, show or hide badges and the legend - The manager list never offers someone below you, so a reporting loop cannot be created; deleting a manager asks whether the team moves to the manager above or to the top level - People CSV import with a preview and line-numbered errors for empty names, repeated codes, managers not found, managers matching two people, self-reporting and loops; managers can be written as a code or a full name - Print on A4 landscape or portrait, scaled to fit one page, or one page for each top-level branch; export SVG (editable text, opens in Word, PowerPoint and design tools) or PNG; people CSV with level and manager path; JSON backup and restore - Insights: headcount by department (people, vacancies, positions), span of control (direct and total reports), levels, the longest chain, and a checks list (more than one top person, departments with no filled leader, repeated names) The problem it solves: a chart that is out of date the week after it is drawn, and a lot of time spent dragging boxes. Here a change to the list is a change to the chart. Who it is for: small and medium businesses, clinics, schools, contractors and retailers with 5 to a few hundred people, and anyone preparing an organisation chart for a bank, a tender or an audit pack. The app only draws the structure you enter. It does not know any labour law and it is not connected to any government or HR system. What it is not: no dotted-line or matrix reporting (each person has one manager), no photos, no payroll, salary or contract data, no approvals. Long job titles are shortened inside the box; the full title stays in the list and the exports. How it differs from the HR spreadsheets and documents in the catalogue: those are workbooks and documents you fill in and print. This is a small app with a layout engine, validation, imports and exports, so the chart redraws itself when the list changes. There is no organisation chart product in the earlier spreadsheet range, so it sits beside them rather than replacing any. Verified by driving the real app in headless Chromium: 63 scripted checks (building a chart through the screens, cycle prevention, layout rules measured from the drawn SVG, collapse, SVG parsed as XML, PNG decoded and checked for non-blank pixels, print preview and split print, deletion with reassignment, CSV import with six kinds of error, insights numbers, backup round trip, a 200-person chart drawn in under 3 seconds) and 45 random trees (1,260 people, 953 laid-out boxes) compared with an independent Python recomputation of headcount, span of control, depth and the layout rules with zero mismatches. The scripted flows also ran in WebKit (62 passed; the PDF step is Chromium only). Firefox could not be launched on the test machine, so it was not tested there. Not tested in Microsoft Edge or on a physical phone (the layout was checked at 375 px wide).
Offline app to run hiring: pipeline board, weighted interview scorecards per interviewer, ranked comparison per role, offer tracker with valid-until dates and source analysis of where hires come from. Data stays on your device.
Recruitment Pipeline and Interview Scorecard App is a working offline app for UAE companies that hire a few people at a time and still track candidates in WhatsApp, email and notebooks. You set up each vacancy with its own weighted scoring criteria, add candidates, move them through your stages, record one scorecard per interviewer, and the app ranks them, tracks offers and shows which sources actually produce hires. The problem it solves: when three managers interview five people, impressions are not comparable, nobody remembers who was offered what or when the offer lapses, and the money spent on job portals and agencies is never compared with the hires they produced. This gives you one record per candidate with dated stage moves and a side-by-side comparison you can print for the hiring meeting. What is inside: - Pipeline board with your own stages (defaults: Applied, Screening, Interview 1, Interview 2, Offer, Hired) plus Rejected and Withdrawn with reasons; every move is dated and days in stage are shown - Roles with weighted criteria (for example Communication in English, weight 2), three example criteria sets, score scale 1 to 5 or 1 to 10 - Scorecards per candidate per interviewer; weighted score per scorecard and per candidate, exact to two decimals, with incomplete scorecards flagged - Comparison table per role with criterion averages, weighted total and rank (ties share a rank), printable A4 landscape; blank interview scorecard form to print - Offer tracker with status, amount, sent and valid-until dates, days left, overdue offers flagged, and a warning when hires exceed openings - Source analysis: candidates, interviewed, offers, hires, conversion percentages and average days to hire per source, plus a funnel per role - Multi-column candidate search (name, phone, email, role, source, notes, stage), CSV import with line-numbered errors, CSV exports, JSON backup and restore, example data Who it is for: owners, HR officers and hiring managers in small and mid-size UAE businesses, recruitment desks and clinics, shops and restaurants that hire regularly. How it differs from the Recruitment Tracker and Interview Scorecards spreadsheet in this catalogue: that is an Excel workbook you fill by hand. This is an app with a pipeline board, validated forms, dated history, ranking with tie handling, offer expiry tracking, CSV import with error reporting and source analysis computed for you. What it is NOT: it does not post jobs, send email or WhatsApp messages, read CVs, store files or decide who to hire. It contains no UAE labour-law, visa or contract rules, so offers, probation and notice terms stay with your contract, your PRO and your lawyer. Scores support a discussion and should use job-related criteria applied the same way to every candidate. Verified by running it in headless Chromium with 32 scripted checks through the real screens (setup, validation, dated moves, scorecards, ranking with a tie, offers, CSV import with bad rows, backup and restore, reload persistence, print pages), and by comparing the engine with an independent Python Decimal model over 50 random roles and 239 candidates (1,534 checks, zero mismatches). The same scripted flows were also run in WebKit. It was not tested in Firefox and not opened on a real phone; the layout was checked at 375 px and 1280 px. Requirements: a modern browser (a modern browser). Works offline; your data stays in the browser on your device, so export a backup regularly.
Offline app that maps who can do what, finds the gaps against the level each role needs, builds a costed training plan and warns before certificates expire. Data stays on your device.
Training and Skills Matrix App is a working offline app for UAE companies that spend money on training without knowing where the real gaps are. You list your people and skills, set the level each role needs, record where everyone is today, and the app shows the gaps, suggests the cheapest suitable course for each one, keeps a costed training plan and tracks certificates with expiry alerts. The problem it solves: training budget goes to whoever asks, nobody can say which skills are thin in a team or who could coach, and forklift, first aid or safety certificates lapse because the dates sit in separate files. This puts the skills matrix, the gaps, the plan with its cost and the certificate dates in one place you can print for a management meeting. What is inside: - Skills matrix: people by skills, each cell a level from 0 to 3, 4 or 5 with your own level names, colour and number together (not colour alone), filters by department, role and skill category, bulk set that only raises levels, printable A4 landscape - Role profiles: a role can need a different level than the skill default, so a Sales Executive and an Operator are measured against what each actually needs - Gap analysis by skill, person and department, with coverage warnings when fewer people than your minimum are at level, who could coach, and a printable individual development plan per person - Courses with provider, level reached, price in AED, hours and optional certificate validity; Suggest plan from gaps picks the cheapest suitable course (lowest price, then fewest hours, then name) and shows a preview before anything is added - Training plan with status, date and cost override; cost by month, by department and by skill; cancelled entries excluded - Mark done: records the completion date, can raise the person's level and creates or renews the certificate record - Certifications with three alert windows (default 90, 60, 30 days), days left shown in words as well as colour, add renewal to plan, printable expiring list - CSV import of levels and people with line-numbered errors, CSV exports, JSON backup and restore, example data Who it is for: owners, HR and operations managers, safety officers and department heads in small and mid-size UAE businesses. How it differs from neighbours: the staff performance review pack rates performance over a period; this maps skills against what a role needs and plans the training. The employee visa and document expiry tracker watches ID documents; this tracks training certificates and links each to the course that renews it. What it is NOT: it does not book courses, send reminders, store certificate scans, connect to a training provider or government system, or tell you which certificates the law requires. It contains no UAE rules, so which certificates your people need and how long they last comes from your regulator, insurer, client or provider. A gap is a planning aid, not an assessment of a person. Course prices in the example data are illustrations only. Verified by running it in headless Chromium with 33 scripted checks through the real screens (matrix editing, CSV import with bad rows, gap totals, plan suggestions, mark done, cost roll-ups, certificate windows, backup and restore, print pages), and by comparing the engine with an independent Python model over random cases (1,007 checks, zero mismatches, including cost ties, gaps with no suitable course and month-end certificate dates). The same scripted flows were also run in WebKit. It was not tested in Firefox and not opened on a real phone; the layout was checked at 375 px and 1280 px. Requirements: a modern browser (a modern browser). Works offline; your data stays in the browser on your device, so export a backup regularly.
Ten offline HR apps in one zip: leave, timesheets and overtime, payslips, onboarding, probation, document expiry, shift rota, org chart, recruitment and training. Open by double-click, data stays on your device. AED 491 less than buying separately.
The UAE HR Offline Apps Bundle is ten working HR apps in one download. Each app is a single HTML file you open by double-click: no installation, no internet, no subscription, and your data stays in your own browser. Each one solves a recurring HR job that small and mid-size UAE companies usually do in WhatsApp, paper forms or fragile spreadsheets. The ten apps: - Leave Manager: balances, accrual by completed month, approvals, team calendar, printable leave record - Timesheet and Overtime Calculator: weekly timesheets, regular, overtime, rest-day and public-holiday hours from your own rules, payroll CSV - Payslip Generator with Batch Printing: auto-numbered payslips, CSV import of the payroll table, totals reconciliation, one or two per A4 page - Onboarding and Offboarding Checklist: task templates by role with due dates, owners, completion percentage, exit clearance form with asset return - Probation and Contract Milestone Tracker: notice-by dates, review reminders and a this-month action list - Employee Document Expiry and Renewal Cost Tracker: 90, 60 and 30 day windows, a 12-month renewal cost forecast, a per-employee file index - Shift Rota Builder: weekly grid, coverage rules, rest-gap and consecutive-day checks, printable rota - Org Chart Builder: auto-layout chart, SVG and PNG export, headcount by department - Recruitment Pipeline and Interview Scorecards: weighted criteria, comparison table, offer tracker, source analysis - Training and Skills Matrix: skill levels, gap analysis, training plan and cost, certification expiry alerts What you get in the zip: ten folders, each with index.html, its own README.txt (quick start, the exact calculation rules, limits) and example CSV files, plus a top-level README.txt. Every app has Load example data, Clear everything, JSON backup and restore, and print layouts for A4. Value: bought separately the ten apps are AED 840. The bundle is AED 349, a saving of AED 491 (about 58 percent). Rules are settings, not built in. Leave entitlements, notice periods, probation length, overtime multipliers, rest gaps and the like start blank in a fresh app, which says so wherever a result depends on one. Example data shows example values only. Check the real rules for your case with MOHRE, your PRO or your lawyer. What it is NOT: legal, tax or immigration advice; payroll or WPS software (the payslip app does not produce a WPS file and the timesheet app does not know overtime law); an HR system with logins, reminders or emails; connected to any government system. Each app keeps data in one browser on one device, so it suits one person or a small team sharing a computer, with JSON backups to move data. Verified by us: each app was tested in Chromium with scripted flows through the real screens (from 32 to 93 assertions per app) and an independent Python recalculation of random cases (for example 80 leave balance rows, 150 timesheet summaries, 106 amounts in words, 691 probation milestone dates, 1,349 documents, 2,868 rota cells, 45 random org trees, 1,534 recruitment checks, 1,007 training checks), all with zero mismatches. The flows also ran in WebKit. Firefox could not be launched in our test environment, so it is untested. Not tested on a real phone, in Edge or desktop Safari, or on a real printer; layouts were checked at 375 px and 1280 px. Some apps sit beside Excel products in the catalogue (leave, document expiry, recruitment, attendance and shifts, onboarding documents). The apps add validation, imports, exact integer arithmetic, printing and a calendar or board view; the spreadsheets and document packs remain useful if you prefer Excel or Word.
Offline app that keeps every post-dated cheque you hold or have issued, shows what to deposit and what leaves your account this week, prints deposit slips and tracks bounced cheques per customer. Works by double-click, data stays on your device.
Post-Dated Cheque (PDC) Register is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Post-dated cheques are still how many UAE businesses are paid and how they pay their landlord and suppliers. The cheques sit in an envelope or a drawer, the dates live in someone's head or a WhatsApp group, and a Thursday deposit gets missed or a cheque you issued clears on a day the account is empty. A bounced cheque is then discovered late, and nobody remembers how often that customer has done it before. What is inside: - A register for cheques you hold (received) and cheques you have given (issued): party, bank, cheque number, cheque date, amount, reference - A weekly dashboard: what to deposit this week, what will leave your account this week, and cheques that have waited too long in the drawer - A calendar view by date, and a printable deposit slip: tick the cheques, print the list for the bank, then mark them deposited in one click - Status through the life of a cheque: in hand, deposited, cleared, returned, replaced, cancelled; every step is kept in a history and the last step can be undone - Returned cheques: choose a reason, record the bank charge and your own fee (both start from the amounts you set), then present again or replace with a new cheque - Exposure per customer: cheques in hand, deposited but not cleared, returned and unresolved, with a count of presentations and returns; outstanding issued cheques per supplier - A warning when a customer has bounced a cheque a number of times you choose - CSV export of the register, example data, JSON backup and restore, Clear everything In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. The bank return charge, your own fee, the number of bounces that triggers a warning and the days after which a cheque still in hand is flagged are settings you enter. Your bank decides how long a cheque stays valid for presentation: ask it and enter that period. Who it is for: owners, accountants and office managers of trading, contracting, rental and service businesses that take or give post-dated cheques and want a clear schedule instead of an envelope. What it is NOT: accounting software and it does not post entries to your books; it does not connect to your bank (you decide when a cheque has cleared and click it); and it does not tell you what the law says about bounced cheques, so ask your lawyer. Rent Roll and Tenant Ledger with Cheque Schedule is a property product for tenant rent cheques by unit; this is a general cheque register for any business. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 65 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, run at 1280 px and at 375 px: adding received and issued cheques, validation, the dashboard windows, calendar, deposit slip, returned cheques with bank charge and fee, present again and replace, undo, bounce warnings, exposure totals, settings, CSV export, backup and restore. The printed register and deposit slip were rendered to PDF in Chromium and looked at. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app that ages your unpaid invoices, lists who to chase today, writes the WhatsApp or email reminder, logs promises and prints customer statements. Import your open invoices from CSV. Double-click to open, data stays on your device.
Invoice Chase Desk is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Most small UAE businesses chase invoices from memory: someone remembers a customer owes money, sends a message when they have time, and nobody knows who was already chased last week or who promised to pay on the fifteenth. Promises are forgotten, polite customers get chased three times and slow payers not at all, and the money you are owed sits a month longer than it should. What is inside: - Import your unpaid invoices from a CSV export (customer, invoice number, dates, outstanding amount, optional phone and email), with a column-mapping step; importing again updates the amount of invoices already there - A Chase today list: customers who are overdue, have no promise pending and have not been chased inside the number of days you set, biggest overdue first - Reminder wording for WhatsApp and email with the customer name, invoices and amounts filled in, chosen by how late the oldest invoice is; you edit the wording and copy it. The app does not send anything - A chase log: how you chased, what happened, the promised date and amount; a broken promise shows in red on the dashboard - Ageing by customer in buckets you define, counted from the due date or from the invoice date - Printable statement per customer, or all customers at once - Record payments against an invoice, add invoices by hand, CSV export of invoices and the chase log - Example data and an example open-invoices CSV, JSON backup and restore, Clear everything In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore, plus 1 example CSV file in the layout the importer expects. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. Bucket limits, the number of days before the same customer is chased again, the default payment terms used for imports without a due date and the reminder wording are all settings. The reminder wording is a starting point, not legal advice. Who it is for: owners, sales administrators and accounts staff of businesses that invoice on credit and want a simple, repeatable weekly chase routine. What it is NOT: accounting software and it does not read your books: the balances are what you import or type, so keep them in step with your accounts. It does not send messages, and it is not legal advice on threatening action or reporting a debtor. Receivables Ageing and Chase Tracker is an Excel workbook; this is a separate offline app with CSV import, a chase list driven by rules, promise tracking and ready message wording. It does not set credit limits: Customer Credit Limits and Statements does that. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 58 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, run at 1280 px and at 375 px, with an independent Python calculation of the ageing buckets and the chase list compared with what the app shows, plus a CSV import with semicolons, month-name dates and deliberately bad rows (skipped with reasons). The statement was rendered to PDF in Chromium and looked at. The example CSV shipped in the zip was imported through the real Import screen with no rows skipped. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline petty cash book with numbered payment vouchers you print and sign, a float that tops itself up on a clear figure, receipts flagged, cash counts with differences on record and a monthly summary for your accountant. Data stays on your device.
Petty Cash Voucher Book is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Petty cash is small money with a big habit of going missing: a pile of crumpled receipts, a notebook of amounts nobody signed, and a box that is short by an amount nobody can explain. Month end becomes a hunt for slips, and when the box is short there is no record of when it happened or who approved what. What is inside: - Numbered payment vouchers (the prefix is yours), printable on A4 with the amount in words and signature lines for the person paid and the approver - An imprest float: the box is topped back up to a fixed amount, and the Dashboard shows exactly how much cash restores it - Record a top-up in the same numbered book; cash over and cash short found at a count are entries too - A running balance after every voucher, checked against the cash you should be holding - Receipt tracking: a voucher at or above the amount you set is flagged until a receipt is recorded - A single-voucher limit above which an approver's name must be entered - Cash count by denomination: the difference to the book is posted as an entry so it is on record - Void with a reason: vouchers cannot be deleted and a number is never reused - Monthly summary by category to print for your accountant, CSV export of the whole book In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. The float, the opening balance, the receipt limit, the single-voucher limit and the categories are all settings. A fresh copy starts with placeholder values: replace them with your own policy. Who it is for: shops, offices, workshops and sites where someone keeps a cash box and the owner wants a clean record without a full accounting system. What it is NOT: accounting software, and it cannot stop someone taking cash from the box: it makes gaps visible through counts and numbered vouchers. It records whether a receipt exists, but does not check it is a valid tax invoice. Petty Cash and Expense Claim Pack is an Excel and Word pack with a policy and forms; this is a separate offline app with numbered vouchers, a float, void control and a count. Staff expense claims are in Expense Claim and Receipt Log. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 49 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, run at 1280 px and at 375 px, including an independent recomputation of the running balance and the monthly summary, amount-in-words, over-limit blocking, void, cash count differences and settings validation. The printed voucher and monthly summary were rendered to PDF in Chromium and looked at. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app for the end of every shift: type the POS totals, count the till by denomination, see expected cash against counted cash instantly, record the card and online checks, print the manager sign-off sheet and watch over/short by till and cashier.
Shop Cash-Up and Till Reconciliation is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: At the end of a shift the cashier counts the notes, the manager glances at the Z report, and a difference of a few dirhams is shrugged off. Repeated small shorts at one till or from one person go unnoticed for months, nobody signs anything, and when the owner asks what the shortfall was last month the answer is a guess. What is inside: - A New cash-up form per till and shift: POS cash, card, online and other sales, cash refunds, cash paid out of the till and cash added - A denomination count (notes and coins): expected cash, counted cash and the difference update as you type - Expected cash = opening float + POS cash sales - cash refunds - cash paid out + cash added - Card and online takings checked against your machine batch and settlement figures when you enter them - How much float stays in the till and how much goes to the bank - A printable sign-off sheet for the cashier and the manager - History with search and till filter, and an Over/short trend by till and by cashier - Duplicate guard for the same till on the same day, CSV export, example data, JSON backup and restore In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. The tills or shifts, the float you leave and the tolerance for a normal difference are settings. A fresh copy starts with placeholder values: replace them with your own policy. Who it is for: shop owners, supermarket and restaurant managers and anyone who closes a till every day and wants a signed record. What it is NOT: a POS and it does not read your POS: you type the totals from your shift or Z report. A difference is a signal, not proof, and the app does not say who is responsible. It does not post to your accounts. Retail Shop Daily Cash-Up and Stock Take Pack is an Excel workbook and forms pack that also covers stock take; this is a separate offline app that is only the daily cash-up, with live differences, sign-off and trend. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 39 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, run at 1280 px and at 375 px, including an independent recomputation of expected cash and the difference for every example day, a hand-worked new cash-up, duplicate and validation rules, editing a signed cash-up, deleting, the trend chart and CSV export. The sign-off sheet was rendered to PDF in Chromium and looked at. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app that holds a credit limit and terms per customer, checks before a big order whether you can sell on credit, ages balances oldest-first and prints customer statements. Import customers and transactions from CSV. Data stays on your device.
Customer Credit Limits and Statements is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Credit is given in the UAE on a handshake and a phone call. The salesman says yes to one more order, nobody checks what the customer already owes or how old it is, and the same customer who is 90 days overdue gets another delivery. When the customer disputes the balance there is no statement to show, only a different figure in each person's head. What is inside: - A customer list with a credit limit, payment terms, phone, email and a hold flag with a note - Can I sell on credit?: enter the customer and the order value and see balance, available credit, overdue amounts and the age of the oldest overdue invoice before you say yes - A ledger per customer for invoices, payments, credit notes and debit notes; an overpayment sits on account - Payments and credit notes are applied to the oldest invoices first to work out what is overdue - Warnings when a percent of the limit you choose is used, and a suggestion to put a customer on hold when the oldest overdue invoice passes the days you choose - A Needs attention list on the Dashboard: customers over limit, near limit, overdue or on hold - Printable statement per customer with your payment details, or all statements at once - CSV import of customers and limits, and of transactions (invoices, payments, credit notes), example files, CSV export, JSON backup and restore In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore, plus 2 example CSV files in the layout the importer expects. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. Default payment terms, the percent of the limit that triggers a warning, the overdue days that trigger a hold suggestion, the ageing buckets and the text printed on statements are settings. Limits are your own policy: the app does not decide who deserves credit. Who it is for: distributors, wholesalers, contractors and service companies that sell on account and want a quick answer before shipping. What it is NOT: accounting software and it does not read your books: balances are only as good as the entries you import or type. It does not stop a sale: a hold flag is a reminder for sales and warehouse staff. If your customers pay specific invoices the overdue figure can differ from your accounting system because the app applies payments oldest first; treat it as a guide. Receivables ECL Provision Matrix is a finance calculator for provisions; Invoice Chase Desk chases unpaid invoices after the fact; Credit Control and Getting Paid in the UAE is a course. This app is the limit check and the statement. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 49 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, at 1280 px and 375 px, with an independent Python recomputation of every customer's balance, available credit and oldest-first overdue, the order check, a limit breach, overpayment, holds, both CSV imports (with and without a type column), settings and backup. The statement was rendered to PDF and looked at. The example CSV files import with no rows skipped and balances match a hand calculation. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app that turns your bank cash, expected receipts and unpaid supplier bills into a 12-week payment plan, keeps a minimum cash balance, takes early-payment discounts only when they beat your cost of funds, and prints the weekly payment run for approval.
Supplier Payment Run Planner is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Every Monday the owner faces the same pile: more supplier bills than cash in the bank. Without a plan the loudest supplier gets paid, the rent gets close to the line, and early-payment discounts that were worth taking are missed because nobody did the maths. Cash runs short in a week nobody looked at because the receipts expected that week never arrived. What is inside: - Enter cash in the bank today, the minimum balance to keep and your cost of funds (a yearly rate) - Import unpaid supplier bills from CSV, or add them; tick Critical for rent, payroll suppliers and anyone you cannot pay late - A Cash forecast tab: expected receipts and other payments for each of the next 12 weeks (payroll, rent, VAT, loan instalments) - A Payment plan: week by week what to pay, what is deferred, closing cash after the run, and where cash runs short. Pin a bill to a week if you have promised it - Order of payment each week: pinned and critical bills, then bills whose discount ends this week, then oldest due date, smaller bills first, while cash after paying stays at or above your minimum - Early-payment discount maths: a discount such as 2% for payment within 10 days of a 60-day term is taken only if its annualised return beats your cost of funds, and the app shows that return - A Discount calculator for any offer you are quoted - A printable payment run for the week with prepared, approved and date lines; Mark paid on each bill after you pay - Example data and an example bills CSV, JSON backup and restore In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore, plus 1 example CSV file in the layout the importer expects. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. Cash today, the minimum cash, your cost of funds, whether to take beneficial discounts, and every forecast figure are yours to enter. The planner assumes payment on the Monday of each week. Who it is for: owners and finance staff of trading, contracting and retail businesses that manage many supplier bills against limited cash. What it is NOT: a payment tool: it does not pay anyone and does not connect to your bank. The plan is only as good as the receipts you forecast, and deferring a bill can cost goodwill, late fees or a stopped supply, so check your supplier terms. It is not accounting software. Owner Cash Discipline Pack is an Excel and Word pack (weekly cash meeting, payment run, 90-day rescue) and 13-Week Cash Flow Forecast is a spreadsheet; this is a separate offline app that decides the order of payments by rules and does the discount maths. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 87 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, at 1280 px and 375 px. An independent Python version of the planning rules was compared with the app on the example data and on hand-built scenarios (cash shortfall, pinned and critical bills, a discount window ending, discounts that do and do not beat the cost of funds). Bad CSV rows, the discount calculator and the payment-run sheet (rendered to PDF and looked at) were checked too. The example bills CSV imports with no rows skipped and its total matches a hand sum. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app that imports your bank statement and your ledger or cash book as CSV, scores every possible pair, accepts the sure matches in one click, finds grouped matches, and prints a bank reconciliation statement listing what is left. Data stays on your device.
Bank vs Ledger CSV Reconciler is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Bank reconciliation is the job that gets left until the auditor asks. Someone ticks lines between a statement and a cash book by eye, a cheque that cleared three days late looks missing, two cash receipts banked as one deposit never agree, and the difference is carried forward month after month. Every unmatched line is a possible error or a missing entry that nobody has looked at. What is inside: - Import the bank statement CSV and your ledger (cash book) CSV for the same period; you map the columns, with one signed Amount column or separate Debit and Credit columns, and a sign option - Re-importing the same file skips lines that are already there - Every possible pair is scored on amount, date, reference or cheque number and matching words; the sure pairs are accepted in one click and the doubtful ones go to a Check these list - Grouped matches: one bank deposit against two to four ledger lines when their amounts add up, with a warning if another combination also fits - Manual match: tick lines on both sides and the difference must be zero - A Matched tab where any match can be undone - A bank reconciliation statement: from the bank balance (plus deposits in transit, less cheques not cleared) and from your books (plus bank credits, less charges not in your books) to the same adjusted balance. Print it - Settings: date tolerance, amount tolerance, high-confidence score - Example CSV files, JSON backup and restore In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore, plus 2 example CSV files in the layout the importer expects. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. The date tolerance, amount tolerance and the high-confidence score are settings. A new copy starts at exact amounts and dates within five days. Who it is for: accountants, bookkeepers and owners who reconcile one account a month from a bank CSV and a cash book export. What it is NOT: a bank connection (you download the CSV yourself), and it posts nothing to your books: it tells you what to post. The scoring is a helper, not a judge: always read a pair before accepting it. It works on one account and one period at a time. Bank Reconciliation Workbook for UAE Small Business is an Excel workbook you tick by hand; this is a separate offline app that imports both CSVs and does the scoring and grouping. Bank Reconciliation Cleanup is a service for a backlog. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 76 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, at 1280 px and 375 px. The scoring was re-implemented in Python and compared pair by pair with the app (a wrong grouped suggestion found in testing was fixed). Also tested: accept all, group accept, manual match, undo, imports with other delimiters, date formats and Debit and Credit or signed layouts, re-import without duplicates, settings and backup. The statement was rendered to PDF and looked at. The example files in the zip import through the real screens and reconcile to 50,717.32 on both sides, difference 0.00. Real bank exports vary and may need the mapping step. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app for staff expense claims: receipts, mileage and per diem lines from rates you set, receipt and duplicate checks, approval with a senior limit, a receipt log with lost receipts, printable claim forms and a period summary with estimated VAT. Data stays on your device.
Expense Claim and Receipt Log is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Staff expense claims arrive as WhatsApp photos, a crumpled bundle or a spreadsheet nobody trusts. The same taxi receipt is claimed twice, a meal over the policy limit is paid without anyone noticing, receipts go missing, and the accountant spends a day each month working out what is VAT-recoverable. Nobody can say how much was claimed by whom last quarter. What is inside: - A claim per employee and period with lines for receipts, mileage (kilometres at your rate) and per diem days (up to three rates you name) - Categories with an optional cap per receipt, and a receipt required from an amount you set - Checks as you type: dates inside the claim period, possible duplicates, over-cap lines, a missing receipt blocks submit - Workflow: draft, submitted, approved or rejected with a reason, paid; claims above a total you set need a senior approver's name - A Receipt log of every receipt with its reference and whether it was kept, lost or not required - VAT estimated only for lines marked as a tax invoice with the supplier's TRN; mileage and per diem carry no VAT - A printable claim form with the advance paid, the amount payable, the employee declaration and signature lines - A Period summary by category and by employee, CSV export, example data, JSON backup and restore In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. The mileage rate, the three per-diem rates, the receipt threshold, the senior-approval limit, the VAT rate and the categories with caps are settings: the app has no built-in rates because these are your company's policy. Who it is for: company owners, office managers and finance staff who reimburse staff expenses and want one claim form and one record. What it is NOT: accounting software, and it does not read receipts or store receipt photos: keep the paper or file and write where it is in the receipt reference. It does not pay anyone, and it does not know UAE company policy or what is tax-deductible: check VAT recovery with your tax adviser. Approval is a record by name, not a login. Petty Cash and Expense Claim Pack is an Excel and Word pack with policy and forms; this is a separate offline app with calculated mileage and per diem, validation and a receipt log. Cash taken from a petty cash box is in Petty Cash Voucher Book. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 92 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, run at 1280 px and at 375 px, including recalculation of every stored line amount and the VAT estimate in Python, the claim flags, a draft that is blocked from submit, line validation, a line outside the claim period, senior approval, approve, reject and delete, the receipt log, the period summary against an independent total, settings and CSV export. The claim form and the period summary were rendered to PDF in Chromium and looked at. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app for UAE importers and exporters: keep dated exchange rates, see each product margin in AED and the rate at which it hits zero, issue quotes and invoices in the customer currency with the rate locked, and track open foreign-currency items with gain or loss.
Multi-Currency Price List and Margin App is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: A trader buys in euros or pounds or yuan and sells in dirhams, or the reverse, and the price list is a spreadsheet with an exchange rate someone typed last month. A quote goes out at an old rate, the margin quietly turns to zero when the currency moves, and nobody knows what the company is exposed to in open foreign-currency invoices and supplier bills until the bank statement arrives. What is inside: - A rates table: AED per one unit of each currency, with the date of each rate, history kept, and a warning when a rate is older than the days you choose. USD is built in at the dirham peg of 3.6725 - A quick converter between any two currencies in your table - A price list: each product with its cost and its price, each in its own currency; margin in AED now, the exchange rate at which margin reaches zero, the rate at which it reaches your target margin, and the effect of a 5% or 10% move - Quotes and invoices priced in AED and shown to the customer in their currency, with the rate, its date and your buffer locked on the document, a validity date and a print layout - An Exposure sheet: open invoices and supplier bills in foreign currency, net position per currency, unrealised gain or loss against the rate you booked at, and the effect of a 5% move - Settle an item at the rate you actually got and the realised gain or loss is recorded - Example data, CSV export, JSON backup and restore In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. Every rate other than the USD peg is typed in by you from your bank, with its date. The stale-rate warning, the default FX buffer on quotes and your target margin are settings. Check the peg with your bank if it matters to a contract. Who it is for: importers, exporters, trading companies and project suppliers who buy or sell in more than one currency and want a margin they can trust at today's rate. What it is NOT: a source of live rates, a treasury system or accounting software. There is no internet lookup, so a rate is only as recent as the one you typed. Amounts are held to two decimals, so currencies with three decimals (BHD, KWD, OMR) are rounded to two. Gain and loss figures are a management view against rates you entered, not accounting entries or tax advice. Your bank's real rate differs from a mid-market rate by its margin and fees. Marketplace Price and Margin Calculator is for online sellers and marketplace fees; this app is for foreign-currency pricing and exposure. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 81 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, run at 1280 px and at 375 px, including an independent Python recomputation of margins, breakeven rates, target-rate and 5% and 10% shifts for every product, locked rates on documents, a refresh after adding a new rate, an exposure settle worked by hand (8,000 GBP at 4.80 against a booking rate of 4.95 gives a realised loss of 1,200.00), settings, CSV export and backup. The quotation was rendered to PDF in Chromium and looked at. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Offline app for customers who pay in instalments: builds the schedule from price, deposit and number of instalments, applies each payment to the oldest instalment, prints numbered receipts, lists who is late with a ready reminder and forecasts the next 12 weeks of collections.
Instalment and Payment Plan Tracker is an offline app: one HTML file in a zip that opens by double-click, with no installation, internet or subscription. The problem it removes: Selling on instalments, whether furniture, equipment, fit-out, tuition, memberships or a car repair, means a promise of money over months to a list of customers. It usually lives in a notebook or a spreadsheet nobody updates: who paid the third instalment, who is two behind, what was agreed when the customer asked for more time. Collections are chased late or not at all, and the owner cannot say what cash is coming next month. What is inside: - A plan per customer: price, deposit, number of instalments, frequency and first due date; the schedule is built for you and any rounding remainder goes into the last instalment - Record a payment: it is applied to the oldest unpaid instalment first, shows what it covered, and you print a numbered receipt; an overpayment is shown, and a payment can be deleted to reverse it - A Chase list: everything overdue or due within the days you set, oldest first, with a ready WhatsApp or SMS reminder whose wording you edit - Restructure when a customer asks for more time: replace the unpaid instalments with a new schedule, or change one instalment's date or amount; the history records every change - Add an extra instalment or charge (for a late fee that your contract allows) - Expected collections: what the schedules say you will receive in each of the next 12 weeks - Cancel and reactivate a plan; printable schedule for the customer - Example data, CSV export, JSON backup and restore In the zip: index.html (the app), README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and EXAMPLE-DATA with a made-up example you can restore. Start in 10 minutes: open index.html, press Load example data, look around, press Clear everything and enter your own settings. Rules are settings, not built in. Grace days before an instalment counts as overdue, the days that count as due soon and the reminder wording are settings. The app charges no interest and no late fee by itself. Who it is for: furniture and equipment sellers, fit-out and maintenance contractors, schools and clubs, and workshops that agree payment plans with customers. What it is NOT: a lending or financing tool: it does not calculate interest or financing charges, and instalments are equal parts of the balance unless you change them. It does not collect money. A printed schedule is a record of what was agreed, not a legal contract: ask your lawyer about your terms. Post-dated cheques held against a plan can be tracked in PDC Cheque Register. Invoice Chase Desk works from invoices; this works from an agreed schedule per customer. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: 95 scripted checks through the real screens in Chromium, run at 1280 px and at 375 px, including independent Python derivation of each instalment's status, paid, balance and the 12-week forecast from the example plans, the schedule rounding, payment application, overpayment, payment deletion, a restructure, an edited instalment with a mismatch warning, cancel and reactivate, the chase list, grace days, settings, CSV export and backup. The schedule and a receipt were rendered to PDF in Chromium and looked at. Not tested in Firefox or Safari (neither could be launched in our test environment), in Edge, on a real phone, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports; layout checked at 375 px and 1280 px.
Ten offline apps in one zip: post-dated cheque register, invoice chase desk, petty cash book, till cash-up, credit limits and statements, supplier payment planner, bank reconciler, expense claims, multi-currency pricing and instalment tracker. AED 391 less than buying separately.
The UAE Cash, Collections and Payments Offline Apps Bundle is ten working apps in one download. Each app is a single HTML file you open by double-click: no installation, no internet, no subscription, and your data stays in your own browser. Each one takes a recurring money job that small UAE businesses do in envelopes, WhatsApp messages and fragile spreadsheets and gives it rules, checks and a printout. The ten apps: - PDC Cheque Register: cheques received and issued, what to deposit this week, deposit slips, bounced cheques and exposure per customer - Invoice Chase Desk: CSV import of open invoices, ageing, a daily chase list, ready WhatsApp wording, promise log and statements - Petty Cash Voucher Book: numbered vouchers, float top-up, receipt flags, cash count and monthly summary - Shop Cash-Up and Till Reconciliation: expected vs counted cash per shift, card and online checks, sign-off sheet, over/short trend - Customer Credit Limits and Statements: limit check before a sale, ledger, oldest-first ageing, statements, CSV imports - Supplier Payment Run Planner: a 12-week payment plan from cash and receipts, early-payment discount maths, printable payment run - Bank vs Ledger CSV Reconciler: scored matches, grouped matches, reconciliation statement - Expense Claim and Receipt Log: mileage and per diem from your rates, approvals, receipt log, claim forms - Multi-Currency Price List and Margin: dated rates, margin and breakeven rate per product, locked-rate quotes, FX exposure - Instalment and Payment Plan Tracker: schedules, receipts, chase list, restructure, 12-week expected collections What you get in the zip: ten folders, each with index.html, its own README.txt (quick start, how it calculates, limits) and an EXAMPLE-DATA folder (a made-up example you can restore for every app, and example CSV files for the five that import files), plus a top-level README.txt. Every app has Load example data, Clear everything, JSON backup and restore, CSV export and A4 print layouts. Value: bought separately the ten apps add up to AED 690. The bundle is AED 299, a saving of AED 391 (about 57 percent). Rules are settings, not built in. Rates, limits, tolerances, approval thresholds and wording are yours to set, and the examples show example values only. What it is NOT: accounting software, payroll or banking software. None of the apps connects to a bank or posts to your books, sends messages, or pays anyone. Each app keeps its data in one browser on one device, so it suits one person or a small team sharing a computer, with JSON backups to move data. Verified by us: each app was tested in Chromium with scripted flows through the real screens (from 39 to 95 assertions per app, run at 1280 px and at 375 px), with independent Python recalculation of the figures that matter (ageing, balances, the payment plan, bank-match scoring, margins and exposure, instalment status) and print layouts rendered to PDF and looked at. The example files in the zips were loaded through the real screens. Firefox and WebKit/Safari could not be launched in our test environment, so both are untested. Not tested on a real phone, in Edge, on a real printer, or with real bank or accounting exports. Some apps sit beside Excel or Word products in the catalogue (receivables tracker, bank reconciliation workbook, petty cash and expense pack, retail cash-up pack, cash discipline pack). The apps add validation, imports, exact integer arithmetic, printing and views; the spreadsheets and document packs remain useful if you prefer Excel or Word.
An offline app that turns a price, rent and costs into gross yield, net yield, cash-on-cash return, a 10-year projection and annual return, for up to four properties side by side, with a printable one-page summary.
A quoted yield rarely includes what it costs to buy the property, the weeks it stands empty, the service charge, or the loan. This app works the real figures out for each property so you can compare like with like before you commit. For each property you enter the price, purchase costs, rent, empty weeks per year, running costs and, if you use one, a loan. The result tiles update as you type: gross yield, net yield, cash invested, year 1 cash flow and cash-on-cash return. A 10-year projection shows rent, costs, loan payments, cash flow, loan balance, value and equity by year, and the annual return (IRR) if you sell at the end of year 10. The Compare tab puts up to four properties side by side with the best value in each row starred. What is inside: - Properties: inputs and live results for up to four properties - Compare: side-by-side table with the best value marked - 10-year projection with charts of cash flow and equity - One-pager: an A4 summary to print or save as PDF - Settings: the default fees and rates for new properties - Example data (made up) and a README that shows every formula Transfer and registration fees, agent fees, bank terms and service charges are settings you enter, not rules built in: they differ by emirate, project and lender, so check them with the land department, your broker or your bank. Every result was checked against an independent calculation in 30 random cases, including loan schedules. How it differs: the loan calculators and spreadsheets in the catalogue cover one loan or one tax. This is the whole property investment view, with fees, vacancy and running costs in the yield. It is an estimate from your assumptions, not a valuation or a forecast. No tax is calculated. Interest is fixed for the whole loan, one loan per property, and rent, costs and value change once a year. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline app for landlords and small property managers: units, tenants, an exact instalment and post-dated cheque schedule per contract, what is received and overdue, arrears ageing and a printable tenant statement.
Rent paid in four or twelve post-dated cheques is easy to lose track of: which cheque is due to deposit this week, which one bounced, and what a tenant really owes. This app keeps one schedule per contract and shows the answer on one screen. Enter a unit and a tenant with the contract dates, annual rent, number of payments and deposit, then Build schedule. The app splits the rent exactly to the fils (any odd fils go to the earliest payments, so the lines always add up to the contract), sets the due dates from the start date including short months and leap years, and numbers the cheques if you give the first cheque number. You then record what was received and when. What is inside: - Rent roll: units, occupied and vacant, monthly rent roll, overdue now, deposits held - Units and Tenants tabs with contract details and an Ejari or contract reference field - Cheques and payments: due date, cheque number, drawer bank, cheque date, mode, status, received - Arrears ageing: 1 to 30, 31 to 60, 61 to 90 and over 90 days, plus not yet due - Statement: one tenant with a running balance, printable on A4 - Example data with paid, bounced and overdue instalments, README, CSV and JSON import and export How it differs: the post-dated cheque register in the money apps is for the cheques a business issues and receives in general. This one belongs to the rent roll: every cheque sits under a tenant and a contract and feeds the arrears. Late fees, interest and legal steps are not calculated, because they depend on the contract and rules that apply to you: check with the Rental Dispute Centre, RERA or your lawyer. A cheque is cleared only when you say so; the app does not talk to your bank. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline app that shows which tenancy contracts need a notice or an offer and by when, tracks each renewal stage, tests rent change scenarios against the cost of losing the tenant, and exports reminders to your calendar.
Missing the date to serve a notice or make an offer can cost a landlord a month of rent or a year at the wrong price. This app watches the dates for you. Enter each contract with its end date and the notice period that applies to it. The app works out the notice-by date and the date to start talks, places the contract in a renewal pipeline and sorts a "Do these first" list. The Rent scenarios tab shows, for the contracts ending in a window, the new rent at the changes you try, what it costs if the tenant leaves (empty days at the rent plus your turnover cost) and how many months of the extra rent it takes to cover that. The Reminders tab lists every date and downloads a calendar file (.ics) so your own phone or calendar reminds you. What is inside: - Renewal board: open contracts, those needing action now, contracts ending in 90 days, rent up for renewal - Contracts: stage, proposed change, notice days per contract, date the notice was sent - Rent scenarios with an optional cap you enter, and what-ifs you type - Reminders and a calendar (.ics) export - Example data, README, CSV and JSON import and export Notice periods, rent increase rules and caps are NOT built in. They are settings you enter. The starting 90 days is only a placeholder, and the app says so on screen. Check the rule that applies to your contract and emirate with RERA, the Rental Dispute Centre or your lawyer. Date arithmetic was checked across month ends and leap years against an independent calculation. How it differs: staff contract expiry trackers in the catalogue follow employee documents. This one follows tenancy contracts and the money at stake in each renewal. It does not draft notices and does not decide what increase is allowed. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
Offline job tracker for a small print shop: a board from Received to Collected, due today and late jobs, a ready-for-pickup list with WhatsApp messages, deposits and balances, and a check that stops a job leaving without payment. Prints the job ticket and pickup slip.
Print Order Tracker is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for the counter of a small print shop. Each order gets a number, a due date, a stage and a price. Payments are recorded inside the order, so the app always knows the deposit and the balance. The board shows where every job is, the Today page shows what is due, late and ready, and each ready job has a WhatsApp message written for you. The problem it removes: Customers phone all day to ask if their job is ready, jobs are printed before the deposit is paid, and a finished order sits on a shelf for weeks because nobody chased it. Jobs also leave with a balance still owed. This app keeps one list with a stage for every job, refuses to start printing without the deposit or leave without payment (unless the customer is an account customer), and lists what has waited too long on the shelf. What is inside: - Order list with due date, stage, price, payments, deposit and balance owed - A board with a column for each stage from Received to Collected, with the value in each column - Rules: no printing before the proof is approved and the deposit is in, no collection with a balance owed unless the customer is on account - Today page: due today, late jobs, ready for pickup, ready but waiting too long, and balances to collect - A written WhatsApp message for ready jobs and late jobs, opened for you to send - Printable job ticket for the shop floor and a pickup slip with the balance and a signature line - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: owners and counter staff of small print shops, copy centres, sign makers and promotional printers who take orders by walk-in, phone and WhatsApp and want one place to see every job. What it is NOT: It does not price jobs (use a quote tool for that), hold artwork files or proofs, track paper stock or machines, or send messages by itself. The deposit rule uses a percentage you enter and does not know your own terms. It is not an accounting system and does not issue tax invoices. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (139 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 736 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
An offline app that splits a yearly building budget between units by area, share or equally, exact to the fils, with fairness checks, part-year units, a year-end true-up against actual spend and a printable statement per unit.
Splitting a service charge budget by hand leaves rounding differences, arguments about part-year units and no clear answer when the actual spend differs from the budget. This app does the split and shows its working. Enter your units with area, share or entitlement and months liable, then your budget lines, each with its budget, its actual year-end spend and how it is split. Every line is converted to fils and divided by weight with the largest remainder rule, so the parts add up to the budget exactly. A part-year unit has its weight reduced by months over 12 and the others pick up the rest. What is inside: - Budget lines and Units tabs - Allocation: every unit against every line, with totals that match - Fairness checks: shares add up to your expected total, units whose cost per area is far from the median - Year-end true-up: budget share, actual share, paid on account and the balance each unit owes or is owed - Unit statements: one A4 statement per unit - Example building, README, CSV and JSON import and export Which method suits which cost, how part years are handled and the shares themselves come from your building documents and the rules that apply to you. The app applies the method you choose and does not decide it. Allocation was checked against an independent integer calculation in 40 random buildings, and every line always sums to its budget. How it differs: tenant invoicing in an accounting package bills one party at a time. This tool allocates one budget across all units, tests the split and handles the year-end balance. It issues no invoices and takes no payments. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline app for landlords, property managers and facilities teams: log requests, set priority and target days, assign vendors, track cost and tenant charges, see vendor performance, and print a job card.
Repair requests that live in WhatsApp get forgotten, nobody knows what a vendor really costs, and charging a tenant needs a record. This app is the job log. Log each request with unit, category, priority and the problem. Assign a vendor, track the target date (blank means the logged date plus your target days for the priority), the completion date, the quoted and final cost, whether the tenant is chargeable and the amount, and a 1 to 5 rating when the job is done. What is inside: - Requests and jobs with status, priority, category and a job reference - Vendors: trade, phone, email - Overview: open and overdue jobs, average days to complete, done on time, total cost, amount chargeable to tenants, cost by category - Vendor performance: jobs, average days, on time, average rating and average cost against quote - Job card: a printable A4 card to hand to the vendor - Example data, README, CSV and JSON import and export The target days per priority are your own service levels and start as placeholders. Which repairs the landlord pays for and which the tenant pays for depends on the contract and the rules that apply to you: check with RERA, the Rental Dispute Centre or your lawyer before charging a tenant. How it differs: the fleet and maintenance tools follow vehicles and service intervals. This one follows repair requests in rented and managed units and the vendors who do them. It does not message vendors or tenants, and it does not store photos or invoices: refer to them in notes. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline app for landlords and agents: room-by-room condition ratings, meter readings, key inventory, itemised deposit deductions with optional age reduction, and a printable report with signature blocks. No photos stored.
Deposit disputes come down to what the unit looked like at move-in and what you can show at move-out. This app keeps both records and works out the deposit arithmetic. Add an inspection (move-in or move-out) for a unit. Go room by room and rate each item with notes and a photo reference number: photos are never stored, you number them on your phone and type the numbers. A move-out inspection can show the move-in rating beside each item. Record meter readings against the last paid bill and a rate, and the keys, cards and remotes issued and returned. On the Deposit tab add each deduction with its cost, an optional reduction for age (age against useful life, both your own estimates) and the evidence, or mark it fair wear and tear to show it at zero. The report prints on A4 with signature blocks for both parties. What is inside: - Inspections, Checklist, Meters and keys, Deposit and Report tabs - Deductible amount = cost x (1 - age / useful life) when you choose the age reduction - Deposit result: deposit held less deductions, unpaid rent and unpaid bills, shown as the amount to return or still owed - Example move-in and move-out for one unit, README, JSON import and export (CSV for the inspection headers) Whether and how much of a deposit may be deducted, and what counts as fair wear and tear, depend on your tenancy contract and the rules that apply to you. Check with the Rental Dispute Centre, RERA or your lawyer before you withhold any amount. The app does the arithmetic, which was checked against an independent calculation in 40 random cases. It does not decide disputes, and the printed report is a record, not a legal document. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline dashboard for owners of several units: occupancy, rent against target, rent lost to vacancy, leases ending in the next 90 days and gross yield, with charts drawn inside the file and an A4 print.
An owner with a dozen units across a few buildings usually has the answer to "how is the portfolio doing" spread over a spreadsheet, a notebook and memory. This app puts it on one page. Enter each unit with status, tenant, contract rent, lease end, target income and, if you want yield, current value. Log the rent actually collected each month. The dashboard shows occupancy, monthly rent from contracts against target, rent lost to vacancy, units by status, rent against target by building, the leases ending in your window (default 90 days) with a chart by month, collected income against target, and gross yield on value. What is inside: - Dashboard with tiles, four inline charts and the expiry list - Units and Income log tabs - Settings: report date, portfolio name, expiry window - Example data (12 made-up units), README, CSV and JSON import and export - A4 print of the dashboard Every figure is defined in the README (for example, occupancy is occupied units over units that are not owner use). Calculations were checked against an independent computation in 40 random portfolios. How it differs: the rent roll app tracks instalments and cheques per tenant. This one is the overview for the owner. The two do not share data, so you enter units in each, or use only the one you need. It shows what you enter and does not read a bank, Ejari or any government system. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline app that shows the loan, payment, debt burden, cash needed, a rate stress test, the highest price you can afford and owning against renting, using bank limits and fees that you enter.
Before you view a property you want to know whether the numbers work, and what happens if the rate rises. This app answers both from your own figures. Enter the price, down payment, income, existing debts and a rate (with an optional change after an initial fixed period). It shows the loan, the monthly payment, loan-to-value, debt burden ratio, total interest, the cash needed upfront against your savings, and the monthly cost of owning against paying rent. The Stress test tab repeats the payment and debt burden at higher rates (starting at 2 and 3 percentage points). The Affordability tab works out the highest price your income, debts, cash and limits allow and says which one is the limit. The Schedule tab lists every month and exports a CSV. What is inside: - Calculator, Affordability, Stress test, Schedule and Bank terms tabs - Pass or fail pills against the limits YOU enter - Year-by-year and month-by-month repayment schedule with CSV export - Example case, README, JSON import and export No bank rules are built in. Maximum loan-to-value, debt burden limit, maximum term, arrangement, valuation and registration fees, insurance and transfer fees are your entries from your bank's written offer or your adviser. The monthly payment and schedule were checked against an independent Decimal calculation in 40 random loans. How it differs: the loan calculators in the catalogue compare flat and reducing-rate loan structures. This one is for a property purchase: limits, fees, debt burden, stress and affordability. It is not a pre-approval or an offer. Conventional reducing-balance loans only: no offset accounts, early repayment or Islamic profit structures. A bank rounds payments and may use another day count, so its statement can differ by a few dirhams. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline app with two tools: a year-by-year rent increase planner driven by the rule bands you enter, and a rent vs buy comparison that includes the opportunity cost of your cash and shows the break-even year.
Two questions come up again and again: what rent can I ask at the next renewals, and would I be better off buying than renting? This app works both out from your own assumptions. The planner takes the current rent, the market rent and its growth, and the rule you enter as bands (for example: if the rent is 20% or more below market, the most you may increase is 8%). For each year it shows the gap to market, your limit, what you would ask, what is applied and the rent for the year, with a line chart of market against your rent. It does not know the rule: the example bands are made up, and you replace them with the rule you have confirmed. The rent vs buy tool compares owning with renting each year. The renter invests the cash the buyer would have put in (down payment, purchase costs, loan fee) at the return you enter, and the monthly difference between owning costs and rent is added to or taken from that portfolio. Owner wealth is the value after selling costs less the loan. The table, chart and break-even year show who is ahead. What is inside: - Rent increase planner with an editable band table, up to 10 years, print - Rent vs buy with owner wealth against renter portfolio, up to 30 years, print - Example data, README, JSON import and CSV import and export of the bands - Both tools checked against independent Decimal calculations in 60 random cases each The rent increase rule or cap is yours to enter and check with RERA, the Rental Dispute Centre or your lawyer. The result of rent vs buy depends heavily on value growth and the return on cash, so change them and watch. No tax or rent-to-income limits are modelled. The tenancy renewal tracker in this series handles dates and notices; this tool handles the numbers. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
An offline app that shows what each empty unit costs, tracks enquiries through viewing, offer and signing, measures days to let and compares holding the asking price with giving a discount.
Every empty month is rent you will never get back, plus the service charge and costs you keep paying. This app puts a number on it and helps you decide what to do. Add units with the asking rent, the monthly costs you carry while empty and the date they became empty. Log each enquiry with its source and add the viewing, offer and signed dates, or mark it lost with a reason. The Overview shows the cost of one empty month and the amount lost so far, the vacant units with flags (no enquiries yet, over your slow threshold, signed but still marked vacant), the leasing funnel with conversion rates, which sources bring signed tenants, and the days to let and the discount you gave on units already let. The Discount or wait tab compares two plans over the same period: hold the price and wait a number of days, or discount and let sooner. It shows the net income of each, the biggest discount that still beats holding, and the number of waiting days at which discounting wins, plus a table of other discounts. The day counts are your estimates (a button fills the wait from your own average days to let), and the leasing fee is your own entry. What is inside: - Overview, Units, Enquiries, Discount or wait and Settings tabs - Example data: 8 units and 25 enquiries, made up - A4 print of the overview, README, CSV and JSON import and export - Discount or wait results checked against both a formula and a numerical search in 60 random cases How it differs: the real estate agent tracker in the catalogue follows an agent's sales leads and commissions. This follows a landlord's empty units and the cost of leaving them empty. The portfolio dashboard shows rent lost to vacancy as one tile; this goes into the cost, the pipeline and the decision. It does not predict how fast a tenant will come, does not model renewals after a discount, and does not post listings or message prospects. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
All ten property apps in one zip: rental yield, rent roll and cheques, renewals, service charge, maintenance, inspections, portfolio dashboard, mortgage, rent increase and rent vs buy, and vacancy cost.
This is the ten property apps of this series in one download, at a lower price than buying them one by one (AED 720 separately, AED 299 as the toolkit, a saving of AED 421, about 58 percent). Each app is a single index.html with its own README.txt and example data, in its own folder. They work offline, keep data in your browser on that device, export and import JSON and CSV, print on A4 and use AED and DD/MM/YYYY. The apps do not share data with each other. The ten apps: - Rental Yield and ROI Calculator: gross and net yield, cash-on-cash, 10-year projection, four properties compared - Rent Roll and Tenant Ledger with Cheque Schedule: exact instalments, post-dated cheques, arrears ageing, statements - Tenancy Renewal and Notice Tracker: notice-by dates, pipeline, rent change scenarios, calendar reminders - Service Charge Allocation Calculator: exact split by area, share or equally, true-up, unit statements - Maintenance Request and Vendor Job Log: priority, vendors, costs, tenant charges, job card - Move-In and Move-Out Inspection and Deposit Report: ratings, meters, keys, deductions, signed report - Property Portfolio Dashboard: occupancy, income against target, expiries, charts - UAE Mortgage and Affordability Calculator: limits you enter, stress test, affordability - Rent Increase and Rent vs Buy Scenario Tool: your rule bands, opportunity cost, break-even - Vacancy Cost and Leasing Pipeline Tracker: empty-month cost, funnel, discount or wait Rules are settings: notice periods, rent increase caps, deposit rules, bank limits and fees are things you enter and check with RERA, the Rental Dispute Centre, your bank or your lawyer. Nothing here states a rule for you. Tested in headless Chromium at phone and desktop widths with scripted flows and independent calculations; Safari and Firefox were not tested. Read each app's description for what it does not do. The same files as the single apps: no extra features. This is a working tool, not legal, tax or financial advice, and it is not connected to or approved by any government body, regulator or bank. The app stores data in the browser on one device, so back it up with Export.
Turn supplier prices into the real cost of every dish and the price that reaches your food cost target. Your sales mix sorts the menu into stars, plough horses, puzzles and dogs. Prints A4 recipe cards. Works offline in your browser.
Most small kitchens price a dish from memory or from the last supplier invoice. Prices move, trimming and cooking loss are ignored, sauces and marinades are left out, and nobody can say which dishes actually earn the money. This app does the arithmetic. Enter what you buy as pack size, pack unit and pack price, with the usable yield after trimming or cooking loss. Build each dish, and each prep such as a sauce or marinade, from those ingredients and from other preps, and add packaging or garnish as an extra cost per portion. The app works out cost per portion, food cost percent, the price needed to reach the food cost you choose (rounded up to a step you set) and the margin per portion. Add the menu price and the units sold in a period and the Menu engineering tab sorts every dish into star, plough horse, puzzle or dog with a suggested action, and shows the menu's overall food cost. Recipe cards prints one A4 card per recipe with ingredients, method and the allergens you typed. What is inside: - Ingredients, Recipes, Menu engineering, Recipe cards, Settings and Start here tabs - Units kg, g, l, ml, pc and doz with automatic conversion - A VAT setting (UAE standard rate is 5 percent) and whether your menu prices include VAT - CSV import of ingredients, JSON backup and restore, print or save as PDF - A worked example (a small cafe with 21 ingredients and 10 recipes) on a button and as importable files Who it is for: cafes, restaurants, bakeries, cloud kitchens and caterers that cost their own recipes. What it is not: not a POS or accounting system, it does not read supplier invoices and it gives no tax advice. The example prices are invented teaching figures, not market prices. Menu engineering ranks dishes against your own menu only. Allergens print only as you type them: check them against labels and your own food safety plan. How it differs from the Restaurant Food Cost and Menu Pricing Workbook in the catalogue: that is an Excel file. This is a browser app with yield loss, preps used inside dishes, unit conversion, menu engineering from your sales mix and print-ready recipe cards, and it needs no spreadsheet skills. Tested: the app's costing was compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised recipe sets, 1,375 values (portion cost, prep rollups, food cost percent, suggested price, margin, menu classes), with no differences. 23 scripted browser checks cover loading the example, validation errors, CSV import, backup export and restore, printing to PDF and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
Count stock, compare it with what the books say should be there, and see the difference in dirhams and as a percentage of usage across your counts. Prints blind count sheets by location. Works offline in your browser.
Stock goes missing in small amounts: waste nobody logged, wrong portions, deliveries not checked, theft. You only see it by comparing what the books say should be on the shelf with what is really there, and most small businesses count, shrug at the total and never see which items drift. Add your items with a location, unit and unit cost, or import them from CSV. Print blind count sheets by location so counters write what they see, not what the system says. Start a count session: the opening stock comes from the previous count, you enter receipts and usage since then, and then the counted quantity for each item (typed, or imported from CSV by SKU for counts taken on a phone or scanner). The variance report shows expected against counted, the money difference, shrinkage as a percentage of usage, lines outside your tolerance in percent or dirhams, and the trend across your counts. What is inside: - Items, Count sheets, Count, Variance report, Settings and Start here tabs - Blind and expected-quantity count sheet options, printable per location - Several count sessions kept side by side, with the previous count carried forward - CSV import (items, counted quantities), CSV export of the variance report, JSON backup, print - A worked example of three monthly counts for a small cafe store Who it is for: cafes, restaurants, groceries and shops with up to a few hundred items who count monthly or weekly. What it is not: a variance is a signal, not proof of loss, because unrecorded usage, wrong units and a miscount look the same, so recount flagged lines before acting. It does not post to your books and is not a stock valuation for tax or audit. How it differs: the Stock Count Sheets and Reorder Planner and the Retail Daily Cash-Up and Stock-Take Pack in the catalogue are Excel files. This app keeps a history of count sessions, carries the opening stock forward, takes counted quantities from CSV and shows the trend and the money lost by item and location. Tested: expected, variance, shrinkage percent and valuation were compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised count histories, 6,902 values, with no differences. 16 scripted browser checks cover the example, sessions, CSV import, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
Log each loss in seconds with its reason, station and cost. The weekly report shows what you lost, why, where and when, against your own target, and names the biggest reason to fix first. Works offline on a phone or computer.
Wasted food and stock is money you paid for and never sold. Most kitchens and shops know it happens but not how much, why or where, because nothing is written down at the moment it is thrown away. Each loss is one line: item, quantity, unit cost, reason and station. Picking an item from your list fills the unit and cost, so it takes about ten seconds on a phone. The weekly report adds up the loss and splits it by reason, item, station and day, compares it with last week and with the target you set in dirhams and as a percentage of the week's sales, and gives a plain suggestion for the biggest reason. After one week of honest entries you can see the three things worth fixing first. What is inside: - Log, Weekly report, Targets and lists and Start here tabs - Editable lists of items, reasons and stations, and a choice of week start day - Weekly sales entry so waste is shown as a percentage of sales - CSV import and export of the log, JSON backup, print or save as PDF - A worked example for a cafe: six weeks, 150 entries Who it is for: cafes, restaurants, bakeries, groceries and canteens that want to see waste as money. What it is not: it records what you tell it. Food safety decisions, such as what may be reused or how long food may be kept, belong to your own food safety plan and your municipality. The suggestions are prompts to look, not findings. How it differs: the Restaurant Daily Operations Pack in the catalogue has printable checklists and an Excel waste log with a weekly review. This app is a log you fill on a phone, with reasons and stations of your own, the percent-of-sales target and the weekly comparison, in one file with no spreadsheet. Tested: weekly totals, breakdowns, week-on-week change and percent of sales were compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised logs, 769 values, with no differences. 18 scripted browser checks cover adding entries with validation, the report, CSV import, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
Put every supplier quote on one footing per kg, litre or piece with VAT treated the same way, see the cheapest supplier per item, and get a flag and a monthly dirham impact whenever a price rises. Works offline in your browser.
A supplier quotes AED 42 for a 10 kg bag, another AED 8.30 per kg, a third AED 45 including VAT for 12.5 kg. Which is cheapest, and which one quietly raised a price since last month? Without one place that keeps the history, price rises are found on the invoice, after the stock is on the shelf. List your items with your monthly use and current supplier, and your suppliers with whether their quotes include VAT, their minimum order and any monthly delivery charge. Add each price you receive with date, pack price, pack size and unit, or import a price list from CSV. The Compare tab shows the cheapest supplier per item, the saving against your current supplier at your monthly quantity, and four basket plans. The Price changes tab lists every increase above your alert level with the extra monthly cost and a price history chart, and flags prices that have gone stale. What is inside: - Items and suppliers, Prices, Compare, Price changes and Start here tabs - Units compared per kg, per litre or per piece with automatic conversion - VAT treatment as a setting: you recover input VAT or you do not, supplier registered or not - CSV import of price lists, CSV export, JSON backup, print - A worked example with invented suppliers and prices Who it is for: cafes, restaurants, groceries and shops that buy from several suppliers and renegotiate or switch. What it is not: the cheapest price is not always the best supplier, since quality, reliability, payment terms and delivery times are not in the numbers. The basket plans are a simple rule-based comparison, not an optimiser, and assume each supplier can supply your full monthly quantity at the quoted price. Check your VAT position with your accountant or the FTA for your case. How it differs: the Supplier Quotation Comparison and Award App in the catalogue evaluates one-off quotes with duty, freight and scoring. This app tracks prices over time for repeat purchases, compares per base unit and flags increases. Tested: unit conversion, VAT treatment, cheapest-supplier choice, basket plans and price-change flags were compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised data, 969 values, with no differences. 15 scripted browser checks cover the example, CSV import, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
Type the day figures from your POS report and till count and get average check, payment mix, cash over or short, and labour and food cost as a percent of sales. Keeps every day, shows trends and prints the close report. Works offline.
At the end of every trading day a manager copies a handful of numbers from the POS report and the till count, then the day is gone. Cash is over or short and nobody can say why, labour and food cost are only known at month end, and there is no record of how Thursday compares with Saturday. Type the day's covers, gross sales, discounts, comps and voids, payments by type, tips, opening float, cash paid out, counted cash, labour cost and hours, and food cost. Results update as you leave each box: net sales, sales excluding VAT, average check, expected cash and the difference, whether payments add up to net sales, labour percent, food cost percent and prime cost against the targets you set. Save the day. History keeps every day and lets you correct or print it. Trends shows charts, day-of-week averages and the month so far. What is inside: - Close a day, History, Trends, Settings and Start here tabs - One site or several (each day is stored per date and site) - Your POS figures with or without VAT, with the VAT rate as a setting (UAE standard rate is 5 percent) - CSV import and export of days, JSON backup, print or save as PDF of the close report - A worked example: five weeks of a cafe Who it is for: cafes, restaurants, takeaways and small chains whose manager closes the day by hand. What it is not: not a POS, not an accounting system and not a VAT return. Labour and food cost are the figures you enter, and a daily food cost needs a stock method of your own, for example opening stock plus purchases minus closing stock. Tips are recorded but not counted as sales. How it differs: the Retail Shop Daily Cash-Up and Stock-Take Pack in the catalogue is an Excel cash-up for shops. This app is built for restaurants and cafes: covers and average check, labour and food cost percent, payment mix including delivery and online, and the history and trends. Tested: every derived figure (net and ex-VAT sales, average check, expected cash and difference, labour, food and prime cost percents, day-of-week averages, month totals) was compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised days, 13,834 values, with no differences. 20 scripted browser checks cover closing a day with validation, history edits, CSV import, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
See the margin you keep and the extra units you must sell before you print a discount sign. Apply one discount to a product list, price bundles and buy-N-get-M offers, plan a clearance ladder and round prices to AED conventions.
A discount feels like a sale but it is a pay cut on every unit you sell. A 20 percent discount on a product with a 40 percent margin means you must sell half as many units again just to earn the same profit. Most shop owners print the sign first and find out later. This app does that arithmetic before the sign is printed. Discount impact takes one product and any discount and shows the new price, the new margin and how many more units you must sell to break even. The Promotion list applies one discount to many products, marks the ones that fall below your margin floor or lose money, and rounds the promotional prices to AED conventions. Bundles and offers prices a bundle, buy N get M free, and second item off, with the true margin. The Clearance schedule builds a dated markdown ladder for slow stock with the expected recovery and a never-below-cost option. Price rounding rounds any price down, up or to the nearest .99, .95, .90, .50, whole dirham, or a price ending in 9 or 5. What is inside: - Discount impact, Promotion list, Bundles and offers, Clearance schedule, Price rounding and Settings tabs - Margins worked out on the price excluding VAT, with the VAT rate and your margin floor as settings - CSV import of products, CSV export of the promotion list, JSON backup, print - A worked example for a small shop with eight products Who it is for: shops, groceries, boutiques and gift stores that run promotions and clearances. What it is not: the break-even uplift assumes the same cost and no effect on other products. Real promotions also move customers between products and pull sales forward, so use the number as a hurdle a promotion has to clear, not a forecast. Consumer protection rules about sale pricing apply to how you advertise: check the current rules with your emirate's economic department. How it differs: the Pricing and Margin Calculator Suite in the catalogue is a set of Excel tools including discount impact and bundle pricing. This app adds a promotion list with margin-floor warnings, buy-N-get-M and second-item offers, a clearance ladder and AED price-point rounding in one browser tool. Tested: break-even uplift, margins, bundle and offer maths, clearance schedules and all rounding modes were compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised cases, 3,549 values, with no differences. 61 scripted browser checks cover every tab, validation, CSV import, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
From your sales, how much they swing and each supplier lead time, it sets safety stock and reorder level per item, lists what to order now by supplier in pack sizes, and shows what a higher service level costs. Works offline.
You run out of the fast sellers while the slow ones pile up. Reordering by feel works until a supplier is late or a busy week hits, and then the shelf is empty on the day it matters. For each item the app turns your average daily sales, how much they vary and how long the supplier really takes into two numbers: safety stock and the reorder point. Enter a daily demand figure and its variation, or enter weekly or daily sales totals (or import a CSV) and let the app work out the average and the variation. The Plan tab shows what to order today and how much, which items are out of stock, and which are above their maximum. Quantities are rounded up to the pack multiple and are never below the supplier minimum. The Order list groups the suggestions by supplier for printing or export. The Service level tab shows how much extra stock a higher service level needs. The formulas are stated in the app: safety stock is z times the square root of ((lead time plus review period) times the daily variation squared, plus average daily demand squared times the lead time variation squared), where z is the normal quantile for your service level; the reorder point is average daily demand times lead time plus safety stock. What is inside: - Items, Sales history, Plan, Order list, Service level, Settings and Start here tabs - Continuous review (order when stock plus on order reaches the reorder point) or periodic review (order up to a level at each review) - CSV import of items and sales history, CSV export, JSON backup, print - A worked example with invented figures Who it is for: cafes, groceries and shops with tens to a few hundred items. What it is not: the formula assumes demand is roughly normal and independent from day to day. Promotions, seasons (Ramadan, Eid, summer) and bulk orders break that, so use a history of normal trading or adjust by hand. A service level is a target, not a guarantee. It does not model cash or financing. How it differs: the Reorder Point and Cash Conversion Planner App in the catalogue also covers cash cycle and growth funding and takes demand variation as a figure you enter. This app stays on stock, calculates variation from your sales history, handles lead time variation and review periods and groups orders by supplier. The Stock Count Sheets and Reorder Planner is an Excel file. Tested: z values, safety stock, reorder points, order-up-to levels, order quantities with pack and minimum rounding and plan statuses were compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised items and histories, 9,897 values, with no differences. 99 scripted browser checks cover every tab, validation, CSV import, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
Make scannable barcodes with the check digit added or verified, print them on A4 label sheets or roll labels with your price and name, download single barcodes as SVG or PNG. Built-in encoders, no subscription, works offline.
Shelf and stock labels with barcodes usually mean a monthly subscription, an online tool that sees your product list, or retyping codes into a word processor. This app builds the barcodes inside one file, with no network, from your own item list. Add each item with a name, barcode type, code, price and the number of labels, or import a CSV. For EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A and ITF-14 the app adds the check digit, and if you type a full number with the wrong check digit it tells you the correct one. Leave the code blank and it makes an in-store number starting with 20. On the Label sheet tab pick a layout, preview the page, set the starting label so a partly used sheet can be reused, shift the grid to align your printer, and print at 100 percent scale. The Quick barcode tab makes a single barcode, downloads it as SVG or PNG and includes a check digit calculator. What is inside: - Items, Label sheet, Quick barcode, Settings and Start here tabs - Code 128 with automatic choice of code sets, Code 39 with optional check character, ITF and ITF-14 for cartons - A4 layouts of 8, 21, 40 and 65 labels per page, 50 x 30 mm roll labels and custom geometry - Name, business name, price and digits on each label, switchable - CSV import and export, JSON backup, print or save as PDF - A worked example of nine bakery items across the main types Who it is for: small shops, bakeries, workshops and warehouses that label their own products, cartons or bins. What it is not: EAN and UPC numbers for products sold through other retailers must be allocated to you by GS1 (GS1 UAE in the UAE). Numbers starting 20 to 29 are set aside for in-store use on your own shelves, and this app does not allocate numbers. No QR or other 2D codes, and no GS1-128 application identifiers, in this version. Scan a printed sample with your own scanner and printer before a full run. How it differs: the Price Tag, Shelf Label and Wobbler Print Sheets in the catalogue are designed tag and label layouts to fill in. This app generates the barcodes themselves. Tested: 541 barcode strings across all seven types were decoded with an independent open-source reader (ZXing-C++) from rendered images. 537 matched exactly. The other 4 are Code 39 strings that the reader reads under its Code 39 Extended rules (a $, /, + or % pair); the bars were identical to a second encoder library's. Bar patterns matched that library in 333 of 380 comparisons; the other 47 were all Code 128, where the two encoders chose different but valid mixes of code sets (mine were never longer), and every Code 128 symbol decoded correctly. Printed PDFs of the 21, 40 and 65 per page sheets and 29 roll labels were rendered at 300 dpi and every barcode decoded. 60 scripted browser checks cover the tabs, validation, CSV, backup and downloads, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
Keep every batch with its lot and expiry date, see what is expired, use now or expiring soon and the money in each group, and issue stock first expired first out. One click writes off expired batches. Works offline in your browser.
Food, cosmetics, medicine-like items and chemicals go bad on a date. Stock is rotated by eye, short-dated deliveries are noticed late, and the first sign of a problem is a bin of expired product you already paid for. Add each item, then each delivery as a batch with lot number, expiry date, quantity and cost. The Dashboard shows what is expired but still in stock, what to use within your red window, what expires soon, and what is on watch, with the money at risk in each group and a chart of the value expiring week by week for eight weeks. Issue (FEFO) takes a quantity and tells you which batches to take from, earliest expiry first, and records the issue. Batches on hold or already expired are skipped. Stock lists every live batch with filters and writes off expired batches in one click, and the Log keeps every receipt, issue and write-off. An item with expiry date 20/11/2026 is usable on 20/11/2026 and expired from 21/11/2026. The red, amber and watch windows in days, and the as-of date, are settings. What is inside: - Dashboard, Stock, Receive, Issue (FEFO), Items, Log, Settings and Start here tabs - A warning when a delivery arrives with less than a set share of its shelf life left - CSV import of batches, CSV export, JSON backup, printable expiry report - A worked example of eight items and 14 batches Who it is for: cafes, restaurants, bakeries, groceries, cosmetics shops and anyone who stocks dated goods. What it is not: it only knows the dates you enter. It is not a food safety system and does not replace temperature checks, supplier documents or the rules your local authority sets on shelf life, relabelling and disposal. Check those rules for your products. How it differs: the document expiry trackers in the catalogue follow licences, visas and staff documents. This one follows stock batches and FEFO issue. Tested: expiry state, days left, window grouping, FEFO allocation order and quantities, write-offs and values were compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised stock, 3,500 cases and 4,313 assertions, with no differences. 59 scripted browser checks cover receiving, issuing, write-off, CSV import, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
Check each delivery against the purchase order at the door: record received and rejected units, compare invoice price with order price, and get the amount to claim. A scorecard ranks suppliers on on-time, in-full, price and quality. Works offline.
A delivery arrives, someone signs the driver's note, and weeks later the invoice does not match what was ordered or what came off the truck. Without a record made at the door, every shortage, damaged case and price difference is an argument you cannot win, and the supplier who keeps getting it wrong looks the same as the one who does not. Record each purchase order with its promised date and priced lines. When the delivery arrives, start a goods received note from the order, enter received and rejected quantities with a reason, the invoice price and, if you check it, the temperature, then post it. The app flags shortages, over-delivery, price differences and late delivery against the tolerances you set, works out the claim (rejected units at invoice price plus the overcharge on accepted units), and for partial deliveries deducts what you already accepted so the next GRN expects only the outstanding quantity. The Scorecard ranks suppliers for any date range on on-time, in-full, price accuracy and quality, with weights you choose. Claims lists every rejected or overcharged line, ready to send to the supplier as a credit-note request. What is inside: - Suppliers, Orders, Receive (GRN), Scorecard, Claims, Settings and Start here tabs - Settings for lateness grace days, quantity tolerance, price tolerance, maximum temperature and score weights - Printable GRN, supplier scorecard and claim request, CSV export, JSON backup - A worked example: three suppliers, seven orders and seven GRNs Who it is for: cafes, restaurants, groceries and shops that receive from several suppliers and want evidence for claims. What it is not: it is a receiving check and a scoreboard, not an accounting or tax system. It does not post to your books, issue tax invoices or credit notes or check VAT. Tolerances and the temperature limit are your own rules; set them to match your supplier agreements and the requirements for your products, which this app does not state. What is payable on a claim is set by your agreement with the supplier. How it differs: the Restaurant Daily Operations Pack has a simple Excel receiving log. This app matches deliveries to orders, handles partial deliveries and builds a supplier scorecard and claims. Tested: outstanding quantities, shortages, over-delivery, price differences, claim amounts, on-time and in-full flags, scorecards and order status were compared with a separate Python implementation on randomised orders and GRNs, 12,907 values, with no differences. 74 scripted browser checks cover the example, partial deliveries, validation, posting and reopening, backup restore, print and the 375 and 1280 pixel layouts, with no console errors. Browser tests ran in Chromium and WebKit; Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested.
5 offline apps for UAE cafes, shops and kitchens in one zip. Separately AED 335, bundled AED 139. Each opens by double-click and keeps your data on your device.
5 working offline apps in one zip, each in its own folder with its own README and example data. Bought separately they come to AED 335; the bundle is AED 139, a saving of AED 196 (about 59 percent). Each app is a single HTML file: double-click index.html, no installation, account or internet. Your data stays in your browser on your device, with Export backup and Import backup, and a Load example data button so you can see each one working first. What is inside: - Recipe Costing and Menu Engineering - Stock Count, Variance and Shrinkage - Wastage and Spoilage Log with a Weekly Loss Report - Supplier Price Comparison and Price Change Tracker - Restaurant and Cafe Daily Sales Close-Out Report Each app is the same product as the one sold on its own, version 1.0, so read its listing for what it does, how it was tested and what it does not do. In short: every calculation was compared with an independent Python implementation on randomised data, and the screens were driven with scripted browser tests in Chromium and WebKit, with no console errors. Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested. What it is not: not tax, legal, accounting or food-safety advice, not an accounting or POS system, and not connected to the FTA, banks, marketplaces or any government system. Example data is invented. Single business use, do not resell or redistribute. Support: support@zeyto.app
10 offline apps for UAE cafes, shops and kitchens in one zip. Separately AED 660, bundled AED 269. Each opens by double-click and keeps your data on your device.
10 working offline apps in one zip, each in its own folder with its own README and example data. Bought separately they come to AED 660; the bundle is AED 269, a saving of AED 391 (about 59 percent). Each app is a single HTML file: double-click index.html, no installation, account or internet. Your data stays in your browser on your device, with Export backup and Import backup, and a Load example data button so you can see each one working first. What is inside: - Recipe Costing and Menu Engineering - Stock Count, Variance and Shrinkage - Wastage and Spoilage Log with a Weekly Loss Report - Supplier Price Comparison and Price Change Tracker - Restaurant and Cafe Daily Sales Close-Out Report - Retail Markdown, Promotion and Bundle Calculator - Reorder Point and Safety Stock Planner - Barcode Generator and Label Sheet - Expiry Date and FEFO Batch Tracker - Goods Received Each app is the same product as the one sold on its own, version 1.0, so read its listing for what it does, how it was tested and what it does not do. In short: every calculation was compared with an independent Python implementation on randomised data, and the screens were driven with scripted browser tests in Chromium and WebKit, with no console errors. Firefox, a real phone, a real printer and a real scanner were not available, so they were not tested. What it is not: not tax, legal, accounting or food-safety advice, not an accounting or POS system, and not connected to the FTA, banks, marketplaces or any government system. Example data is invented. Single business use, do not resell or redistribute. Support: support@zeyto.app
An offline workpaper that sorts your sales and purchase lines into the VAT 201 boxes, applies credit notes and reverse charge, ties the totals to your ledger and flags duplicates and dates outside the period. Prints on A4. It files nothing.
Preparing the VAT return from an accounting export usually means a pivot table rebuilt every quarter, a reverse charge line forgotten in Box 3, credit notes entered with the wrong sign, and a final figure that differs from the ledger by an amount nobody can explain. This app does the sorting and the arithmetic once, shows the formula for every box and keeps a printed page for the return file. What is inside - Sales and purchase grids: type each invoice once or import a CSV from your accounting system. Credit notes are entered as positive amounts and the app applies the sign. - Category lists that say which box each category feeds: Box 1a to 1g by emirate, Box 3 reverse charge, Box 4 zero-rated, Box 5 exempt, Box 6 imports, Boxes 9 and 10 for input VAT, with a recoverable percentage you set per category. - Reverse charge VAT is always calculated, so it cannot be mistyped. VAT you type on other lines is kept, and a line where it differs from rate times net is flagged. - An Adjustments tab for figures you work out elsewhere, such as the Box 7 adjustment. - The return workpaper: Boxes 1 to 14 with the formula beside each, printable on one A4 page. - A Reconcile tab: type the totals from your ledger and see every difference against your own tolerance. - A Checks tab: duplicate document numbers, missing dates, lines dated outside the period, VAT differing from rate times net, invalid numbers. - Export of the boxes and the lines as CSV, JSON backup and restore, and a README with a worked example in numbers. What is fact and what is a setting The standard rate of 5% and the VAT 201 box structure follow the FTA VAT Returns User Guide, as recorded in the Zeyto Academy fact check; the README says to verify them with the FTA. The rate, the categories, the recoverable percentages and the tolerance are settings you control. Tax groups, profit margin scheme, designated zones, bad debt relief, capital asset adjustments and Box 2 are not decided by the app. What it is NOT It is a workpaper, not a filing tool. It does not connect to the FTA, submit a return or decide how a transaction should be treated. It is not tax or legal advice and is not endorsed by the Federal Tax Authority. E-invoicing is not covered. How it differs from the VAT 201 Workings Workbook That product is an Excel workbook with the same purpose. This one is a single offline file that needs no Excel, runs on a phone, and handles credit note signs and reverse charge automatically. If you already work comfortably in Excel, the workbook is an equal alternative. Buying both adds little. How it was checked Every box total was compared with an independent Python Decimal calculation over 30 random sets of lines, with no difference at all. Typed screens, CSV import, exports, reload, print view and phone width were tested in Chromium. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
An offline calculator for businesses with taxable and exempt supplies: four apportionment methods you choose between, period claims, the annual adjustment and a printable worksheet. Every step is shown for your accountant.
If you make both taxable supplies (standard or zero rated) and exempt supplies, input VAT that relates to the exempt ones is not recoverable. Costs that serve both need a method to split them, and that is usually done in a spreadsheet nobody trusts, or not at all. Over-claiming leaves a repayment to find later. Under-claiming leaves recoverable VAT unclaimed. This is a working offline app, one HTML file you open by double-clicking. You enter supplies and input VAT for each period and it calculates the recovery percentage, the recoverable and irrecoverable VAT, and then the annual adjustment: what the whole year supports minus what you claimed period by period. What is inside - Four methods you choose between: turnover method on all input VAT, direct attribution plus residual by turnover, direct attribution plus residual at your own fixed percentage, and direct attribution plus residual on a custom basis such as floor area. - Options that are off by default: round the percentage up to the next whole percent, include out-of-scope supplies in the denominator, and a de minimis threshold that you enter only if your accountant or the FTA confirms one. - Four periods (add or remove periods), period results and the annual adjustment worksheet with positive or negative result. - A side-by-side view of the same year under each method, so you can see how much the choice matters. - Every formula shown on screen, a Checks tab, example data, CSV export of the results, JSON backup and restore, and a clean A4 print or PDF of the worksheet. - A README with a worked example using the real numbers the app produces. How it was checked The results were compared with an independent Python Decimal calculation over 20 random cases for each method, the round-up option and the de minimis option, with a maximum deviation of 0.00. Tested in Chromium through scripted screens. It was not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. What it is NOT The method is your choice and the FTA may require an approved method for your business: the app does not tell you which method is permitted, what a de minimis limit is, or whether and when an adjustment is due. Those are settings you fill in from your accountant or the FTA, and it ships with neutral defaults. It does not cover capital assets, does not file anything, is not an FTA-approved system and does not cover e-invoicing. It is not tax or legal advice. How it differs from neighbours The VAT 201 Workings Workbook sorts invoices into return boxes and flags non-recoverable VAT; it leaves annual apportionment to you. This app does only that one job, in depth, and needs no Excel. Requirements: a current browser on a computer or phone. No internet and no installation needed.
An offline checker that scores a tax invoice, or a CSV batch of them, against a required-elements list you control: missing TRN, wrong total, late issue, repeated number. Lists exactly what is wrong. Not an FTA approval.
Your input VAT claim depends on holding a proper tax invoice, and customers and auditors can refuse an invoice with something missing. A missing or malformed TRN, a total that does not add up, an invoice issued weeks after the supply, a number used twice: today these are found by eye, after the fact. This is a working offline app, one HTML file you open by double-clicking. Type or paste the fields of one invoice, or import a CSV of many from your accounting system. It checks each against a list of required elements, gives a score and lists what is missing or inconsistent. What is inside - A single-invoice form with a live score and a pass or fail line for every element. - A batch mode: import a CSV (template and a 12-invoice sample with deliberate defects included), see score, status and the problems for each invoice, export the results as CSV, print them. - A configurable list of required elements with a switch per profile (Standard tax invoice, and a Simplified or other profile you set up). Rename items, add your own on extra fields, remove what you do not need. - Built-in checks: the words tax invoice, supplier name, address, TRN of exactly 15 digits, a sequential or unique number, issue within the allowed number of days of the supply (14 by default, a setting), VAT equals taxable amount times rate, total equals taxable plus VAT, and no repeated invoice number in a batch. - Every rule is shown, and the README works through an example with the real numbers. What is fact and what is a setting The core particulars and the 14-day rule follow the FTA tax invoice page as recorded in the Zeyto Academy fact check, and the README says to verify them with the FTA. Other commonly expected elements are labelled as common elements to confirm with the FTA. Simplified invoice rules changed under Cabinet Decision 100 of 2025, so the Simplified profile is a list you configure, not a rule the app states. How it was checked Scores and failure lists were compared with an independent Python calculation over 25 random cases of 8 invoices each for every rule, with no differences. Tested in Chromium through scripted screens. It was not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. What it is NOT It reads the text you give it. It does not read PDFs or images, does not look a TRN up, does not validate the TRN check digit, and does not decide whether a supply is taxable. It is not an FTA-approved system, files nothing with the FTA, and does not cover e-invoicing. It is not tax or legal advice. How it differs from neighbours The UAE Tax Invoice Pack gives you invoice templates to issue. The VAT 201 Workings Workbook sorts your invoices into return boxes. This app does a different job: it checks whether an invoice is complete, one at a time or in bulk. Requirements: a current browser on a computer or phone. No internet and no installation needed.
An offline calculator that takes accounting profit through your adjustments, losses and the bands you enter to an estimated tax figure, with a printable A4 computation. No rate is built in: you enter what the FTA or your adviser confirms.
A small business owner or accountant often needs to answer one question before year end: roughly how much corporate tax will we owe, and can I show the working. Doing it in a spreadsheet means rebuilding the bridge every time and trusting a formula nobody has audited. This app does the arithmetic in one file you open by double-clicking, keeps your numbers on your device and prints the whole computation on one A4 page. The design rule is honest: the app contains no built-in corporate tax rate, band, threshold or relief rule. The only fact it states is that a federal corporate tax exists in the UAE and is administered by the Federal Tax Authority. Everything else is a setting that you enter after confirming it with the FTA or your tax adviser. The Load example data button fills invented numbers so you can see it working; they are labelled example only and are not the real rates. What is inside - Profit to taxable income bridge: accounting profit (entered, or revenue plus other income less expenses), add-back and deduction rows with a type checklist, taxable income before losses. - Tax losses brought forward with an optional utilisation limit you enter, losses used, losses left, and any tax loss arising in the period. - Tax by band: any number of bands you enter (from, to, rate), progressive slices shown, rounded once at the end, half up. - Small business relief check: a checklist driven by your settings (availability, revenue threshold, prior period revenues, a list of conditions you enter and tick, and the effect you choose). - A list of prompts to ask your adviser, a Checks tab that flags problems, and a printable computation page with every formula. - Backup and restore with Export and Import JSON, CSV export and import of the adjustments, a clear-everything button and a worked example in the README. Who it is for Owners, bookkeepers and accountants of UAE small and medium businesses who want a transparent estimate and a working paper to discuss with an adviser. What it is NOT It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system and not a return. It does not know any current rate, threshold, relief condition, loss rule or due date, and it models no instalments, group or free zone regimes, transfer pricing, foreign tax credits, interest limits or filing. E-invoicing is not covered. Adjustment types are things worth asking about, not statements of what is deductible. How it differs from the Corporate Tax Readiness Workbook: that product is an Excel organiser that calculates no tax. This is an offline calculator that does the arithmetic once you enter the rules. Tested in headless Chromium against an independent Python implementation. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
An offline app that works out gratuity with exact day counts, adds leave, final salary, notice and deductions, and prints a signed settlement statement with the working for every line. Every open rule choice is a visible setting.
When someone leaves, HR has to produce a number and justify it. The law fixes the gratuity tiers but leaves choices open: the daily rate, what the cap is measured on, how unpaid leave counts, and whether resignation or termination changes anything. Different people make different choices and nobody can show which. This app makes each choice a visible setting, counts days exactly and prints the choices on the statement. What is inside - Gratuity with the published tiers (21 days of basic wage per year for the first five years, 30 days after, one-year minimum, part years in proportion, cap of two years' wage, per Federal Decree-Law 33 of 2021, Article 51 as summarised in the Zeyto fact check). Verify with MOHRE before relying. - Exact day counting: calendar-anniversary years (including 29 February joiners) or service days divided by 365, with the last-day and unpaid-leave rules as settings. - Daily rate method as a setting: basic x 12 / 365 (Zeyto's own method), basic / 30, or total wage / 30. The law does not define the daily rate. - Cap months and cap basis (basic or total wage) as settings. - Scenario table (resignation, termination, end of limited contract, other) with a factor that defaults to 100% because the fact check supports no reduction. You enter a different factor only if MOHRE guidance or your lawyer says so. - Unused leave, final salary, notice pay in lieu or notice recovery, other earnings, advances, loans and other deductions, giving a net payable. - A printable A4 settlement statement with the working per line, signature lines and a disclaimer, a register of saved settlements with CSV export, and a Checks tab. - JSON backup and restore, example data and a README with a worked example. Who it is for Owners, HR officers and accountants of UAE private-sector employers who want one consistent, explainable method. What it is NOT It is an estimate and a working paper, not legal advice, not a MOHRE system and not connected to any authority. It does not cover free zone schemes, court awards or benefits beyond the statutory gratuity. E-invoicing is not covered. How it differs from existing Zeyto products: the End-of-Service Gratuity Calculator ($9) is an Excel sheet for the gratuity figure only, and the End-of-Service Final Settlement Workbook is an Excel workbook built around a register of leavers. This is an offline app with exact day-count rules, a settings panel and a printable signed statement. Tested in headless Chromium against an independent Python implementation, including 29 February joiners and the five-year tier boundary. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
An offline fixed asset register with straight line, reducing balance and units of production, month conventions you choose, disposals with gain or loss, a by-category movement table, balanced journals and a projection of up to 15 years.
Year-end depreciation is often a spreadsheet that breaks when an asset is bought mid-year or sold, and the note, the journal and the schedule disagree by a few fils. This app keeps one register and gives, for any financial year you choose, the movement in cost and accumulated depreciation, the charge, the net book value and the gain or loss on disposal, with journals whose debits equal credits. What is inside - An asset grid: in-service date, cost, residual value, method, life or rate or total units, disposal date and proceeds, with CSV import and export. - Three methods: straight line (cumulative, so the years add up exactly), reducing balance (never below residual value) and units of production (with a units tab for each year). - Month conventions as settings: full month, half month, from the following month, or actual days, separately for the month of acquisition and the month of disposal. - A year report by asset and by category in the shape of the fixed asset note, plus journals for depreciation, additions and disposals. - A multi-year schedule of up to 15 years with net book value at each year end, exported as CSV. - A README with every formula and a worked example in numbers, example data and JSON backup. What is fact and what is a setting This is arithmetic. Useful lives, residual values, methods and conventions are accounting policy for you and your accountant to choose, and depreciation in the accounts can differ from what is allowed for tax. The app states no UAE rule. What it is NOT It does not handle revaluation, impairment, component depreciation or assets under construction, and it does not post to an accounting system. It is not accounting or tax advice. How it differs from the Fixed Asset Register and Depreciation Schedule workbook That product is an Excel workbook with straight line and reducing balance. This is an offline app that adds units of production, daily and half-month conventions, a 15-year projection and by-year journals. If you only need straight line in Excel, the workbook is enough. How it was checked Outputs were compared with an independent Python Decimal calculation over 48 random registers covering all three methods, all conventions, disposals and units, with no difference. Typed screens, CSV, exports, reload, print view and phone width were tested in Chromium. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
Offline volunteer roster for community events: shifts with places needed, sign-ups that stop overbooking and clashes, a waiting list, reminders and hours, and a printable sign-in sheet for each shift.
Volunteer Sign-Up and Shift Sheet for Community Events is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a community group, school parents committee, charity or society that needs helpers at events. Each event has shifts with a role, a start and end time and the number of volunteers needed. Volunteers sign up to shifts. The app refuses a sign-up when the shift is full or when the same volunteer already has another shift at the same time, so a full shift goes on a waiting list instead. After the event you mark who attended and who did not turn up, and each volunteer hours are added up. The problem it removes: Volunteers sign up in a chat thread, some sign up twice for overlapping jobs, popular shifts overflow and others stay empty until the morning of the event. Nobody knows who actually came. This app shows every shift with places filled and places open, keeps a waiting list, and prints a sign-in sheet for the shift leader. What is inside: - Events with date, venue, organiser and a status - Shifts with role, start and end time and places needed, showing filled, open and the waiting list - Volunteers with phone, age group and a guardian for those under 18 - Sign-ups with a status: Confirmed, Waitlist, Cancelled, Attended, No show - Checks that stop a sign-up to a full shift, a clash with another shift of the same volunteer, and attendance marked before the shift date - Hours, attended shifts and no-shows for each volunteer - Today page with open places, a waiting list and WhatsApp reminders for the next days - A printable shift sign-in sheet and an event roster - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: community groups, parents committees, charities, residents societies and sports clubs that run events with helpers who give their time free. What it is NOT: It does not record any payment, it does not check identity, training, police clearance or insurance, and it makes no statement about what the law requires for working with children. It only records a guardian name for volunteers under 18. It sends no messages: you press WhatsApp and send them yourself. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (157 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1909 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
An offline calculator that turns a flat rate quote into the true effective rate, compares two or more offers on total cost, and works out what it costs to settle early. Handles fees, insurance, balloon and advance payments.
A flat rate is charged on the original amount for the whole term, even though you pay the loan down every month, so 4% flat is not the same price as 4% reducing. Buyers compare a flat quote from one dealer with a reducing quote from another and pick the wrong one. This app solves the real rate and puts the offers side by side. What is inside - A flat quote converter: instalment, total interest, nominal and effective annual rate, and the equivalent reducing rate. - Fees as a fixed amount or a percentage, added to the loan or deducted from what you receive; insurance financed; a balloon payment; payments in advance or arrears. - A reducing-rate quote for comparison, with its equivalent flat rate and total cost of credit. - A Compare offers tab that ranks several quotes on the same price by effective annual rate. - Early settlement three ways: the actuarial balance, the Rule of 78 and your own rebate percentage, with an optional settlement fee. - A month-by-month schedule that exports to CSV, a printable A4 page for each tab, example data and a README with a worked example. What is fact and what is a setting This is arithmetic. It states no UAE lending rule and no regulator limit. Fees, insurance, balloon and the settlement method come from your contract, so they are inputs. No bank or finance company is named. What it is NOT It is a calculation, not a quote or financial advice. Variable rates, grace periods, skipped payments, late fees and tax on fees are not modelled. How it differs from the UAE SME Bank Loan Application Pack That pack includes a repayment and flat-rate converter as one sheet among many application documents. This app is the full calculator: effective rate, comparison of offers, balloon, fees and early settlement. How it was checked Instalments, effective rates, schedules and settlement figures were compared with an independent Python calculation over random cases, with the differences reported in the README. Typed screens, CSV, exports, reload, print view and phone width were tested in Chromium. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single use.
An offline lease register that works out the lease liability, the right-of-use asset, the monthly interest and depreciation schedule, the journals and the current and non-current split at your reporting date. A working tool, not an audit tool.
Lease schedules are usually rebuilt in a spreadsheet every year: a present value formula, a hand-made amortisation table and a current portion that nobody can reproduce. This app takes each lease once and shows the working, so the figures can be explained to your accountant or auditor. What is inside - A leases register: commencement date, term in months, payment per period (monthly, quarterly, every 6 months or yearly), in advance or arrears, yearly increase, rent-free months, your incremental borrowing rate, initial direct costs, prepaid payments, incentives and a restoration provision. - Your choice of how the rate is quoted: an effective annual rate converted to a monthly rate, or a nominal rate divided by 12. - The liability as the present value of the payments, the right-of-use asset, and a month-by-month schedule with interest rounded each month and the last month balancing the liability to exactly nil. - Straight line depreciation of the asset, commencement and month journals that balance, and the split of the liability into current and non-current at the reporting date. - A portfolio position page for all leases that prints on A4, with the last 12 months of interest, depreciation and cash. - Short-term and low-value leases flagged and expensed straight line. - A Checks tab, CSV exports, example data, JSON backup and a README with a worked example. What is fact and what is a setting The arithmetic is standard present value and effective interest. The lease term, the rate, which payments are included and the exemptions are accounting judgements, not defaults of the app. How corporate tax treats lease payments is a separate question to verify with the FTA or your tax adviser. What it is NOT It is a working calculator, not an audit tool. It does not decide whether a contract is a lease and does not handle modifications, variable or index-linked payments, foreign currency, sub-leases or sale and leaseback. The restoration provision is not unwound. Verify the treatment with your accountant or auditor. How it was checked Every figure and every month of the selected schedule were compared with an independent Python calculation at 80 digits over 44 random portfolios (182 leases), with no difference. Typed screens, CSV, exports, reload, print view and phone width were tested in Chromium. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge, or with a real lease contract. Single business use.
An offline provision matrix for trade receivables: ages invoices by due date, applies the loss rates you set, adds invoices assessed individually, compares with your books and writes the journal. No loss rate is built in.
At year end the allowance for doubtful debts is often a guess, or a spreadsheet nobody can audit, and the journal is worked out by hand. This app does the ageing from the due dates, shows every step, reconciles the movement from the opening allowance and writes journals that balance. What is inside - Ageing buckets you define (days past due) and a loss rate for each, with an optional forward-looking adjustment. - Invoice mode with CSV import, or manual mode where you type a balance per bucket. Invoices you assess on their own take a specific percentage. - The required allowance, the movement from your opening allowance with write-offs and recoveries (recoveries to the allowance or to profit or loss, your choice), and the charge or release. - Journal entries that balance, a by-customer provision table with CSV, and a printable A4 provision memo. - A loss-rate helper that suggests a rate from your own history and never changes the matrix by itself. - A README with a worked example, example data and JSON backup. What is fact and what is a setting No loss rate, bucket bound or adjustment is built in. They are your accounting policy and your estimates. Whether the approach meets IFRS 9, and how to support the rates with history, is for you, your accountant and your auditor. VAT bad debt relief and the corporate tax treatment of provisions are not covered. What it is NOT It is not an audit tool or an opinion on IFRS 9 compliance. It covers trade receivables on the simplified approach only, with no staging, no discounting and no probability of default model. How it was checked Balances, rates, provisions, the charge, journal totals and helper rates were compared with an independent Python Decimal calculation over 36 random portfolios, with no difference. Typed screens, CSV, exports, reload, print view and phone width were tested in Chromium. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
An offline schedule that spreads an invoice over the months it relates to, recognises cost or income with no invoice yet, and gives the balance at any date, the month's amounts and the month-end journals. Months always add up exactly.
Month-end adjustments for insurance, rent, licences, annual contracts billed in advance and audit fees are usually done in a spreadsheet rebuilt every month, with rounding that never quite adds up. This app takes each item once with the period it covers and keeps the schedule. What is inside - Four item types: prepayment, deferred income, accrued expense and accrued income, each with the amount excluding VAT, the period it covers and, where it applies, the payment or settlement date. - Two spreading methods: actual days or equal calendar months, set as a default and overridable per item. - The balance sheet balance at your balance date, the amount recognised in the month, and month-end journals that balance. - A full month-by-month schedule for every item, exported as CSV, with CSV import for a list of items. - Rounding carried in the running total, so the months always add up to the amount. - A printable A4 journal page, example data, JSON backup and a README with a worked example in numbers. What is fact and what is a setting This is arithmetic and states no UAE rule. How VAT is treated on an advance invoice or prepayment, which spreading method fits an item, your materiality limit and whether to book an accrual are your accounting policy and your accountant's call. What it is NOT It does not model usage-based or milestone patterns, part payments or price changes, and it does not post to an accounting system. It is not accounting or tax advice. How it was checked Balances, monthly amounts and journal totals were compared with an independent Python Decimal calculation over 40 random sets of items, with no difference. Typed screens, CSV, exports, reload, print view and phone width were tested in Chromium. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
Three offline VAT apps in one download: a return workpaper to the VAT 201 boxes, an input VAT recovery apportionment calculator and a tax invoice completeness checker. Cheaper than buying them one by one.
Three jobs come up around every VAT return: checking that the invoices you hold are complete, working out how much input VAT you can recover when you also make exempt supplies, and putting the quarter into the VAT 201 boxes with a reconciliation to the ledger. These three offline apps do those jobs, each in one file that opens by double-clicking, with the formulas shown and a worked example in each README. What is inside - VAT Return Workpaper: Sales and Purchases to VAT 201 Boxes (Offline App) - Input VAT Recovery and Partial Exemption Calculator (UAE) - VAT Tax Invoice Completeness Checker (UAE) The real saving Bought separately these 3 apps cost AED 187. The bundle is AED 79, a saving of AED 108 (about 58 percent). What they are NOT Working calculators, not tax, legal, accounting or audit advice and not connected to any authority. Each README says which rules are facts to verify with the FTA or MOHRE and which are settings you control. E-invoicing is not covered. Each app was tested separately in Chromium against an independent Python calculation; see its README for the cases and results. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
Four offline accounting calculators in one download: a fixed asset depreciation register, an IFRS 16 lease calculator, a receivables ECL provision matrix and an accruals, prepayments and deferred income schedule. Cheaper than buying them one by one.
Year-end and month-end close for a small business comes down to a handful of schedules: depreciation, leases, the allowance for doubtful receivables, and accruals and prepayments. These four offline apps do the arithmetic once, show the working, produce journals that balance and print a page for the close file. Each is one file that opens by double-clicking. What is inside - Fixed Asset Register and Depreciation Schedule with Journals (Offline App) - IFRS 16 Lease Calculator for SMEs: Liability, Right-of-Use Asset, Schedule and Journals - Receivables ECL Provision Matrix and Journal (UAE SMEs) - Accruals, Prepayments and Deferred Income Schedule with Month-End Journals The real saving Bought separately these 4 apps cost AED 286. The bundle is AED 119, a saving of AED 167 (about 58 percent). What they are NOT Working calculators, not tax, legal, accounting or audit advice and not connected to any authority. Each README says which rules are facts to verify with the FTA or MOHRE and which are settings you control. E-invoicing is not covered. Each app was tested separately in Chromium against an independent Python calculation; see its README for the cases and results. Not tested in Safari, Firefox or Edge. Single business use.
Enter a supplier invoice and your shipping costs, get the true landed cost per unit in AED, duty and import VAT, container fill and a recommended selling price. One offline file, no Excel needed.
Importers often set selling prices from the supplier invoice plus a rough guess for freight. The costs that arrive later (freight, insurance, clearing, port charges, bank fees, duty, breakage) quietly take the margin, and you find out when the goods are already on the shelf. This app works the real cost out first, per unit, line by line. You enter the supplier invoice lines (quantity, unit price, optional carton size, weight, volume and duty %) and the shipment costs in any currency with your own exchange rate. The app spreads each cost over the lines by value, weight, volume, units or equally per line, works out the customs value and duty on the basis you choose, treats import VAT as recoverable, a cost or not applicable, allows for shrinkage, and shows landed cost per line and per unit in AED. Choose a target margin or markup and a rounding step and it suggests a selling price. A container tab shows how full a container is by volume and weight, against capacities you type in. What is inside: - Shipment, Results, Cost spread, Container fill, Settings and How it works tabs - Several shipments kept on your device, each with its own lines and costs - CSV import for invoice lines, JSON export and import for backups - An invented worked example in USD and an EXAMPLE-DATA folder - A printable A4 result sheet Your rates, your rules: the app knows no customs duty rate, no freight rate and no fee. Every rate is a setting you type in from your tariff, your quotes and your clearing agent, so check your current rate card and your own declaration. It is not a customs declaration. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the spreadsheets in the catalogue: the pricing and margin workbooks start from a cost you already know. This app calculates that cost from the invoice and the shipment, with multi-line cost allocation and container fill, and runs as a single offline file. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Net profit per unit after your own commission, fixed fees, fulfilment, storage, ads and returns. Finds the minimum price that still meets your margin, and tests a whole product list from CSV. Offline.
Selling on a marketplace, the listing price is not the money you keep. Commission, a fixed fee per order, payment charges, fulfilment by weight, storage, advertising and returns each take a share, and a product that looks fine at the listed price can lose money once returns are counted. Many sellers only find out from the monthly statement. Enter the fees of a sales channel exactly as your own rate card shows them: commission % (on the price with or without VAT), fixed fee per order, payment fee, fulfilment bands by weight or a flat fee, storage per unit per month, ad cost per unit or as a percent of the sale, return rate, the cost of handling a return, how much of returned stock you can resell and how much commission comes back on a refund. Add products (SKU, cost, price, weight). The app shows expected net profit per unit and margin, the minimum viable price for the margin you want, and a what-if grid of price changes against return rates. A batch table scores the whole list and flags products that lose money. Import the product list from CSV and export the results. What is inside: - Channel fees, Products, Profit per unit, All products, What-if and How it works tabs - Several channel profiles, so one product list can be tested on each channel - Prices with or without VAT, handled as a setting - Print / Save as PDF, CSV in and out, JSON backup - An invented example (clearly marked) and EXAMPLE-DATA files Fees and commission rates are settings only. The app contains no marketplace fee schedule and no platform names or logos: check your current rate card and type the numbers in. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the pricing and margin workbooks in the catalogue: those are spreadsheets for one product at a time. This app handles the expected cost of returns, solves for the minimum viable price, runs a what-if grid and scores a whole CSV of products in one go. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Load your cash-on-delivery orders and your courier remittance statements as CSV. It matches by reference, shows short-paid, over-paid and unremitted orders with ageing, and gives you a dispute list per courier.
Couriers collect cash on your behalf and pay it back in batches. Checking those batches against your orders by eye, line by line, is slow, so short payments, missing orders and double fees tend to go unnoticed until they are too old to dispute. The cost is cash you delivered and never received. Load your orders as a CSV (order reference and COD amount at least) and each courier statement as a CSV (reference and amount remitted, optionally fee, date and statement number). The app normalises references so ' ORD-10230', 'ord-10230' and '10230' can still match, then matches by order reference and falls back to waybill. For every order it says matched, short-paid, over-paid, not remitted yet, overdue or skipped, and it lists remittance lines that match no order. Totals show cash expected, cash received, fees and what is still outstanding, with ageing buckets and a tolerance for small rounding differences. The Disputes tab produces a list and a ready message for each courier, and you can export it as CSV. What is inside: - Data and settings, Summary, Orders, Ageing, Disputes and How it works tabs - Column mapping, so your own export headers can be used - Windows-1252, semicolon, tab and comma files, Arabic text and a byte order mark are handled - A worked example with 70 invented orders and 3 invented statements, and EXAMPLE-DATA CSVs How long a courier may take to remit, and what fees apply, come from your own courier agreement: they are settings, not facts the app knows. The app does not contact any courier and does not move money. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the receivables ageing tracker in the catalogue: that tracks customer invoices you issue. This matches courier cash remittances to individual COD orders, which is a different job. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Log each return with its reason and what happened to the goods. See what returns really cost you by product, channel, reason and month, and which supplier claims are still to file before the window closes.
A return costs more than the refund. You may also pay for return shipping, handling and repacking, lose fees the platform does not give back, and write off goods that cannot be resold. Spread over many orders this is a large, invisible cost, and claims against suppliers for faulty goods are often forgotten until the claim window has closed. Log each return with its date, order, channel, product, quantity, cost and selling price, the reason, and what happens to the goods: restock, write off, or claim from the supplier. Add the refund, its status, return shipping, handling and fees you could not recover. The app works out the net cost of every return and reports it by product, channel, reason, supplier and month. Enter units sold per product and it shows the return rate and flags products above the rate you choose. The Supplier claims tab lists what is still to file, what is filed and what credit has come back, with days left in your claim window. What is inside: - Log returns, Reports, Supplier claims, Settings and How it works tabs - Return reasons and channels are lists you edit - Import returns and units sold from CSV, export everything to CSV - A worked example of 10 invented returns and EXAMPLE-DATA files The claim window and the alert rate are settings: use your supplier agreement for the first. The app does not contact suppliers or customers and does not give legal advice on refunds or consumer rights. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the stock and reorder workbooks in the catalogue: those count stock. This tracks why goods come back, what each return truly cost and which claims to chase. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Enter monthly figures per sales channel. It shows contribution margin before and after ads, ROAS against break-even ROAS, a share of overheads, and a plain verdict per channel: scale, hold, cut or fix.
A channel can look busy and still lose money. Revenue is easy to see; what is left after discounts, refunds, cost of goods, platform and payment fees, shipping, packaging and ad spend is not, and ad budgets tend to follow what feels like it is working instead of what pays. Enter one row per month and channel: orders, gross sales, discounts, refunds, cost of goods, platform fees, payment fees, shipping paid, packaging, other direct costs, ad spend and the sales your ads brought in. The app shows each channel's net revenue, contribution margin before ads and after ads, a share of your fixed overheads by net revenue, and profit. For ads it works out ROAS (from the ad-attributed sales you give, or blended if you give none), the break-even ROAS for that channel's margin, and how much each extra dirham of ads is likely to return. Each channel gets a verdict from your own rules: Scale, Hold and improve, Cut ad spend, Cut or fix, Room to grow, Fix costs or No sales. What is inside: - Data, Profit and loss, Ads and ROAS, Trend and How it works tabs - From and to month filters - CSV import of monthly rows, CSV export, JSON backup - A worked example with four invented channels and EXAMPLE-DATA files The target margin and the safety cushion are your settings, and the verdicts are rules, not predictions: the app cannot know how a channel will respond to more spend. Figures are what you type in; it does not connect to any ad or sales account. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the KPI dashboard and finance workbooks in the catalogue: those are company-level. This compares sales channels against each other, with break-even ROAS per channel. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Type in your own courier rate cards once. Compare the real charge for one parcel or a whole CSV of orders, including volumetric weight, fuel, COD fee and VAT, and see which courier is cheapest for each parcel.
Courier prices depend on more than the weight on the scale. Volumetric weight, the rounding step, fuel and other surcharges, a fee for collecting cash on delivery, and VAT all change the final charge, and the cheapest courier for a small heavy parcel is often not the cheapest for a large light one. Choosing by habit means overpaying on many parcels. Enter each courier's own rate card: volumetric divisor, rounding step, minimum chargeable weight, weight bands per zone, the price for each extra kilo, fuel surcharge, fixed surcharge, COD fee (fixed, percent, or the larger or the sum of both), minimum charge and VAT. Map destinations to zones. Then enter one parcel (actual weight, size, destination, COD amount) to see every courier's charge and the cheapest, or load a CSV of orders to price each parcel with each courier, see the cheapest per parcel and the total per courier. Compare before or after VAT. What is inside: - Rate cards, One parcel, Batch of orders and How it works tabs - Any number of couriers, zones and weight bands - Batch results exported to CSV, JSON backup of your rate cards - Example rate cards that are clearly invented, and EXAMPLE-DATA files Rates are yours to type in: the app contains no real courier rates, names or logos. Check your current rate card and contract; surcharges change, so keep the cards up to date. It does not book or track anything. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the pricing and cost workbooks in the catalogue: it works parcel by parcel against rate tables you enter, handles volumetric weight and COD fees, and prices a whole batch. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Put quotes from several suppliers side by side in the same units. It adds duty, freight, MOQ and pack rounding, the cost of paying early or late, scores price, lead time, rating and terms, and prints an award recommendation.
Supplier quotes never arrive in the same shape: one is per carton, one per piece, one in dollars with freight to come, one delivered with 30 days credit. Comparing them by the headline price picks the wrong supplier more often than people expect, and there is rarely a record of why a supplier was chosen. List the items you need with the quantity. For each supplier enter the currency and exchange rate, delivery terms, freight, other charges, duty %, advance payment %, credit days, lead time, validity date and your own 0 to 5 rating, then each price per pack, units per pack and MOQ. The app converts everything to your unit and to AED, rounds up to whole packs and the MOQ and shows the extra units you would be left with, adds duty, freight and charges for a landed total, adds the cost of money for paying in advance (or credit for paying later) at your yearly rate, and scores price, lead time, rating and terms with weights you choose. Expired quotes and quotes with a missing price are flagged and never recommended. The Award tab gives a recommendation text you can copy, a runner-up and a split-award view that picks the cheapest supplier per item. What is inside: - What you need, Enter quotes, Comparison, Award, Scoring settings and How it works tabs - CSV import of one supplier's quote at a time - A printable comparison and award sheet, CSV exports, JSON backup - An invented worked example with three suppliers and EXAMPLE-DATA files It does not know any market price, duty rate or freight rate: you enter every figure. A score is a way to be consistent, not a reason to ignore quality or trust, and the award is your decision. VAT is left out of every supplier's total so they compare fairly. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the tender and RFQ response skill in the catalogue: that helps you write responses when you are bidding. This helps you buy: it compares quotes you receive. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Load an orders CSV and get a pick list in bin order, one packing slip per order, and a courier handover manifest with parcels, weight and COD to collect. Prints cleanly on A4.
Packing a day's orders from a screen full of order lines is slow and error-prone: items get picked order by order instead of in one walk, slips are written by hand or copied from another system, and the courier handover is a scribbled list. Mistakes show up as wrong items, missed cash-on-delivery amounts and arguments about how many parcels were handed over. Export your orders from your shop or system as CSV (one row per order line) and load it. The app groups lines into orders, adds up quantities for one consolidated pick list sorted by bin location (from an optional product list, or a location column), and also gives a by-order list for picking into boxes. Each order gets a packing slip with your business name, customer, address, phone, courier, the COD amount to collect or a prepaid note, items with tick boxes and your notes. The dispatch manifest groups orders by courier with parcel counts, weight and COD to be collected, a handover list with a tick box per order and signature lines. Untick orders to leave them out, filter by courier, and mark a batch as dispatched so tomorrow's run hides it. What is inside: - Load orders, Orders, Pick list, Packing slips, Dispatch manifest and How it works tabs - Column mapping for your own export, semicolon, tab and comma files, Arabic names and addresses - Print / Save as PDF for each sheet, CSV export of the pick list and handover list - A worked example of five invented orders, and EXAMPLE-DATA CSVs A packing slip is not a tax invoice, and the app does not create one. It does not talk to your shop, a courier or a printer. Check addresses with the customer where it matters. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the invoice, quote and delivery note design sets in the catalogue: those are document designs you fill in. This builds the sheets from your order data, in batches. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
Paste a customer's order message. It finds quantities and matches items to your price list (English and Arabic spellings), then builds a quote or invoice-style document and a reply text. Runs on your device, no AI, nothing sent.
Small sellers take orders in chat. Turning a messy message into a priced quote means retyping each line, looking up prices, adding up, working out VAT and writing a reply, and the same customer often sends the same order again next month. It is slow at busy times and easy to get a total wrong. Type or import your price list and add the other names customers use for each item (for example 'blue mug' and its Arabic wording). Paste the customer's message and press Read order lines. The app strips WhatsApp date and name prefixes and greetings, splits the message into lines, finds the quantity (2 x, 3 pcs, x2, qty 2, a number at the start or end, English number words, Arabic digits) and matches the rest to your price list, allowing small spelling differences. Lines it is less sure about are marked Check, ambiguous or unknown lines are never silently accepted, and you can change any match from a drop-down, override a price or leave a line out. The Quote tab shows a printable document with numbering and totals (prices with VAT, without VAT or VAT-free, discount as an amount or a percent, delivery fee) and a reply text from a template you can edit, ready to copy. Save to the order log to keep a record and move the number on. What is inside: - Price list, Paste order, Quote and reply, Order log, Settings and How it works tabs - Everything runs on your device with fixed rules: no AI, no account, no upload - Price list CSV import, order log CSV export, JSON backup - A worked example and EXAMPLE-DATA files, including a sample message The app never connects to WhatsApp and never sends a message: you copy the reply and paste it yourself. Matching is simple text matching and can be wrong, which is why it marks uncertain lines: always read the result. A quotation is not a tax invoice; VAT on your documents is your responsibility, so check the FTA requirements for tax invoices or ask your accountant. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the WhatsApp sales reply skill and the message templates in the catalogue: those help write replies with Claude or from templates. This reads the order, prices it from your list and does the arithmetic, locally. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge. On generated test messages it matched the right item and quantity on nearly all lines; real customer messages are messier, so expect more Check lines.
Enter stock, demand and lead times. It lists what to reorder now, how many (MOQ and pack rounded) and what it costs, shows your inventory, collection and payment days, and how much cash a growth plan needs.
Stock is cash on a shelf. Too little and you lose sales while waiting for the next delivery; too much and your cash is stuck, and growth makes it worse because stock and unpaid invoices grow before the money comes back. Most small traders reorder by feel and discover the cash gap when a payment bounces. Enter each product with on hand, on order, demand per day, week or month, lead time, unit cost, MOQ and pack multiple. Choose fixed safety days or a service level with demand variability. The app calculates safety stock, the reorder point and the order-up-to level, tells you which products to order now, which at your next order day, which are overstocked and which have no demand, suggests quantities rounded to MOQ and pack, and puts the urgent orders in order of urgency against the cash you set aside. It also shows the stock-out date and warns if a product will run out before the delivery would arrive. The Cash cycle tab turns your revenue, cost of goods, inventory, receivables and payables into days of inventory, days to collect, days to pay and the cash conversion cycle, and shows the cash released if you reach target days. The Growth funding tab shows, month by month, how much extra cash a growth plan ties up against the cash and credit you have, and when it runs short. What is inside: - Products, Reorder list, Cash cycle, Growth funding, Settings and How it works tabs - Product list CSV import, reorder list and funding table CSV export, JSON backup - Print / Save as PDF - A worked example with seven invented products and EXAMPLE-DATA files Demand is taken as a steady average with the swing you enter: seasons, promotions and supplier delays are not modelled, so adjust demand by hand for them. Service levels use the normal curve as a rough guide. Lead times, MOQs and interest rates are yours to enter. This is planning help, not financial advice. It is not tax or legal advice, not an FTA-approved system, and no platform or courier endorses it. How it differs from the stock count and reorder planner and the wholesale reorder workbook in the catalogue: those are spreadsheets for counting and basic reorder levels. This adds service-level safety stock, MOQ and pack rounding, a cash-limited order list, the cash conversion cycle and growth funding. Tested: every calculation was compared with an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases, CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark) were run through the importer, and the screens were driven in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths. It has not been tested on a real phone, in Safari, Firefox or Edge.
All ten trade and e-commerce apps in one download: landed cost, marketplace margin, COD reconciliation, returns, channel profit and ROAS, courier comparison, RFQ comparison, dispatch sheets, WhatsApp quotes and reorder planning.
If you import, sell online or buy from several suppliers, the same few jobs come round every week: work out what a shipment really costs, check what a sale really earns, chase courier cash, count the cost of returns, decide which channel deserves the ad budget, pick the right courier, compare supplier quotes, pack the day's orders, turn a chat message into a quote and plan what to reorder with the cash you have. This bundle puts the ten offline apps that do those jobs in one download. Each app is a single HTML file that runs in your browser with no internet, no account and no installation. Data stays on your device with Export and Import for backups. Each has its own folder with a README.txt and an EXAMPLE-DATA folder, so you can load a worked example first and then enter your own numbers. The ten apps: - Landed Cost and Import Costing Calculator (AED 99) - Marketplace Price and Margin Calculator (AED 69) - COD Remittance Reconciliation (AED 79) - Returns and Refunds Tracker (AED 69) - Multi-Channel Profit and ROAS Tool (AED 79) - Courier Rate Comparator (AED 69) - Supplier Quotation (RFQ) Comparison (AED 69) - Pick, Pack and Dispatch Sheet Generator (AED 59) - WhatsApp Order to Quote Helper (AED 69) - Reorder Point and Cash Conversion Planner (AED 79) Real saving: bought one by one the ten apps cost AED 740. The bundle is AED 309, a saving of AED 431 (about 58 percent). Your rates, your rules: none of the apps contains a customs duty rate, a marketplace fee schedule or a courier rate. You type them in from your own tariff, rate cards and contracts and check your current rate card yourself. They are not tax or legal advice, not FTA-approved systems, and no platform or courier endorses them. Tested in a headless Chromium browser at phone and desktop widths, with each calculation compared against an independent Python (Decimal) calculation on randomised cases and CSV edge cases (quotes, commas, Arabic text, byte order mark). Not tested on a real phone, Safari, Firefox or Edge. The single-business-use licence applies to the bundle as a whole.
Enter your licence, permit and filing dates once. The app works out every repeat date and writes a calendar file with reminders that you import into Google, Apple or Outlook calendar. Works offline, no subscription.
Renewals get missed when the dates sit in different folders, emails and one person's memory. A spreadsheet lists them but never rings. This app turns your list of dates into a calendar file with built-in reminders, so the alert arrives on the phone you already look at, before the date and not after it. Open Suggestions and add the renewals and filings that apply to you. Enter the real date from your own licence, contract or tax account, and choose how each one repeats: every N days, weeks, months or years, or a set number of days after each period end (for filings). Check the Upcoming tab, which shows every date and the day each reminder fires. Then download the .ics file and import it into Google Calendar, Apple Calendar or Outlook. What is inside: - My calendar, Suggestions, Upcoming, Download .ics and Instructions tabs - Two repeat styles: every N days, weeks, months or years, and after each period end, with an optional move to the next working day - Several reminders per item (days before), a default set for new items and a time of day - Month-end handling: a monthly item on the 31st falls on the last day of shorter months - A starter list of common renewals and filings, to confirm against your own documents - CSV import, export and template, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: owners, office managers and accountants who look after a handful or a few dozen company dates: trade licence, tenancy, insurance, vehicle, filing and subscription dates. What it is not: The app does not know your deadlines. The suggestions are starting points that you must confirm with the authority, document or adviser that applies to you. It is not connected to the FTA, MOHRE or any licensing authority and cannot file or renew anything. It does not know public holidays. Staff visa and Emirates ID expiries are better tracked per person. How it differs: The licence-and-document-expiry-tracker and annual-compliance-calendar-2027-uae are Excel files you open and read. This app puts reminders into the calendar on your phone, repeats beyond 2027, and uses your own dates and rules. Per-employee document expiry belongs in the employee document expiry app, not here. Tested: 606 scripted browser checks. Generated calendar files were parsed with the open-source icalendar library, and every repeat date was compared with the recurrence rules of python-dateutil, including month-end and weekend-roll cases. The files were not opened inside Google, Apple or Outlook calendar apps, so import one item first and look at it. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Type an amount, get it in words in English and Arabic, then print date, payee and amount on your own cheque leaf using a calibration page, or run a batch from a CSV. Exact decimals, ten currencies, works offline.
Writing amounts in words by hand is slow and one wrong word can mean a spoiled cheque or a document sent back. Typing cheques one by one at month end is worse. This app writes the words for you and prints the details onto your own cheque, lined up to your printer. On Amount in words, type an amount and copy the English or Arabic words. On Layout and calibration, enter the size of your cheque, print the calibration page on plain paper, hold it against a real cheque to the light and enter the offsets. Then print one cheque from the Cheque tab, or load a CSV with payee, amount, date and memo and print the whole batch. What is inside: - English and Arabic words for amounts below one quadrillion - AED with fils, plus USD, EUR, GBP, SAR, QAR, INR (2 decimals) and OMR, KWD, BHD (3 decimals) - Style options: title case, the word and, the word only, where the currency name sits - Single cheque and batch printing, with figures and words, date styles and memo - Cheque size, field positions, printer offset and a calibration page - Download the batch with words as CSV, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: finance staff, small businesses and PROs who still pay by cheque and write the same kinds of amounts every week. What it is not: It prints cheques. It does not keep a cheque register, track post-dated cheques or know your bank balance. Printing exactly onto a cheque depends on your printer feeding paper the same way each time: print a test on plain paper and check the first real cheque carefully. Banks can refuse cheques for reasons that have nothing to do with printing, so follow your bank's own rules. The Arabic words are produced by rules and need a native read before you rely on them. How it differs: The pdc-cheque-register-offline-app keeps a register of cheques received and issued. This app only writes the words and prints the cheque. Use both together if you need a register as well. Tested: 57 scripted browser checks. English words were compared with the open-source num2words library on 4,239 amounts and all matched. Arabic words were compared with a 66-case table written by hand and all matched, which still does not replace a native reader. Amounts are handled as exact decimals. Printed pages were rendered to PDF and the page size and positions of the fields were measured. Not tested: a physical printer, real cheque stock or any bank. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Convert between Hijri and Gregorian, add days, months and years, count working days with your own weekend and holiday list, and work out notice periods and deadlines. Hijri accuracy is shown honestly. Works offline.
Contracts, notices and deadlines are counted in days, and which day counts depends on the weekend, the holidays and sometimes the Hijri calendar. Doing it by hand from a wall calendar leads to arguments about one day. This app does the counting in exact calendar days and shows its working. On Hijri / Gregorian, type a date in either calendar. On Working days, choose your weekend and enter your own holiday list (one per line, ranges allowed, or import a CSV) and count working days between two dates or add working days to a date. On Notice and deadlines, set the start, the length and whether it counts calendar or working days. Hijri key dates lists Ramadan, Eid and similar estimates for a year that you can add to your holiday list and then correct to the announced dates. What is inside: - Hijri to Gregorian and back, with a plus or minus two day adjustment - Date calculator: add or subtract days, weeks, months and years (month end handled) - Working days with your weekend (Saturday and Sunday, Friday and Saturday, or Friday only) and your holiday list - Notice period and deadline calculator, calendar or working days - Hijri key dates estimates for a chosen year - JSON backup, holiday CSV import, example data Who it is for: HR staff, PROs, property managers and anyone who counts notice periods, grace periods and deadlines. What it is not: It does not know UAE public holidays: you enter them, because the authorities announce them each year. The Hijri calendar used is the tabular (arithmetic) calendar, and real months start by moon sighting or an authority's calculation, so a result can be one or two days off. It is not legal advice. How a notice or deadline must be counted is set by your contract and the law, so ask your lawyer or the authority concerned. How it differs: The annual-compliance-calendar-2027-uae lists dates for one year in Excel. This app is a calculator for any date and any period, not a list of deadlines. Tested: 31 scripted browser checks. The tabular Hijri conversion matched the convertdate library on every day from 1900 to 2100. Against the Umm al-Qura tables (hijridate) over 55,991 days it differed by up to 2 days, and by 1 day or less on 95.1 percent of days (exactly equal on 35.8 percent), which is why the adjustment setting exists. Date arithmetic was compared with python-dateutil. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Make QR codes for links, WhatsApp, contact cards, Wi-Fi and text, one at a time or in a batch from a CSV, and print them on A4 label sheets. The encoder is inside the file, so nothing is uploaded anywhere. Works offline.
Free QR sites want your link, your Wi-Fi password or your contact details uploaded to them, put their own redirect in the middle, and make you do one code at a time. This app builds standard QR codes in your browser with no upload and no redirect, in bulk, and lays them out on label sheets. On Create one, choose what the code holds, fill the fields and pick colours and error correction, then download SVG or PNG. On Batch and label sheet, paste or load a CSV with a label and a value per row, choose the sheet layout and print. Scan one printed copy with two phones before you print a batch. What is inside: - Create one, Batch and label sheet, and About and self-test tabs - Payloads: web link, WhatsApp chat link, contact card (vCard 3.0), Wi-Fi, plain text, phone, email and a readable payment request block - A from-scratch encoder: numeric, alphanumeric and byte modes, versions 1 to 40, error correction L, M, Q and H, all eight masks with automatic choice - SVG and PNG download with your colours, and a zip of every code in a batch - A4 label sheets with a caption under each code and a warning when the printed squares are too small to scan reliably - Self-test against the worked example in the QR standard, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: shops, restaurants, offices and event teams that need menu, Wi-Fi, WhatsApp, review or product-page codes in quantity. What it is not: The payment request option prints a clear text block. It is not a bank or wallet payment QR, so banking apps will not pay from it. It makes QR codes only: no barcodes and no GS1 codes. Very long text needs a larger printed code. How it differs: The barcode-generator-and-label-sheet-app makes product barcodes (EAN, UPC, Code 128). This app makes QR codes. The whatsapp-click-to-chat-link-builder-uae makes wa.me links and QR sheets for phone lists, while this one is a general QR tool. Tested: 116 scripted browser checks. The encoder reproduces the worked example in the QR standard and the capacity limits. 320 random payloads across modes, versions and error levels were rendered and decoded: ZXing-C++ and ZBar read all 320. OpenCV was used as a third check; its older detector read 284 of 300 non-ECI codes, its newer Aruco detector read all 300, which tells you the denser codes are valid but some scanners are fussier than others. A 30-code label sheet was printed to PDF and all 30 codes decoded from the rendered pages. Not tested: paper scans with a range of phones. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Make quotations, tax invoices and credit notes with automatic numbers, VAT, discounts, amount in words and an A4 print layout. Customer and item lists, payments and overdue view. Offline, your data stays on your device.
Many small businesses issue quotations and invoices from a word processor or a spreadsheet: numbers get duplicated, VAT is added by hand, and nobody knows what is still unpaid. This app gives you a proper document maker with locked numbers, VAT calculated to the fils and a list of what is overdue, with no subscription and no cloud. In Settings enter your company name, address and TRN, and check the VAT rate and the numbering. Add customers and items, or import them from CSV. Create a quotation, tax invoice or credit note, pick a customer, add lines and a discount if needed, then issue it. Issuing gives the next number and locks the document. Print it or save it as PDF, and record payments against invoices. What is inside: - Documents, Edit / view, Customers, Items, Settings and About tabs - Quotation, tax invoice and credit note, each with its own sequential numbers - VAT per line (standard, zero-rated, exempt), prices typed with or without VAT, line and whole-document discounts worked out to the fils - Amount in words in English, with optional Arabic - Statuses: draft, issued, part paid, paid, overdue and void; payments against invoices - Customer and item lists with CSV import and export, CSV export of documents and lines, JSON backup - Your logo and bank details on invoices, and an A4 print layout that handles documents of more than one page Who it is for: small trading, service and project businesses that need clean documents and a simple receivables view without cloud accounting software. What it is not: It is not approved by the Federal Tax Authority and it does not connect to any e-invoicing system. If your business must use e-invoicing, use an accredited provider. It does not file returns or check a TRN. AED only. The layout follows the particulars the tax authority lists for a tax invoice, but how credit notes, reverse charge and line rounding must be handled in your case is for your accountant to confirm. Numbers are held on one device: two copies can issue the same number. How it differs: The uae-tax-invoice-pack and quotation-and-proposal-template-set are document templates you fill in. The proposal-and-quote-builder is a Claude skill that writes proposal text. This app is a working document maker with numbering, VAT and payments, and does not write proposals. Tested: 123 scripted browser checks. 600 random documents with random lines, discounts, VAT categories and tax-inclusive prices were compared with an exact-rational reference calculation (a second implementation of the same rules, so it checks arithmetic and rounding, not whether the rules suit your case). Numbering, locking, credit notes, payments, status changes, CSV and backup were exercised, and printed documents, including multi-page ones, were rendered to PDF. One known weak point: on a multi-page document the totals block can land alone on the last page. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
One register for invoice, quotation, LPO and voucher numbers: who took which number and for what, voided numbers kept with a reason, missing numbers flagged. CSV export for your accountant. Offline, no subscription.
When several people issue documents from separate files, numbers get repeated, skipped or quietly reused, and month end turns into a hunt for the missing ones. This register is the single place where a number is taken, so nobody guesses the next one and every gap has a reason written next to it. Set up your series under Series and rules (prefix, digits, start, and whether a voided number may be reused). Whenever someone needs a number they take it on Take a number and say what it is for. A wrong or cancelled document is voided with a reason, and its number stays in the register. Checks lists missing numbers and old reservations, and the register exports to CSV. What is inside: - Take a number, Register, Checks, Series and rules and About tabs - Several series, each with its own prefix, digits and rules - Reserve a block of numbers, and record numbers used before you started the register - Void with a required reason, optional reuse, and a history of every change to each number - Missing numbers, old reservations and other checks, a by-person view, CSV export, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: finance teams, shops with several counters, project teams and anyone who hands out document numbers to more than one person. What it is not: It records numbers. It does not issue the documents themselves. It is a record on one device: if two people use two copies they can hand out the same number, so one person should run it or the export file should be passed around. Whether and how a business may reuse or skip invoice numbers is for your accountant and the tax authority to say. The app only enforces the rules you set. How it differs: The quotation-and-invoice-maker-offline-uae numbers its own documents. This register is for numbers that come from anywhere, including a paper book, another system or a word processor. Tested: 54 scripted browser checks: 500 numbers taken in a row were all unique and gap free, voiding needs a reason, a voided number is not handed out again and reuse is refused unless the series rule allows it, yearly series restart at 1 even with backdated entries, duplicate backfill is refused, planted gaps (100, 101 and 200) were found and shown as ranges, blocks can be reserved and released, stale reservations are flagged, and CSV, print and backup work. Typing in the series fields keeps focus while the tables update. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Agenda, minutes and actions with owners and due dates. Open actions carry forward to the next meeting, and an overdue list by owner gives you a reminder text to paste. Prints to A4. Offline, no AI, no subscription.
Meetings end with good intentions and no list. Two weeks later nobody remembers who was to do what, and the same points come back. This app keeps the minutes and the actions together, brings every open action into the next meeting automatically, and shows who is overdue. Create a new meeting with a title, date, attendees and agenda. Write the discussion and decision under each item and add actions with an owner and a due date. Finalise the minutes so they lock and can be printed or saved as PDF. Next time, create the meeting with the same title and the open actions are listed at the top until they are done or dropped. The Overdue tab lists every open action past its due date, grouped by owner. What is inside: - Meetings, Minutes, All actions, Overdue and About tabs - Attendees, apologies, agenda items with discussion and decision - Actions with owner, due date and status, carried forward by meeting title - Overdue view grouped by owner with a reminder text you can paste into a message - Finalised minutes keep a snapshot of the actions as they stood that day - A4 print layout, CSV export of actions, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: managers, project teams, committees, building owners associations and office teams that meet regularly. What it is not: It does not send reminders or email anyone: you copy the reminder text and send it yourself. There is no recording, transcription or AI. Carry-forward matches meetings by title, so use the same title each time. Overdue is counted against the date on your computer. How it differs: The meeting-to-actions skill uses Claude to turn notes or a transcript into actions. This app is a plain offline record with no AI, where you type the minutes and it keeps the follow-up. Tested: 66 scripted browser checks: finalised minutes are locked and print to PDF with their text, open actions carry forward to the next meeting, overdue counts and days overdue were compared with an independent reference for the example data and a fixed date, finalised minutes do not change when an action is updated later, filters and search work, and CSV and backup round trip. Typing a meeting title and tabbing to the next field keeps focus. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Contacts, deals and the next action for each deal. A Today list shows what is due or late, and one tap opens WhatsApp with your follow-up already written. Pipeline shows value per stage. Offline, no subscription.
Most small sales teams lose deals to forgotten follow-ups, not to bad pitches. A full CRM is too heavy for a few people, and a notebook has no reminder. This app is a light follow-up tracker: every open deal must have a next action with a date, and the Today list tells you what to do this morning. Add contacts, or import them from CSV, and the phone number shows a green tick when it can be used for WhatsApp. Create a deal for each opportunity with a value, a stage and a next action with a date. Open Today every morning: tap WhatsApp to open the chat with your message ready, do the follow-up, press Done, note what happened and set the next step. The Pipeline tab shows the value in each stage and a weighted total based on your own win chances. What is inside: - Today, Pipeline, Deals, Contacts, Settings and About tabs - Contacts with company, phone, email, source, tags and notes; CSV import and export - Deals in AED with stage, next action, date and a history of what happened - WhatsApp links with merge fields: {name} (first name), {fullname}, {company}, {deal}, {value}, {owner}, with a live preview - A phone cleaner for UAE and international numbers, with landlines flagged - Open deals with no next action are listed so none is forgotten - Your own stages and win chances, weighted pipeline value, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: small sales teams, shops with account customers, agencies, contractors and owners who chase their own leads. What it is not: WhatsApp opens in your browser or app with the message filled in. Nothing is sent until you press send, and only people who agreed to be contacted should be messaged. UAE landline numbers get no WhatsApp link. The weighted pipeline value uses your own win chances and is not a forecast. It is one device and one user: no team sharing, no email or calendar connection, no automatic reminders. How it differs: The whatsapp-business-sales-reply-desk is a Claude skill for writing replies. The invoice-chase-desk-offline-app chases unpaid invoices. This app tracks sales follow-ups on open deals. The whatsapp-click-to-chat-link-builder-uae makes links and QR codes for lists, while this app builds each link from a deal. Tested: 72 scripted browser checks: due, late and upcoming lists against a fixed date, stage moves and weighted totals recomputed independently, merge fields, link text decoded and compared, landline handling, CSV import and export, backup, and typing in the contact form keeps focus. Printing was not tested for this app. The links were not opened in live WhatsApp. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Clean UAE phone numbers, build wa.me links with your message, make links for a whole CSV list, download a clickable sheet and print QR codes with names for counters and flyers. Offline, nothing uploaded.
Phone lists arrive in every format: 050, +971, 00971, with spaces, dashes or Arabic digits. WhatsApp links need clean digits and an encoded message, and typing them by hand for each contact is slow and error-prone. This tool cleans the numbers, builds the links, and shows you which rows have a problem before you share anything. On One link, type a number in any format and a message, then copy the link, open the chat or download the QR. On Number cleaner, paste numbers one per line to see the cleaned form, the type and any problem. On Batch from CSV, load rows with a phone column and use other columns in the message as {{name}}, {{city}} and so on. Download the links as CSV, download a clickable HTML sheet for the person who will tap through the chats, or print an A4 QR sheet with a name under each code. What is inside: - One link, Batch from CSV, Number cleaner and About tabs - UAE-aware cleaner: spaces, dashes, brackets, +, 00 and a stray 0 after the country code, Arabic-Indic digits, UAE mobile prefixes (050, 052, 054, 055, 056, 058) and landlines flagged - Properly encoded wa.me links and merge fields from your CSV columns, repeated numbers left out if you choose - Links CSV, a clickable HTML sheet with no scripts, and an A4 QR sheet with caption and number - Default country code setting for other markets, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: shops, clinics, schools, agents and event teams that send individual WhatsApp messages from a list, or put a WhatsApp QR on a counter or flyer. What it is not: It does not send anything: a link opens a chat with your message ready and the person still presses send. It cannot know whether a number is registered on WhatsApp. Numbers from other countries need a + or 00 in front, and are checked by length only. Only message people who agreed to hear from you, and check the rules for business messaging that apply to you. It is not made or endorsed by WhatsApp. How it differs: The whatsapp-marketing-message-templates-uae pack gives you the message wording. This tool builds the links and QR codes. The mini-crm-follow-up-tracker-whatsapp builds a link per deal, while this one works on lists and posters. The offline-qr-code-generator-and-label-sheets is a general QR tool, while this one is built for WhatsApp phone lists. Tested: 173 scripted browser checks. A 67-case table of phone formats, with expected results written by hand from the numbering rules, gave no wrong result (a phone number library was not available to cross-check it). Links were compared with an independent URL encoder, including Arabic text, emoji, ampersands and percent signs. A 30-code QR sheet was printed to PDF and every code decoded to its own link. The links were not opened in live WhatsApp. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Seven small tools in one offline file: area and plot size with price, gold weight and purity value, price per unit conversion, fuel use and cost, paper sizes, and a table of every factor. Exact arithmetic, nothing fetched.
Property ads quote square feet and the plan says square metres. Gold is quoted per ounce, per gram or per tola. Fuel economy is in l/100 km on one car and mpg on another. People convert these on a phone calculator and carry a rounding error or a wrong factor into an offer. This pack converts exactly and shows the factor it used, so you can check it. On Convert, choose a category, type a value and pick from and to. Switch to A price per unit to turn AED 450 per sq ft into AED per square metre, or a gold rate per tola into per gram. Plot and price works out area from length and width and a total price. Gold gives the pure gold content and metal value from weight, karat and your own 24 K price. Fuel and mileage converts economy units and works out trip, monthly and yearly cost, or compares two vehicles. Factors shows every definition and prints a one-page cheat sheet. What is inside: - Convert, Plot and price, Gold, Fuel and mileage, Paper sizes, Factors and About tabs - 55 units in six categories: area, length, weight, gold weight, volume and fuel economy - Exact arithmetic with whole numbers and fractions; a rounded result is marked, and the exact fraction can be shown - Plot size in sq ft, sq m, sq yd, acre, hectare, marla and kanal with a total price - Gold: tola, troy ounce, pennyweight, grain, karat table, fineness to karat, metal value at the purity you choose - Fuel: km/l, l/100 km, mpg (US and UK), trip cost, yearly cost and a two-vehicle comparison - Paper sizes A0 to A10, B0 to B6, C4 to C6, DL and US sizes in mm, inches and pixels, plus a size finder - Printable A4 cheat sheet for each category, JSON backup, example data Who it is for: property buyers and agents, gold buyers and sellers, small fleets and drivers, designers and printers, and anyone who converts these units more than occasionally. What it is not: It fetches no prices: you type the gold price and fuel price you use. Metal value leaves out making charges, margin and VAT. Marla and tola are not fixed everywhere, so they are settings with defaults of 272.25 sq ft and 11.6638038 g, and you should confirm them against your document or trade. Areas on a title deed or approved plan are the authority. It is not valuation, investment or legal advice. How it differs: No existing catalogue product converts units or prices per unit. The property and finance tools use their own formulas and do not replace this one. Tested: 226 scripted browser checks. Every ordered pair of units in all six categories, at seven values and in both quantity and price per unit modes (6,664 conversions), equalled an exact Fraction calculation built from the published definitions, with no mismatch. 486 conversions also agreed with the pint units library within one part in a billion. Display rounding was compared with an independent half-up routine, paper pixel sizes were checked against the ISO halving rule and known A4 and Letter values, and every cheat sheet printed to one A4 page. Tola and marla were checked against the definitions stated here, since pint has no standard value for them. It was tested in Chromium only. Firefox, Safari, a real phone and a real printer were not available for testing.
Offline store register for clinic consumables: receive by batch with expiry date, log use by room, see which batch to use first, expired stock still counted, items below minimum with the quantity to order, and a discard record. Supplies only. Data stays on your device.
Clinic Consumables Register is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). Each item has a minimum and a top-up level. Every delivery is entered as a batch with its number, expiry date, quantity and cost. Use is logged against the batch by room. The app works out the usable stock of each item (batches that have not expired), the days it will last at the recent rate of use, which batch to use first, and what to order. The problem it removes: Gloves, disposables and materials are found expired when they are needed, and the shelf count is a guess. Expired boxes stay on the shelf and in the stock number, so the reorder is late. Nobody knows which batch was opened first or what is written off each year. This app keeps the stock by batch and counts only what is still usable. What is inside: - Items by category with a minimum level and a top-up level, and the quantity to order when usable stock reaches the minimum - Batches received with batch number, expiry date, quantity and cost per unit - A check that refuses a use or discard larger than what the batch holds, and use dated after the expiry - Use by room, days of cover at the last 28 days rate, and the batch to use first for each item - Expired stock that still counts on the shelf, with a button that writes it all off as a discard record - Short-dated batches need a note when you accept them, and discards have a reason - Printable order list, expiry report, stock list and discard record - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: clinic managers, assistants and nurses who look after the supply store of a dental or small medical clinic. What it is NOT: It is a supplies register only. It does not hold medicines, controlled items, patient details or clinical records, does not know what must be kept or reported under any health rule, and does not place orders. Expiry dates are the ones you enter from the box. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (161 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1556 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline takings sheet for clinics that pay doctors a percentage: daily entries by doctor, kind of work and payment method, lab fee deductions, refunds and pending insurance, each doctor's own share rates, advances, and a printable monthly share statement.
Clinic Daily Takings and Doctor Share Statements is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). Each doctor has a share percentage for each kind of work: general, specialist, cosmetic and hygiene. You enter each receipt as it is collected with the doctor, the kind of work, how it was paid and any lab fee to deduct. The app works out each doctor's share, the cash, card and transfer totals for the day, what is owed after advances, and prints a monthly statement for each doctor. The problem it removes: Each doctor's percentage share is worked out by hand at month end. Rates differ by kind of work, lab fees must be taken off first, refunds and insurance claims that are not paid yet should not count, and advances given during the month are forgotten. The doctors question the sums, and the manager rebuilds them every month. This app calculates the share on every receipt, so the statement is only a print. What is inside: - Doctors with four share percentages, one for each kind of work - Daily takings by receipt number, doctor, kind of work and payment method, with a lab fee to deduct and a note - A check that refuses a repeated receipt number, a lab fee larger than the amount, and a refund without a reason - Insurance pending that does not count until it is received, and refunds that cancel the share - Advances and month-end payments to doctors with the balance still owed - Monthly statements created in one tap for every doctor, with collected, lab fees, share due, paid and balance - Printable doctor share statement (A4) with every receipt, a daily takings list for closing the till, and a month summary - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: clinic managers, accountants and owners who pay doctors a percentage of the fees collected and prepare the share each month. What it is NOT: It is not a billing or insurance system and does not hold patient names or records: enter receipt numbers only. It does not know your doctors' contracts: the percentages, the VAT setting and which costs are deducted come from you. It does not compute tax or payroll, and nothing here is accounting or legal advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (153 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1174 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline price list where every price has a start date: schedule next month's change today, see what is in force now, keep the history, print retail, trade and wholesale lists, and see which customers hold a list that is now out of date. Data stays on your device.
Dated Price List is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You list your items once, then record every price as a change with the date it starts: today, next week or the first of next month. The app works out the price in force today, the one before it, the next one, and the trade and wholesale prices from your two discount percentages. You log which list you sent to which customer and the app shows who is now holding a list that no longer matches your prices. The problem it removes: The price list is an old file with prices edited by hand. A supplier raises costs from the first of the month and someone has to remember to change thirty prices on the day. Nobody can say what the price was in March, who was sent the old list, or whether a price was a typing slip. This app keeps each price as a dated change, blocks the obvious slips, and tells you which customers need the new list. What is inside: - Items with code, group, unit, an optional lowest price you never go under, and a discontinued tick - Price changes with start date and reason, so next month's prices are entered now and switch on by themselves - The price in force today, the previous price, the change in percent and the next scheduled price for every item - Trade and wholesale prices worked out from percentages you set, and the price with VAT at the rate you set - Checks: a change bigger than your limit needs a note, no price below the lowest price, one change per item per date, a correction must say what was wrong - Customers with their price tier and a log of the list sent to each, with out-of-date lists flagged and a WhatsApp reminder link - Printable retail, trade and wholesale price lists (A4) and a price change notice for any period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: distributors, wholesalers, suppliers, workshops and shops that publish a price list, change prices several times a year and send the list to named customers. What it is NOT: It is not a stock, costing or margin tool: it holds selling prices only and does not read supplier invoices or change prices in any till. It does not know your costs, your competitors or what you may legally charge. VAT and discounts are settings you enter, and nothing here is tax advice. It does not send the list for you: it opens WhatsApp with a message ready. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (158 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 2395 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline delivery note book: numbered notes with lines, A4 and A5 print, a status from Prepared to Delivered, and a follow-up list of unsigned copies, short deliveries and delivered goods nobody has invoiced yet. Data stays on your device.
Delivery Note Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a trader, supplier or small distributor who sends goods out with a driver or lets customers collect. You write each delivery note once, print it, and then keep track of what happens to it: out on the road, delivered, signed copy back in the file, and invoiced. The problem it removes: Delivery notes are signed on loose paper, the customer copy goes in a drawer, and weeks later nobody can find proof of delivery when a customer disputes an invoice. Some deliveries are never invoiced at all because nobody connected the note to a bill. This app keeps one numbered record per note and shows what is still open. What is inside: - Numbered delivery notes (DN number by year) with item lines, customer order reference, driver and site address - Status board logic: Prepared, Out for delivery, Delivered, Part delivered, Returned, Cancelled, changed in one tap - Accepted quantity per line, so a short delivery shows how many lines the customer did not take in full - Follow-up page: signed copies missing (oldest first, with a WhatsApp message to the customer), delivered but not invoiced, part deliveries with a balance to follow - A4 and A5 delivery note print with signature boxes, and a printable delivery register for any period - Customers, items and drivers lists, with unsigned and not-invoiced counts per customer - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: traders, wholesalers, suppliers, caterers and workshops that deliver goods on a note and want proof of delivery and invoicing to be tracked without a full ERP. What it is NOT: It does not hold stock levels, prices or invoices: it records what went out and whether the signed copy and the invoice number are on file. It does not store photos or signatures, it cannot be shared between several computers at once, and it is not a transport or customs document. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (156 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1033 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline treatment plan quote: price a plan from your procedure list across up to four visits, print the patient quote with fees by visit, follow up offered plans, and track payments. Fees only, no clinical notes. Data stays on your device.
Dental Treatment Plan Quote is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip). You keep a price list of procedures. For a patient you build a plan: each line is a procedure, the tooth or area, the visit it belongs to and the quantity. The app adds up the fees, applies a plan discount, adds VAT only on the procedures you flagged, prints a quote with the fees by visit, and later tracks who accepted, who declined, who has not answered, and what each accepted patient has paid. The problem it removes: Patients ask for a written price for a plan that spans several visits. The receptionist adds it up on a calculator, writes it on paper, nobody remembers to follow up, and later nobody can say how much of an accepted plan has been paid. Discounts are given at the desk without a record. This app prices the plan from one list, prints it, and keeps the follow up and the payments together. What is inside: - A procedure price list with code, category, fee and a VAT flag for the ones that carry VAT - Treatment plans with lines by visit, a fee for this patient when it differs from the list, a plan discount and automatic totals by visit - A discount limit you set: a bigger discount needs a note on who allowed it - Status Draft, Offered, Accepted or Declined, an expiry date from the days you set, and a list of offered plans to follow up with WhatsApp links - Payments against accepted plans with the balance, and a check that a payment cannot be more than the balance - Printable treatment plan quote (A4) with fees by visit and a place to sign, a payment receipt (A5), and a plans register - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: dentists, practice managers and receptionists who give patients a written price for a plan with several procedures and visits. What it is NOT: It is not a clinical record and does not hold X-rays, charts, diagnoses or notes: do not type medical details. It does not decide what treatment is needed, does not claim from insurers, and does not know whether VAT applies to a procedure: that is the flag you set with your accountant. The quote is a price, not clinical advice. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (156 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 1559 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
Offline petty cash and staff claims book: several cash boxes with their own balance, numbered vouchers, top-ups and cash over or short, staff claims with lines that are paid out of a chosen box, missing receipts and duplicate claim lines flagged. Data stays on your device.
Petty Cash and Staff Claims Book is an offline app (one HTML file in a zip) for a business with one or more cash boxes. Each box (head office, warehouse, branch) has an opening amount, a float size and a custodian. Vouchers, top-ups and cash found over or short change the box. Staff claims are written with receipt lines, approved, and paid from a chosen box, so the box balance always matches what was actually paid out. The problem it removes: Small cash payments have no voucher, receipts go missing, and the box never balances. Staff send photos of receipts and claims are paid from memory out of the same cash, so nobody can say how much is really in the box, which claim was paid from which box, or whether the same taxi receipt was claimed twice. This app puts vouchers and claims against one balance per box. What is inside: - Several cash boxes, each with opening cash, float size, custodian, cash held now and the amount needed to top it back up - Numbered vouchers with category, receipt tick and an approver name when the amount reaches the limit you set, with a check that blocks paying more cash than the box holds - Top-ups, cash over and cash short found at a count, and cash returned to the safe, all counted in the box balance - Staff claims with receipt lines, Submitted, Approved, Paid and Rejected, paid from a chosen box so the balance drops by the claim total - Flags for vouchers and claim lines with no receipt, and for claim lines that match another line on the same date, amount and category - Printable petty cash voucher (A5), staff claim form (A4), cash summary and claims register for any period - Example data you can load in one click, a Start here guide and an Honest limits panel - JSON backup and restore, CSV export, and CSV import with a check of every row before anything is added Who it is for: office managers, accountants, branch supervisors, warehouse keepers and small business owners who keep petty cash in a box and reimburse staff from it. What it is NOT: It is not a ledger and does not post to accounting software. It does not know your company policy: the approval limit and categories are yours. It does not write the amount in words, does not store receipt images, and cannot tell whether VAT on an expense can be recovered, which is a question for your accountant. It is not legal, tax or accounting advice, it is not connected to any government system, bank or messaging service, and it does not file or send anything by itself. UAE e-invoicing is not part of it. Your data stays on this device in your browser. Back it up with Export; clearing browser data loses it otherwise. Verified by us: scripted tests in Chromium (165 checks through the real screens: adding, editing and deleting records in every table, required-field messages, backup then clear then restore, CSV export then import, keyboard order, print layouts rendered to PDF, no horizontal scrolling at 375 and 1280 pixels, no network requests) and an independent recalculation by a separately written Python evaluator of 836 calculated values (25 randomised rows plus the example data) with 0 mismatches. Safari engine (WebKit): smoke test passed; Firefox: could not be launched. Not tested: Firefox beyond what is stated here, and no real printer was used (print layouts were checked as PDF).
A ready chart of accounts for a UAE small business: 125 core accounts plus add-ons for trading, services, restaurants and contractors. Each account has a tax code, the VAT 201 box it usually lands in and the reports it feeds. Five CSV import files included.
A chart of accounts built for UAE reporting. Each account has a code, a type, a statement line, a normal balance, a default tax code (SR5, ZR, EX, OOS, RCM or Check), the VAT 201 box its transactions usually land in, the reports it feeds and a note on what to watch. The design aims to let your VAT workings and standard reports fall out of the account structure. What is inside - Core chart: 125 accounts, with Arabic names (drafted, they need a native read before you print them). - Variants: 16 trading, 12 services, 19 restaurant and 18 contracting accounts that do not clash with the core codes. - Tax Codes and VAT 201: what each code means, where it lands on the return, the Box 12, 13 and 14 logic. - Reports Map, Opening Balances (it tells you when debits and credits do not agree), Example Journal and Example Trial Balance with a VAT cross-check. - Five CSV files (core and one full chart per industry) for importing into an accounting system. What it is not A chart is a design. It does not make your bookkeeping right and it does not file anything. Codes are this workbook's own scheme, so map by name when you import. Treatment of rent, insurance, bank fees, travel and entertainment depends on the facts, so those accounts are marked Check. It is a starting point your accountant, lawyer or PRO should review. It does not say that any document satisfies a law, and it does not file, register or pay anything. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
Eleven HR tools in one zip with a 90-day set-up roadmap: payroll, leave, visa expiry, contract guide, warning and exit letters, settlement, recruitment, reviews, handbook, attendance and staff costing. About half the price of buying them separately.
UAE HR Starter Bundle puts the eleven HR products in this catalogue into one download, with a roadmap that shows how they fit together and in what order to set them up. If you are starting HR properly for a UAE company of about 5 to 100 people, this is the shortest route from nothing to a working system. What is inside: - WPS Payroll Workbook - Employee Leave and Absence Tracker - Employee Visa and Document Expiry Tracker - UAE Employment Contract Checklist and Clause Guide - Warning, Termination and Exit Letter Kit - End-of-Service Final Settlement Workbook - Recruitment Tracker and Interview Scorecards - Staff Performance Review Pack - UAE HR Policy Handbook Starter - Staff Attendance, Overtime and Shift Planner - Staff Costing Workbook - A set-up roadmap and guide (about 13 pages, Word): the employee life cycle and which tool serves each stage, the three monthly hand-offs between tools, a decide-once table of 16 settings that must agree across workbooks, a 90-day plan in four phases, a which-tool-for-which-moment table, a monthly, quarterly and yearly calendar, common mistakes and a list of when to ask for advice The tools are the same files sold separately, each with its own README. At the prices listed when this bundle was published, buying the eleven separately costs about twice the bundle price. Who it is for: a new employer, a growing company with HR spread over WhatsApp and personal spreadsheets, or an accountant or PRO setting up several clients. What it does not do: the tools are standalone Excel and Word files. They do not connect to each other, to a bank, to MOHRE, to the Wage Protection System or to Zeyto, and the guide shows which figures you copy across. The bank layout in the payroll workbook is illustrative. None of the tools states a labour-law rule as certain: legal figures are settings to confirm with MOHRE, your free zone authority, your PRO, your accountant or a lawyer. There is no Arabic text. It is not legal advice and does not make a company compliant. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (or Google Sheets) and Microsoft Word 2016 or later (or Google Docs).
An 11-sheet Excel planner, a 6-page guide and a printable message bank for a respectful Ramadan and Eid campaign: 8-week plan, offer margin checks, 60 content ideas, ad budget phasing, 40 messages and a 30-point respect checklist.
A planning kit for UAE businesses that want a clear and respectful Ramadan and Eid campaign without starting from a blank page. Put the expected dates on the Setup sheet and the 8-week plan, ad calendar and staffing plan move with them. Update the dates when the official announcement is made. What is inside - ramadan-eid-campaign-planner.xlsx with 11 sheets: Setup, 8-Week Plan, Sector Ideas, Offers (margin check per offer), Content Ideas (60), Ad Calendar (weekly budget phasing by platform), Message Bank (40), Hours and Staffing, Respect Checklist (30 checks), Instructions and a Worked Example. - ramadan-eid-campaign-guide.pdf, 6 pages on tone, offers, timing and sector notes. - ramadan-message-bank-and-checklists.docx: a printable message bank, respect checklist and debrief sheet. Who it is for UAE restaurants, cafes, retailers, salons, clinics, agents and service firms. What it is not It is not religious guidance and it promises no sales or reach. Ramadan and Eid dates in the workbook are expected dates only: confirm them from the official announcement, and note that holiday arrangements are announced by the government. Advertising, discount, charity-collection and working-hours rules vary, so check with your authority, MOHRE and the UAE Media Council. Choices of tone are best checked with people in your team and community who observe Ramadan. English only: have a native speaker read any Arabic you add. How we checked it We recomputed the workbook formulas in a spreadsheet library, counted the content ideas, messages and checklist items, and checked the PDF page count. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
200 adaptable Instagram hooks and captions in 20 occasions for restaurants and cafes, in Excel, Word and CSV, with a 30-day posting planner that fills in your details.
200 hooks and captions you can adapt for the Instagram account of a UAE business, grouped into 20 occasions. This bank is written for restaurants, cafes, bakeries with seating, cloud kitchens and food trucks. Occasions include a new menu, brunch, iftar and suhoor, Eid opening hours, delivery, corporate catering and more. Each entry has a hook (the line that survives the "more" cut), a caption with [placeholders] for your own facts, a call to action and a suggested format. What is inside - restaurant-cafe-instagram-caption-hook-bank.xlsx with 8 sheets: Bank (filter by occasion), Occasions, My Details (type your business facts once), Posting Planner (type bank IDs and get 30 days of posts with your details filled in), Cautions, Hashtags, Instructions and a Worked Example. - restaurant-cafe-instagram-caption-hook-bank.docx: the whole bank as a printable Word document with the cautions page. - restaurant-cafe-instagram-caption-hook-bank.csv: the bank as a UTF-8 CSV you can paste into a scheduler or a notes app. How to use it Fill My Details, filter the Bank, pick entries, replace every remaining [placeholder] with a true fact (delete a sentence if you cannot fill it honestly), and post it yourself. Entries are drafts, not finished posts: copy-pasting the same line as other accounts will not make you stand out, so change them into your own voice. What it is not It does not post, schedule or connect to Instagram. No reach, follower, enquiry or sales result is promised. UAE advertising, discount, permit and licence rules depend on your emirate, licence and sector, so check with your licensing authority and the UAE Media Council. Nothing here is legal or regulatory advice. The text is English only: if you post in Arabic, have a native speaker read it. It keeps food claims modest. If you make health, nutrition or allergen claims, check the rules and your facts first. How we checked it We counted the 200 entries, checked that each has a hook, caption, call to action and format, linted the text for banned words and dashes, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library by entering sample IDs into the Posting Planner. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
200 adaptable Instagram hooks and captions in 20 occasions for real estate agents, in Excel, Word and CSV, with a 30-day posting planner that fills in your details.
200 hooks and captions you can adapt for the Instagram account of a UAE business, grouped into 20 occasions. This bank is written for property agents and small brokerages in the UAE. Occasions include new listings, viewings, area guides, off-plan launches, renting tips, market updates and more. Each entry has a hook (the line that survives the "more" cut), a caption with [placeholders] for your own facts, a call to action and a suggested format. What is inside - real-estate-agent-instagram-caption-hook-bank.xlsx with 8 sheets: Bank (filter by occasion), Occasions, My Details (type your business facts once), Posting Planner (type bank IDs and get 30 days of posts with your details filled in), Cautions, Hashtags, Instructions and a Worked Example. - real-estate-agent-instagram-caption-hook-bank.docx: the whole bank as a printable Word document with the cautions page. - real-estate-agent-instagram-caption-hook-bank.csv: the bank as a UTF-8 CSV you can paste into a scheduler or a notes app. How to use it Fill My Details, filter the Bank, pick entries, replace every remaining [placeholder] with a true fact (delete a sentence if you cannot fill it honestly), and post it yourself. Entries are drafts, not finished posts: copy-pasting the same line as other accounts will not make you stand out, so change them into your own voice. What it is not It does not post, schedule or connect to Instagram. No reach, follower, enquiry or sales result is promised. UAE advertising, discount, permit and licence rules depend on your emirate, licence and sector, so check with your licensing authority and the UAE Media Council. Nothing here is legal or regulatory advice. The text is English only: if you post in Arabic, have a native speaker read it. Property advertising is regulated. Before you post a listing or an offer, check the permit, listing and advertising rules of your emirate and regulator. The bank gives wording, not permission. How we checked it We counted the 200 entries, checked that each has a hook, caption, call to action and format, linted the text for banned words and dashes, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library by entering sample IDs into the Posting Planner. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
200 adaptable Instagram hooks and captions in 20 occasions for salons and clinics, in Excel, Word and CSV, with a 30-day posting planner that fills in your details.
200 hooks and captions you can adapt for the Instagram account of a UAE business, grouped into 20 occasions. This bank is written for hair and beauty salons, barbers, nail studios, spas, wellness studios and licensed clinics. Occasions include new services, hair care tips, bridal and event bookings, Ramadan and Eid appointments, team spotlights and more. Each entry has a hook (the line that survives the "more" cut), a caption with [placeholders] for your own facts, a call to action and a suggested format. What is inside - salon-clinic-instagram-caption-hook-bank.xlsx with 8 sheets: Bank (filter by occasion), Occasions, My Details (type your business facts once), Posting Planner (type bank IDs and get 30 days of posts with your details filled in), Cautions, Hashtags, Instructions and a Worked Example. - salon-clinic-instagram-caption-hook-bank.docx: the whole bank as a printable Word document with the cautions page. - salon-clinic-instagram-caption-hook-bank.csv: the bank as a UTF-8 CSV you can paste into a scheduler or a notes app. How to use it Fill My Details, filter the Bank, pick entries, replace every remaining [placeholder] with a true fact (delete a sentence if you cannot fill it honestly), and post it yourself. Entries are drafts, not finished posts: copy-pasting the same line as other accounts will not make you stand out, so change them into your own voice. What it is not It does not post, schedule or connect to Instagram. No reach, follower, enquiry or sales result is promised. UAE advertising, discount, permit and licence rules depend on your emirate, licence and sector, so check with your licensing authority and the UAE Media Council. Nothing here is legal or regulatory advice. The text is English only: if you post in Arabic, have a native speaker read it. It avoids medical claims, promised results and drug or injectable names. Clinics and any licensed health facility are regulated by health authorities (for example DHA, the Department of Health in Abu Dhabi and MOHAP), so have your compliance contact approve every post. The Cautions sheet lists what to check. How we checked it We counted the 200 entries, checked that each has a hook, caption, call to action and format, linted the text for banned words and dashes, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library by entering sample IDs into the Posting Planner. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
200 adaptable Instagram hooks and captions in 20 occasions for retail and online shops, in Excel, Word and CSV, with a 30-day posting planner that fills in your details.
200 hooks and captions you can adapt for the Instagram account of a UAE business, grouped into 20 occasions. This bank is written for physical shops, boutiques and online stores in the UAE. Occasions include new arrivals, gift ideas, sale days, delivery and returns, unboxing, size guides and more. Each entry has a hook (the line that survives the "more" cut), a caption with [placeholders] for your own facts, a call to action and a suggested format. What is inside - retail-online-shop-instagram-caption-hook-bank.xlsx with 8 sheets: Bank (filter by occasion), Occasions, My Details (type your business facts once), Posting Planner (type bank IDs and get 30 days of posts with your details filled in), Cautions, Hashtags, Instructions and a Worked Example. - retail-online-shop-instagram-caption-hook-bank.docx: the whole bank as a printable Word document with the cautions page. - retail-online-shop-instagram-caption-hook-bank.csv: the bank as a UTF-8 CSV you can paste into a scheduler or a notes app. How to use it Fill My Details, filter the Bank, pick entries, replace every remaining [placeholder] with a true fact (delete a sentence if you cannot fill it honestly), and post it yourself. Entries are drafts, not finished posts: copy-pasting the same line as other accounts will not make you stand out, so change them into your own voice. What it is not It does not post, schedule or connect to Instagram. No reach, follower, enquiry or sales result is promised. UAE advertising, discount, permit and licence rules depend on your emirate, licence and sector, so check with your licensing authority and the UAE Media Council. Nothing here is legal or regulatory advice. The text is English only: if you post in Arabic, have a native speaker read it. Sale and discount rules depend on your licence and emirate. Check them before you advertise a percentage off or a "final" sale. How we checked it We counted the 200 entries, checked that each has a hook, caption, call to action and format, linted the text for banned words and dashes, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library by entering sample IDs into the Posting Planner. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
365 short-video ideas for Reels, TikTok and YouTube Shorts, each with a hook, a 3 to 5 step shot list, a call to action, length and effort, grouped into 14 business types, with a filming-day sheet and a tracker.
365 short-video ideas for people who film their own content on a phone. Each idea has a hook, a shot list of 3 to 5 steps, a call to action, a suggested length and an effort level. The ideas are grouped into 14 business types with 24 ideas each, plus 29 ideas that suit any business. What is inside - reel-tiktok-idea-vault-365.xlsx with 7 sheets: Vault (filter by business type, effort or length), By Business Type, Filming Day (type six idea IDs and get one shopping and filming list), Tracker (log your own views, saves, shares and messages), Filming Basics, Instructions and a Worked Example. - reel-tiktok-idea-vault-365.docx: the whole vault as a printable Word document. - reel-tiktok-idea-vault-365.csv: the vault as a UTF-8 CSV. How to use it Filter to your business type, choose six ideas, film them in one session, edit on your phone and post across the week. Use the Tracker to compare your own videos with each other, not with anyone else's numbers. What it is not It gives ideas and structure, not footage. It does not edit, post or supply music. No views, followers, enquiries or sales are promised. Rules on consent for people on camera, music licences, health, real estate, education and food advertising vary by emirate and licence: check with your authority and the UAE Media Council. English only. How we checked it We counted all 365 entries, checked each has a hook, 3 to 5 shots and a call to action, linted for banned words and dashes, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
80 WhatsApp message templates in 10 groups, four timed sequences, an opt-in log, a broadcast planner and a rules-to-verify sheet, in Excel, Word and CSV.
80 WhatsApp message templates for UAE businesses that talk to customers on WhatsApp, in 10 groups: opt-in and welcome, broadcast, abandoned order, follow-up after enquiry, orders and delivery, bookings, reviews, win-back, opt-out and data replies, and B2B. Each template has [placeholders] for your facts. Marketing templates carry stop wording. What is inside - whatsapp-marketing-message-templates.xlsx with 8 sheets: Templates, Sequences (four timed sequences), Opt-in Log (one row per person with the exact wording they saw), Broadcast Planner, Rules to Verify, Arabic Greetings, Instructions and a Worked Example. - whatsapp-marketing-message-templates.docx: a printable version of every template, the rules and the sequences. - whatsapp-templates.csv: the templates as a UTF-8 CSV. What it is not It does not send messages, connect to WhatsApp or promise replies or sales. WhatsApp, Meta and UAE rules on consent, opt-in, opt-out, templates, spam and personal data change. The Rules to Verify sheet lists what to check and where, with a date column: verify each point yourself, it is not legal advice. Message categories are our guide only, because Meta decides the category of a template. Do not use it to message a bought list. The templates are in English. The eight Arabic greetings were drafted by the author and need a native read before you use them. How we checked it We counted the 80 templates, linted the text, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
A 90-task checklist and a 6-page guide to set up and maintain a Google Business Profile in the UAE, with a citations consistency checker, a review log with live averages, reply templates and post ideas.
A working checklist for a UAE business that wants to be found on Google Maps and local search. It covers claiming the profile, categories, services, photos, posts, reviews, consistency of your name, address and phone number across the web, and a monthly routine. What is inside - gbp-local-seo-checklist-and-trackers.xlsx with 8 sheets: Checklist (90 tasks in 11 sections with a status and rough minutes), Progress (counts and a chart), Citations Tracker (type your master details once, then each listing, and it flags the ones that differ), Review Log (a live average rating and counts), Reply Templates (12), Post Ideas (30), Instructions and a Worked Example. - gbp-local-seo-guide-uae.pdf: 6 pages explaining the steps for UAE businesses, including a 30-minute monthly routine. Who it is for UAE shops, cafes, clinics, salons, trades, agents and service firms. What it is not It cannot log in to Google or change your listing: you do the steps. No ranking, call or visit result is promised, and anyone who sells a guaranteed position or reviews is not being honest. Google and other platforms change features and rules, so check their current help pages. It is not legal advice. How we checked it We counted the tasks and PDF pages, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library. We did not open the workbook in desktop Excel.
A copy kit for writing the pages of a small UAE business website: facts sheet, page templates, a 40-question FAQ bank, a worked example, SEO title checker, a 40-point audit and privacy and terms skeletons flagged for legal review.
A kit for owners who write or rewrite their own website. It gives you the structure, formulas and examples for each page so you are not staring at a blank screen, and an audit to run before you publish. What is inside - website-copy-kit.docx, 10 parts: a facts sheet, rules for plain copy, home page, about page, services pages, an FAQ bank of 40 questions, contact page and microcopy, SEO title and description templates, and a 40-point audit. - website-copy-worked-example.docx: finished copy for a made-up cleaning company, so you can see the result. - privacy-and-terms-skeletons-for-legal-review.docx: outlines of a privacy notice, terms and a cookie notice, with notes for a lawyer. - website-copy-worksheet.xlsx: Facts, Page Plan, SEO Titles (counts the length of each title and description), Audit (a score out of 40), Instructions and a Worked Example. Who it is for UAE trades, shops, cafes, clinics, agencies, agents and consultants writing their own website. What it is not The privacy notice, terms and cookie notice are skeleton outlines. They are NOT legal advice and NOT ready to publish: have a UAE lawyer review them. It promises no traffic, enquiries or sales, and it does not build or publish a website. Rules on advertising, privacy, consumer protection and e-commerce differ by emirate, free zone and activity. Arabic is not supplied, so have a native speaker write or read any Arabic. How we checked it We opened each file with a library, counted the 40 FAQ questions and 40 audit checks, and recomputed the Excel formulas in a spreadsheet library. We did not open the files in desktop Word or Excel.
An Excel planner and a 5-page guide for Meta and TikTok ads: break-even and allowed cost per order, budget split, campaign planner, creative testing log with a decision rule, funnel maths, UTM builder and a 32-point pre-launch checklist.
A planning workbook for a UAE business that runs, or is about to run, its own ads on Meta (Instagram and Facebook) and TikTok. It starts with the maths of one order, so you know what you can afford to pay before you spend, and then keeps your tests honest. What is inside - paid-social-ads-planner.xlsx with 10 sheets: Setup (margin, break-even and allowed cost per order, break-even and target ROAS), Budget Split (stage and platform split, and how many creatives you can afford to test), Campaign Planner (15 campaigns with a naming rule and a budget check), Creative Testing Log (60 rows with CTR, CPC, CPM, hook rate, cost per result, ROAS and a keep, borderline or pause decision), Funnel Maths (three scenarios from spend to profit), UTM Builder (25 tagged links), UAE Targeting Notes (16 notes), Pre-launch Checklist (32 checks), Instructions and a Worked Example. - paid-social-ads-starter-guide.pdf: 5 pages on the method, the decision rule and common mistakes. What it is not No results are promised. Numbers in the Worked Example and the Funnel Maths are examples to show the arithmetic, not benchmarks or forecasts. It does not connect to Meta or TikTok: you type numbers from their reports. Platforms change tools, prices and policies, so check their current pages. UAE targeting notes are general guidance. Advertising rules for regulated sectors, VAT on ad invoices and data protection are flagged for you to verify with the authority or your accountant. It is not tax, legal or advertising-law advice. How we checked it We recomputed all of the workbook formulas in a spreadsheet library, checked the worked example and decision rule against hand calculations, and counted the checklist items and pages. We did not open the workbook in desktop Excel.
A guide, a brief template, a draft agreement outline flagged for legal review, and an Excel tracker with shortlist scoring, rate check, approvals log, campaign tracker and a 33-point compliance checklist.
A pack for a UAE business that wants to work with creators in an organised and careful way: find and score them, brief them, agree a fee, approve content in writing, and measure what happened. What is inside - influencer-collaboration-guide.docx: how to decide, find, vet, brief, approve, track and report, with fee models, warning signs and 8 message templates. - influencer-brief-template.docx: a fill-in creator brief with 16 sections. - influencer-agreement-skeleton-for-legal-review.docx: an 18-clause draft outline plus questions to ask a lawyer. It is NOT a finished contract. - influencer-tracker.xlsx with 7 sheets: Shortlist Scoring (weights you set, engagement rate, rank and a suggested next step), Rate Check (cost per 1,000 views against your own limit, plus a campaign budget check), Approvals Log, Campaign Tracker (cost per order, ROAS and engagement per post), Compliance Checklist (33 checks), Instructions and a Worked Example. UAE caution Paid promotion by creators in the UAE is understood to be regulated by the UAE Media Council, and a creator may need a licence or permit, with possible obligations for the business too. We have not confirmed the current rules, fees or exemptions for your case. The pack tells you to ask for the permit, check it with the authority, and get legal advice before anyone signs. Always verify the current requirements. What it is not It is not legal or tax advice, it does not find creators for you and it does not verify any permit. It promises no reach, sales or return. Numbers in the Worked Example are invented. Ask your accountant how VAT applies to creator invoices and to free products. How we checked it We recomputed the tracker formulas in a spreadsheet library using test entries, counted the checklist items and clauses, and linted the text. We did not open the files in desktop Word or Excel.
All twelve Zeyto UAE marketing products in one zip, with a 6-page day-by-day first 30 days plan. Bought separately they total USD 193.
Twelve ready-to-use marketing products for UAE small businesses in one download, each in its own folder with its own README, plus a plan that puts them in a working order for a business with one or two people doing the marketing. What is inside - uae-marketing-first-30-days-plan.pdf: a 6-page plan with one task of 20 to 90 minutes a day, in four stages (foundations, content, conversations, reach), a weekly numbers table, a monthly review and a list of rules to verify. It is also inside the zip. - uae-marketing-starter-bundle.zip: START-HERE.txt, the plan and the files of these twelve products: - UAE Marketing Calendar 2027 - Ramadan and Eid Campaign Planner - Instagram Caption and Hook Bank for Restaurants and Cafes - Instagram Caption and Hook Bank for Real Estate Agents - Instagram Caption and Hook Bank for Salons and Clinics - Instagram Caption and Hook Bank for Retail and Online Shops - Reel and TikTok Idea Vault (365) - WhatsApp Marketing Message Templates - Google Business Profile and Local SEO Checklist - Website Copy Kit - Paid Social Ads Starter (Meta and TikTok) - Influencer Collaboration Pack Priced separately, these twelve products total USD 193. The bundle is USD 99. Most businesses will use one of the four sector caption banks, so the other three are for ideas or a second business. If you already own some of the products you would be paying twice for those files. What it is not No product promises orders, followers, reach or rankings, and the plan does not either. Dates for 2027 occasions are expected dates, not confirmed. Rules on advertising, WhatsApp messaging, influencer permits, privacy and tax are flagged for you to verify, and nothing in the bundle is legal, tax or regulatory advice. The website privacy and terms skeletons and the influencer agreement skeleton are drafts for a lawyer, not finished documents. Arabic text is limited and needs a native read. How we checked it We opened the zip and confirmed it holds every file of the twelve products, and we checked each product as described on its own page. We did not open the files in desktop Excel or Word.
33 setup steps in 10 phases, from deciding on a structure to the first invoice, with a tracker that re-dates your plan as real dates come in. Costs, documents and a conversation log included. Durations are placeholders for you to replace.
A printable checklist and an Excel tracker for setting up a UAE company. The checklist gives you the steps, the order, the question that avoids the usual mistake at each step and a tick box. The tracker turns the steps into a dated plan that shows what is slipping. What is inside - Word checklist: 33 steps in 10 phases (decide, approvals, documents, premises, licence, visas, bank, tax, people, go-live), a money checklist, common delays, the first 90 days and who does what. - Excel tracker with 9 sheets: Instructions, Settings, Plan (dependencies, baseline and forecast dates), Timeline (week by week), Costs (with refundable deposits), Documents, Contacts and Log, Dashboard and a Worked Example in which one approval finishes late and everything after it slips. Who it is for First-time founders, partners who need one shared plan, and PROs or advisers who want a client-ready tracker. What it is not The durations are planning placeholders, not how long any authority, bank or agent takes. The steps are generic for mainland and free zone companies and skip anything that depends on your activity. It files and applies for nothing. It is a starting point your accountant, lawyer or PRO should review. It does not say that any document satisfies a law, and it does not file, register or pay anything. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
One Excel register for every UAE document that expires: trade licence, tenancy, insurance, visas, Emirates IDs, passports, permits. Colours and a dashboard show what is expired, what to renew now and what the renewals will cost.
An Excel register for the dates that stop a business when they are missed. Add one row per document with its expiry date. The workbook shows what is expired, what to start renewing now and what is coming, and totals the renewal cost for the next 30, 60, 90 and 365 days. What is inside - Register: 300 ready rows with document type, company or person, number, issuing authority, issue and expiry dates, lead days, responsible person, renewal cost, renewal progress, days left, status and the date to start renewing by. - Dashboard: counts by status, the soonest 15 expiries and renewal cost by window. - Settings: default reminder lead days per document type, and an optional override date. - Renewal Log, Instructions and a Worked Example with a fixed date and invented data that shows each status. Who it is for Owners, office managers and PROs who keep licence, visa and insurance dates in their heads or on scattered sheets. What it is not It does not send emails or messages: the alert is the colour and the dashboard when you open the file. It does not know your authority's rules, fees or grace periods; lead times are your planning times. It is not connected to any government system. It is a starting point your accountant, lawyer or PRO should review. It does not say that any document satisfies a law, and it does not file, register or pay anything. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
Check your sales against the UAE VAT registration thresholds month by month, test whether voluntary registration makes sense, and get your documents and first two weeks after registration in order. Facts follow the FTA pages and our fact check.
An Excel workbook and a short Word guide for the question every growing UAE business meets: do I have to register for VAT, and am I ready? You enter monthly sales (standard-rated, zero-rated, exempt, out of scope) and purchases, and the workbook shows where you stand against the thresholds and how many days you have. What is inside - Threshold Checker: month-by-month turnover against the mandatory threshold (AED 375,000) and the voluntary threshold (AED 187,500), with the next 30 days included. Thresholds are typed in so you can update them. - Voluntary Worksheet: ten questions that point towards or away from registering, and a rough yearly cash estimate of registering: recoverable input VAT, VAT paid to the FTA, margin lost if you add 5% to prices, and your compliance cost. - Documents checklist and a first-two-weeks-after-registration checklist (tax invoices, TRN on documents, the return calendar). - Worked Example and a 7-page Word guide in plain English with the questions to take to your accountant. What it is not It does not register you or file anything: you apply on the FTA portal or through an accountant. It does not decide how your sales are classified. Penalty amounts are deliberately not quoted because they change. E-invoicing is on the roadmap, and this pack does not make you ready for it. It is a starting point your accountant, lawyer or PRO should review. It does not say that any document satisfies a law, and it does not file, register or pay anything. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
Get ready for UAE corporate tax conversations without guessing: a 42-item records checklist, an accounting period planner, a 30-question fact pack and 43 questions for your tax adviser or the FTA. It calculates no tax and states no rates on purpose.
An Excel workbook and a printable Word question brief that make a UAE business organised for corporate tax, whatever the answers turn out to be. It is built around questions, because the right answers depend on your structure, your income and your facts, and the rules are for your tax adviser and the FTA to confirm. What is inside - Records checklist: 42 items to have in order. - Period Planner: your accounting period, a year-end close timetable and room for due dates that your adviser or the FTA confirms in writing. - Fact Pack: 30 questions that give an adviser what they need. - Questions: 43 questions to take to an adviser or the FTA, with space for the answers. - Profit Bridge: list the amounts you need to discuss, by category. - Dashboard: how organised you are, and what is still open. - A worked example and a 6-page printable Word brief. What it is not It calculates no tax. It states no rate, threshold, relief condition or due date, on purpose. It does not decide whether any exemption, relief or status applies to you. The dashboard score measures how organised you are, not whether you comply. Ask your accountant, tax adviser or the FTA for your case. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
Turn your bookkeeping routine into dated jobs: bank reconciliation, payroll, VAT workings, month-end close, quarter and year-end. Set working-day targets once; it dates every month and shows what is overdue. Authority dates say to confirm.
An Excel calendar that dates your recurring bookkeeping work. You set your financial year end, VAT filing frequency and public holidays; it works out the due date of each job for each month from rules you control, records the date you finished it and shows overdue and due-soon work on a dashboard. What is inside - Settings, Calendar (30 jobs and 20 spare rows, due dates for all 12 months), Done Log, Dashboard (status counts, by month, by category, next 12 items), Routines (daily and weekly habits) and a Worked Example in which one job is done a day late and others are open. - Word guide of 6 pages: the monthly close step by step, the VAT period, the quarterly review, the annual close, roles, common mistakes and what to do when the dashboard is red. What it is not The dates are planning dates from rules. The only authority-stated rule built in is the VAT return and payment date (the 28th day after the period end, or the next business day); confirm your own periods with the FTA. The corporate tax number is a placeholder. It assumes a Monday to Friday week and lists no holiday dates: enter them from the official announcement. It posts, files and reminds nothing. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
Paste your bank statement lines and your cash book lines, give matching items the same number, and get a reconciliation statement with deposits in transit, outstanding payments and a difference that must be zero. It also checks your inputs add up.
An Excel workbook that reconciles one bank account to your books for one period and tells you why they differ. You paste the statement lines and the cash book lines and type the same Match ID on matching lines. One bank line can match several book lines, for example a deposit slip made of several receipts or a wage file. What is inside - Statement: completeness checks (do the statement lines add up to the closing balance, do the book lines add up to your ledger), the full reconciliation with deposits in transit, outstanding payments, statement items not in your books, the difference and a clear result, plus flags for open and stale items. - Bank Lines and Book Lines (300 lines each) with suggestions for open items of the same amount; Match Check (200 Match IDs) that shows where a pair does not agree. - Sign-off Log for every account and month; Reconciling Items Guide covering 17 common items and what to do. - A complete worked month for an invented company across four Example sheets, with a suggested experiment. What it is not It does not connect to banks, read bank files or post journals. A zero difference means the balances are explained, not that every amount is right. Do not type full account numbers or online banking details. Cheque validity and practice differ by bank: ask your bank. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
An imprest petty cash book that flags missing receipts and over-limit payments, a cash count sheet, a staff claims register, plus a starter policy, printable forms and an approver checklist. Limits are blanks for you to set.
A complete petty cash and expense system for a small UAE business: an Excel workbook that records and flags, and three Word documents that give your team the rules and the paperwork. What is inside - Workbook (10 sheets): Cash Book (float, limits, receipts, VAT shown on valid tax invoices, running balance and flags), Cash Count (AED note and coin denominations against the cash book), Monthly Summary by category, Expense Claims register with status and days outstanding, and four Example sheets for an invented company. - Policy (5 pages): roles, float, what petty cash may and may not pay, vouchers, receipts, top-ups, counts, claims and breaches, flagged for review. - Forms (5 pages): voucher, expense claim, missing receipt declaration, top-up request and cash count sheet. - Approver checklist (2 pages): what to check before you sign and the red flags. What it is not It does not post to an accounting system or stop a payment. Limits and thresholds are blanks and examples for you to set; they are your policy, not a legal requirement. Whether VAT on an expense is recoverable is for your accountant. The policy is a starting point to be reviewed by your accountant, and by a lawyer if you employ staff. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
Registers for suppliers and customers that track documents, trade licence expiry, TRN format, review dates and credit against limit, plus onboarding forms, a credit terms letter and a procedure with fraud controls. Bank detail changes are logged and verified.
An Excel register and three Word documents for opening and managing supplier and customer accounts without losing track of who you deal with. What is inside - Workbook (8 sheets): Suppliers and Customers registers (150 rows each) with document checks, licence expiry, TRN format check, yearly review dates and a status; customer credit with a suggested limit from expected sales, terms and a risk factor that you set, the limit you approved, balance and utilisation; Dashboard; Bank Detail Changes log with call-back verification; two Example sheets with invented businesses. - Supplier pack (6 pages): information form, documents checklist, scorecard, bank change form and a short code of conduct for legal review. - Customer pack (6 pages): application, due diligence checklist, credit approval, credit terms letter draft, welcome letter and yearly review form. - Procedure (3 pages): steps, controls, red flags and records. What it is not It does not verify documents, TRNs or businesses and does not screen anyone against any list. The TRN check tests only the format. Credit suggestions are a simple guide, not a credit rating. The letters and code of conduct are drafts for legal review. If your sector has customer due diligence duties, follow them and ask your lawyer. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
Eight short starter policies: conduct, purchasing and approvals, data protection, IT security, anti-bribery, speak-up, records retention and continuity, plus an adoption guide and an Excel tracker. Drafts for your lawyer to review, with blanks for your own limits.
Eight starter policies in plain English for a small UAE business, a read-first guide for adopting them in a week, and an Excel register that shows which policies you have adopted, which are due for review and which staff have acknowledged each one. What is inside - Policies (each about 3 pages, with a document control table and an acknowledgement block): code of conduct and conflicts of interest; purchasing, expenses and approval authority; data protection and confidentiality; IT acceptable use and information security; anti-bribery, gifts and hospitality; speak-up and grievance; records retention and document control; business continuity and incident response. - Read-first guide: a seven-day adoption plan, the questions to take to your lawyer and what the policies cannot do. - Workbook (6 sheets): Policy Register with lawyer-review and review-due flags, Acknowledgements matrix for up to 60 people, Settings, Instructions and two Example sheets. What it is not These are drafts for legal review. They are not legal advice and do not state what UAE law, your free zone or your licensing authority requires. They do not make a business compliant and do not replace employment contracts or licence conditions. Retention periods, approval limits and similar figures are left blank on purpose. They are in English; Arabic versions need a native-speaking translator and lawyer. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
A 2027 calendar of 35 recurring obligations for a UAE small business. Rule-based dates calculate; document dates you enter; every date says Confirm with the authority until you confirm it and record the source. Year grid and month view.
An Excel compliance calendar for 2027. It lists 35 recurring obligations across tax, licence and corporate, staff, banking, insurance and assets, and data and IT. Dates that follow a rule (VAT return and payment, month-end targets, salary day, quarterly reviews) calculate from your settings. Dates that come from documents (trade licence, visas, Emirates IDs, permits, insurance, lease) are typed by you. What is inside - Settings, Public Holidays (you enter the closing days; the sheet counts working days per month), Obligations (the list, the authority to confirm with, the rule, and Confirmed, Confirmed on and Source columns), Entered Dates, Year Grid (every date with its status), Month View (one month sorted by date with a reminder on each) and a Worked Example. What it is not The only authority-stated rule built in is the VAT return and payment date (the 28th day after the period end, or the next business day). The corporate tax number of months is a placeholder you replace after asking the FTA or your tax adviser. Holiday dates are not listed because Islamic holidays depend on moon sighting and are announced each year. It does not say which obligations apply to your business: rows marked 'where it applies' are prompts to ask your PRO or adviser. It files and sends nothing. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
All twelve UAE company packs in one download with a roadmap that says what to use first and what to run every month. Bought separately they cost USD 295 (AED 1,089); the bundle is USD 199 (AED 750), a saving of USD 96. The files are the same as the individual products.
Twelve products for starting and running a small UAE company, in one zip, plus a four-page roadmap and a start file. The roadmap says which folder to open first, what to do in the first 90 days, the monthly rhythm, the quarterly and yearly work and how the files connect. What is inside - Mainland vs Free Zone vs Offshore Decision Kit - Business Setup Checklist and Timeline - Licence and Document Expiry Tracker - VAT Registration Readiness Pack - Corporate Tax Readiness Workbook - SME Chart of Accounts with VAT Mapping - Bookkeeping Calendar and Month-End Close Planner - Bank Reconciliation Workbook - Petty Cash and Expense Claim Pack - Supplier and Customer Onboarding Pack - Business Policies Starter Pack - Annual Compliance Calendar 2027 The saving, stated plainly Bought separately the twelve products cost USD 295 (AED 1,089). The bundle is USD 199 (AED 750), which is USD 96 (AED 339) less, about 33 percent. The bundle adds only the roadmap and the start file. If you already own some of the products you are paying for them again, so compare before you buy. What it is not Each product has its own limits, listed in its README. None files, registers or pays anything, and none tells you which rules apply to your business. Rules and dates change: confirm with the authority, your PRO, your lawyer or your accountant. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
An Excel calculator for UAE marketplace sellers: profit per unit, margin, break-even price, target-margin price and the most you can pay for ads, VAT-aware. You fill in the fees from the official pages, so it never goes stale.
This workbook shows what you really earn on each product you sell on Amazon.ae, Noon or your own website. You enter the fees from the marketplace fee pages, your product cost and your advertising assumptions. It returns profit per unit, margin, the break-even price, the price that reaches your target margin and the most you can pay for advertising before a sale loses money. Marketplaces change their fees, so the fee tables are blank on purpose. The workbook states no current Amazon or Noon fee. You copy each figure from the official page, note where it came from and the date, and a warning appears when the fees were last checked more than 90 days ago. What is inside: - Setup: VAT status and rate, whether the referral fee is charged on the price with or without VAT, margin floor, target margin, monthly fixed costs, 8 fee profiles (fulfilled, self-ship, own website and so on) and an optional referral fee table by category - SKU Calculator: 60 rows. Per row you type the selling price including VAT, product cost, freight and duty, packaging, fees, storage months, ACoS, share of sales through ads, return rate and units per month - Results per SKU: profit per unit, margin on net revenue, return on cost, break-even price, price for your target margin, break-even ACoS and break-even cost per click, with a status of OK, LOW MARGIN, LOSS, FILL FEES or PICK PROFILE - Monthly Plan: revenue, profit and ad spend for your mix after fixed costs, and a view by selling profile - A live Worked Example sheet with invented fees and products - Instructions sheet and README It works for sellers registered for VAT (the price is split into net and VAT, VAT on fees is recoverable) and for sellers who are not (VAT on fees is a cost). Who it is for: small sellers, resellers and brands that list in the UAE and want to know which products earn money after fees, returns and ads. What it is not: it does not read your seller account, import fees or sales, or give advice on listings. The example fees and products are invented and are not real marketplace fees. Marketplace rules and fee changes are yours to check on the official pages. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
An Excel workbook that costs every recipe from your ingredient prices and yields, sets menu prices from a target food cost, classifies dishes with a menu engineering matrix and checks delivery app margins. Includes a filled-in cafe example.
Most restaurant owners know their takings but not what each dish costs to make. This workbook builds the cost from the bottom: ingredient purchase prices, usable yield after trimming, the quantity in each recipe, and the dish price you charge. It tells you the food cost percentage, the margin per plate, the price needed for your target, and which dishes to promote, reprice or drop. What is inside: - Setup: whether menu prices include VAT, your target food cost, price rounding, delivery app commission and discount defaults, menu categories - Ingredients: 150 rows with pack size, pack price, yield percentage and cost per usable unit - Recipes: 500 recipe lines that pull ingredient costs by name - Menu Costing: 80 dishes with selling price, food cost, margin, suggested price for your target and a flag for dishes above target - Menu Engineering: units sold per dish classified into the four groups (popular and profitable, popular and weak, profitable and unpopular, neither) - Delivery Check: margin per dish after the delivery app commission, packaging and VAT, with a warning when commission is missing - Break-even: fixed costs, overall margin, break-even sales per open day, margin of safety and an ingredient price shock test - Two Excel files: a blank workbook and the same workbook filled in for a fictional cafe, plus README and a Worked Example sheet Who it is for: owners and managers of restaurants, cafes, cloud kitchens and bakeries in the UAE who set prices by feel today. What it is not: it does not read your POS or invoices. You type prices and sales. The cafe example is fictional and its prices are not a recommendation. Labour, rent and waste are only in the break-even sheet. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
Printable opening and closing checklists, cleaning schedules and logs in Word, plus Excel temperature, waste and receiving logs with a weekly review. Temperature limits are for you to confirm with your municipality.
A restaurant runs on repeated small checks: is the chiller cold, was the delivery in good condition, who closed the till. This pack gives you the forms to print and the logs to type, so the checks happen the same way every day and you can see the pattern at the end of the week. Temperature limits and food safety rules differ by municipality and licence. Setup holds starting values for each type of equipment that are only placeholders: replace them with the limits in your own food safety plan and your municipality's requirements, and the temperature log then flags readings outside them. A final form lists the questions to settle with your municipality. What is inside: - A Word document with 13 forms: opening and closing checklists for kitchen and front of house, daily cleaning schedule, weekly deep-clean list, temperature, receiving and waste logs, incident and complaint log, shift hand-over note, weekly manager review and the municipality questions - An Excel workbook with a temperature log (400 lines), waste log (400 lines), receiving log (300 lines) and a weekly review that counts out-of-range readings, waste cost by reason and rejected deliveries - The same workbook filled in for one fictional week, a Worked Example sheet and a README Who it is for: owners and managers of restaurants, cafes, bakeries and canteens who want routines on paper and a simple record in Excel. What it is not: not a food safety certification or HACCP plan, and not a statement of what your municipality requires. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc) and Microsoft Word 2016 or later (not tested in Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer).
An Excel workbook for a UAE shop: count notes and coins, work out expected cash from your POS shift report, see the variance and what to bank, and value stock take differences. Includes a filled-in week.
At closing time you need three answers: how much cash should be in the till, how much is there, and what to bank. This workbook gives them from the figures on your POS shift report (often called a Z report) and your count. What is inside: - Count Calculator: notes and coins by denomination into a counted total, 400 lines - Cash-Up: one line per till per day with opening float, cash sales, cash refunds, paid in and paid out. It works out expected cash, counted cash, variance and the amount to bank, and compares your gross sales with the Z report figure you type - Stock Take: 300 lines comparing the system quantity with your count and valuing the difference at cost - Month Review: takings, shortages and overages by till and by cashier, and the days with differences - Two Excel files (blank and a filled-in week), a Worked Example sheet and a README Expected cash is opening float plus cash sales minus cash refunds plus paid in minus paid out. This is how the Zeyto Academy POS lesson describes the Zeyto POS Z report, where card and on-account sales never enter it. Other POS systems can define it differently, so compare with your own report first. Who it is for: owners and managers of shops, minimarts and kiosks with a till and a POS shift report. What it is not: it does not read from any POS, including Zeyto POS, and it is not an audit. You type the figures. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
A paper and Excel starter for a small garage: a Word job card and workshop forms, and an Excel job register with an estimate and tax invoice print sheet. For workshops that are not yet ready for software.
A small workshop runs on paper job cards and memory. This pack gives you the forms to print and a simple Excel record behind them, so every job has a number, an approved estimate, a list of parts and labour, and a clear amount to collect. It is a paper and Excel starter. Zeyto also makes garage management software; this pack is separate, does not connect to it and does not copy its features. What is inside: - A Word document with the job card, vehicle condition report, estimate and extra-work approval, parts request slip, final inspection and road test sheet, hand-over and warranty record, workshop board, a customer terms outline to complete and have reviewed, and customer message templates - An Excel job register (300 jobs) with 1,200 job lines for labour, parts, consumables and sublet, status, stale-job and approval flags - An Estimate-Invoice print sheet: type a job number and print an estimate or a tax invoice with VAT, discount, paid so far and balance due - A Month Summary: jobs opened and invoiced, labour and parts sales, margin, technician hours, open work, money owed - Blank and filled-in workbooks (fictional month), a Worked Example sheet and a README Who it is for: owners of garages, body shops and workshops with a few bays who want order before buying software. What it is not: not a customer database, not a stock system and not a legal contract. The customer terms outline must be reviewed by your lawyer. The tax invoice layout follows the published FTA particulars; confirm yours with your accountant. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc) and Microsoft Word 2016 or later (not tested in Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer).
An Excel tracker for a salon or spa: services, staff, prepaid packages with balances, daily sales, retail sales and commission per staff member, with a filled-in month. Works from your appointment book.
A salon needs to know three things at month end: what was sold, what is still owed on prepaid packages, and what each stylist or therapist has earned in commission. This tracker keeps them in one workbook. What is inside: - Services: 60 services with VAT-inclusive price, duration and the direct cost of the products used - Staff: 15 staff members, each with a commission scheme (a rate up to a monthly threshold, another rate above it, and a product commission) - Packages: 200 prepaid packages with sessions sold, used and remaining, the value used and the unused value - Sales Log: 1,200 lines for completed, no-show and cancelled appointments, with discount, VAT and direct cost - Retail Sales: 400 lines for products sold with cost and commission - Month and Commission: revenue, VAT, direct cost, gross profit, no-show rate, average ticket, revenue by category and each staff member's commission and net pay - Blank and filled-in workbooks, a Worked Example sheet and a README Package money is handled on one rule: VAT on a package is counted when you receive the money, as with an advance payment, and sessions used from a package do not add VAT again, so unused package value shows what you still owe in services. Confirm the treatment with your accountant. Who it is for: salons, spas, barbershops and beauty studios in the UAE with one to fifteen staff. What it is not: not a booking system and not payroll. It does not send reminders or take payments, and commission rules are yours to type. Keep customer names out of shared copies. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
57 expected UAE marketing dates for 2027 with prep lead times, content angles and sector filters, plus a month planner and prep countdown. Every date is marked to verify.
An Excel workbook for planning a year of UAE marketing around the dates that matter. It lists 57 expected dates for 2027: public holidays, Ramadan and Eid, shopping festivals, school terms, seasons, community festivals and awareness days. Every row is labelled "Verify the year's date" and names where to verify it. Many UAE dates are lunar or announced late, so none of them is presented as confirmed. What is inside - Calendar 2027: each event with an expected date or window, how long before it to start preparing, content angles, which sectors it suits and where to verify it. You type the confirmed date in a yellow column once you have checked it. - Month Planner: one offer, one budget and one note per month. - By Sector: pulls the events for each kind of business from the calendar automatically. - Seasons and Rhythm: general patterns of the UAE year (winter and summer, Ramadan, Eid, the school year, weekly and payday rhythm) to compare with your own sales. - Prep Countdown: twelve dated steps, from 12 weeks before an event to 7 days after it, counted from the verified date you type. - My Events: space for your own dates, such as a launch or an anniversary. - Worked Example: a made-up business filling it in. Who it is for Owners and managers of UAE small businesses who plan campaigns: restaurants and cafes, retail and online shops, salons and clinics, property agents, gyms, service firms and education providers. What it is not It is not an official holiday list. Use the UAE Government portal for official public holiday announcements. It does not promise results, it is not legal advice, and it does not know your licence rules: check advertising, discount and permit rules with your licensing authority and the UAE Media Council. How we checked it We recomputed every formula in a spreadsheet library with example inputs and counted the 57 rows. We did not open it in desktop Excel.
An Excel billing tracker for a small clinic or dental practice: revenue by department, payer and provider, what patients and insurers still owe, claims ageing and actions. Built to hold no health data.
This tracker is for billing and revenue only. It records each billed service against a patient number, never a name, diagnosis or treatment note, and it shows what patients and insurers still owe and what to do next. Privacy: do not enter patient names, Emirates ID numbers, diagnoses, treatment notes, test results or photos. Health information is regulated by your health authority and by data protection law. Do not keep patient health data in a spreadsheet without a process your regulator and lawyer have approved. Even a patient number is confidential: protect the file with a password and limit who can open it. What is inside: - Services: 60 billing lines with fee, department and VAT treatment ("Check with accountant" counts as 0% until you decide) - Providers: 15 providers with their revenue share rules - Visit Log: 1,500 lines with payer type, discount, VAT, patient and insurer shares, claim status and an Action column (SUBMIT CLAIM, CHASE PAYER, CHASE PATIENT, REJECTED: FIX OR APPEAL) - Claims Ageing: insurer and company balances by age band - Month Summary: revenue by department, payer type and provider, balances owed and a simple provider share calculation - Blank and filled-in workbooks (fictional month), a Worked Example sheet and a README Who it is for: practice managers and owners of small clinics and dental practices who track billing in Excel. What it is not: not a medical record, not a clinic system and not advice on insurance rules, co-pay or claim deadlines, which come from your payer contracts. VAT on health services depends on the service: ask your accountant. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
An Excel workbook for traders and wholesalers: margin by customer tier, the price for your target margin, credit limits and invoice ageing with actions, what credit costs you, a deal checker and a reorder list.
A trader's money is made or lost in three places: the price given to each customer, the days that customer takes to pay, and the stock you order. This workbook puts the three together. What is inside: - Setup: customer tiers with a target margin and default credit days, your hold-orders rule, review period and cost of money - Products: 200 rows with landed cost, prices and margin for three tiers, the price needed for each tier's target, reorder point, stock cover, a suggested order and a stock status (REORDER NOW, OVERSTOCK, NO SALES) - Customers: 100 customers with credit limit, what they owe, overdue amounts, status (OK, OVERDUE: CHASE, HOLD ORDERS, OVER CREDIT LIMIT), average days to pay and the margin left after the cost of credit - Invoices: 1,000 credit invoices with due date, balance, days overdue, age band and an action - Credit Summary: what you are owed by age and key counts - Deal Check: type a deal and see the margin after credit cost, the largest discount you can give, the lowest price at those terms and whether an early-payment discount is worth it - Blank and filled-in workbooks, a Worked Example sheet and a README Who it is for: traders, distributors and wholesalers who give credit and keep prices and stock in Excel. What it is not: it overlaps on purpose with a receivables ageing tracker and a reorder planner; this one adds margin by tier, credit cost and the deal checker. It does not connect to accounting or stock software, and it does not contact customers. Cheques, disputes and recovery belong with your accountant or lawyer. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
An Excel estimating workbook for contractors and fit-out companies: a priced bill of quantities, contingency, overhead and profit, cost by section against actual, and a monthly cash flow with retention, advance and peak funding.
This workbook turns quantities and your own rates into a tender total and then shows how the cash will move over the life of the job. It is an ESTIMATE tool: it is only as good as your quantities and your rates. What is inside: - Setup: project dates, VAT, contingency, overhead and profit, retention, advance payment, payment and defects periods, and up to 12 sections of the works with a start month and duration - Rates: 150 unit rates by code with material, labour, subcontract or plant cost, wastage, source and a valid-until date that flags expired quotes - BOQ: 300 lines priced from a rate code or your own override rates, with direct cost, tender rate and tender amount and checks for NO RATE and RATE EXPIRED - Estimate Summary: direct cost and tender value by section, the markups, VAT, the profit percentage and a place to type actual cost to date against each section - Cash Flow: 36 months of cost incurred and value certified by section, retention held, advance recovered, receipts after your payment delay, supplier payments, the cumulative position and your peak funding need - A filled-in office fit-out and MEP example with 40 lines, a Worked Example sheet and a README Who it is for: small contractors, fit-out and MEP companies that price in Excel. What it is not: it does not measure drawings, and it does not model VAT timing, inflation, variations or claims. Sections are spread evenly over their months and retention is released in one lump. Every rate and percentage in the example is invented. Zeyto is developing a contracting product that is not yet released; this workbook makes no promise to match it. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
An Excel tracker for main contractors who pay subcontractors: packages and variations, payment certificates from cumulative valuations, retention held and due for release, advance recovery, overdue payments and licence expiry.
A main contractor can lose track of what each subcontractor has been certified, how much retention is held and when it falls due. This tracker follows the usual flow from package to variation to certificate to payment to retention release. What is inside: - Subcontractors: 60 with trade licence and insurance expiry dates, flagged when expired or expiring soon, and what you owe each one - Packages: 100 packages with original and revised value after approved variations, retention, advance, payment terms, completion and defects period, retention held and a status (OVER-CERTIFIED, PAYMENT OVERDUE, RETENTION RELEASE DUE, In progress and others) - Variations: 200 lines; only approved ones change the package value - Certificates: 400 lines where you type the cumulative gross value; the sheet works out this period, retention, advance recovery, net, VAT, amount payable, due date and overdue days, with checks for missing or lower valuations - Retention Releases: 100 lines - Payment Summary: commitment, certified, retention held, advance still to recover, what you owe, overdue and falling due in 30 days - Blank and filled-in workbooks, a Worked Example sheet and a README Who it is for: contractors and fit-out companies with several subcontract packages running at once. What it is not: not legal advice and not a contract reader. Retention, advance and payment terms must come from your subcontracts. VAT on certificates is a simplification that you choose in Setup; ask your accountant how it applies to retention and advances. Licence checks only compare the dates you type. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
An Excel tracker for UAE real estate agents and small brokerages: every lead with a next action, weighted pipeline value, lead sources, listings with agreement expiry, and commission splits with what has been paid.
Leads go cold when nobody records the next step. This tracker gives every open lead a next action date and shouts when it is missing or late, and it keeps listings and commissions in the same place. What is inside: - Setup: pipeline stages with your own chance of closing, 10 agents with their share of net commission, review, expiry and chase rules - Listings: 200 properties with owner, agent, price, agreement reference and expiry, days on market, an agreement check and a price review flag - Pipeline: 400 leads with source, stage, expected deal value, commission percentage, expected and weighted commission and a check (NO NEXT ACTION, FOLLOW UP OVERDUE, DUE TODAY) - Commissions: 200 closed deals with gross commission, a co-broker or referral share, net commission, agent earnings, what the brokerage keeps, VAT on the invoice, received and outstanding - Summary: pipeline by stage, lead source results, agent table, listings status and commission money - Blank and filled-in workbooks (fictional agency), a Worked Example sheet and a README Who it is for: individual agents and small brokerages that keep their pipeline in WhatsApp and memory. What it is not: it contains no RERA, DLD or other regulatory rule. Agreement types, permits and fees are things you type; verify them with the regulator and your brokerage. Chances of closing and agent splits in the example are invented. Client names and phone numbers are personal data: keep the file private. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc).
A Word pack and an Excel tracker for UAE freelancers and solo consultants: licence questions to ask, proposal, VAT tax invoice layout, agreement skeleton, routines and messages, plus an income, expense and VAT threshold tracker.
Starting a one-person business raises questions nobody answers in one place. This pack lists them, gives you the documents you need in your first year and an Excel tracker so the books stay tidy. It does not tell you which licence is right: that depends on your activity, emirate and free zone. Part 2 of the Word pack gives you the questions to ask the authority, a free zone, a PRO or your accountant, with space for the answers. What is inside: - A Word pack in nine parts: how to use it, licence and set-up questions, proposal or quote, VAT tax invoice layout, services agreement skeleton with the choices to make, project change request, client onboarding checklist, monthly and year-end routines, and message templates (proposal, invoice, three reminders, scope change, ending an engagement) - An Excel tracker: 300 invoices with due dates, overdue flags and the 14 day invoice check, 500 expenses by category with receipt checks, a month-by-month year summary, the VAT registration threshold watch (AED 375,000 mandatory, AED 187,500 voluntary) and an indicative VAT difference - The same tracker filled in for a fictional consultant, a Worked Example sheet and a README Facts used: 5% VAT, the two registration thresholds and the 30 day application rule, the 14 day tax invoice rule (Federal Decree-Law 8 of 2017, Article 67), the required tax invoice particulars and the general five-year record rule, as published by the FTA. Verify on tax.gov.ae. Who it is for: freelancers, consultants, trainers and creatives who invoice clients in the UAE. What it is not: not legal, tax or licensing advice, and not a contract. A lawyer must review the agreement before you use it. It does not cover corporate tax or any other tax: ask an accountant what applies to you. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc) and Microsoft Word 2016 or later (not tested in Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer).
Thirteen industry packs in one zip: marketplace sellers, online stores, restaurants, retail, garages, salons, clinics, wholesale, contractors, subcontractors, real estate and freelancers. $149 against $406 one by one; most owners need only two or three packs.
This bundle puts the thirteen Zeyto industry packs in one zip, each in its own numbered folder with its own README. A START-HERE.txt lists them and tells you which folders fit your kind of business. Bought separately the thirteen packs cost $406. The bundle is $149, which saves $257, about 63%. Most businesses only need two or three of the packs. If that is you, buying those individually costs less than the bundle. The bundle makes sense if you run more than one kind of business, or if you are an accountant, adviser or consultant who serves several small businesses. What is inside: - Selling: Amazon.ae and Noon Seller Pricing and Profit Calculator, UAE Online Store Launch Checklist, Retail Shop Daily Cash-Up and Stock Take Pack - Food: Restaurant and Cafe Food Cost and Menu Pricing Workbook, Restaurant Daily Operations Pack - Services: Garage and Workshop Job Card, Estimate and Invoice Pack, Salon and Spa Sales, Package and Commission Tracker, Clinic and Dental Practice Visit, Revenue and Claims Tracker, Freelancer and Consultant Business Starter Pack - Trade and property: Wholesale and Trading Margin, Credit Terms and Reorder Workbook, Contractor BOQ, Cost Estimate and Cash-Flow Workbook, Subcontractor Payment and Retention Tracker, Real Estate Agent Pipeline, Commission and Listing Tracker - In total: 24 Excel workbooks (blank files and filled-in examples), 4 Word documents, a README for every pack and START-HERE.txt The files are identical to the individual products. If you already own some of them, the bundle does not discount those. Who it is for: owners of mixed businesses, and advisers who need a ready toolkit for clients in several trades. What it is not: the packs are independent Excel and Word files. They do not connect to any marketplace, bank, authority or accounting software, and none states a current fee, licence cost or market rate. Two of them involve personal data (clinic billing and client lists), so read their privacy notes. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc) and Microsoft Word 2016 or later (not tested in Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer).
Seven lessons, 54 exercises and a 21-question quiz on lookups, data cleaning, SUMIFS, pivot tables, bank reconciliation tricks, VAT at 5% and error finding. Practice workbooks with UAE data, live answer-key workbooks and a printable answer key.
A self-study Excel course written for accountants and finance staff who work with UAE data every day: bank exports, VAT at 5%, AED amounts, DD/MM/YYYY dates. Seven lessons, 54 exercises, a 21-question quiz, and every practice workbook has an answer key. The seven lessons: 1. Lookups that do not break: VLOOKUP, INDEX and MATCH, XLOOKUP, and approximate-match tiers for commission and discounts 2. Clean the data before you trust it: a messy bank export with text dates, amounts with commas and brackets, stray spaces and duplicates 3. SUMIFS and conditional totals: SUMIFS, COUNTIFS, AVERAGEIFS, LARGE, SUMPRODUCT, EOMONTH and a cost-centre by month grid that must tie to the ledger 4. Pivot tables for finance reports: building, grouping by month, calculated margin, and tying every pivot back to the source total 5. Reconciliation tricks: a running COUNTIF match, the divisible-by-9 test for transpositions, half-difference test, adjusted bank and cash book balances 6. VAT workings at 5%: net and VAT from gross, expected versus charged VAT on 36 invoices, 15-digit TRN format check, totals by VAT code and by quarter 7. Find the error: why a trial balance is out by AED 3,600, numbers stored as text, ranges that stop early, and checks that catch it next time What you get: - A Word course guide with the tools, a walk-through, common mistakes and the exercises for each lesson - Seven practice workbooks with fictional UAE data and yellow answer cells - Seven answer-key workbooks where every answer is a live formula you can inspect - A 21-question quiz with a printable answer key, plus each exercise answer with its formula and the reason Every exercise answer was calculated twice, once independently from the data and once by recalculating the answer workbook, and the two agreed on all 54. Honest limits: this teaches Excel techniques for accounting tasks. It is not an accounting, tax or legal course. XLOOKUP needs Excel 2021 or Microsoft 365, and INDEX and MATCH alternatives are shown. Pivot table steps are described in the guide, but the author could not check them in Excel: the workbooks give the totals your pivots must match. The VAT lesson covers workings only, not reverse charge, imports or partial exemption, and the rate and rules must be confirmed with the FTA or your accountant. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (2021 or Microsoft 365 for XLOOKUP) and Word or Google Docs for the guide. Basic comfort with formulas such as SUM.
A plain-English guide for the owner or HR officer who has to issue an employment contract: a 10-part checklist, a guide to 27 clauses, a question list for your lawyer and MOHRE, and an offer-to-contract match sheet. About 29 pages in four Word files.
UAE Employment Contract Checklist and Clause Guide is for the person who writes or reviews employment contracts for a UAE company and wants to know what a contract has to cover, what each clause is for, and what to ask a lawyer before it is signed. It does not give you a contract to sign. It gets you ready to brief a lawyer, and it catches the gaps between what you promised in the offer and what the contract says. What is inside (four Word files): - Employment Contract Checklist: ten parts from before you draft to final sign-off, covering parties, term and probation, pay and benefits, hours and leave, conduct, ending the contract, visa and permit costs, registration and signing - Contract Clause Guide: 27 clauses (duties, probation, salary, overtime, leave, insurance, flights, visa costs, confidentiality, non-compete, notice, termination, gratuity, return of property, governing law and more). For each: what it does, what to decide, plain-English sample wording with placeholders, common mistakes and when to ask a lawyer - Questions for Your Lawyer and MOHRE: organised by topic, with space for the answer, a decisions log and a list of documents to bring - Offer-to-Contract Match Sheet: a line-by-line comparison to settle every mismatch before signing Who it is for: owners of small and mid-size companies, HR officers, office managers and PROs who draft or check contracts, and anyone who has been handed a template and not told what it should say. What it does not do: it does not state labour-law rules as certain. Where a rule matters (probation limits, notice, leave, overtime, end of service, non-competes, who pays visa costs), it names the topic and tells you to confirm with MOHRE, your free zone authority, your PRO or a lawyer. The one rule it states is the basis of gratuity (on basic wage) as in the official summary. It does not replace a lawyer, does not register contracts, and has no Arabic text. Sample wording is a starting point for review, not a final clause. Requirements: Microsoft Word 2016 or later, or Google Docs. Page counts are estimated from word counts; the files were not laid out in Word.
An original employee handbook draft for a small or mid-size UAE company: 42 policies in nine parts and nine ready-to-sign forms, about 13,700 words. Law-dependent figures are highlighted placeholders with drafting notes, ready to send to your lawyer.
UAE HR Policy Handbook Starter is the first draft of an employee handbook for a UAE company with roughly 5 to 150 staff. It is written in plain English and gives you the structure a handbook normally has, with every company decision left for you to make and every legal figure left for your lawyer to confirm. It saves the long first drafting; it does not replace the legal review. What is inside (one Word file, about 13,700 words): - How to use this draft, a five-step route to an issued handbook and a 13-point legal review checklist - 42 policies in nine parts: welcome and values; contracts, probation, records, visas and induction; working hours, attendance, overtime, Ramadan hours and remote work; annual, sick, public holiday, family, compassionate, study, Hajj, unpaid leave and absence without notice; salary and WPS, payslips and deductions, expenses, company property and loans, end-of-service gratuity; code of conduct, conflicts and bribery, confidentiality and data, IT and social media, dress, alcohol and drugs, harassment and speaking up; health, safety and vehicles; performance, discipline and grievance; resignation, termination, final settlement and handover - Nine forms: acknowledgement of receipt, confidentiality undertaking, IT use acknowledgement, company property record, leave request, expense claim, incident report, grievance form and a policy review log - Yellow-highlighted placeholders and a drafting-note box under every policy saying what to confirm and with whom - A table of the figures that must agree across your handbook, contract and payroll Who it is for: owners, general managers and HR officers who have no handbook, or only a copy of someone else's. What it does not do: it does not state minimum leave, maximum hours, notice periods, grounds for dismissal or deduction limits as law. Each is a placeholder to confirm with MOHRE, your free zone authority, your PRO or a lawyer. The one legal rule it outlines is the end-of-service gratuity tiers (21 and 30 days, one-year minimum, basic wage, cap of two years of wage), flagged for confirmation; the daily rate is your choice. It does not create contract terms, is English only, and the page count (estimated at 40 or more when printed) comes from the word count. Requirements: Microsoft Word 2016 or later, or Google Docs.
A Word checklist and an Excel launch tracker for opening an online store in the UAE: payments, delivery, returns, VAT on invoices and consumer rights as questions to verify, plus 14 test orders and three policy outlines.
Opening an online store involves dozens of small decisions and a few that cost money if you get them wrong. This pack gives you the list, in order, and turns the risky points into questions you must answer before launch, for example: which payment gateways accept your licence type, who handles failed deliveries, what happens to a returned item, and what your invoices must show if you are VAT registered. It does not tell you what the law says. Where a rule matters the checklist says to verify it with the authority, the FTA, your payment provider, your courier or your lawyer, and leaves a space for the answer. What is inside: - A Word document with a checklist in nine parts (business set-up, store platform and domain, payments, delivery, returns and consumer rights, VAT and invoices, privacy and messages, product pages, launch week), three policy outlines to complete (shipping, returns, privacy) and a first 30 days plan - An Excel launch tracker with 64 tasks (owner, due date, status), a dashboard that shows progress by section, with late and blocked tasks flagged, and 14 test-order scenarios to run before you go live, each marked Pass or Fail - A worked example sheet and a README The tax invoice points follow the published FTA particulars and the 14 day rule for VAT registered sellers. Everything else is a question for you to answer. Who it is for: a small business or first-time seller opening a store on Shopify, WooCommerce or similar, in the UAE. What it is not: not legal advice and not a policy generator. The policy outlines are skeletons that a lawyer should review. It does not set up your store, and it names no payment provider or courier as better than another. They are working tools and templates, not tax, accounting, legal or regulatory advice, and UAE rules change: check with your accountant, lawyer or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (not tested in Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc) and Microsoft Word 2016 or later (not tested in Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer).
We review your live Zeyto set-up in a 90-minute screen-share against a 40-point checklist, then send a written findings list ranked by priority. Review only: we change nothing, and we do not audit your books or your VAT position.
Outcomes - A written findings list covering 40 checks in 8 areas: company, tax and chart, users and security, backup, documents and printing, posting controls, data quality, routine and reports - Each finding is ranked fix now, fix this month, or nice to have, and gives what we saw, why it matters, the screen to open and the suggested fix - A one-page summary: what is in good shape, the five things to do first, and which items need your accountant's decision - For each fix, the Zeyto package that would cover it if you prefer us to do it. This is optional, never required What we do - Read your intake form before the session so the 90 minutes go on your set-up - Hold one 90-minute screen-share in which you open each screen and we read it with you. We do not change, post or delete anything - Use the read-only checks Zeyto offers: Data health, Trial Balance, backup history, user and role lists, template defaults, posting controls - Give up to 15 minutes of the session to one report or screen that worries you - Email the written findings within 2 working days of the session What you provide - A Zeyto company that has been in use for a few weeks, and an administrator sign-in that you open yourself. We never ask for it - The completed intake form at least 1 working day before the session - One or two people on the call, including whoever knows how the business trades - The tax treatments you or your accountant have chosen, if any, so we can compare the settings against them Timeline The session takes place within 5 working days of receiving your completed intake form, at a time agreed by email or WhatsApp. Please give 24 hours' notice to move it. The written findings follow within 2 working days of the session. Limits - One company, one 90-minute session, up to 2 attendees - Read-only review of settings and Zeyto's own data health checks. We do not open individual customer files, and we skip any screen you prefer not to show - The 40 checks listed in the scope document, plus one extra topic of up to 15 minutes - The review covers Zeyto ERP. Garage Pro, Contracting pre-release and Field Sales devices are not reviewed - A second session is a second purchase Not included - Making the fixes. You make them, or you order a set-up package - An audit of your books, a check that your figures are right, or any opinion on your VAT position. Check tax treatments with your accountant or the FTA for your case - A security audit or penetration test of your network - Reviewing other systems or integrations Support after delivery - One short follow-up question by email within 7 days of the session - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
We reconcile one bank account for up to 3 statement months: a reconciliation statement for each month, a matching workbook, and a list of proposed entries for your accountant. In Zeyto we also tick the cleared rows.
Outcomes - A reconciliation statement for each month: statement closing balance, deposits and payments not yet cleared, bank items not yet in your books, the adjusted bank balance, the adjusted book balance and the difference (nil when it agrees) - A matching workbook (.xlsx) holding the statement lines, your book entries, a match status for every line, and formulas that carry the totals into the statements - Zeyto path: the matched rows ticked as cleared in Accounting, Bank Recon with the statement date and reference, so the Uncleared list shows only what the bank has not shown yet - A list of proposed entries (bank charges, interest, items missing from the books), each with the date, amount and entry type we suggest, for your accountant to approve - A list of open questions: rows we could not match and what we would need to match them What we do - Check that the opening balance of the first month agrees with your books, or record the known difference - Match statement lines to book entries by amount and date, then by reference and name, and list what remains - Zeyto path: you export the Bank Statement (book) report to Excel, we match in the workbook, then tick the rows in a screen-share with you present - Excel path: we match the book entries you send, from any system or sheet, in the same workbook - Enter up to 10 simple Bank Entries in Zeyto (such as bank charges or interest) in a screen-share, only those your accountant approved in writing, with the account and amount they chose - Send the files and hold one 30-minute handover call What you provide - Statements for up to 3 consecutive months as Excel, CSV or text-searchable PDF. A scan or a photo is not retyped - Zeyto path: the Bank Statement (book) export and a sign-in in a screen-share. Excel path: your book entries in Excel, one row per movement - The opening position: the last reconciled balance, or a note that earlier months were never reconciled - Someone to answer questions about unusual rows within 2 working days, and your accountant for approvals Timeline 5 working days from the day we have the form, the statements and the book data. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and the items under "What you provide". The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One bank account in AED, up to 3 consecutive statement months and up to 300 statement lines in total. More lines, another account or a foreign-currency account is a second order or a quote - Zeyto's Bank Reconciliation screen loads the newest 500 rows for the filters you set, so we work in date ranges - Up to 10 simple Bank Entries, and only those approved in writing - If a difference stays after matching, we list the rows to chase. We do not promise every difference is explained, because some depend on documents you have not entered Not included - Catching up bookkeeping: entering missing invoices, receipts or payments, or correcting posted vouchers - Accounting judgement. Your accountant decides each proposed entry and its VAT treatment. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - Credit card or loan accounts, post-dated cheque management, foreign-currency revaluation - Retyping scanned statements, or contacting your bank Support after delivery - 14 days of email support on the files and the rows we ticked in Zeyto, answered within 1 working day - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
We load your customers, suppliers and items through the Zeyto Import Center and post your opening balances from your signed figures, then reconcile to the Opening Balance ledger. Up to 500 masters, 60 account lines, 100 open bills, 150 stock lines.
Outcomes - Up to 500 master records in total loaded through the Import Center: customers, suppliers and items, in Zeyto's loading order, each file checked in the preview before anything is written - Opening balances posted in Accounting, Openings from your signed figures: up to 60 account lines, up to 100 open customer and supplier bills (one row per invoice) and up to 150 stock lines - The reconciliation downloaded and read: the Opening Balance ledger (3900) nets to zero, or the remaining difference is listed as a missing ledger for your accountant - A one-page load record: files loaded, counts, rejects and how each was resolved, and the Import history reference What we do - Send the Import Center templates and a checklist of what to prepare. You fill them in - Check your files before loading: duplicate codes, missing units or tax codes, odd characters and number formats. We clean up to 1 hour of problems with you - Load masters in order, reading the preview line by line: payment terms and groups first, then items, then customers and suppliers. One reload of rejected rows is included - Run Validate on the Openings screen, then post accounts, bills and stock in a screen-share with you present - Download the reconciliation and walk you and your accountant through it - Show you how to undo a load: Roll back in Import history, and Cancel all openings What you provide - A Zeyto company whose first fiscal year is open, and a sign-in with access to all branches (posting needs it). A 14-day evaluation is fine for the masters - Your lists in the templates we send: customers, suppliers and items, with units, groups and tax codes already decided - A signed trial balance at the cut-over date, an ageing by invoice with dates and due dates, and a stock valuation by item and warehouse with quantity and unit cost - Your accountant for the decisions that are theirs: which ledger each balance belongs to, and how post-dated cheques in hand are recorded Timeline 7 working days from the day we have the form and your first complete files. Data quality usually decides the pace. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and the items under "What you provide". The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One company and one cut-over date inside an open fiscal year. Each opening part posts once per fiscal year - Up to 500 master records in total, 60 account lines, 100 open bills, 150 stock lines, one reload of rejects and about 1 hour of data clean-up - The chart of accounts and tax codes must already exist. We can add up to 10 missing units, groups or payment terms while loading - Remote only. You attend the posting session Not included - Preparing the trial balance, ageing or stock valuation, or deciding what the balances should be. Your accountant signs the figures - Transaction history, past invoices or past VAT returns - Post-dated cheques. The Openings screen has no cheque section, so they are recorded through vouchers once you and your accountant agree how - Migration from Emeron (see the Emeron to Zeyto Data Migration package), chart-of-accounts design, users and roles, training - Tax advice. Opening VAT balances are plain account lines and do not enter the VAT return Support after delivery - 14 days of email support on what we loaded, answered within 1 working day - If a load must be undone because of a mistake on our side, we redo it at no charge - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
We shape up to 6 of Zeyto's standard reports into saved views for your questions, set up the Daily Owner Report, and build one Excel owner summary from your exports. We configure what Zeyto offers; we do not add new report types.
Outcomes - Up to 6 saved views on Zeyto's standard reports (for example Sales Register, Aging, Stock Balance and Valuation, Sales Analysis), each with the period, filters, columns, grouping and sort for one question you ask, named by that question - Those reports starred as Favourites on up to 2 users or computers. Zeyto keeps saved views on the computer where they were made, so we set them up on each - The Daily Owner Report set up: send time, days, email addresses and WhatsApp numbers, tested with Send now. WhatsApp opens for a person to press send; Zeyto does not send it by itself - One Excel owner summary workbook that reads the XLSX exports of up to 4 of those reports: a data sheet for each export and a one-page summary of up to 8 figures and up to 3 charts, all driven by formulas - A one-page monthly routine: which saved view, who runs it, when, and who receives the PDF What we do - Read your intake form: the questions you want answered and who reads each answer - Map each question to the standard report that answers it, and say plainly where Zeyto has no report for it - In a screen-share of about 90 minutes, build and save each view, star the favourites, set the PDF layout and set the Daily Owner Report - Export the reports to XLSX and build the owner summary from your own export, then check its figures against Zeyto's report totals - Hold a 45-minute session with the owner on reading Business Overview, the Finance Dashboard and the Sales Dashboard, and on tying a dashboard figure back to its report What you provide - A running Zeyto with at least one month of posted data, and a sign-in that can run the reports. The Owner Overview opens only for users who may see all branches and cost - Up to 6 questions you want answered, in plain words, and who reads each answer - The email addresses and WhatsApp numbers for the Daily Owner Report. If it goes by email, the mail account in Settings, Sharing must work. You type any password yourself - Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, or Google Sheets, to use the workbook Timeline 7 working days from the day we have the form and your Zeyto access. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and the items under "What you provide". The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - Up to 6 saved views, 2 users or computers, one Daily Owner Report, one workbook (up to 4 data sheets, 8 figures, 3 charts) and 2 rounds of changes - We configure what Zeyto offers. We do not write new report types or change code. If no standard report answers a question, we say so and suggest the nearest one - Saved views stay on one computer and are not shared. The workbook updates only when you paste a fresh export - Some reports add document currencies as they are. We flag any such figure in the workbook notes Not included - New report types, custom code, live data connections or business-intelligence tools - Deciding accounting treatments, or checking that your books are right (see the Zeyto Health Check) - Sending reports for you. Zeyto and your own people send them - Tax advice or preparing VAT returns Support after delivery - 14 days of email support on what we set up, answered within 1 working day - If a Zeyto update changes a saved view or an export layout we used, we put it right within those 14 days - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
We build your tax invoice, quotation and delivery note layouts in the Zeyto Document Designer: logo, header, columns, totals, bank line and terms. Preview-tested on a real document and set as your defaults. Needs a licence with the Designer.
Outcomes - Three templates built in the Document Designer: sales tax invoice, quotation and delivery note, with one paper size each (A4 or A5) - Each shows your logo, a header block (legal name, TRN, address, contact), the line-item columns you choose, discount and VAT lines where you want them, totals, bank details, terms and a signature or stamp area - Each set as the default in Settings, Templates, so Print, Email PDF and WhatsApp PDF use it - Sample PDFs drawn by Zeyto's own PDF engine from a real document of each kind, with the Designer's Problems list empty - A one-page note: which template does what, and how to make a small change safely later What we do - Review your logo, your wording and an invoice you like - Start from Zeyto's shipped template for each document (shipped templates are read-only, and saving creates your own copy) and adjust the layout, fonts, colours and fields - Use the Totals fields for money, so the printed figures match what was posted - Run Preview PDF on a real submitted document, fix every problem the Designer lists, save, and press Set as Default - Send sample PDFs for your review, make up to 2 rounds of changes, and send the one-page note What you provide - A Zeyto licence that includes the Document Designer. If you are not sure, write to support@zeyto.app before you order - Your logo as a high-resolution PNG or SVG, and the company details, TRN and bank line exactly as they should print - The list of items your accountant says a tax invoice must show. The FTA's tax invoice page lists the particulars, and we place the fields you give us - One real submitted document of each kind in your Zeyto, or permission to use sample data - Any Arabic wording you want printed, supplied by you. We do not translate Timeline 5 working days from the day we have the form, your logo and your Zeyto access. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and the items under "What you provide". The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - 3 documents, one template and one paper size each, 2 rounds of changes, one company - English layout, plus Arabic text you supply where the Designer allows it - Zeyto's Designer limits apply: we cannot add a field a document type does not carry, or change how a document posts - POS till receipts keep their fixed layout. Labels and barcodes are not included - If your licence does not include the Document Designer we cannot deliver this service. We tell you in our first reply, before any work starts Not included - A logo or brand design, or translation into Arabic - Confirming that a layout meets VAT or tax-invoice rules. A layout is a starting point your accountant should review. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - E-invoicing, which is on the roadmap and not live. A printed layout is not an e-invoice - Printer set-up and repair (see the Report and Print-Format Set-up package) Support after delivery - 14 days of email support on the templates we built, answered within 1 working day - If a Zeyto update changes a layout we built, we put it right within those 14 days - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Send us one Claude prompt or skill that gives uneven results. We diagnose it, rewrite it, and test it over 3 rounds on your sample inputs, then return the improved version, a paste-in copy and a test log. Claude drafts; a person must review.
Outcomes - A one-page diagnosis of what causes the weak results, such as an unclear job, no output format, no decision rules, no checks, or a skill description that does not say when it applies - The improved version: a SKILL.md with YAML front matter (name and description) and instructions, or a rewritten prompt, plus a paste-in version for any Claude chat - A test log of 3 rounds on your sample inputs. Round 1 runs the original, rounds 2 and 3 follow our changes, with every output and a score against the criteria you gave us - A one-page review checklist: what a person must check in the output before using it What we do - Read what you send and your idea of a good output, and ask up to 5 questions by email if something is unclear - Rewrite it in plain, specific instructions. We change only what the diagnosis supports, and we say what we changed and why - Run all your samples in Claude, in 3 rounds, and keep every output in the log - Score each round against up to 5 criteria we agree with you, change the instructions after each round, and show whether the result got better, worse or stayed the same - Deliver the files by email and answer one round of questions within 7 days What you provide - The prompt or skill, up to 1,500 words, and any reference files a skill uses (up to 3 files, 2,000 words in all) - Up to 3 sample inputs, each up to 2 pages, with personal and customer data removed, and an example of an output you consider good - Up to 5 criteria for a good output, in plain words (for example: under 150 words, lists the three next steps, never quotes a price) - A reviewer on your side who can judge quality and reply within 2 working days Timeline 5 working days from the day we have the form and your samples. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and the items under "What you provide". The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One prompt or skill, 3 test rounds, up to 3 sample inputs and up to 5 criteria. English only, unless you supply Arabic samples and can judge the result - We test in a Claude chat that we have access to when we do the work. Results can differ on your plan, on another model or version, and from run to run - Text in, text out. Nothing connects to Zeyto or any other system - Your samples are used only for this job Not included - Building a new skill from scratch (see the Custom Claude Skills and Prompt Workflows Build package) - A guarantee that outputs are correct. Claude can be wrong. Accounting, tax, legal and HR outputs must be checked by a qualified person - Any automation that sends, posts, pays or logs in by itself. A person reviews and sends everything - A Claude subscription, or training for your team Support after delivery - One round of questions by email within 7 days - If the improved version gives a poor result on an input of the same kind as your samples within 14 days, send it and we adjust once - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
A 4-hour live remote training for up to 8 of your people, on Zeyto basics or one role track: sales and billing, purchasing and stores, accounts, or owner and manager. Hands-on exercises on practice data and a quick-reference sheet for everyone.
Outcomes - A 4-hour live training in English for up to 8 users: one block of 4 hours with a 15-minute break, or two blocks of 2 hours within 5 working days, your choice - One track of your choice: Basics, or a role track (Sales and billing, Purchasing and stores, Accounts, Owner and manager). Agendas are in the scope document - Hands-on exercises for every attendee on a practice database, not on your live books - A quick-reference sheet (PDF) for your track and an exercise sheet with answers, sent within 2 working days - An attendance list, and answers by email to any question we could not finish in the session What we do - Agree the agenda with your contact before the day, and remove topics you do not use - Prepare practice data and the exercises for your track - Teach in short demonstrations followed by exercises. Attendees do the clicking, and we watch screens and help - Show where Zeyto's free Academy lessons cover each topic, so people can go deeper afterwards - Send the sheets and the attendance list within 2 working days What you provide - Up to 8 attendees at the same time, each on their own computer with sound, and a way to open Zeyto from it (their sign-in or the public demo) - A named contact and the completed intake form with each attendee's name and role - A practice database: Zeyto's Demo data mode on your install, or the public live demo. We tell you which fits and explain how to switch - Your own examples if you want them used (a real quotation, a purchase, a report question), with names changed if you prefer Timeline Training takes place within 10 working days of us holding your intake form, on dates agreed by email or WhatsApp. Please give 48 hours' notice to move it. The sheets follow within 2 working days of the training. Limits - Up to 8 attendees, one company, one track, 4 hours in total, remote only, in English (ask first about Arabic) - Zeyto ERP only. POS, Field Sales, Garage Pro and Contracting are separate - We train on practice data. We do not change your live settings during the session - The session is not recorded unless you ask in writing and everyone on the call agrees - More than 8 attendees, or a second track, is a second purchase Not included - Set-up, configuration, data import or opening balances (see the set-up packages) - Tax or accounting advice. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - A Zeyto Academy exam or certificate. The training is not a qualification - On-site training, which is quoted separately Support after delivery - 14 days of email questions from attendees, through your named contact - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Four hours of Zeyto specialist time over 30 days for how-to questions, small configuration changes, report help and month-end questions, by email, WhatsApp and screen-share. First-reply target of 1 working day. You renew by ordering again.
Outcomes - Up to 4 hours of specialist time in a 30-day term, used in 15-minute blocks and drawn down as we work - Help by email (support@zeyto.app), WhatsApp or screen-share on how to do something in Zeyto, why a figure looks the way it does, settings changes you decide on (users and roles, numbering, template defaults, saved views, backups), reading reports, and month-end questions - A first-reply target of 1 working day on messages to support@zeyto.app or WhatsApp. This is a target, not a guarantee - A time log of what we did and how long it took, sent when 3 hours are used and at the end of the term What we do - Reply to your named contacts, and ask for what we need: the screen name, what you expected, and the Error Log reference if there is one - Work in a screen-share where you stay in control, or send step-by-step written instructions - Keep a running log and tell you when 3 of the 4 hours are used - Report any defect we find in Zeyto itself to the product team, tell you what we reported, and not count that time against your hours - Send the time log at the end of the term What you provide - A Zeyto ERP company in use, and up to 3 named contacts who may ask - Questions with the screen name, what you expected and what happened, and an Error Log reference where there is one - Dates for screen-shares, given 24 hours ahead where you can - The decisions that are yours, such as tax treatments, from you or your accountant Timeline The term starts on the day we confirm your intake form and runs for 30 days. Our first-reply target is 1 working day. Unused hours end with the term and do not roll over. Nothing renews automatically: to continue, order again. Limits - 4 hours per order, one company, up to 3 named contacts, remote only, in English (ask first about Arabic) - Support for Zeyto ERP. Garage Pro, Contracting pre-release and Field Sales devices are not covered, so ask first - Messages sent outside working days wait until the next working day. There is no urgent or after-hours line - Work beyond 4 hours is quoted first and done only with your written yes - Long jobs, such as a data import, a migration or a training day, are better bought as their own package Not included - Bookkeeping or data entry for you, correcting your accounts, or posting entries - Tax or accounting advice, or preparing or filing VAT returns. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - Custom development, integrations, hardware or network repair, or on-site visits - A guarantee of reply or fix times. We aim for the targets above Support after delivery - A time log by email when 3 hours are used and at the end of the term - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Paste a WhatsApp enquiry (Arabic, English, Arabizi or a voice-note transcript) and get the lead classified, qualifying questions, a reply in the customer's language, a quote with VAT arithmetic and a follow-up plan. You review and send.
WhatsApp Business Sales Reply Desk is a Claude skill for UAE shops, traders, caterers, workshops and service businesses that sell through WhatsApp. You paste the customer's message. Claude sorts it into hot, warm, browsing, not a lead, or an existing customer who needs support, and drafts what to send next. What is inside: - A lead classification table with tie-break rules, and two to three qualifying questions by type of business - Language rules for code-switching: reply in the language the customer last used, mirror formality, handle Arabic written in Latin letters and pasted voice-note transcripts, and know when to offer a call - A fixed quote message: item lines, quantity, AED unit price, total, a VAT line that says whether prices include or exclude 5% VAT, validity date, delivery and payment terms. The arithmetic is shown every time - A "best price?" ladder that uses a floor price you set, so you do not discount in a panic - A follow-up plan where each message adds something new (same day, day 1, day 3, day 7, close-out) instead of "just checking in" - Payment safety rules: check the money in your own bank before releasing goods, never ask for card numbers or OTP codes in chat, and be careful with payment screenshots - A message bank of 36 English replies and 12 Arabic drafts with English meaning, a quote and follow-up guide, and a code-switching and dialect guide - Three worked examples: a curtains seller with an Arabizi enquiry and a voice note, an electronics trader facing "last price?", and an Arabic catering quote Who it is for: owners and sales staff who answer WhatsApp all day and want replies that are quick, polite and accurate. It pairs well with Customer Support Reply Desk, which handles complaints and after-sales messages. What it does not do: it does not send messages, read your WhatsApp, log in anywhere or promise that a customer will buy. Quote validity, quiet hours and cash-on-delivery limits are labelled as assumed defaults for you to set. WhatsApp menus and Business Platform rules change, so it tells you to check your own app. Arabic drafts need a native speaker's check before use. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Reply to Google reviews calmly and in your voice, in English or Arabic, draft an evidence note for a suspected fake review, get a monthly review report you can check, and plan four weeks of local posts. You post from your own account.
Google Business Profile Review Replier is a Claude skill for UAE restaurants, clinics, salons, workshops, gyms and shops. You paste the reviews. Claude classifies each one, applies fixed reply rules and drafts replies you can paste into your own profile. It also plans and drafts short local posts. What is inside: - A review classifier: star level with text, rating only, mixed, staff praise, suspected fake or competitor, off-topic, abusive, health or private details, legal threat - Reply rules: thank, be specific, never argue, protect privacy, move detail offline, no incentives for reviews, and "check Google's current review policies" - A reply bank of 38 drafts, 10 of them in Arabic with English meaning, plus a bilingual form - A path for a suspected fake review: signals counted, a neutral public reply, and an evidence note for the report you file yourself - A monthly review report from pasted reviews, with counts you can verify, repeat complaints and staff mentions - A four-week local post plan by business type with post drafts that leave placeholders for your own hours, prices and offer dates - Hooks for Ramadan, Eid, National Day on 2 December, summer and back to school, each marked "confirm this year's dates" - Three worked examples: a two-star review for a Dubai workshop, four reviews for a Sharjah salon including a suspected fake, and a National Day post plan for an Abu Dhabi cafe Clinics get extra care: the skill will not confirm that someone was a patient, makes no clinical claims and tells you to check advertising and privacy rules with the relevant health authority. What it does not do: it does not log in to Google, post, reply or report anything. It does not promise a rating, ranking or removal of a review. Length limits are labelled as assumed defaults to check in your account. It never invents offers, prices, awards or reviews. Arabic needs a native speaker's check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Write a Noon or Amazon.ae listing from facts you can prove: title options, bullets, description, search terms, Arabic version, image shot list, a claims check and a margin check with VAT shown. You check your seller rules and upload.
Noon and Amazon.ae Product Listing Writer is a Claude skill for UAE marketplace sellers. You give it the product, what you can prove about it, your costs and the limits shown in your own seller account. It returns a listing you can paste, and a price and margin check. What is inside: - A limits step: the skill never states a marketplace's title, bullet or keyword length as fact. It asks you to paste the current limits for your category, or uses labelled "assumed default, verify" values - Title formulas by product type, a five-benefit bullet pattern where each bullet pairs a feature with a measured spec or proof, and a description structure - Keyword work from your own data only: search-term reports, customer questions and competitor titles you paste, with a gap analysis and de-duplication rules - An Arabic listing method that does not translate word for word, with a note on Arabic characters versus bytes and a native-speaker flag - An attribute completeness checklist and an image shot list - A claims and compliance pass: a brand gate, a claims ledger (proven, seller states, unknown, not allowed), no medical or cure claims, no competitor comparisons, and a reminder to check category approval in your seller account and with the relevant UAE authority - A price and margin check: VAT-inclusive shelf price to net (price divided by 1.05), your commission and fulfilment fees as you supply them, landed cost, margin in AED and per cent, break-even price and a margin-floor warning - Four references: title and bullet formulas, a keyword worksheet, a claims checklist and a margin walkthrough - Three worked examples: a bilingual coffee dallah set for Noon, a phone case for Amazon.ae with a gap analysis, and a skincare serum where claims are removed and the category is flagged What it does not do: it does not log in to Noon or Amazon, upload, generate or check images, or promise ranking or sales. Commission and fees are your inputs, never assumed. It is not product-compliance advice. Arabic needs a native speaker's check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Score go or no-go, turn pasted tender clauses into a compliance matrix, draft clarification questions, build past-performance narratives from your facts only, and check the price schedule arithmetic. You sign and submit.
Tender and RFQ Response Builder is a Claude skill for UAE contractors, suppliers, agencies and consultancies that answer formal RFQs and tenders. It is different from a normal client quote: the tender text decides everything, so the skill works clause by clause from what you paste. What is inside: - A weighted go or no-go scorecard (weights add up to 100, arithmetic shown) covering fit, capacity, margin, risk terms and effort - A compliance matrix built only from pasted clauses: requirement, clause reference, mandatory or optional, complies, partially, does not comply or clarify, evidence held, evidence missing, owner, status - A mandatory documents checklist, each item written as "if the tender asks" and "check with the issuing entity" - Clarification questions to send before the deadline, with rules for asking and a bank of 65 questions across construction and fit-out, IT, supply, consultancy and facilities management - A past-performance narrative builder. It refuses to invent projects, values, outcomes or client names, and marks gaps as "needs your fact" - A technical approach skeleton mapped to the evaluation criteria with a coverage check - A pricing worksheet with explicit assumptions and exclusions, VAT 5% handled as the tender asks, and a consistency check of line totals, subtotal, VAT and grand total - A risk table for retention, damages, payment terms, indemnities and guarantees, with "ask your lawyer" triggers - A final red-team read: does every mandatory item have a response - Three worked examples: a fit-out RFQ with a compliance matrix, an IT firm's narratives with two missing facts, and a price schedule where a transposed line is caught What it does not do: it does not submit anything, sign, contact the issuer or promise a win. It does not know how evaluators will score. Scorecard thresholds are assumed defaults you can change. It is not legal advice. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md. Paste the tender in sections.
Paste a contract and get a plain-English summary, key dates with notice deadlines computed, a red-flag register with fixed severity rules, lawyer-review triggers and questions for the other side. A reading aid, not legal advice.
Contract Summariser and Red-Flag Reader is a Claude skill for business owners who receive a contract and want to understand it before they see a lawyer. It covers supply, service, agency and distribution, lease, shareholder, NDA, subcontract and vendor terms. Every output starts with a fixed notice: this is a reading aid, not legal advice, and it does not say whether you should sign. What is inside: - An inventory of what was seen and what was not (annexes, schedules, referenced documents, blanks) - A clause map by topic: term, price and payment, liability, termination, renewal, IP, exclusivity, governing law, security, signatories and more - A plain-English summary of 150 to 250 words and a key dates and money table. Notice deadlines are computed with both counting conventions, with a reminder date - Obligations tables for each party - A red-flag register using 19 fixed checks and a severity rule, so two runs give the same answer. Each flag quotes the clause, says why it matters in plain words, suggests a question for the other side and a safer-wording idea marked "for your lawyer to judge" - 12 lawyer-review triggers, including personal guarantees, cheques as security, foreign governing law and a language-prevails clause - A negotiation priority list: must-have, trade, nice-to-have - A one-page brief to send your lawyer, a glossary of plain wording and a counterparty question bank - Three worked examples: a distribution agreement, an office lease and a service contract with an auto-renewal trap What it does not do: it does not say a clause is valid, enforceable, usual or fair, and it does not say what UAE law provides. For that it says "your lawyer will tell you how this works under the law that applies". It never rewrites the contract as final legal text and never says "safe to sign". It cannot read what you do not paste. It does not contact the other side or sign anything. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Run a consent and source check, then draft a respectful 5-touch sequence over email, LinkedIn and, with permission, WhatsApp, with reply handling and a tracker. English and Arabic. You check UAE rules with your lawyer and send.
Cold Outreach and Follow-up Sequencer is a Claude skill for UAE B2B businesses (agencies, suppliers, software, consultancies, logistics, fit-out, training) that want a short, respectful outbound sequence. It starts with a gate: where did you get the contact, and is it a fair way to write to them? What is inside: - A consent and source gate before any drafting. Public business contact for a relevant role is treated differently from a bought list, scraped data or a personal number - Anti-spam rules written into every draft: sender identity, a simple opt-out, opt-outs honoured at once and kept in a suppression list, no fake referrals, no deceptive subject lines - A research note built only from facts you paste. The skill refuses invented personalisation such as "saw your recent expansion" when you did not give it that fact - A 5-touch sequence over about 21 days: email, LinkedIn connection note, a second email that adds value, a short bump and a polite close-out. Call or WhatsApp only with permission - Length and subject-line rules, UAE timing notes and Ramadan and Eid adjustments - Drafted answers for 8 reply types: interested, not now, wrong person, send info, price first, already have a supplier, referral to a colleague, and remove me - A tracker with consent basis and a suppression flag, plus a deliverability note - A message bank of 37 drafts (9 in Arabic), a reply-handling bank, a consent checklist and a subject and opening-line bank - Three worked examples: a logistics company writing to e-commerce operations managers, a reply-handling session, and a bilingual sequence for a training provider What it does not do: it does not send, scrape, log in or automate anything, and it does not promise replies or meetings. It does not state UAE marketing or data-protection rules: you check the current requirements with your lawyer or the relevant authority. The LinkedIn note length is an assumed default to verify. Arabic needs a native speaker's check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Prepare a one-page call plan with discovery questions and objection answers, then turn messy notes (including mixed Arabic and English) into CRM-ready fields, a transparent score and follow-up messages. You enter and send.
Sales Call Prep and Notes is a Claude skill for UAE salespeople and owners who run discovery and follow-up calls. Before the call it writes a one-page plan. After the call it turns your raw notes or a voice-note transcript into a record your CRM can hold and a follow-up you can send. What is inside: - A call plan: objective, the three things to learn, an opening line, an agenda to propose, and 8 to 12 discovery questions by lane (situation, problem, impact, alternatives and who else is involved, decision process, budget and timing, next step) - A discovery question bank of 74 questions, including industry-specific ones - An objection bank of the 14 objections UAE sellers hear most, two answer variants each: price, "send it on WhatsApp", existing supplier, "I need to check with the boss", "after Ramadan or Eid", sample or trial, post-dated cheque terms, cheaper competitor, timing, local reference, Arabic, minimum order, delivery, and trust. Each follows acknowledge, ask, offer. If a fact is missing the answer is "I will confirm and come back by [date]", never an invented reference or discount - A note-capture template, then fixed CRM fields: account, contact, stage set by defined criteria, need in their words, pain and impact with numbers only if said, budget and authority as stated or "not discussed", timeline, competitors, objections, next step with owner and date, risks, and what you do not know - A transparent qualification score with weights that add up to 100 and the arithmetic shown, a manager forecast rule, a coaching note and short email and WhatsApp follow-ups - Three worked examples: a discovery plan for a facilities company, mixed-language notes from a restaurant group turned into a CRM entry, and a stalled deal after "check with the boss after Eid" What it does not do: it does not record calls, log in to a CRM or send anything. Check consent rules before you record anyone. The score and stage criteria are default rules you can change. It gives no approval-cycle lengths: you ask and record them. Arabic needs a native speaker's check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Plan and write newsletters and promo campaigns with UAE calendar hooks, eight scored subject lines per email, an honest A/B test plan, a send and unsubscribe checklist and a results review. English, Arabic or both. You send from your own tool.
Newsletter and Email Campaign Writer is a Claude skill for UAE retailers, restaurants, clinics, property firms, schools and B2B services that email customers. It takes a campaign from brief to a send-ready draft and then reviews the results you paste back. What is inside: - A campaign brief: audience segment, how the list was built, goal, offer, dates, voice and languages - A UAE campaign calendar guide: Ramadan, Eid Al Fitr, Eid Al Adha, Islamic New Year, National Day on 2 December, Commemoration Day, White Friday-style November sales, the Dubai Shopping Festival period, Diwali, Christmas and New Year, Valentine's Day, Mother's Day, back to school, summer and B2B budget season. Every date is marked "confirm this year's date", with tone notes for each period - Eight scored subject-line candidates per email from six fixed patterns, with a scoring rubric and tie rule, plus a bank of 42 patterned examples - An honest A/B plan: test one thing, split evenly, decide on clicks or replies rather than opens, and a rule for when a list is too small to test - Email section templates: welcome, monthly newsletter, promo, event invite, reminder, re-engagement and post-purchase, a mobile-first body and a plain-text version - Arabic and bilingual handling, including right-to-left testing reminders - A send checklist: consent proof, a working unsubscribe link, sender identity, opt-outs honoured and recorded, no bought or scraped lists, sender authentication set up by whoever runs your domain - A results review from numbers you paste, with the arithmetic shown - Three worked examples: a Ramadan perfume promo, a Sharjah accounting firm newsletter with a bilingual intro, and a gym re-engagement email with a results review What it does not do: it does not send, connect to your email tool or promise opens, clicks or sales. It never invents discounts, scarcity, testimonials or statistics. It does not state UAE marketing or data-protection rules: you check them with your lawyer or the relevant authority. Arabic needs a native speaker's check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Pick your niche and draw hooks, series formats and shot lists from a bank of 12 UAE niches, then get timed scripts, captions with on-screen search terms, Arabic versions and a two-week batch shoot plan. You film and post.
TikTok and Reels Script Bank is a Claude skill for UAE businesses that want a steady supply of short vertical video ideas without starting from a blank page each week. The same video can go to TikTok and Reels. It works bank-first: you pick your niche, Claude draws from pre-written patterns, fills the slots with your real facts and plans the shoot. It is different from Instagram Reel and Carousel Studio, which takes one idea through a full production package and a posting checklist. This skill is for planning a batch of ideas from a bank. What is inside: - Twelve UAE niches: restaurant and cafe, property agent, salon and barber, garage and detailing, gym, clinic, boutique, online store, accountant, tutor, travel, fit-out and home services. Each has nine fill-in hooks, three series formats and four shot-list starters, so 108 hooks in all - A format library (point-of-view, myth versus fact, behind the counter, day in the life, packing orders, reply to a comment and more) with a timing table for 15, 30 and 45 seconds and word counts as a rule of thumb - A scoring rule that picks 5 to 7 ideas by fit to your real offer, effort, proof you have and risk - Timed scripts, shot lists, captions and on-screen search terms written for people who search inside the app, with area names and no stuffing - Arabic and bilingual handling with subtitle and right-to-left reminders - Filming reminders: consent from staff and customers, mall and building rules to check, no licence or ID numbers on screen - A calendar of hooks (Ramadan, Eid, National Day on 2 December, summer, back to school, sale periods), all marked "confirm this year's dates", and a two-week batch plan - Three worked examples: a Sharjah barber with five scripts, a Dubai property agent with a table of claims declined, and a bilingual Ajman home-baking plan What it does not do: it does not post, log in or edit video. It does not state how any algorithm works or promise views or followers. Clinics get no before-and-after or outcome claims, and healthcare, property and home-food rules are for you to check with the relevant authority. Arabic needs a native speaker's check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Translate business text between Arabic and English, back-translate it blind, classify every difference by severity, build a terminology table and get a native-reader checklist. Not a certified translator: it flags what needs a person.
Arabic-English Business Translation Checker is a Claude skill for UAE businesses that translate quotes, policies, emails, menus, website copy, signage and job ads and want to catch errors before they print or send. It is honest about its limits: Claude is not a certified translator and its Arabic can be wrong. What is inside: - A class gate. Contracts, legal, medical and official filings are sent to a certified legal translator, with a list of what to ask for and "check with the receiving authority" for attestation - A drafting step with a fixed register: formal business modern standard Arabic by default - A blind back-translation step, then a comparison. The skill says plainly that the same model does both, so errors can be correlated and the check reduces risk without removing it - A difference table by type (meaning, omission, addition, number or date or currency, tone, terminology, cultural fit, direction) and severity A, B or C, where A means it changes meaning, money, a date, an obligation or safety - A terminology table you keep and paste next time: source term, chosen translation, alternatives, decision note, native speaker confirmed yes or no - Formatting checks for Arabic: right-to-left, numerals, AED, phone numbers, English names inside Arabic sentences, transliteration of names and brands, punctuation - A native-read list: exactly what to ask the reader to check and the five riskiest phrases - A starter business terminology list of 140 rows, a register and tone guide, a numbers, dates, names and direction checklist and a false-friends list - Three worked examples: an English quotation to Arabic with VAT and payment terms, an Arabic complaint email to English with one ambiguous phrase, and a bilingual cafe menu where dish names are transliterated What it does not do: it does not certify anything, replace a native or professional translator, or guarantee accuracy. The terminology list is a starter to confirm with your own reader. Anything printed, signed or filed needs a native read first. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Draft internal job descriptions and 12 core HR policies for a UAE business with no HR team. Every legal number becomes a flagged placeholder for your lawyer. A starting point for review, not legal advice.
HR Policy and Job Description Drafter is a Claude skill for UAE businesses with no HR department. It writes the internal job description and the policies that every employee should be able to read. It is different from Job Post and CV Screener, which writes a public job post and screens CVs. What is inside: - A job description builder: role purpose in one sentence, accountabilities written as outcomes, measures without invented targets, decision rights, reporting line, must-have and nice-to-have qualifications, working-condition placeholders and a "what this role is not" box - A wording review that flags requirements that could discriminate, such as age, gender, nationality or appearance, for your lawyer to judge - Twelve policy templates: attendance, leave, remote and hybrid work, expenses, conduct, grievance, disciplinary, probation, employee data, devices and social media, onboarding and offboarding, and performance review - The placeholder rule. Leave days, probation length, notice, working hours, overtime, penalties and deductions are never written as fact. Each becomes a bracketed placeholder with a lawyer-review flag (26 flag codes with the question to ask) - A gap analysis: tell the skill which policies you have and it ranks the missing ones by risk and frequency - A 10-test policy quality check: plain sentences, who does what by when, no promise the company cannot keep - A change log and an acknowledgement page template. The company, not Claude, collects signatures - Reference job descriptions for an admin assistant, a sales executive and a warehouse supervisor - Three worked examples: a warehouse supervisor description, a remote and hybrid policy for an agency, and a disciplinary and grievance process for a clinic where penalty amounts are refused and the lawyer's questions are listed What it does not do: it is not legal advice and does not state UAE labour law. It names the private-sector labour law, Federal Decree-Law 33 of 2021, and tells you to check whether it applies to you (mainland, free zone, DIFC or ADGM) with your lawyer, MOHRE or your free zone authority. It does not issue, sign or file anything. Arabic versions need a native check, and which language prevails is a question for your lawyer. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Paste a trial balance or P&L and get data checks first, then a variance and ratio workings table, a management commentary where every statement is labelled fact, calculation or hypothesis, and board questions. No invented numbers.
Financial Statement Commentary Writer is a Claude skill for owners, finance managers and accountants who report monthly or quarterly in AED. You paste a trial balance and/or P&L, with a prior period and budget if you have them. The skill checks the numbers before it writes a word. What is inside: - 14 data integrity checks: debits equal credits, balance sheet balances, subtotals recomputed, wrong-sign balances, odd accounts and more. Each is pass, warn or stop. If any check stops, the reply is a fix list only and no commentary is written on numbers that do not reconcile - A variance and ratio workings table with every formula and input shown: revenue growth, margins, expense ratio, favourable or adverse variance, receivable, inventory and payable days with the day-count basis stated, current and quick ratio, cash runway and debt service cover - A materiality filter, with a default rule of both a percentage and an AED amount labelled "assumed default", so the commentary covers what moved - Commentary sections: headline, revenue, margin, operating costs, profit, cash and working capital, balance sheet, items to watch. Each statement is tagged FACT (from your numbers), CALCULATION (shown) or HYPOTHESIS (a possible reason to confirm with a named role). It never states a cause as fact - 10 to 15 board questions per run, from a bank of 55, a 150-word executive version and a 400 to 600 word version - A "what these numbers cannot tell you" section - Three worked examples built on consistent data sets: a Dubai trading company monthly commentary, a trial balance that is out by AED 1,250 where the skill stops, and an Abu Dhabi consultancy quarterly view Numbers can come from Zeyto reports or any other system. What it does not do: it does not read your books, log in or send anything. It does not assess corporate tax or VAT treatment: check with your accountant. Ratio thresholds are assumed defaults you can change. It is not audit or assurance work. You review and own the final commentary. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Build a use-of-funds table that adds up, calculate the instalment and debt service cover with formulas shown, log forecast assumptions, check your documents tell one story, and rehearse bank questions. Never promises approval. You submit.
Bank Loan and Investor Pack Builder is a Claude skill for UAE SME owners who prepare a bank loan or credit-line application, or a small investor pitch. It works only from your own numbers and labels anything it cannot support. What is inside: - A use-of-funds table that must sum to the amount you ask for, with timing and the quote or evidence for each row - A funding-need check using receivable, inventory and payable days, and a capex payback view - Repayment capacity: the standard instalment formula and debt service coverage ratio with every step shown. The interest rate is always your illustrative figure from your bank, never assumed - A stress case and a three-scenario view (base, downside, upside) from your inputs - A forecast assumptions register: assumption, value, source in your own history, sensitivity, owner. Growth numbers with no evidence are labelled "unsupported" - Narrative sections for business overview, management, market and customers, use of funds, and repayment and risks, built only from your facts, with gaps shown as "needs your fact" - A document checklist of what banks typically ask for, with "check your bank's list", and a consistency check that compares VAT returns, bank statements and accounts so you can explain mismatches before the bank finds them - A question rehearsal: 66 questions in 11 themes with what a good answer must contain. In practice mode it asks one question at a time and critiques your answer - An investor variant: one-page summary, traction only from your data, milestones tied to funds, and a caution that raising money from outside investors can be regulated, so check with a lawyer and the relevant authority first - Three worked examples: a Sharjah trader's AED 600,000 working-capital request, a Dubai cafe group's AED 350,000 equipment finance with a VAT mismatch flagged, and a five-question rehearsal What it does not do: it does not contact a bank, submit anything, set a rate, value your business or promise approval. It gives no tax, legal or investment advice. Thresholds for flags are assumed defaults. You submit. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
All 13 Volume 2 Zeyto Claude skills in one pack, with a master README, install guide and a which-skill-when chart. US $249 instead of US $687 bought one by one (saving US $438, 64%).
The Zeyto Skill Library Volume 2 is thirteen more Zeyto Claude skills in one download, for a UAE business, accountant, freelancer or agency that wants repeat jobs done the same careful way every time. It does not repeat Volume 1 and you do not need Volume 1 to use it. Each skill is a folder of instructions Claude follows: intake questions, a step-by-step workflow with decision rules, output formats, a quality checklist, failure cases, reference banks and three worked examples with real inputs and full outputs. They work in Claude with Skills support (upload the zip for each skill) or in any Claude chat by pasting SKILL.md. The thirteen skills: - WhatsApp Business Sales Reply Desk: classifies enquiries, replies in the customer's language, writes quotes with VAT arithmetic and follow-ups. - Google Business Profile Review Replier and Local Post Writer: review replies, a fake-review evidence note, a monthly report and local posts. - Noon and Amazon.ae Product Listing Writer: listings, Arabic version, claims check and a margin check. - Tender and RFQ Response Builder: go or no-go score, compliance matrix, clarification questions and price schedule checks. - Contract Summariser and Red-Flag Reader: plain-English summary, red-flag register and lawyer-review triggers. A reading aid, not legal advice. - Cold Outreach and Follow-up Sequencer: consent gate, a 5-touch sequence and reply handling. - Sales Call Prep and CRM-Ready Notes: call plans, objection answers and CRM fields. - Newsletter and Email Campaign Writer: UAE calendar hooks, scored subject lines and a send checklist. - TikTok and Reels Script Bank: 12 niches, 108 hooks and a batch shoot plan. - Arabic-English Business Translation Checker: blind back-translation, severity ratings and a terminology table. - HR Policy and Job Description Drafter: job descriptions and 12 policy templates with lawyer-review flags. - Financial Statement Commentary Writer: data checks, variance workings, commentary and board questions. - Bank Loan and Investor Pack Builder: use of funds, DSCR, assumptions register and question rehearsal. Also in the pack: - A master README and an install guide for the three ways to use a skill: upload to Claude, copy into Claude Code, or paste into a chat. - A which-skill-when chart with combinations and a starter message for every skill. - An index of all 39 worked examples. - An upload-ready zip for each of the 13 skills, and the single business use licence. The saving: bought one by one at the Zeyto list prices on 9 November 2026, the 13 skills add up to US $687. Volume 2 is US $249. That is US $438 less, or 64% off. Prices can change; these figures are for the day this version was released. What it does not do: none of the skills logs in, posts, sends, files, signs or pays anything on your behalf. You review and send. None promises replies, sales, tender wins, approvals, ratings or views. The contract, HR, tender, finance and marketing skills are reading and drafting aids, not legal, tax or accounting advice: take the output to your lawyer or accountant. Platform limits and fees are always yours to paste or verify. Claude can make mistakes, so check output before you rely on it. Arabic text in the examples is drafted for illustration; have a native speaker read it before public use. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you can paste text. Single business use licence, no resale.
A 30-page guide and a 9-sheet scoring workbook for choosing between a mainland, free zone and offshore company. You weight 14 criteria, rule out options that cannot work, and compare written quotes on the same basis. No fee claims: the quote cells are yours to fill.
A Word decision guide of about 30 pages and an Excel scoring workbook for the first big choice a UAE founder makes: mainland, free zone or offshore. It does not tell you the answer. It gives you a method to reach your own answer and to defend it to your partners. What is inside - Guide: what each structure is, the 14 criteria that decide the choice, how to compare quotes on the same basis over three years, six worked scenarios, common myths, a 30-day plan, and an email to send to agents and authorities (Appendix A). - Workbook: Your Business, Scoring (your weights, knock-outs and scores for up to four options), Quotes (three-year written quotes, blank cells for you to fill), Authority Questions (20 questions to put in writing), Decision Record, Instructions and a Worked Example with invented numbers. Who it is for Founders, partners and advisers comparing structures; business owners moving from one structure to another; anyone who has three quotes that do not look comparable. What it is not It states no free zone fees, licence prices or timelines, because they change and we will not guess them. It does not register a company, speak to an authority or replace a lawyer, PRO or tax adviser. Rules on ownership, mainland access for free zone companies, visas, tax and banking change: confirm each one in writing. How we checked it We opened every workbook in desktop Excel on Windows, recalculated all formulas, and checked the worked examples against hand calculations. We measured Word page counts in desktop Word. We did not test Google Sheets, LibreOffice, Excel for Mac or Excel on the web.
A 36-month Excel forecast with revenue drivers, costs, loan, a profit and loss, cash flow and a balance sheet that balances, plus Base, Cautious and Strong scenarios. Filled with a worked example.
This is a 36-month financial model for a UAE business, built in Excel. You type your assumptions once on one sheet. The workbook builds the monthly forecast, a three-year profit and loss, a cash flow statement and a balance sheet that balances in every month, then tells you the number that matters most: the lowest your bank balance gets and when. What is inside: - Revenue drivers for up to 4 streams: units in month 1, monthly growth by year, price, yearly price rise, direct cost percentage, plus a 12-month seasonality index - People: up to 8 lines with headcount, monthly cost, start month, yearly pay rise and an on-cost percentage - Overheads, equipment and vehicles with depreciation, working capital (customer days, stock days, supplier days), a loan with an annuity schedule, equity, owner drawings - Three scenarios (Base, Cautious, Strong) with multipliers for volume, price, direct cost, overheads and payment days, and a side-by-side snapshot table - Annual statements, margins, current ratio, debt service cover, break-even month, lowest cash and funding gap - A Checks sheet with nine self-tests, and a Worked Example sheet with five experiments It ships filled with a fictional Dubai cleaning company so every sheet already shows numbers. Replace the yellow cells and the model is yours. The author recalculated all three scenarios and compared the results with an independent calculation: they agree to the fils. Who it is for: owners, founders, finance managers and accountants who need a forecast for a bank, an investor, a partner or an internal decision, and want to understand the cash, not only the profit. What it is not: it does not know UAE law, it does not file anything and it does not replace your accountant. Corporate tax, VAT, end-of-service, visa and free-zone costs are inputs you must confirm with your accountant, your PRO or the FTA. The tax values in the example are placeholders. VAT is not modelled. Tax is simplified (no loss carry-forward). A forecast is a set of assumptions, not a prediction, and banks and investors will test your assumptions. Time saved: building a three-statement model from a blank sheet usually takes days. With this workbook, a first usable draft takes an afternoon with your numbers to hand. The saving depends on how clean your numbers are. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
An 18-slide editable pitch deck with guidance in the notes, 64 investor questions with a rehearsal scorecard, a use-of-funds and dilution calculator, and a one-page summary worksheet. Built for UAE founders and owners.
Raising money, or asking a partner or lender for it, is mostly preparation. This pack gives you the four things most founders build too late: a deck that tells a clear story, answers to the hard questions, a use-of-funds table that adds up, and the facts an investor will ask you to prove. What is inside: - An editable PowerPoint deck of 18 slides (zipped): cover, problem, solution, why now, market, product, business model, traction, go to market, competition, team, financials, the ask and use of funds, milestones, risks, appendix and close. Each slide states the one sentence it must say, gives prompts, and holds guidance in the notes. Four slides carry ready-made tables. - An investor Q&A rehearsal workbook: 64 realistic questions in 8 areas with why they are asked and what a strong answer includes. You write your answers, score your confidence and see a scorecard that shows your weak areas. - A use-of-funds and dilution calculator: investor and founder share after the round, a what-if table of valuations, a use-of-funds table that must equal the raise, runway today and after the raise, and a test of whether the runway reaches each milestone. It ships with a fictional example. - A Word worksheet: 20 story questions, a table of numbers you must be able to prove, a one-page investor summary, a data room checklist and four follow-up email templates. Who it is for: founders, owners of growing companies and finance managers in the UAE preparing for investors, partners, family offices or lenders, and advisers who coach them. What it is not: it does not find investors or promise funding. It does not tell you what UAE investors require, because they differ. The dilution sheet is arithmetic: it ignores option pools, convertibles, liquidation preferences and tax, and valuation is a negotiation. Take advice from a lawyer and an accountant before you agree terms. The deck is plain by design and you should restyle it. Time saved: starting from a blank page a first deck and Q&A preparation usually take days. With the prompts, the numbers table and the question bank, a first complete draft is realistic in a day or two with your facts ready. The result depends on your facts, not the template. Requirements: Microsoft PowerPoint (or Google Slides or Keynote import), Excel 2016 or later or Google Sheets, and Word or Google Docs. Unzip the deck file first.
A workbook and Word pack to prepare a UAE bank loan application: 48-document checklist with expiry flags, repayment and flat-rate converter, DSCR with stress test, 12-month cash flow, ratios, plus the request letter and narrative templates.
Applying for a bank loan goes wrong in predictable ways: a missing or expired document, a cash flow that does not support the instalment, a flat rate mistaken for a cheap loan, and a letter that says nothing about how you will repay. This pack covers the preparation so you walk into the bank with the facts. What is inside: - A workbook with a 48-document checklist for UAE SME lending: company, owners, financials, business and facility documents, with status, owner, date ready, expiry date and a flag that turns red when a licence, Ejari, visa or Emirates ID is within 60 days of expiry - A loan calculator: monthly instalment, total interest, fees, a schedule up to 84 months, and a flat-rate converter that shows the true reducing-balance rate of a flat-rate offer - A DSCR calculator: cash available for debt service against existing and new instalments, a target check, the largest loan your cash supports at your target, and a stress test - A 12-month cash flow projection with the loan instalments built in, plus a ratio sheet a credit officer is likely to calculate - A Word pack: facility request letter, business overview, a cash-flow narrative template, 15 likely questions with what to prepare, and a meeting and follow-up routine The workbook ships with a fictional Dubai trading company so you can see every result before you type your own numbers. Who it is for: owners, finance managers and accountants of UAE small and medium businesses preparing a term loan, equipment finance or working capital request. What it is not: it does not apply to any named bank and makes no claim about any bank's rules, prices or approval. The 1.25 target, rates and fees in the example are placeholders. Your bank's written list overrides the checklist. It is not legal advice: take advice before you sign any guarantee or give security cheques. Time saved: collecting documents and building a repayment case usually takes several rounds with the bank. With the checklist and the DSCR and cash flow sheets ready, you can often cut a few of those rounds. The effect depends on the bank. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc, and Word or Google Docs.
A one-page Excel dashboard fed by 12 months of simple figures: sales, margins, receivable, stock and payable days, cash cover and break-even safety with targets, green/amber/red status and charts. Includes a worked example.
Many owners see profit on a monthly report and still run short of cash. A one-page dashboard puts the numbers that explain it side by side: margin, the three days measures (customers paying you, stock, you paying suppliers), the cash cycle and cash cover. This workbook builds that page from simple monthly figures. What is inside: - A Dashboard sheet with a month selector, 13 results (sales, growth, gross margin, operating margin, receivable days, stock days, payable days, cash conversion cycle, cash cover, margin of safety, sales per employee, cash, operating profit), previous month and change, your target and a green, amber or red status, year to date figures, and four charts - A Data sheet for 12 months: sales, direct costs, operating expenses, closing cash, receivables, stock, payables, orders, headcount and last year's sales - A Targets sheet where you set a target, direction and tolerance for each KPI, with notes on where to look first when a KPI is red - A KPI Calc sheet with the working, all formulas - A Worked Example: a fictional food distributor that is profitable every month but whose cash falls from AED 210,000 to AED 70,000, with five red KPIs that explain why Who it is for: owners, general managers and finance managers of UAE trading, distribution, service and manufacturing businesses who want one page for the monthly meeting. What it is not: it does not connect to your accounting software, so you type or paste monthly figures. It does not set your targets: the example targets are invented. The days measures are approximations from month-end balances. It shows what happened, not why, and it is not financial advice. Time saved: assembling a monthly KPI pack by hand often takes a few hours. Once the monthly figures are pasted in, this takes minutes. The saving depends on how quickly you can get the monthly figures. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (the charts are standard Excel charts), Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
Seven Excel pricing tools: cost-plus price list, markup versus margin, discount impact, bundle pricing, VAT-inclusive shelf price, marketplace channel price and a price test log. Filled with fictional examples.
Most small sellers set prices by copying a competitor or adding a percentage on cost, then wonder why the profit is thin. This workbook gives you the arithmetic for every common pricing decision in one place, with examples you can overwrite. What is inside: - Cost-Plus Price List: up to 20 items. Enter purchase or material cost, labour, freight, duty and packaging, an overhead uplift and a markup. It returns the price excluding and including 5% VAT, the profit per unit and the margin on the price, rounded to the step you choose - Target Margin: the price you need for a margin you want, and a table that converts markup to margin and back (a 60% markup is only a 37.5% margin) - Discount Impact: how many more units you must sell after a discount to earn the same gross profit (a 20% discount in the example needs about 111% more), and how much volume a price rise can lose before it hurts - Bundle Pricing: a bundle of up to 8 items with a discount, the bundle margin, the saving the customer sees and the deepest discount that keeps a margin floor - VAT and Shelf Price: a converter and a planner that rounds to a whole dirham, a half dirham or a price ending in 9, and shows the margin you really get - Channel Price: the price needed in your own shop, on a marketplace and in B2B after commission, payment fees, advertising, returns and delivery - Price Test Log: record each price change and see whether weekly gross profit went up Who it is for: owners, e-commerce and marketplace sellers, retailers, trading companies, freelancers and service firms in the UAE who set prices without a finance team. What it is not: it does not know your market, so a price with the right margin may still not sell. The commissions and fees in the example are placeholders: use each platform's current rate card. It does not give tax advice and does not model cash, stock or staff time. Time saved: re-working a price list, a discount or a marketplace price by hand is slow and easy to get wrong. With the sheets set up it takes minutes per decision. The real benefit is avoiding prices that lose money. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
An Excel workbook for firms that sell time: true cost per chargeable hour, a quote builder that shows profit before you send it, job tracking against quote, and client profitability. Includes a worked example.
Service firms often quote from a rough hourly rate, win the job, and only learn at the end that it lost money. This workbook shows you what an hour really costs, prices a quote from hours with the profit visible before you send it, and then tracks each job against its quote so the next quote is better. What is inside: - Rate Card: for up to 10 roles, annual cost per head and the share of time that is chargeable give the direct cost per chargeable hour. Overheads are spread over all chargeable hours to give the full cost per hour, a suggested rate for your target margin, and the margin at the rate you actually charge - Quote Builder: up to 12 lines of hours by role, other costs with markups, contingency, discount and VAT. It shows profit before and after overhead, the verdict against your target and floor margins, the lowest price to accept and the price for your target - Job Register: up to 40 jobs with quoted and budget figures, actual hours and costs pulled from the Timesheet and Job Costs by job number, hours used, margin on what you have invoiced, and flags for jobs at 90% of hours or over hours - Timesheet (200 rows), Job Costs (100 rows) and Client Profit - Portfolio lessons: how far completed jobs ran over their budget hours, so you can set contingency from evidence, and how much quoted work is not yet invoiced - A Worked Example: a fictional Dubai advisory firm with seven jobs Who it is for: owners and managers of consultancies, agencies, accounting and design firms, IT and engineering services and maintenance companies in the UAE who sell hours. What it is not: it does not track time by itself and treats everyone in a role as the same. Cost inputs must come from your payroll and accounts: the example numbers are invented. It does not invoice or keep accounts and is not tax or financial advice. VAT treatment depends on your service. Time saved: building a costing sheet and a job tracker from scratch takes days. With this workbook you can have the first quote costed within an hour of entering your payroll. The profit benefit depends on acting on what it shows. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
An Excel fixed asset register that calculates straight-line or reducing-balance depreciation for any year, handles disposals, builds the movement schedule by category and prepares balanced journal entries. Worked example included.
A spreadsheet list of assets is easy. A register that gives the right depreciation for any year, handles a disposal correctly and agrees to the ledger is what an auditor and an accountant want. This workbook does that without macros. What is inside: - A Register for up to 200 assets: asset ID, description, category, purchase date, cost, residual value, method (straight line or reducing balance), life, disposal date and proceeds. Blank life or rate falls back to the category default - Depreciation for any financial year you set, by whole months: full month in the month of purchase, none in the month of disposal. It also gives accumulated depreciation at the start and end of the year, net book value, the status of each asset and the gain or loss on disposal - A Schedule: the fixed asset movement note by category for cost, accumulated depreciation and net book value (opening, additions, disposals, closing) - Journal Entries: additions, depreciation (expense against accumulated depreciation) and disposals (bank, accumulated depreciation removed, gain or loss, cost removed), with a test that debits equal credits - Eleven checks, a Settings sheet for account codes and category defaults, and a Worked Example with 14 fictional assets, two disposals and both methods Who it is for: finance managers, accountants, bookkeepers and owners in the UAE who keep assets in a list and need depreciation that ties to the accounts and to the auditor's request. What it is not: it does not choose your policy. Lives, methods and residual values are your accounting policy, and accounting depreciation can differ from what is accepted for tax, so ask your accountant. It does not cover revaluation, impairment, components, assets under construction or leases. It does not post to any system: you post the journals. Time saved: rebuilding a depreciation schedule and the disposal entries by hand each year takes hours and often produces differences to the ledger. With the register maintained, the year-end schedule and journals take minutes. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
An Excel budget workbook for departments: 24-month budgets, actuals, a rolling 12-month forecast, variance flags with questions to answer, an approval tracker with an approval matrix and a cost-envelope check.
Budgets that are set once in January and ignored are not budgets. This workbook keeps departmental budgets alive: you enter actuals as each month closes, the forecast moves forward to always show the next 12 months, and the lines that need an explanation are flagged with the questions to ask. What is inside: - Setup: first month, last closed month, thresholds for commentary, a company cost envelope, up to 8 departments, up to 14 account lines and an approval matrix - Budget, Actuals and Reforecast sheets: 60 lines by 24 months each. The Reforecast lets you change a future month without touching the original budget, so you can always measure against the plan - Rolling 12M: the next 12 open months by line and by department. Close April and the window moves to start in May - Variance Commentary: year to date budget, actual and variance, remaining months, full-year outlook, the Explain flag and a prompt for the right questions (over budget: cause, one-off or repeating, recoverable? Under budget: timing or real saving?), plus space for commentary, action, owner and due date - Dept Summary: one row per department with status and a chart of year to date budget versus actual - Approvals: Draft, Submitted, Approved or Returned by department, the approver needed from the matrix, days to approve, headroom against the envelope and a test that says whether the budget can be locked - Nine checks and a Worked Example with a fictional group closed through March Who it is for: finance managers, FP&A staff, general managers and owners of UAE groups and mid-sized businesses with several departments or branches, and anyone who wants a budget process without buying software. What it is not: it budgets costs only, not revenue, headcount, capex or cash. It does not connect to accounting software, does not lock sheets and the approval matrix is an example. It is not financial advice. Time saved: collecting budgets by email and reconciling them each month usually takes days. With one workbook, one set of lines and automatic variance flags, the monthly review is a matter of entering actuals and reading the flags. The saving depends on how many departments take part. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
A weekly cash routine for UAE owners: 4-week look-ahead sheet, payment run planner that ranks bills by supplier priority, supplier priority matrix, 90-day cash rescue tracker, and a Word playbook with agenda, scripts and the day-by-day plan.
Most cash crises are visible weeks before they arrive, if someone is looking in the right place. This pack gives an owner and the person who pays the bills one routine: a 30-minute weekly cash meeting, a payment run that follows priorities rather than whoever phones loudest, and a 90-day plan for when the weeks ahead look tight. What is inside: - Weekly Cash Meeting sheet: four weeks of receipts and payments, closing cash, headroom above your buffer and a signal for each week (OK, BELOW BUFFER, OUT OF CASH), plus forecast accuracy against the bank, a customer chase list and a decision log - Payment Run Planner: enter your cash position and up to 60 open bills. It ranks them by supplier tier and due date, says PAY or DEFER within the cash you really have, names the action for each bill and warns you if the must-pay Tier 1 bills exceed your cash - Supplier Priority Matrix: score up to 30 payees from 1 to 5 on five weighted questions (supply risk, replaceability, legal duty, relationship, flexibility) and let the tier appear, with a usual tactic for each - 90-Day Cash Rescue tracker: up to 20 levers (collect faster, pay smarter, cut costs, sell stock, raise cash) with one-off and monthly amounts, start week and owner, a 13-week projection against your baseline, actual cash tracking, the lowest point and the number of weeks below your buffer - Word playbook: the 30-minute agenda, a minutes template, rules for the payment run, five supplier scripts, four customer scripts, a warning-signs checklist and the 90-day plan in three phases The workbook ships with a fictional Sharjah food importer, so you see how every sheet behaves before you enter your own numbers. Yellow cells are inputs, grey cells are formulas. Who it is for: owners and finance managers of UAE small and medium businesses who feel cash is always tighter than profit suggests and want a weekly habit instead of a monthly surprise. What it is not: it does not forecast your sales, move money or decide what you owe. Receipts and baseline numbers are your judgement: count only the receipts that are certain. Salaries, taxes and government payments have legal consequences when late, and cheques can too: take advice from your accountant or lawyer before deferring them, or issuing, postponing or stopping a cheque. It is a starting point your accountant should review, not financial or legal advice. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc, and Word or Google Docs.
Prepare for your external audit: a 75-item checklist of what auditors typically ask for, auditor request tracker, working paper index, nine tied-out schedules, lead schedule and a Word guide. A preparation aid, not an audit.
Most of the time an audit takes is not the auditing. It is finding documents, chasing suppliers for statements, explaining a bank reconciliation that does not agree and answering the same question three times. This pack puts those things in order before the auditor arrives, so the questions you get are about judgement, not about where the file is. It is a preparation pack. It is not an audit and gives no assurance. What is inside: - A readiness checklist of 75 things auditors typically ask for, in 13 areas (governance, cash, receivables and revenue, inventory, fixed assets, payables, payroll and end of service, VAT and tax, equity and related parties, borrowings and leases, financial statements, post year-end and going concern, systems), each with the reason it is asked, an owner, a due date and a status - A tracker for the auditor's own request (PBC) list: log each request, owner and due date, see days taken, days open and what is overdue - A working paper index with preparer and reviewer sign-off and an automatic Complete, Needs review or Not prepared status - Supporting schedules that you fill from your ledger: bank reconciliation summary, receivables and payables ageing with provision and statement agreement, fixed asset roll-forward with a depreciation reasonableness check, prepayments recomputed from dates, accruals compared with later payments, payroll register to ledger to WPS file, end-of-service provision roll-forward, and a quarterly VAT reconciliation - A lead schedule that ties each trial balance line to its schedule and marks it Agrees, Explained or DIFFERENCE, and a Checks sheet that separates hard stops from open work - A dashboard with a chart of readiness by area - A Word guide: a twelve-week timeline, a working paper cover block and tick-mark legend, how to run the request list, questions auditors commonly ask, frequent adjustments, meeting agendas and a letter-of-points response template The workbook ships with a fictional Dubai trading company so you can see every sheet working. Yellow cells are inputs, grey cells are formulas. Who it is for: owners, finance managers and accountants of UAE small and medium businesses that have an external audit, a lender review or an investor review coming, and want to hand over a tidy set of files. What it is not: it does not decide whether you need an audit or who may do it, it does not calculate end-of-service benefits or corporate tax, and tie-outs only prove that schedules add up to the trial balance, not that the numbers are right. Corporate tax appears only as a flagged placeholder to confirm with the FTA or your accountant. Your auditor's list overrides this one. A starting point your accountant should review. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc, and Word or Google Docs.
Eleven UAE finance tools in one download: business plan, pitch pack, loan pack, KPI dashboard, pricing, job costing, fixed assets, budgeting, cash discipline, audit-ready files and an Excel course. USD 349 instead of USD 475 separately.
Eleven finance tools for UAE owners and finance teams, in one download, for less than buying them one by one. What is inside (each is also sold separately): - Business plan workbook (USD 79) - Investor pitch pack (USD 39) - Bank loan application pack (USD 49) - KPI dashboard (USD 39) - Pricing and margin calculators (USD 25) - Quote and job costing (USD 49) - Fixed asset register (USD 39) - Departmental budgeting (USD 49) - Cash discipline pack (USD 29) - Audit-ready files pack (USD 39) - Excel mini-course (USD 39) Together these cover a year of owner finance: plan and budget, track KPIs and margins, run the weekly cash meeting, record fixed assets and depreciation, prepare for a lender, an investor or the auditor, and train your accountants. A start-here guide tells you which tool to open for your situation, gives a weekly, monthly, quarterly and yearly rhythm, and shows how the tools connect. The tools do not need each other: use one or all. The saving, plainly: bought separately the eleven products cost USD 475 (AED 1,719). The bundle is USD 349 (AED 1,300), which saves USD 126 (AED 419), about 27 percent. It is the same files with nothing removed, and the arithmetic is shown in contents-and-saving.csv. Honest break-even: the seven dearest tools together cost USD 343 separately, which is below the bundle price of USD 349. So any seven tools cost less than the bundle; the bundle only saves money if you want at least eight of the eleven, and with eight it depends which ones. If you need fewer, buy them separately. Who it is for: owners, finance managers and accountants of UAE small and medium businesses who want one consistent set of tools instead of building spreadsheets from scratch. What it is not: templates are a starting point your accountant should review, not legal, tax, accounting or audit advice. The tools do not file anything with the FTA or any authority and do not release payments. Corporate tax appears only as flagged placeholders to confirm with the FTA or your accountant. All examples are fictional. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (Google Sheets and LibreOffice work for most workbooks), Word or Google Docs, and PowerPoint, Keynote or Google Slides for the pitch deck.
Monthly payroll for up to 60 employees: net pay, overtime, unpaid leave, advances and loans, a salary register to sign, printable payslips and a bank upload layout you adapt to your bank's format. Every rate is a setting you confirm.
WPS Payroll Workbook is an Excel workbook for UAE employers who run payroll themselves or prepare it for the accountant and the bank. You enter each month's variable items (unpaid days, overtime hours, bonuses, deductions) and it works out net pay for every employee, a salary register for signatures, a payslip for anyone you choose, and a bank upload layout in the WPS style. What is inside: - Eight sheets: Instructions, Settings, Employees (up to 60), Payroll, Salary Register, Payslip, Bank File and Worked Example - Settings for the pay month, the days basis for the daily rate, the hours per day, the overtime base and three overtime multipliers. All of them are yours to set - A Check column on every payroll row: negative net pay, deductions above a level you choose, and missing bank details - A salary register ready to print, and a payslip you can print or save as a PDF for any employee - A bank file layout of employee lines (ID, routing code, account, pay dates, days, fixed and variable income) with a clear warning that it is illustrative - A second, filled workbook with a live walk through one fictional employee, and a four-record sample CSV of the layout Who it is for: owners, office managers and accountants at small and mid-size UAE companies who want payroll to be repeatable and checkable without buying payroll software. What it does not do: it does not connect to MOHRE, the Wage Protection System or any bank, and it does not submit or guarantee acceptance of any file. The bank upload sheet is NOT an official file: your bank or exchange house decides the exact columns, order, header and totals, so test with a small file first. The overtime multipliers, the 30-day basis and the leave pay base are settings you must confirm with MOHRE, your PRO or a lawyer; the workbook does not state them as law. It does not calculate gratuity (see the End-of-Service Final Settlement Workbook), social security for UAE and GCC nationals, or tax. Verified by recalculating the formulas with an independent spreadsheet engine and comparing results with a separate calculation. Not opened in Microsoft Excel itself, so open it once and check the dropdowns. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, or Google Sheets (check dropdowns and shading after upload).
Track annual, sick, unpaid and other leave and unauthorised absence for up to 50 staff. Working days are counted by formula, skipping your weekend and holiday list. See balances, a month calendar of who is off, and an absence-pattern score.
Employee Leave and Absence Tracker is an Excel workbook for small and mid-size UAE companies that still track leave on paper, in WhatsApp or in several sheets. You list your employees once, log each leave or absence, and the workbook counts the working days and shows every balance. What is inside: - Seven sheets: Instructions, Settings, Holidays, Balances (up to 50 employees), Leave Log (up to 500 entries), Month View and Worked Example - Working days counted with your weekend pattern (Saturday and Sunday, Friday and Saturday, or one day) and your own list of public holidays, so a holiday inside a leave period is not charged - Balance to date (pro rata of the year elapsed), balance at year end if everything booked is taken, carried-forward days and days paid out - Half days through a days override, and an overlap check that catches two entries for the same person on the same dates - Counts of sick, unpaid, other paid and absent days, and an absence-pattern score (spells x spells x days) as a prompt for a conversation, with a clear warning not to use it alone - A Month View calendar: a grid by employee and day with letters for each type of leave and a count of staff off each day - A filled example with six fictional employees for 2026, and a worked-example sheet that says where to look Who it is for: owners, HR officers and office managers who need to answer "how many days does she have left?" and "who is off next week?" in seconds. What it does not do: the holiday list is empty by design because dates are announced each year, so you type the official dates. Entitlements, accrual, carry-over, sick leave pay and the effect of unpaid leave are set by the law and your contract: the 30 days in the file is only an example value, and you replace it after checking MOHRE or a lawyer. It does not send reminders or approvals and does not connect to payroll; copy unpaid and absent days across yourself. For rotating shifts use the Attendance, Overtime and Shift Planner. Verified by recalculating the filled example with an independent engine and comparing balances with a separate calculation. Not opened in Microsoft Excel itself. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, or Google Sheets.
One register for every employee's residence visa, Emirates ID, passport, labour card, insurance and licences, with days left, a red-amber-yellow-green status, a one-page matrix and a dashboard of the next 15 expiries, so your PRO starts renewals in time.
Employee Visa and Document Expiry Tracker is an Excel workbook for UAE employers who keep staff documents in folders and WhatsApp chats and only discover an expiry when something is blocked. You enter each document once with its expiry date, and the workbook tells you what is overdue, what is due soon and what your PRO should start now. What is inside: - Seven sheets: Instructions, Settings, Employees (up to 80), Documents (up to 400), Employee Matrix, Dashboard and Worked Example - Nine document types to start (residence visa, Emirates ID, passport, work permit or labour card, medical insurance, health card, driving licence, professional licence or attestation, other), each with a renewal lead time you set - Days left, a colour status, a renewal-action column, an estimated cost column and a Check column for missing or impossible dates - An Employee Matrix: expiry dates by person and type on one page, colour coded, ready to print - A Dashboard: counts by status and by type, estimated renewal cost and the next 15 expiries - A filled example with eight fictional employees and a worked-example sheet Who it is for: owners, HR officers and PROs who manage 5 to 80 staff and want a Monday-morning view of what needs action. What it does not do: it only counts days from the dates you type. It does not look anything up, is not connected to MOHRE, immigration, a free zone or any insurer, and does not file renewals. The 30, 60 and 90 day warning levels and the lead times per document are your own reminders, not official deadlines. Renewal steps, timing, fines and what happens when a visa or permit ends differ by emirate and free zone: ask your PRO or the authority. The register holds passport and ID numbers, so keep the file on a protected drive. Verified by recalculating the filled example with an independent engine and comparing statuses and counts with a separate calculation. Not opened in Microsoft Excel itself. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, or Google Sheets.
A fair process guide plus 22 letters and forms for a UAE employer: notice to explain, meeting record, written warnings, probation and contract-end letters, exit checklist, service certificate and final settlement receipt. About 33 pages in four Word files.
Warning, Termination and Exit Letter Kit covers the difficult side of employment: conduct and performance cases, probation decisions, resignations, contract end and exit. It gives you a process to follow and the letters and forms that go with each step, so you act fairly and keep a record that holds up. The hiring side (onboarding) is covered by the separate Employee Onboarding Pack. What is inside (four Word files): - Fair Process Guide: ten steps from the first concern to the final settlement, signals to stop and take advice, what not to do, a timeline sheet and a case log - Disciplinary letters and forms (8): verbal warning record, notice to explain, meeting record, suspension pending investigation, first and final written warnings, no-further-action outcome, and a witness note for refusal to sign - Probation and contract-end letters (9): confirmation, extension, not confirmed, termination with notice, fixed-term end or non-renewal, acknowledging a resignation, agreed notice arrangement, unauthorised absence request to explain, and termination without notice (marked for use only on legal advice) - Exit documents (5): offboarding checklist, handover and property return form, exit interview, service certificate and final settlement statement with receipt - Every letter has a notes box for the employer: when to use it, what to check first and the common mistake Who it is for: owners, HR officers and managers at small and mid-size UAE companies who face a warning, a probation decision or a departure and do not have a lawyer on call. What it does not do: it does not say which conduct is a lawful ground for dismissal, how long notice must be, which deductions are allowed or when a termination without notice is lawful. Those depend on the law, your contract and whether you are on the mainland or in a free zone. The kit flags each point and tells you to take advice from a UAE employment lawyer, MOHRE or your PRO before you act. Letters are templates with highlighted placeholders and are not legal advice. No Arabic text is included. Requirements: Microsoft Word 2016 or later, or Google Docs. Page counts are estimated from word counts.
The full final settlement for a leaver, not just gratuity: end-of-service gratuity, unused leave, final-month salary, notice pay, additions and deductions, with a printable statement, a register for 60 leavers, flags and a second-method cross-check.
End-of-Service Final Settlement Workbook is an Excel workbook for UAE employers who need to work out and document everything owed when someone leaves. It is broader than the Zeyto End-of-Service Gratuity Calculator, which is a cheaper tool for the gratuity figure only. This workbook builds the whole statement for the employee to sign. What is inside: - Five sheets: Instructions, Settings, Register (up to 60 leavers), Statement and Worked Example - Gratuity with the published tiers (21 days of basic wage a year for the first five years, 30 days after, one-year minimum, part years in proportion, cap of two years of wage), computed from joining and leaving dates - Unused annual leave, salary for the final month, notice pay in lieu and notice recovery (each controlled by a setting you choose), additions, advances, loans and other deductions - A Settings sheet for the choices the law leaves open: the daily-rate method, the cap basis, the days basis and the notice rules, so you can match your accountant - 17 flag messages (for example under one year of service, notice shortfall, negative net) and a second-method gratuity cross-check so a wrong setting shows up - A gratuity override column for when a lawyer tells you a different amount applies - A one-page statement per leaver, with the working for each line, for the employee to sign - A filled example file with five fictional leavers and expected figures computed outside the workbook Who it is for: owners, HR officers and accountants who handle exits and want one consistent method and a record. What it does not do: it gives an estimate for planning and review, not a legal determination. The law does not define the daily rate: Zeyto's default is basic x 12 / 365 and you can change it. Whether the cap is measured on basic or total wage in your case, how unpaid leave counts toward service, how leave and notice pay are calculated for your contracts, which deductions are allowed and the payment deadline are points to confirm with your lawyer, accountant or MOHRE. Free zones can have their own schemes. It does not cover tax (none on salary in the UAE), social security for UAE and GCC nationals, insurance payouts or any claim the employee may bring. Verified by recalculating the five-leaver example with an independent engine and comparing results with a separate calculation. Not opened in Microsoft Excel itself. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, or Google Sheets.
Run hiring in Excel and Word: vacancies, up to 300 candidates by stage, weighted interview scores that rank people within each role, and a dashboard of the pipeline and sources. Includes an interview guide, reference check form and offer approval sheet.
Recruitment Tracker and Interview Scorecards is for UAE employers who hire from CVs in email and WhatsApp and decide on gut feel. The Excel tracker keeps every vacancy and candidate in one place with a stage, a next action and a due date. The Word documents give interviewers a structure so candidates are compared on the same criteria. What is inside: - Excel tracker with seven sheets: Instructions, Settings, Positions (up to 40 vacancies), Candidates (up to 300), Scorecards (up to 400), Dashboard and Worked Example - Six interview criteria with weights you can edit, scores from 1 to 5 per interviewer, a weighted score, the candidate average and a rank within each position - Candidate fields for source, location or visa status, expected salary, notice period, stage, offer details and next action with overdue highlighting - A dashboard with a pipeline matrix by position and stage, offer acceptance, time to hire, sources that produce hires and rejection reasons - Interview Guide and Scorecards (Word): principles, a question bank by criterion, questions to avoid, a scoring guide, a printable scorecard, a comparison sheet and an interview-day checklist - Reference Check and Offer Approval (Word): a reference form, an offer approval sheet, an offer conditions checklist and candidate message templates - A filled example file with fictional candidates Who it is for: owners and hiring managers at small and mid-size companies, and HR officers who run several vacancies at once. What it does not do: it does not post jobs, read CVs or contact candidates. Scores guide the conversation and a person makes the decision. Score only job-related criteria; the guide lists what not to ask. Anti-discrimination, data protection, offer terms, visa steps and notice periods depend on your situation: check with a lawyer or PRO. Candidate data is sensitive, so keep the file protected and delete data you no longer need. Verified by recalculating the filled example with an independent engine and comparing scores and ranks with a separate calculation. Not opened in Microsoft Excel or Word. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (or Google Sheets) and Microsoft Word 2016 or later (or Google Docs).
A full yearly review cycle for a small or mid-size UAE company: manager guide, goal sheet with quarterly check-ins, self-assessment, manager review form, rating guide with eight competencies, improvement plan, and a scoring workbook with calibration by manager.
Staff Performance Review Pack gives a company that has never run reviews, or runs them badly, a complete and fair cycle in seven documents. A manager can use it without training, an employee knows what to expect, and the owner can compare ratings across managers. What is inside: - Manager guide (Word): how to prepare, rate fairly, run the conversation, handle disagreement, and a yearly calendar - Goal-setting sheet and quarterly check-in: how to write a goal, a goal sheet, a development plan and a check-in form - Employee self-assessment form and manager review form, with the same competencies on both so the gap between self-rating and manager rating is visible - Rating guide and competency framework: what each rating means, eight competencies with behaviours at levels 1, 3 and 5, adapting to a role, and a calibration meeting agenda - Improvement plan and one-to-one log: a supportive plan with support and checkpoints, plus feedback conversation prep - Scoring workbook (Excel) for up to 60 people: goal and competency scores with weights you set, an overall score and rating, a flag when the self-rating differs from the manager, a rating distribution and a calibration table by manager. Plus a filled example with eight fictional employees Who it is for: owners and managers at companies of about 5 to 150 people who want consistent reviews without buying HR software. What it does not do: a rating is a basis for a conversation, not an automatic decision. Do not link pay, promotion or dismissal to a score without a human decision and, where it matters, legal advice. An improvement plan is supportive and is not a dismissal step; for a formal case use a process and take legal advice (see the Warning, Termination and Exit Letter Kit). The weights, rating bands and competencies are defaults you can change. No Arabic text is included. Review forms are personal data: restrict access. Verified by recalculating the example workbook with an independent engine and comparing scores, ratings and calibration with a separate calculation. Not opened in Excel or Word; page counts are estimated. Requirements: Microsoft Word 2016 or later and Microsoft Excel 2016 or later (or Google Docs and Sheets).
Plan a month of shifts for up to 40 staff, record clock times, absences and leave, and get hours, lateness, short hours and overtime split into normal-day, night and rest-day-or-holiday buckets. Overtime counts only when you approve it.
Staff Attendance, Overtime and Shift Planner is an Excel workbook for UAE employers with shifts, long days or overtime that nobody can fully explain at month end. You plan the roster, enter what actually happened, and the workbook works out every person's hours and overtime by day type, then gives you the month's totals for payroll. What is inside: - Nine sheets: Instructions, Settings, Shifts, Holidays, Employees, Roster, Timesheet (1,000 rows), Month Summary and Worked Example - Shift codes with start, end and unpaid break; shifts that cross midnight work, and an overnight shift is one row - A roster grid for up to 40 people and 31 days with codes for shifts, OFF, AL, SL, UL and PH; cover by shift for every day; red days where fewer people are on duty than you set; a flag when someone has fewer rest days than your minimum - A timesheet with the planned shift pulled from the roster, the day type (working day, rest day or public holiday), hours worked, normal hours, overtime, late minutes after your grace period, short hours and an error check on every row - Overtime split into the same three buckets as the WPS Payroll Workbook (normal day, night, rest day or holiday); only overtime marked as approved is counted for pay, and overtime awaiting approval is shown separately - A Ramadan switch for reduced daily hours, and an overtime cost estimate from the monthly pay and multipliers you set - A filled example for October 2026 with six fictional employees Who it is for: owners, supervisors and HR officers in operations, retail, hospitality, security, workshops and offices where hours matter. What it does not do: it is not a time clock and does not connect to a fingerprint, face or card device; you type or paste the clock times. Working hours, breaks, rest days, Ramadan hours, overtime rates, night hours and limits are set by law and your contract and differ by sector: every figure in the file (8 hours, 10 minutes grace, 1.25 and 1.5) is an example you replace after checking MOHRE, your PRO or a lawyer. Night hours are typed by you because the rule is yours to confirm. One calendar month per file. Verified by recalculating the filled example with an independent engine and comparing every Month Summary figure with a separate calculation. Not opened in Microsoft Excel itself. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, or Google Sheets.
See what each employee really costs per month beyond salary: allowances, gratuity accrual, insurance, tickets, visa and government fees, equipment and overheads. Then price a billable hour and test planned hires. Visa fees are a fill-in table.
Staff Costing Workbook is an Excel workbook for UAE owners who know the salary on the contract but not what the person costs. It adds the costs that sit around a salary, shows the true monthly and annual cost and the uplift over pay, and turns the result into a minimum hourly and day rate or a 12-month hiring cost. What is inside: - Seven sheets: Instructions, Assumptions, Visa and Fees, Employee Cost (30 people), Job Pricing (20 lines), Hiring Planner (10 hires) and a Worked Example - Per employee: gross pay, end-of-service gratuity accrual, health insurance, air tickets, visa and government fees, equipment, recruitment fee, overheads per head and other costs, giving true monthly cost, true annual cost and cost per available hour - A Visa and Fees fill-in table: rows for the usual permit, visa, medical, Emirates ID, PRO and renewal items, each with an amount you type and how often it recurs. One-off fees are spread over the months the person is expected to stay; recurring fees become a monthly equivalent - Job Pricing: cost per billable hour from your leave, holiday and billable-share assumptions, a minimum rate at your target margin, a day rate and a flag when your current rate is below cost or below target margin - Hiring Planner: recurring monthly cost, one-off costs in the start month and a 12-month cash grid for planned hires - A filled example with six fictional employees and a live one-employee worked example Who it is for: owners, finance managers and service businesses that charge by the hour or day and need to know a safe minimum rate. What it does not do: the blank file contains NO visa or government fee amounts. Fees depend on your emirate or free zone, the permit type and the date, and they change, so you fill the table from a written quote from your PRO. The example file uses round illustrative numbers that are not real fees. Gratuity uses the published tiers (21 and 30 days of basic wage) with the daily rate basic x 12 / 365, which the law does not define; it is an accrual that ignores the cap and the one-year minimum. Raises, bonuses, overtime, social security for UAE and GCC nationals and tax or VAT effects are not included. Leave days, billable share and margin are your own planning figures. Verified by recalculating the filled example with an independent engine and comparing Employee Cost, Job Pricing and Hiring Planner with a separate calculation. Not opened in Microsoft Excel itself. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, or Google Sheets.
We move your books from Emeron into Zeyto with the Zeyto Migration Tool: rehearsal, final run, a review of what could not post, and a reconciliation certificate for your accountant to sign. Other systems: masters and opening balances through the Import Center.
Outcomes - Option A, Emeron: masters and transaction history moved with the Migration Tool, through Zeyto's own posting engine so VAT, numbering, periods and permissions apply - Anything the tool could not post is placed in Settings, Migration Review with its reason, for your accountant to decide. Nothing is dropped or guessed - A reconciliation workbook whose first sheet is the Migration Certificate: moved trial balance equals zero, counts per document type, VAT, parties, banks and cheques, and a verdict - Option B, any other system: masters, open items and opening balances loaded through the Import Center, with a reconciliation against your trial balance, ageing and stock listing - The old data kept read-only in the Legacy Archive (Option A) What we do - Inspect the Emeron data and give you a list of data-quality problems with the fix we propose or the question your accountant must answer - Agree scope: date range and document types (Option A) or the lists and cut-over date (Option B) - Run a rehearsal that writes nothing, then a second timed rehearsal, then the final run - Run the tool a second time on the same data to prove it changes nothing - Support your accountant through Migration Review in up to 3 sessions of 90 minutes and produce the certificate What you provide - Option A: a copy of the Emeron database restored on a SQL Server we can reach. We agree at intake whether we work by remote session on your own server (preferred) or on a copy you send us - A running Zeyto server at a version the Migration Tool supports (the download page states it) with a licence, and a Zeyto user with the Migration review permission and create and submit rights - Option B: exports from your system, filled into our import templates, and a signed trial balance, ageing and stock valuation - An accountant who lists the VAT periods already filed and the years to close, decides each Migration Review item, confirms the balancing account (Opening Balance Suspense, 3900) and signs the certificate - A freeze on new entries in Emeron during the final run Timeline 15 working days from the day we have the form, the data and the Zeyto access: inspection and scope by day 3, rehearsals by day 8, review sessions by day 12, final run and certificate by day 15. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - Option A: up to 3 financial years and 100,000 documents, 2 rehearsals and 1 final run. Larger histories are quoted - Option B: up to 5,000 master records and 1,000 open bills and stock lines, 1 rehearsal and 1 final load - Up to 3 Migration Review sessions of 90 minutes - The Migration Tool reads Emeron only. Other systems are not replayed document by document Not included - Signing the certificate or any accounting judgement. Your accountant signs - Fixing errors in the old books. We list them; you decide - Amending VAT returns already filed, or tax advice. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - Training and configuration beyond migration (see the ERP Set-up and Staff Training package) - Zeyto licence fees, hardware, or on-site visits (quoted separately) Support after delivery - 14 days after the final run for questions about the migrated data and the Migration Review queue - Any copy of your data we received is used only for this job and deleted when the job closes - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Pre-release pilot: we install Zeyto Contracting on your server, set up your company, one live project with its BOQ and budget, users and site phones, train your team and support the pilot for 30 days. Not yet a generally released product.
Pre-release pilot. Zeyto Contracting is not yet a generally released product. Its Windows installers are an unsigned pre-release and Windows will show a warning when you run them. By buying you agree to pilot it on one project, expecting defects and gaps. Outcomes - Zeyto Contracting installed on your server with up to 2 client PCs, and a pilot licence key issued by our team (the pilot licence terms are agreed with you in writing before we start) - Your company set up: chart of accounts, categories, UAE VAT codes, up to 100 vendors and subcontractors, up to 10 desktop users and 5 phone users - One live project: work breakdown tree, BOQ loaded from Excel or CSV or pasted (up to 500 items), budget by cost nature on each item, tender version locked - The site phone web app opened on up to 5 phones for check-in, daily update and material request - One end-to-end walk-through: material request, RFQ, purchase order, inspected delivery, progress bill with retention and VAT - A pilot log of the defects and gaps we meet together, shared with our product team What we do - Hold a 90-minute discovery call on your project structure, cost natures, approval limits and how your sites work - Install, activate and configure; load the BOQ and budget; set 2 approval rules - Run the end-to-end flow on test data with your commercial team, then start your real project - Train in 3 sessions of 2 hours: office team, commercial and project managers, site staff - Run four weekly 45-minute check-ins during the 30 days of pilot support after go-live What you provide - A Windows PC or server with a reliable network, and permission to run an unsigned installer - Your BOQ, budget figures, vendor list and chart-of-accounts needs - One real project to pilot, and a project manager and a commercial lead who attend the sessions - Patience with a pre-release: you tell us what is wrong, and we log it Timeline 20 working days to go-live on your pilot project (week 1 discovery, install and company set-up; week 2 project, BOQ, budget, users and phones; week 3 training and dry run; week 4 go-live), then 30 days of pilot support. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One company, one pilot project, about 30 hours of specialist time - Counts as listed above. Remote only; on-site visits are quoted separately - Pre-release software: no service-level agreement. We aim to reply within 1 working day and fix or work around what we can, but a fix may need a new release - Not built today: live e-invoicing through an accredited provider, a bank-accepted WPS salary file, estimating and tender take-off, portals for clients and subcontractors, a hosted cloud service, a packaged Android app. Arabic wording is still under review Not included - Migration of your ledger or past projects from another system, which would be scoped separately - Custom development or integrations - A commercial licence. Zeyto Contracting has no public price list yet; buying this onboarding does not commit you to one - Hardware, network work, tax advice or accounting decisions Support after delivery - 30 days of pilot support after go-live: four weekly check-ins, plus email and WhatsApp - Defects found are logged and shared with the product team; we report back what was fixed - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
We design and write 3 custom Claude skills for tasks your team repeats, plus prompt workflows and a handbook, delivered as files you install or paste into Claude. Claude drafts and checks; your people review and publish.
Outcomes - 3 custom Claude skills, each a SKILL.md folder with instructions, a checklist and worked examples, in a zip - A paste-in version of each skill for any Claude chat that does not have Skills support - 3 prompt workflows: step-by-step sequences with what to give Claude and what a person must check - A handbook (Word) covering install steps, when to use each skill, when not to, and a review checklist - A test log: each skill tried on 3 sample inputs you supplied, with the results and the fixes made What we do - Hold a 45-minute kickoff call to choose the 3 tasks (for example quote replies, supplier email drafts, month-end checklist notes, job-card summaries) - Write each skill from scratch for your wording, rules and examples of good output - Test each on your samples, fix weak spots, and record the results - Make up to 2 rounds of changes, then hold a 30-minute handover call on installing and using the files What you provide - A Claude plan with Skills support, or any Claude chat to paste the instructions into. Claude is not included in the price - A list of candidate tasks and, for each, 3 real-style samples with personal and customer data removed - Examples of output you consider good, and rules the output must follow - A person who can judge quality and give feedback within 2 working days Timeline 10 working days from the day we have the form and your samples: kickoff on day 1 or 2, first versions by day 6, two review rounds by day 9, handover by day 10. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - 3 skills, 3 workflows, 2 rounds of changes, one kickoff call and one handover call - Skills work on text and files you give Claude. They are not connected to your Zeyto data or any other system - Each skill covers one type of task; more tasks mean a larger build, quoted after a consultation Not included - Software development, APIs or connectors, or any automation that posts, sends, pays or logs in by itself. A person reviews and sends everything - A guarantee that outputs are correct. Claude can be wrong; accounting, tax, legal and HR outputs must be checked by a qualified person - Claude or any other subscription, or general Claude training for your whole team - Prompts for use with models other than Claude Support after delivery - 30 days of email support on the skills we delivered: we adjust instructions that give poor results on inputs similar to your samples - Your samples are used only for this job - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
A 7-lesson mini-course for accountants and consultants: positioning, profile, content, engagement, hand-written outreach, calls and proposals, and a 30-day plan. Workbook, 42 quiz questions and a completion checklist. No results are promised.
LinkedIn for Accountants and Consultants is a mini-course for professionals in the UAE and GCC who sell their own services and want to be found, understood and trusted by the right clients. It has 7 lessons of about 1,400 to 2,200 words each. Everything is done by you, by hand: the course does not use or recommend automation tools, scraping or mass messaging. The lessons: - 1 Positioning: who you help, with what, and how to say it in one sentence, with a worksheet - 2 Your profile: headline, About section, experience, featured section, photo and banner, with before and after examples of made-up people - 3 Content: five post types, how to write them, a four-week editorial plan, and confidentiality and professional-duty cautions (never name or hint at clients without permission, never post client numbers) - 4 Engagement and relationships: comments that earn attention, replying, being found by the right people, with no claims about algorithms - 5 Outreach by hand: connection requests, first messages, follow-ups and referrals with many example messages; follow the platform's current terms and applicable UAE data-protection rules - 6 From conversation to call to proposal: a discovery call guide, follow-up emails and a simple proposal - 7 A weekly routine and a 30-day plan, with a tracker you keep by hand and a review method Each lesson has objectives, the idea in plain words, UAE and GCC professional context, worked examples with made-up people and firms (labelled), mistakes to avoid, three short exercises with answers, and key points. In the package: a course book PDF, each lesson as PDF and Markdown, a workbook (Word and PDF) with answer space and model answers, 7 quizzes with 6 questions each (42 questions) and an answer key with explanations, and a completion checklist. The checklist is a personal record. It is not a certificate or an exam. Who it is for: accountants, bookkeepers, finance managers and consultants who want to build a professional presence. What it is not: it promises no leads, calls, clients or followers, gives no tax, audit or legal advice, and states nothing about how LinkedIn ranks content or about its limits. Outcomes depend on your own work and market. Requirements: a LinkedIn profile (or the plan to create one), a PDF reader, and Word or a compatible editor for the workbook. Written November 2026
A 41-page guide for UAE garage and workshop teams on Zeyto Garage Pro: roles, daily routines, check-in to gate pass, day close, reports and a 30-day plan, with 13 printable forms and checklists in a Word file.
A practical operator's guide for the people who run a garage or workshop day to day on Zeyto Garage Pro. It is a 41-page PDF organised by role, by routine and by what to do when something goes wrong, with a companion Word file of 13 printable forms and checklists. What is inside: - The flow of one car on one page, from first call to gate pass. - Who does what: owner, service advisor, technician, parts person and cashier, with the screens each one uses and a day for each role. - Setting up the shop: company and TRN, rates, bays, technicians, catalogue, users and the rules to decide first. - The one-form check-in, then estimates, extra work and approval proof, with the approval rules and the proof options. - Job cards, the technician clock, holds, what each job state allows, advances and corrections. - Parts and stock, purchasing, supplier bills and returns, and the setting for selling more than the stock. - Billing and 5% VAT, payments, credit notes and the Correct this invoice flow. - Counter day close with cash over and short, receivables, hand-over and the gate pass. - Reports and controls, users and permissions, backups and data safety. - Daily opening and closing checklists, a weekly owner review and a month-end checklist. - Fifteen common mistakes with fixes, and a first 30 days plan. - 23 worked examples with example figures (all arithmetic checked) and 27 short exercises with answers at the end of the chapters. The Word file garage-forms-and-checklists.docx has 13 forms you can print or edit: paper check-in sheet, approval record, hold log, parts slip, counter day close sheet, credit note request, hand-over checklist, daily opening and closing lists, weekly owner review, month-end checklist, user access review, backup log and a 30-day tracker. Who it is for: owners, managers, advisors, foremen, technicians, parts staff and cashiers of UAE garages and workshops that use, or are about to use, Zeyto Garage Pro. What it is not: it is not a software manual for every screen (the free Zeyto Academy garage lessons cover screens in more detail), not a car repair course, and not tax, legal or accounting advice. UAE VAT is mentioned only as 5% and the basic deadlines; for your own position check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. E-invoicing is mentioned only as being on the Ministry of Finance roadmap. Companies and figures in the examples are fictional. No results are promised, and where a screen can differ by version the guide says to check the screen in your version. It does not state Zeyto Garage prices: see the Zeyto website for current prices. Requirements: a PDF reader and a program that opens Word files (.docx). Zeyto Garage Pro is needed to follow the screens, but the routines and checklists work on paper too. Written November 2026
A 45-page playbook and editable Word templates that turn social media into a weekly routine for UAE small businesses: decisions, a week-by-week 90-day plan, hooks, WhatsApp reply scripts and hand-kept counting. No results are promised.
The Social Media Machine is a playbook for small business owners in the UAE who run their own social media and want a repeatable weekly routine instead of posting when they feel like it. It is a 45-page PDF plus an editable Word file of worksheets and templates. Everything is done by you, by hand, and the guide does not assume any particular channel. What is inside the PDF: - Phase 0 (week 0): choose one goal, one customer, one offer, three content pillars and two channels with a channel-choice worksheet, and fill in a brand voice sheet - The weekly rhythm (plan, batch, publish, engage, review) with time budgets for a 3, 5 and 8 hour a week owner - A 90-day plan in three 30-day phases (foundation, consistency, conversion), week by week with specific tasks and a ready-to-fill 90-day grid - Hook frames and five caption structures, with worked examples for made-up UAE businesses (a bakery, a car workshop, an accountant, a boutique, a cleaning company, a property broker) - 40 content ideas across educate, prove, sell and connect - Phone filming and photo basics - Arabic and English posting decisions, with a method to find out what your own customers use - UAE specifics: weekly rhythm, seasonal moments (Ramadan, Eid, National Day, summer, Dubai Shopping Festival) with a reminder that dates change and must be checked on the official calendar - WhatsApp as the conversion channel for many UAE businesses, with a reply script library - Community management, comments and handling complaints - Measuring by hand: what to count weekly, a monthly review sheet, no benchmark numbers - Repurposing, a 30-day recovery plan for when you stop, and common mistakes The Word file contains the Phase 0 worksheets, idea bank, reply script cards, weekly plan, post brief, caption bank, enquiry log, monthly review sheet and the 90-day grid. Who it is for: owners and managers of small UAE businesses with about 3 to 8 hours a week for social media. What it is not: it does not promise followers, reach, enquiries or sales, and makes no claims about how any platform ranks posts. It is not a tool, scheduler or automation. It does not cover paid advertising setup. Rules on paid promotion, influencer or advertiser permits and licensing change in the UAE and must be checked with the relevant authority. All business names and figures in the examples are made up. Requirements: a PDF reader, Microsoft Word or a compatible editor for the templates, and a phone for photos and clips. Written November 2026
Track unpaid sales invoices in Excel: ageing buckets, chase stages, next action dates, a chase log and reminder wording, so you know who to call today. Includes a sample CSV.
Late payment is a process problem more often than a refusal. This workbook keeps a list of unpaid and part-paid invoices, works out the due date and days overdue from the as-at date, puts each invoice in an ageing bucket, tells you the chase stage and the next action date, and summarises the position by bucket and by customer, including credit limits. What is inside: - A Setup sheet for the as-at date, bucket limits and chase stage days - An Invoices register of 500 rows with status options: Disputed, Promised, On hold, Written off - An Ageing Summary by bucket and by customer, with an over-limit flag - A Chase Log of 300 entries for calls, promises and next steps - A Chase Scripts sheet with starting wording for four stages, from a friendly reminder to escalation - A Worked Example with ten fictional invoices - invoices-sample.csv, the same ten invoices as a CSV, to show the layout - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: service firms, contractors, wholesalers and any business that sells on credit and chases invoices by phone, email or WhatsApp. What it is not: it does not send reminders, and it does not connect to accounting software. Export your open receivables and paste the columns in. The chase wording is a starting point, not legal advice: take advice from a lawyer before sending any letter that threatens legal action. Enter amounts including VAT because that is what the customer owes. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
Tax invoice, simplified tax invoice and tax credit note layouts in Excel that calculate their own VAT and check the required details, plus a Word guide with fill-in templates. Layouts and checks only: it does not make you e-invoicing ready.
A set of invoice layouts for VAT-registered businesses that want to produce clean, complete invoices without buying software. The Excel workbook holds three layouts that calculate line totals, VAT and the invoice total: a tax invoice, a simplified tax invoice and a tax credit note. Each layout checks that the details a tax invoice should carry are filled in, and warns when the invoice date is more than 14 days after the date of supply. A checklist sheet lists what the FTA expects on an invoice. A Word guide gives the same layouts as fill-in templates for people who prefer documents. What is inside: - Business Details sheet: type your name, address and TRN once - Tax Invoice, Simplified Invoice and Tax Credit Note sheets with automatic VAT per line, tax codes for standard, zero rated and exempt lines, and a completeness check - A Mandatory Fields Checklist sheet - A Worked Example with a fictional invoice - A Word guide with a checklist and fill-in templates A to C - Print setup for A4 Who it is for: small VAT-registered businesses, freelancers and consultants who invoice from a spreadsheet or a Word file. What it is not: it is a layout and calculation tool. It does not file anything, does not send anything to the FTA and does not make you e-invoicing ready. E-invoicing in the UAE is on the roadmap through accredited service providers, with dates that depend on your turnover: watch the Ministry of Finance announcements. The rules on simplified tax invoices changed with Cabinet Decision No. 100 of 2025, so check eligibility with the FTA before you use that layout. VAT is rounded per line, which can differ by a few fils from systems that round on the total. Which supplies are zero rated or exempt is for you and your accountant. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. Requirements: Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc for the workbook; Word 2016 or later, Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer for the guide.
A weekly cash forecast for 13 weeks in Excel: enter cash in and out, see the closing balance, get a flag for any week below your buffer, and compare forecast with actual cash as the weeks pass.
Profit does not pay salaries and rent: cash does. This workbook gives you a rolling 13-week view of the cash you expect to collect and pay, so you can see a shortfall weeks before it arrives. You enter expected cash in and cash out by week. The workbook calculates the opening and closing balance for each week, compares it with the minimum buffer you choose, flags any week that falls short and draws a chart. A row for actual closing cash lets you compare forecast with reality and learn where your estimates are weak. What is inside: - A Forecast sheet with cash-in rows (collections, cash sales, deposits, loans and capital, other) and cash-out rows (suppliers, salaries, rent, utilities, VAT payment, loan repayments, insurance and licences, marketing, owner drawings, other) - A minimum cash buffer setting and a summary: lowest closing cash, the week it happens, first week below the buffer, and closing cash at week 13 - A chart of closing cash against the buffer - An Assumptions Log sheet to write down how each figure was estimated - A Worked Example in which cash goes below the buffer in week 12 and is overdrawn in week 13 - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: owner-managed businesses, contractors, shops and service firms that want a simple weekly cash view without accounting software. What it is not: it is a cash forecast, not a profit forecast, and it does not connect to your bank. Use payment dates, not invoice dates, and enter VAT and tax in the week you expect to pay. It cannot make your estimates accurate: be honest about how fast customers really pay. Check with your accountant for tax payment timing. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
Plan a year by month in Excel, type in what actually happened, and see the variance by line for the month and the year to date, with favourable and adverse flags and a chart.
A simple monthly review tool for owner-managed businesses. You set up your own income and cost lines, enter a budget for each of 12 months, then enter actual figures as each month closes. The workbook shows the variance for each line for the month and for the year to date, as an amount and as a percentage, marks it favourable or adverse and flags lines that need a look. A chart compares budget and actual. What is inside: - A Setup sheet for the business name, year label, first month and two review thresholds (percentage and AED) - A Budget sheet with income, cost of sales and operating expense lines (including depreciation and loan interest), some of which you can rename - An Actual sheet that copies your line names - A Variance sheet for the month and year to date, with gross profit and net profit before tax - A chart of budget against actual - A Worked Example with fictional figures - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: owners and managers who want to review the numbers once a month and see where they are off plan, without a full accounting package. What it is not: it does not connect to accounting software and it does not calculate corporate tax. Ask your accountant how to treat tax in your review. Variance is actual less budget: for cost lines, a positive variance means you spent more than planned, and the workbook labels it adverse. Match your category names to your chart of accounts so figures are easy to copy from your reports. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
An Excel estimator for UAE private-sector end-of-service gratuity, for one employee or a whole team, with two daily-rate methods side by side. An estimate for planning and accruals, not a final settlement.
This workbook estimates the end-of-service gratuity for employees under the UAE private-sector rules: at least one year of service, 21 days of basic wage for each of the first five years, 30 days for each year after that, part years in proportion, and a cap of two years' wage. The tiers follow Federal Decree-Law 33 of 2021, Article 51, as published on the UAE government portal. The law does not define the daily rate. The workbook shows two methods side by side so you can see the difference: basic x 12 / 365, which is the method Zeyto's own gratuity calculator uses (with a cap of 24 x basic), and basic / 30, which many online calculators use. Choose one with your accountant and apply it consistently. What is inside: - A Calculator sheet for one employee: dates, basic wage, method and the amount with the working shown - A Staff Register for a team, with the liability per person and in total - A Worked Example with five fictional employees, including one under a year and one that reaches the cap - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: owners, HR and accountants who need a quick estimate, or a figure to accrue in the books. What it is not: it is an estimate, not a final settlement. It does not include notice pay, unused leave, final salary, allowances or any contractual benefit beyond the standard gratuity. Open points to confirm with your accountant: whether the cap is measured on basic or total wage in your case, how unpaid leave counts, and whether your free zone has its own scheme. Check with your accountant or the relevant authority for your case. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
A checklist of 46 tasks in 10 sections for closing the books each month, with owner, target day, status, evidence and control totals, in Excel, plus a printable Word and PDF version.
A month-end close goes wrong when a step is forgotten. This pack gives you a practical checklist you can reuse every month. Each of the 46 tasks has an owner, a target working day, a status and a place for evidence. A progress sheet shows how far you are, and a sign-off sheet holds control totals that compare each sub-ledger with the general ledger before the owner signs. What is inside: - Excel workbook with a Checklist sheet of 46 tasks in 10 sections: before you start, sales and receivables, purchases and payables, bank and cash, payroll, inventory, fixed assets, VAT, journals and balances, and review and report - A Progress sheet by section - A Sign-off sheet with control totals and signatures - A Worked Example with 20 of 45 applicable tasks done (44%) - A landscape Word version and a 5-page PDF of the same checklist to print and tick by hand - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: bookkeepers, accountants and owners of small businesses that close monthly and want a consistent routine. What it is not: the list is generic and does not replace accounting knowledge. Add or reword tasks for your business. Target days assume a Monday to Friday week. If you are unsure about a task, ask your accountant. Where the month ends a VAT return period, check the due date in EmaraTax. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc for the workbook; Word or a PDF reader for the printable versions.
Two planning tools in one Excel workbook: total your start-up costs and funding, and work out how many sales a month you need to break even, with a price what-if table and chart.
Before you open, you need to know how much money you need and how much you must sell each month to stay afloat. This workbook answers both. The Startup Costs sheet lists one-off costs by category, adds a contingency percentage and working capital for the months before you reach break-even, compares the total with your funding sources and estimates the monthly repayment on any loan. The Break-even sheet takes your price, variable cost per unit and monthly fixed costs and shows the break-even units and sales, the volume needed for a profit target, the margin of safety, a payback period and a table that shows what a 5% or 10% price change does. A chart shows sales against total costs. What is inside: - Startup Costs sheet with 19 cost lines, working capital, funding and loan repayment - Break-even sheet with a price what-if table and chart - A Worked Example for a fictional neighbourhood cafe - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: people planning a new business or a new branch, and owners who want to test a price change. What it is not: the numbers are yours. The workbook does not know UAE licence, visa or free-zone fees, so get current quotes from the authority or an adviser. Break-even uses one price and one variable cost per unit: use averages if you sell several products. Enter prices and costs excluding VAT. The loan repayment is an equal-instalment estimate; your bank's schedule is the real figure. This is a planning aid, not financial advice. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
Turn your service, product or consultation into a complete Zeyto marketplace listing that fits the field limits, with exact character counts, a packages plan, an honesty checklist and a fixer for review feedback.
Marketplace Listing Writer is a Claude skill for people who sell on the Zeyto marketplace. You describe what you offer, and Claude asks the intake questions, chooses the listing kind and category with clear rules, and writes every field: three title options, summary, description, packages plan, delivery note, FAQ and tags. It writes to the real form limits: titles of 4 to 120 characters, summaries of 10 to 280, descriptions up to 4,000, delivery notes up to 2,000, up to 6 tags of 24 characters each, one price in AED and one unit per listing, and delivery days from 0 to 365. Claude counts every field, reports the counts, and rewrites anything that is over. In a chat that can run code, it checks counts with a script. What is inside: - The four listing kinds (service, digital product, consultation, free offer) with rules for choosing, and the 13 categories with a quick map - A packages guide: because a listing has one price, it shows when to split Basic, Standard and Premium into separate listings and when to keep one - A pre-publish honesty checklist: no fake reviews, counts or guarantees, no claims you cannot prove, prices in AED, what the buyer must provide, timelines - A review rejection fixer for rewriting after feedback, with before and after counts - Three worked examples with exact character counts: a spreadsheet template, VAT return preparation (hedged properly), and a one-hour consultation What it does not do: it does not publish, edit or contact the marketplace. You paste the text into your seller dashboard. It does not promise approval, sales or ranking, and it does not quote fees; read the seller terms for fees, payouts and refunds. It gives no tax or legal advice, and listings on regulated topics are written as guidance with clear exclusions. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md. No tools or connectors are needed.
150 original, copy-and-fill prompts in 15 categories for everyday accounting and finance work, with what to check in each answer. Includes privacy and accuracy chapters, PDF, plain text and CSV.
A library of 150 original prompts that you copy into an AI chat assistant to help with everyday accounting and finance work, written for people who must check the result before it is used. What is inside: - 150 numbered prompts in 15 categories, 10 in each: bookkeeping and coding, month-end and reconciliations, accruals and journals, receivables, payables, VAT workings and queries, management reports, budgeting and forecasting, cash flow, spreadsheets and formulas, policies and procedures, client and supplier emails, audit preparation and controls, hiring and training finance staff, and data cleaning. - For every prompt: a title, when to use it, the prompt in a block with [PLACEHOLDERS] to fill in, what to check in the answer, and a caution where it matters. - A chapter on how to use a prompt well (role, context, task, format and checks), with a weak and a strong example. - A privacy chapter: what never to paste, how to replace real details with placeholders, and questions to ask before you use a tool. - An accuracy chapter: a checking routine for numbers, facts and rules, and what to do with UAE VAT questions. - A chapter on building your own prompt, with a template, a worked example and a checklist. - An index of all 150 prompts. - Three formats: a 79-page PDF, a plain text .md copy that is easy to copy from, and a CSV of all 150 prompts (number, category, title, when_to_use, prompt, check, caution). Who it is for: bookkeepers, accountants, finance managers, credit controllers, owners who do their own books, and students. What it is not: tax, legal or accounting advice, or an AI product or plugin. The prompts are written to be checked and promise no particular output; AI answers can be wrong, so you must verify every number and every legal claim. The VAT prompts only help you prepare questions and point to official sources such as the FTA, EmaraTax and u.ae. For your case, check with your accountant or the FTA. Never paste real client data, bank details or tax registration numbers unless your policy allows it. Requirements: a PDF reader, a text editor or spreadsheet program for the other files, and access to any general AI chat assistant. Written November 2026.
A 46-page close playbook for UAE SMEs: calendar, RACI, procedures per area, a full worked example, 20 common errors, a six-month plan, six editable templates and a Zeyto appendix.
The Month-End Close Playbook for SMEs is a 46-page PDF that shows a small or medium UAE business how to close its books each month: what to do, in what order, who does it, what evidence to keep and who signs. It comes with an editable Word file of six templates. What is inside - A definition of what "closed" means, and a close calendar from two working days before month end to ten working days after, with a RACI table of who does what. - Step-by-step procedures, with evidence and sign-off, for sales and receivables cut-off, purchases and payables cut-off, bank reconciliation, cash and petty cash, stock count and valuation, accruals and prepayments, fixed assets and depreciation, payroll and the gratuity accrual, VAT reconciliation, foreign currency and journal controls. - Trial balance review, analytical review with worked commentary, the management pack, sign-off and lock, and a lessons log. - A table of the 20 most common close errors, and a six-month plan to shorten your close. No benchmarks are quoted; you compare against your own history. - A complete worked close for a made-up company (Sandstone Trading LLC, October 2026). Every figure is example data and every total was checked by calculation. - Six templates, printed in the PDF and editable in the Word file: close checklist, bank reconciliation sheet, accrual schedule, prepayment schedule, variance commentary sheet and close sign-off page. - An appendix, "Doing the close in Zeyto", that maps each step to the screens in Zeyto. The rest of the playbook works with any accounting software. Who it is for Owners, bookkeepers and finance managers of small and medium UAE businesses who keep their own books or supervise someone who does. You should know what a debit and a credit are. What it is NOT It is not a tax filing guide, an audit manual or a replacement for your accountant, and it does not give legal, tax or accounting advice for your company. Where UAE VAT, gratuity or penalty rules matter, it states only the points that are well established and tells you to check your own case with your accountant or the FTA. The gratuity daily rate is shown as a policy choice to agree with your accountant, because the law does not define it. E-invoicing is described as being on the published roadmap and timetable, not as something you can assume is ready. The examples are not results you should expect. Requirements - A PDF reader, and Microsoft Word or a compatible editor for the templates. - Your own accounting records. Zeyto is not required. Version 1.0. Written November 2026. Single business use.
A guided interview that produces a Voice Guide for your business, tested on your own sentences, plus a 100-word short version. Paste it into any chat so every draft sounds like you.
Brand Voice Builder is a Claude skill that interviews you in short rounds and turns your answers into a Voice Guide. The guide uses a fixed set of headings so you can paste it at the start of any chat and get consistent writing, whether that is a caption, a proposal, an email or a LinkedIn post. The interview rounds: - Business basics - Audience - Three pieces of writing you admire and three you dislike, pasted by you - Tone dials, rated 1 to 5 with a reason: formal-casual, serious-playful, plain-technical, reserved-bold - Words you use and words you avoid - A sample rewrite test on two of your own plain sentences, with room to accept or correct The Voice Guide it produces has these headings, in this order: Voice in one line; Audience; Tone dials; Do; Do not; Words we use; Words we avoid; Sentence habits (length, openings, punctuation, emoji policy, English and Arabic mixing); Sample paragraph. The skill also gives a 100-word short version for small prompts, notes on how to maintain the guide, and how to hand it to other skills or chats. Who it is for: small business owners, freelancers, agencies and teams in the UAE who write in English, Arabic or both and are tired of generic copy. What it does NOT do: it does not analyse customer data, copy anyone's writing or imitate a named real person, check claims or trademarks, or publish anything. A voice guide improves consistency, not sales, and it promises no results. Arabic content is flagged for a native speaker check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md. No tools needed. About 15 minutes for the interview.
Word templates for pricing and winning work: a simple quotation, a detailed quotation with scope and payment schedule, a 10-section proposal, and a filled-in example with the arithmetic shown.
Clear quotations get approved faster and cause fewer arguments later. This set gives you the right document for each situation. What is inside: - Quotation (simple): from and to details, an items table with quantity, unit price, VAT and amount, a totals box, short terms and an acceptance block - Quotation (detailed): summary of the request, scope of work, what is not included, pricing, assumptions, timeline, payment schedule, numbered terms and acceptance - Proposal template: executive summary, understanding of needs, proposed solution, approach and timeline, team, investment, assumptions, next steps, terms and acceptance, with a hint under each heading - Worked example: a completed quotation for a fictional business, with the arithmetic checked and shown - All documents are A4 with real styles, a header and footer with page numbers, and yellow-highlighted fields - README Who it is for: freelancers, agencies, contractors and small service firms that quote jobs and send proposals. What it is not: the Word files do not add up the figures: you calculate them, or use the Tax Invoice Pack workbook and copy the numbers across. A quotation is an offer, not a tax invoice. When you invoice, issue a tax invoice with the details the Federal Tax Authority requires, and check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. The terms are starting points. Have a lawyer review wording that creates obligations, such as cancellation, ownership and governing law. Requirements: Microsoft Word 2016 or later, Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer.
We adapt the 90-day content system Zeyto wrote for itself to your business: brand voice, channel kits, a 90-day calendar with the first 30 days fully written, 10 video scripts and tracked links. You film and post; we never run your accounts.
Outcomes - A brand voice sheet: who you talk to, tone, words to use and avoid, 5 content pillars - Channel set-up kits for up to 3 channels (for example Instagram, TikTok, LinkedIn): bio text, link-in-bio, cadence, profile checklist including two-factor sign-in - A 90-day calendar built on the same weekly structure as Zeyto's own plan: one series per weekday, with the first 30 days fully written (hook, caption, on-screen text, shot list, call to action, posting time) - Days 31 to 90 as themed outlines with hook options, ready to write when you are - Spoken scripts and beat sheets for your first 10 hero videos - A sheet of tracked (UTM) links and a posting routine: weekly filming session and a 20-minute daily reply habit What we do - Hold a 45-minute kickoff call on your offer, audience and the content you can realistically film - Write the documents above, in the calendar as an Excel/CSV file plus a readable document - Send a first draft by working day 5; make one round of changes per document - Hold a 30-minute handover call that shows how to schedule posts in each channel's own scheduler What you provide - Your business details, offers, audience, and 5 to 10 photos or examples of your work - Social accounts you have created yourself. We never ask for passwords and never log in - A person who can film on a phone once a week - Written feedback within 2 working days of each draft Timeline 10 working days from the day we have the form and your examples: kickoff on day 1 or 2, first draft by day 5, changes by day 8, handover call by day 10. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - Up to 3 channels, one brand, one language (English; Arabic only if agreed in writing at intake) - 30 days fully written; 60 days as outlines - 10 video scripts, one round of changes per document, one kickoff call and one handover call - The structure comes from Zeyto's own 90-day plan, prepared in November 2026. We make no claim about the reach it will produce for you Not included - Posting, scheduling or managing your accounts, and replying to comments - Filming, editing, photography, graphic design or logo design - Paid advertising, influencer outreach, or any guarantee of followers, leads or sales - Claims about prices, results or regulated products. You approve every claim before you post it Support after delivery - 14 days of email support on how to use the files, answered within 1 working day - A short fix if a date or link in the calendar is wrong - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
We set up how your Zeyto documents look and print: company identity, look and paper for up to 4 document types, printer defaults, and a month-end report pack list with the right filters. Two rounds of changes included.
Outcomes - Up to 4 document types (for example tax invoice, quotation, delivery note, receipt voucher) printing the way you want, in English and, where Zeyto offers it, the Arabic mirror - Company identity set: legal name, TRN, address, bank line, logo, header and footer images, stationery mode - Paper chosen per document: A4, A5, or receipt roll (80 mm or 58 mm) where Zeyto has that layout - Up to 2 printers connected and tested with a test page - A report pack sheet: up to 10 standard reports, who runs each and when, with the filters to use What we do - Review your logo, wording and an example of your current invoice - Configure the Company Profile identity cards, print format look and paper size - Set discount printing and long-description printing as you choose - Where your licence includes the Document Designer, adjust up to 4 templates and set them as defaults - Connect and test up to 2 printers (receipt, label or A4) in Settings, Printers - Show you how to save a PDF, share by WhatsApp or email, and export a report; write the report pack sheet What you provide - A running Zeyto install and a screen-share session (about 90 minutes in one sitting) - Your logo as a high-resolution PNG or SVG, header and footer images if you use a letterhead - Legal name, TRN, address, bank details exactly as they should print - Any Arabic wording you want printed, supplied by you. We do not translate - The printer models and access to the PC they are attached to Timeline 5 working days from the day we have the form, your logo and your Zeyto access. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - Up to 4 document types, 2 printers and 2 rounds of changes - Custom template layouts need a Zeyto licence that includes the Document Designer (see zeyto.app/pricing). Without it we use the built-in looks, company identity, paper and printer settings only - POS thermal receipts keep their single built-in layout Not included - Designing a logo or brand identity - Translating text into Arabic - Buying or repairing printers, or fixing network and driver problems outside the session - Label and barcode design (ask in the consultation if you need it) - New report types or code changes. We configure what Zeyto already offers Support after delivery - 14 days of email support on the formats we set up, answered within 1 working day - If a Zeyto update changes a layout we set up, we put it right within those 14 days - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Write a clear job post, turn the must-haves into a weighted scorecard, screen pasted CVs with evidence quotes, and prepare interviews and a decision summary. Built-in fairness rules and a bias-check pass. A person decides.
Job Post and CV Screener is a Claude skill for small employers who hire without an HR team. It helps you write a job post, build a scorecard from your must-haves, compare pasted CVs against it, and prepare the interview, reference and decision steps. What is inside: - A job post structure: role summary, responsibilities, must-have versus nice-to-have, salary and benefits placeholders, how to apply - A scorecard builder: criteria from your must-haves, 1 to 5 anchors written as observable evidence, weights that add up to 100, and scoring arithmetic shown every time - A CV screening method with evidence quotes, "cannot tell" as a valid answer, an evidence coverage rule, and suggested labels that are never rejections - An interview question bank (behavioural, technical-practical, work-sample task) and reference-check prompts - A bias-check pass before any final shortlist, and a decision summary for the person who decides - A fairness reference with phrases to avoid in job posts and how to redirect a request that touches personal circumstances Fairness and privacy are built in. The skill does not use or infer age, gender, nationality, religion, marital status, health, family plans, photo or appearance. It ignores them when scoring, warns you if you ask, and offers a job-related question instead. It reminds you to share only what you need, not to paste ID numbers or passport copies, and to check your own data-handling obligations under current UAE requirements. UAE context: the skill does not state labour, visa, probation, notice or gratuity rules as fact. Wherever they come up it says to check current UAE labour rules and your free zone or mainland authority with a qualified adviser, and uses placeholders in the job post. What it does not do: it does not post jobs, contact candidates or reject anyone. A score is a suggestion, not a prediction. A human makes every hiring decision. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md. No tools or connectors are needed.
Paste a customer message and get it classified, a reply drafted in English or Arabic at the right length, and a clear flag when a human must step in. Includes 27 macros, review replies, a refund aid and a weekly top 5 report.
Customer Support Reply Desk is a Claude skill for shops, clinics, salons, workshops and online stores. You paste a message from WhatsApp, Instagram, email or a Google review. Claude classifies it, checks whether a person must take over, and drafts a reply you can send in under a minute. What is inside: - A decision table that sorts messages into question, order status, complaint, refund or return, booking change, price haggle, abuse, urgent safety or spam, with tie-break rules - Escalation rules: money above a threshold you set, safety, legal or regulatory mentions, review or media threats, VIP customers, and repeat contact (three or more) - Tone and length rules for WhatsApp, Instagram, email and Google reviews - A library of 27 ready macros with placeholders in square brackets, six of them with Arabic drafts - Public review reply patterns for Google and Instagram - A refund and return decision aid that works from your own pasted policy - A weekly top 5 repeat questions report built from a pasted log, with counts you can check - Arabic guidance, and a standing flag that Arabic drafts need a native speaker's check How it runs: Claude first asks for your policy, your approval threshold, who the human is, and your voice (or uses neutral business English). Then for each message it classifies, checks escalation, lists the facts it has and the facts missing, and drafts the reply with a short note for the person sending it. Escalated messages get a holding reply plus a handoff note with options. If you keep sales or POS records, for example in Zeyto POS, you can paste an order's details into the chat so the reply is accurate. That is only an example. Any order system works, and Claude never looks anything up itself. What it does not do: it does not send, post or log in anywhere. It never invents a policy, stock level, price or delivery date. It does not state consumer law as fact; where rights come up it tells you to check with the relevant authority or a qualified adviser. It cannot promise that a reply will calm a customer or protect a rating. You review and send every message. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md. No tools or connectors are needed.
Paste your weekly sales, cash, stock, receivables and payables and get a one-page review with the data check first, arithmetic shown, and 5 to 8 questions to investigate. No invented numbers.
Weekly Business Review is a Claude skill that turns the numbers you paste each week into a one-page review. You give it sales, cash in bank, stock, receivables and payables, and perhaps headcount. It first checks whether the numbers agree with each other. If totals do not add up, it says so before anything else and shows the result both ways. It then writes a headline, a numbers table with week-on-week change, against-target only when both the actual and the target are supplied, what changed, what looks wrong, and 5 to 8 questions to investigate. Every computed percentage shows its arithmetic. Nothing is invented, and every assumption carries a label. What is inside: - A weekly intake template you fill the same way each week - Reconciliation checks for sales, cash, receivables ageing and stock - Rules for simple cash runway, labelled as simple and computed only from supplied numbers - Receivables ageing buckets with shares and an over-60-day line - Stock cover days by units or by cost, never mixing bases - A what-I-need-to-look-at-next-week list - Three worked examples: a clean week, a week where the data does not reconcile, and a first week with gaps Who it is for: owners and managers of small UAE businesses, and accountants who want a consistent weekly read. The numbers can come from any ERP, accounting package or spreadsheet. Zeyto's sales, receivables ageing, stock and cash reports can supply them, as one example. What it does not do: it does not check your books, forecast, or judge. It is not accounting or investment advice. It cannot tell you why a number moved, only what to ask. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste the SKILL.md.
Turn a topic, business and audience into a clear SEO content brief: intent, titles, outline, FAQs, links, schema, meta and UAE angles. No invented volumes. No ranking promises.
SEO Content Brief Writer is a Claude skill that produces a brief a writer or owner can follow. Give it a topic, your business and your audience. It classifies keyword intent, then builds the brief around what the searcher needs. What is inside: - Keyword intent classification with decision rules: informational, commercial, transactional, navigational, local (local as a layer) - A brief with a search intent statement, working titles, an H2 and H3 outline, and what each section must answer - An FAQ list written as real customer questions - Internal link suggestions as placeholders you map to real URLs - Schema suggestions (Article, FAQPage, LocalBusiness, Product) with templates and a reminder to check valid JSON-LD in a testing tool - Meta title and description length guidance, with character counts - UAE local angles: emirates and areas, English and Arabic search habits, WhatsApp as the call to action, costs in AED, and authority sources to check - An on-page checklist, and the exact steps to get demand data from your own tools Who it is for: UAE small businesses, freelancers and agencies who write their own pages or brief writers. Honest about data: Claude has no live keyword volume, difficulty or ranking data. If you paste Search Console or keyword tool numbers, the skill uses them exactly and labels them as yours. Otherwise it says so and shows how to get them. It never invents search volumes. What it does NOT do: it does not guarantee ranking, traffic or leads, does not browse or check rankings, does not validate your schema, and does not publish. Legal, tax and regulatory topics are handled with "check with the relevant authority". Arabic is flagged for a native speaker check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md.
Turn your expertise into a weekly LinkedIn plan, hooks, drafts in your voice, comment replies and a content calendar. You review and publish. Built for UAE B2B, English and Arabic.
LinkedIn Post Engine is a Claude skill that works like a content editor for a founder, consultant or small B2B team. You tell it what you sell, who buys, and what clients keep asking you. It returns a plan, hooks, drafts and a calendar you can review and publish yourself. What is inside: - A weekly plan built on 3 or 4 content pillars named in buyer language - A hook method plus ten hook patterns, with six hook options for each post - Drafting rules: three length bands, line-break style, one idea per post, one clear ask - A "does this sound like a person" edit pass with a change report - A repurposing step that turns one idea into three different posts - Comment replies, including how to handle critical and sales-pitch comments - A content calendar as a markdown table: date, pillar, format, hook, draft status, CTA - UAE B2B guidance: English and Arabic, founder profile versus company page, permissions, occasions Who it is for: founders, consultants, agency owners and small B2B teams in the UAE and Gulf who want steady, honest LinkedIn content without spending hours staring at a blank box. How the workflow runs: Claude asks a short set of questions, confirms your buyer and goal, proposes pillars, plans the week, offers hooks, drafts, edits for a human voice, and finishes with the calendar. If you have a Voice Guide, paste it and the skill follows it. If you do not, it asks three quick questions or writes plain business English. What it does NOT do: it does not log in, post, schedule, comment or message anyone. You review every word and publish. It does not promise reach, followers, leads or sales. It does not invent clients, results or statistics, and Arabic drafts are flagged for a native speaker check. It does not give legal, tax or regulatory positions. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md. No tools, browsing or connectors needed.
Paste meeting notes or a transcript and get decisions, owned action items, open questions, risks, a follow-up email and a WhatsApp summary. Unknown owners and dates stay TBC.
Meeting to Actions is a Claude skill that turns messy meeting notes or transcripts into a clear record of what was decided and who must do what. It extracts decisions, action items with owner, task, due date and evidence of done, open questions, risks and parked items. It then writes a follow-up email and a WhatsApp-length summary. Its main rule is honesty about gaps. It never invents an owner or a due date. Anything missing is marked TBC and turned into a question you can ask. Relative dates such as "next Thursday" are resolved only when you give the meeting date, and the working is shown, with a flag when the phrase could mean two dates. What is inside: - A workflow for tagging and extracting from notes and transcripts - Rules for soft commitments such as "I'll try" and "inshallah" - Handling for missing speaker labels, voice-to-text errors, and Arabic and English mixed together - A chunking method for long meetings - A recurring-meeting mode that carries over last time's open actions and shows a status table - A short note on whether the meeting needed to be a meeting - Email and WhatsApp templates, and a time-word glossary in English and Arabic - Three worked examples, including a messy mixed-language voice note and a weekly meeting with carried-over actions Who it is for: team leads, project coordinators, owners and assistants who run meetings in the UAE and want a reliable record. What it does not do: it does not attend, record or transcribe meetings, and it does not send the email or message. It cannot confirm that an action was done unless the notes say so. Arabic parts should be checked by a native speaker. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste the SKILL.md.
Go from one idea to three hooks, a timed script, shot list, on-screen text, caption and a posting checklist. Carousels slide by slide. English and Arabic. You film and publish.
Instagram Reel and Carousel Studio is a Claude skill for small businesses that want to plan, film and caption posts without a production team. You give it one idea and what you have to shoot with. It returns a package you can film from. What is inside: - A format decision rule: when an idea should be a Reel and when it should be a carousel - Three hook options from different patterns, including one that works with the sound off - A spoken script with timings and a word-count table for 15, 30, 45 and 60 seconds - A shot list, on-screen text rules, and phone-shooting tips for light, stability and sound - A caption with search terms placed naturally in the spoken words, on-screen text, caption and alt text - Carousel text slide by slide: cover, body, close - A posting checklist: cover frame, subtitles, audio rights check, alt text, tags, location, comment plan, and five things to review before publishing - Arabic and English handling, including Arabic subtitle and right-to-left reminders Who it is for: bakeries, shops, salons, studios, freelancers and agencies serving UAE small businesses. How the workflow runs: Claude asks about the business, the idea and your kit, picks the format, writes hooks, then the script or slides, the shot list, the caption and the checklist. If you paste a Voice Guide it follows it. What it does NOT do: it does not post, schedule or log in. It does not promise views, followers or leads. It does not state how Instagram's algorithm works or give platform rules as facts; it points you to your own Insights. It does not invent reviews, prices or results. Arabic text is flagged for a native speaker check. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste SKILL.md. No tools or connectors needed.
Turn a client brief into a scoped proposal or itemised quote in AED, with good/better/best options, assumptions, VAT line and follow-up emails, as markdown you paste into Word.
Proposal and Quote Builder is a Claude skill for anyone who writes proposals and quotes by hand. It starts by asking the scoping questions that make a proposal specific: the outcome the client wants, constraints, who decides, the budget range, the timeline and what is out of scope. Then it helps you decide whether the client needs a short quote or a full proposal, with a simple rule you can apply yourself. It drafts the document as markdown that you can paste into Word: summary, understanding of the need, scope, deliverables, timeline, pricing options, assumptions, exclusions, risks, payment terms, change requests and an acceptance block. Pricing options follow written rules for building good/better/best tiers, a discount rule (no discount without something in return), and change-request pricing. What is inside: - Scoping questions with a rule for what to do when an answer is skipped - Quote versus proposal decision rule - Cost-plus, value-based and market-anchored pricing worksheets - Tier-building rules and a tier worksheet - A VAT line showing prices excluding or including 5% VAT, with the arithmetic - Prompts for payment schedule, revision limits, validity, cancellation, IP and confidentiality, with draft wording marked for your lawyer to review - Follow-up email templates after sending - Three worked examples in AED: a services proposal, a trading quote and an agency retainer Who it is for: consultants, trainers, agencies, small trading companies and freelancers in the UAE. What it does not do: it does not send anything, know your costs or invent your client's budget. Terms are prompts and draft wording for your own lawyer to confirm, not legal advice. The VAT line is a presentation; confirm VAT treatment with your accountant. It cannot promise that a client will accept. Requirements: Claude with Skills support, or any Claude chat where you paste the SKILL.md.
A Claude skill that guides a small UAE company through the month-end close: calendar, cut-off, bank matching, receivables, payables, stock, accruals, payroll, VAT review points, trial balance review, draft journals and a sign-off summary. Works with any ERP.
Month-End Close Coach is a Claude skill that runs a month-end close with you, one block at a time. It starts by asking what your company looks like (stock, payroll, fixed assets, VAT, post-dated cheques, foreign currency), builds a close calendar with working-day deadlines, and then walks the blocks in the right order: cut-off and document capture, bank and cash, receivables, payables, stock, fixed assets, accruals and prepayments, payroll, VAT review points and other balances. For each block it tells you what to paste, what to flag and what to ask. Bank matching works from text you paste: it classifies unmatched items (timing, missing entry, error, unknown), builds the reconciliation statement and shows the arithmetic. Accruals and prepayment releases come out as debit and credit tables with a basis, a reversal plan and an approver line. The trial balance review checks totals, signs, movements against a rule you can change, missing recurring items, odd accounts and gross margin, and writes a question for every flag. What is inside: - SKILL.md (223 lines) with the operating rules (no invented numbers, arithmetic shown, flag but never fix), the workflow, the output formats and the failure cases. - A close calendar and a full checklist by block. - Reconciliation prompts for bank, petty cash, card settlements and supplier statements. - An accruals and adjustments guide with a recurring-cost list and journal format. - VAT review points before the return, based on the dated facts in the pack. - A trial balance review method. - Three worked examples: a bank reconciliation with a duplicate, accruals and prepayment journals for a caterer, and a trial balance review with flagged accounts. Works with any ERP or spreadsheet. Zeyto is used only as an example where its screens or accounts are relevant, such as tax codes, Day End and the accounts used for POS and petty cash differences. What it does not do: it posts nothing, cannot see your books, does not set accounting policy, provision amounts or tax treatment, gives no corporate tax advice and does not replace your accountant. It is a checklist, a calculator and a drafting aid, and it is only as good as the lists you paste. Works in Claude with Skills support, or in any Claude chat by pasting SKILL.md. Single business use licence.
We configure your Zeyto company's chart of accounts and UAE tax codes (SR5, ZR, EX, RCM, OOS), set default VAT codes on your item groups, and test each case. Set-up only: we do not file VAT returns or give tax advice.
Outcomes - Your chart of accounts reviewed against the reports you need, with up to 25 new ledgers or groups added - UAE tax codes checked and set as you decide: SR5, ZR, EX, RCM and OOS, each mapped to its VAT 201 box as built in Zeyto - A default VAT code on up to 10 item groups - Test documents showing each case landing in the expected VAT 201 box - A two-page record of every decision and who made it What we do - Review the intake form and your current chart before the session - Hold one 60-minute screen-share session with you and, ideally, your accountant to settle each treatment - Configure the chart, tax codes and item-group defaults in Zeyto - Test: a standard-rated sale, a zero-rated sale, an exempt sale, a purchase with input VAT and a reverse-charge purchase, then check the VAT 201 worksheet - Hand over the record and make one round of corrections What you provide - A running Zeyto install with an administrator login (a 14-day evaluation is fine) - Your TRN if you are VAT-registered, and your chart of accounts if you have one - Your item groups with the VAT treatment you or your accountant decided for each - Someone who can decide tax treatments for the 60-minute session. We configure what you decide Timeline 3 working days from the day we have the form and access to your Zeyto. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One company, one 60-minute session, one round of corrections - Up to 25 new accounts and 10 item groups - If your company already holds live transactions we do not post test documents in it; we test in a separate evaluation company you set up, or show the treatment on your existing documents - "VAT-ready" means each sale and purchase lands in the box you chose. It does not mean we have checked your VAT position Not included - Preparing or filing VAT returns, FTA registration, or reviewing past periods - Tax advice or deciding how your supplies are treated. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - Importing customers, suppliers, items or opening balances (see the ERP Set-up package) - E-invoicing, which is on the roadmap and not live - Tax codes for countries other than the UAE Support after delivery - 14 days of email support on what we configured, answered within 1 working day - Small corrections to the configured items are free during those 14 days - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
For a business that holds stock: ABC classes, reorder points and suggested order quantities, blind count sheets to print, and a count variance report. Up to 300 items in Excel, with a sample CSV.
Stock problems usually come from two things: not knowing when to reorder, and not checking the shelf against the system. This workbook helps with both. You list your items with unit cost, usage, lead time and on-hand quantity. The workbook ranks them by usage value and assigns A, B and C classes, works out average daily usage, safety stock, a reorder point and an order-up-to level, and shows which items to reorder now and how many to order, rounded to your pack size. A blind Count Sheet hides the system quantity so that counters do not just confirm it. After counting, the Count Variance sheet shows the difference in units and value for each item, flags the ones to investigate and gives a count accuracy. What is inside: - A Setup sheet for the usage period, ABC limits, review period, safety days and count tolerances - An Items sheet for up to 300 items with all the calculations - A printable Count Sheet, a Count Variance sheet, a Reorder List and an ABC Summary with advice for each class - A Worked Example with 12 fictional items (3 flagged items, 2 to reorder now) - stock-items-sample.csv with the 12 items - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: shops, workshops, distributors and warehouses that count stock by hand and order from a few suppliers. What it is not: it does not connect to a stock system, it assumes average usage (seasonal items need a usage period that reflects the season) and it does not post anything to accounts. If you use Zeyto for stock, you can use this for the physical count and ABC analysis alongside it and copy counted quantities across by hand. No import is built in. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
Three Word documents for a new hire: an onboarding checklist from offer to day 90, an offer letter skeleton, and a probation review form with a manager's guide. Templates, not legal advice.
A new employee forms an opinion in the first weeks. This pack gives you three documents to make those weeks organised and to leave a clear record. What is inside: - Employee Onboarding Checklist: seven stages from before the offer to day 90 (before the offer, after acceptance, documents to collect, day 1, first week, first 30 days, 60 and 90 days), each task with an owner and a due date, plus a sign-off table - Offer Letter Skeleton: a letter structure with a terms table for title, reporting line, place of work, probation, salary and allowances, hours, leave, notice and visa costs, conditions of the offer, and an acceptance block, with notes for the employer - Probation Review Form: a rating scale, eight assessment areas with space for examples, goals for the next period, the employee's comments, an outcome section and a guide to running a fair review - All documents are A4 with real heading styles, a header and footer with page numbers, and yellow-highlighted fields to replace - README Who it is for: owners and office managers of small businesses that hire a few people a year and have no HR department. What it is not: it is not legal or HR advice and it states no legal limit. Probation length, notice, visa steps and contract rules differ for the mainland and for each free zone and change over time, so check the current requirements with the labour authority, your PRO or a lawyer, and have the final offer letter and contract reviewed. The offer letter is not a contract. Requirements: Microsoft Word 2016 or later, Google Docs or LibreOffice Writer.
An Excel workbook to plan 90 days of posts, track status and results, and review by week, pillar and platform, with 40 hook templates and 48 post ideas. It plans and reviews: it does not post for you.
Consistent posting is mostly planning. This workbook helps you decide who you are talking to and what you will say, then plan every post, track it from idea to published, record the results and learn what works. What is inside: - Strategy sheet: goal, audience, tone, up to five platforms with weekly targets, up to five content pillars with target shares, and a list of key dates - Calendar: 90 days plus 30 extra slots for second posts on the same day, with drop-downs for platform, pillar, format and status, caption and call-to-action columns, and result columns for reach, reactions, comments, shares, saves and link clicks, with engagement and engagement rate calculated - Weekly Review for 13 weeks: posts planned and published, reach, engagement, notes on what worked and what to change, with a chart - Pillar and Platform Review: is your mix what you planned, and which pillar and platform earn the most engagement per reach - Hooks Library: 40 opening-line templates in seven types - Idea Bank: 48 post ideas in six groups - Worked Example: four weeks for a fictional cafe, with live formulas - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: small business owners, freelancers and the people who run social media for them. What it is not: it connects to no platform, posts nothing and gives no best time to post or growth targets, because those depend on your audience. You type in results from each platform's own analytics. Platforms define reach differently, so compare rates within a platform first. Platform rules change, and promotional and influencer content has rules: check the ones that apply to you with the relevant UAE authority. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
Five Excel tools for freelancers and solo consultants: work out your hourly and day rate, price a job, track the effective rate each project earned, spot client dependence and compare monthly take-home with your target.
Most freelancers set their rate by guessing or by copying someone else. This workbook works backwards from the income you want, your costs and the hours you can really bill, then tracks whether your projects actually earn that rate. What is inside: - Rate Calculator: monthly take-home you need, set-aside percentage, buffer, 12 cost lines (monthly or yearly), working days, leave, holidays and billable share of your hours, giving the lowest workable rate, the rate to quote, a day rate and a VAT-inclusive rate, plus a table showing the rate you need if you can bill more or fewer hours - Project Quote: tasks and hours, a risk buffer, job costs with a handling mark-up, price, VAT, deposit, and a table showing your effective hourly rate if the job runs over - Project Tracker for 30 projects: effective hourly rate against your target, hours over the estimate and a rate check - Profitability Summary: average effective rate, money by stage (quoted, in progress, delivered, invoiced, paid) and client concentration with a flag - Monthly Tracker for 12 months: take-home against target, cumulative difference and a chart - Worked Example for a fictional designer, all five tools - Instructions sheet and README Who it is for: freelancers, consultants and one-person studios. What it is not: it does not calculate tax. The set-aside percentage is yours, so ask your accountant what fits your case, and check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. It does not know licence or visa fees: enter your own. The rate is a floor for your planning, not a price the market will pay. Rates exclude VAT unless stated. Requirements: Microsoft Excel 2016 or later, Google Sheets or LibreOffice Calc.
Work out your floor price, then price, package and quote your services with worked AED examples, scripts, templates and ten worksheets. Includes VAT points and a short Zeyto marketplace fee chapter.
A playbook for freelancers, consultants, accountants in practice, designers, translators and tutors who quote prices to clients in the UAE. It shows you how to work out your own floor price, then turn it into prices clients can say yes to, without guessing, copying competitors or pricing from fear. What is inside (40 pages, 10 chapters): - Why service prices go wrong, and the four tests a price must pass. - Finding your floor: target income, expenses, buffer, a tax set-aside you confirm with your accountant, utilisation and billable hours. Full worked calculations in AED for six example freelancers. - Value and outcome pricing, and the five models (hourly, day rate, fixed project, retainer, value-based) with when each fits. - Eight services priced step by step: bookkeeping clean-up, VAT registration help, website build, logo and brand kit, social media management, ERP set-up consulting, translation and tutoring. - Packaging into three tiers with a worked example, and the psychology said honestly. - Scope definition, change requests, deposits, milestones and late-payment practice. - VAT on your invoice at 5 percent with the registration thresholds, as published by the FTA. Check with your accountant for your case. - Discount and negotiation scripts, saying no, and a script and timeline for raising prices with existing clients. - A one-page proposal template and a quote email. - Practical points for selling to UAE clients. - One short chapter on the Zeyto marketplace: platform fees of 10 percent, 7 percent for sellers with a valid Zeyto Academy certificate, and 0 percent for free offers, and how to price so you still earn your floor. - A pricing review ritual, a table of 25 pricing mistakes, and model answers to every exercise. A companion Word file has ten blank worksheets you can fill in and keep. Who it is for: self-employed people and small consultancies who sell their own time and skill. What it is not: tax, legal or accounting advice for your case. It publishes no market rates and no results. All people, companies and figures are made-up examples, and the arithmetic in them was checked. It does not promise income, sales or clients. The playbook is platform-neutral apart from its marketplace chapter. Requirements: any PDF reader, and Word or a compatible app for the worksheets. Written November 2026.
Seven short lessons with worked ledgers, exercises, a workbook with model answers, 42 quiz questions and a completion checklist (no certificate). Generic bookkeeping for UAE small businesses, with VAT and gratuity notes.
Bookkeeping Basics in 7 Days is a self-study mini-course in plain bookkeeping for small business owners and staff in the UAE who have little or no accounting training. Seven short lessons, each built around a small worked ledger, take you from the accounting equation to a monthly routine. It is generic bookkeeping; Zeyto screens appear only in short notes. What is inside - Seven lessons of about 1,400 to 1,500 words each: the equation and five account types; the chart of accounts and double entry; sales, receivables, 5% output VAT and credit notes; purchases, payables and input VAT; cash, bank and petty cash with a step-by-step bank reconciliation; accruals, prepayments, depreciation, stock and correcting mistakes; the trial balance, profit and loss, balance sheet and a monthly routine. - In every lesson: objectives, the concept, a UAE specifics section, a worked example for a made-up company (Desert Bloom Stationery LLC, with every figure checked by calculation), mistakes to avoid, three exercises with answers, and key points. - A workbook with six extra tasks per lesson, ruled answer space and a model answers appendix, as an editable Word file and a PDF. - Seven quizzes of six questions each (42 in all), one correct answer per question, with an answer key that explains every option. - A completion checklist (no certificate) and a seven-day study plan of about 14.5 hours in total. - The whole course in one PDF, and each lesson as a separate PDF and text file. Who it is for Owners and staff of small UAE businesses who keep or oversee their own books. No software is needed. What it is NOT It is not a tax guide, an audit manual or a replacement for your accountant, and it does not give legal, tax or accounting advice for your company. It does not lead to an exam, an accredited qualification or a certificate. UAE rules change: the course states only well-established points on VAT, tax invoices, gratuity and penalties, quotes no penalty amounts, and tells you to check the current position with your accountant or the FTA. E-invoicing is described as being on the Ministry of Finance roadmap with a published timetable. All figures are examples. The free Zeyto Academy is separate and stays free. Requirements - A PDF reader. Microsoft Word or a compatible editor for the workbook. - A pen or a calculator is handy for the exercises. Version 1.0. Written November 2026. Single business use.
Remote set-up of Zeyto Garage Pro for one workshop: install and licence, services and labour rates, users, print layouts, import of customers, cars and parts from your files, and two training sessions.
Outcomes - Zeyto Garage Pro installed on your server PC and up to 2 client PCs, licence activated, tablets opening it in a browser over the shop Wi-Fi - Your workshop's company profile, services list with labour rates (up to 40), parts categories, users and roles (up to 6) - Customers, vehicles and parts loaded from your Excel or CSV files (up to 1,500 customers, 1,500 vehicles, 2,000 parts) - Print layouts for estimate, job card, invoice and receipt in A4 or A5 as you choose - Your staff trained in two sessions: advisors and cashier, then technicians - A one-page record of how your workshop is set up What we do - Check your PC and network, then install and activate Zeyto Garage Pro in a screen-share - Configure the workshop, services, labour rates, parts, users and numbering - Clean and load your customer, vehicle and parts files through the import preview, fixing rejects with you - Set up print layouts, then run one full test job: check-in, estimate, customer approval link, job card, parts, invoice with VAT, payment - If your plan includes them, configure the bays board, bookings diary and daily owner report; set up the basics only - Train staff in 2 sessions of 90 minutes (up to 6 people each) and join a 60-minute go-live check on your first working day What you provide - A Zeyto Garage licence (plans on zeyto.app/garage/pricing); the price of this service does not include it - A Windows PC for the server, extra PCs if wanted, and a reliable shop network - Customer, vehicle and parts lists in Excel or CSV. If you use the Emeron Garage app, the exports it can produce - Your services and labour rates, logo, TRN and bank details - Staff available for both training sessions Timeline 7 working days from the day we have the form, the PC access and your data files, plus the go-live check on your first live day. Working days are counted from the day we hold your completed intake form and everything under "What you provide" that is marked as needed first. The clock pauses while we wait for you. Limits - One workshop at one location, about 12 hours of specialist time - Up to 3 PCs, 6 users, 3 technician tablets, 40 services, 4 print layouts - Import limits as above; larger lists are quoted - Remote only. On-site visits are quoted separately Not included - The Zeyto Garage licence, hardware, printers or network cabling - Several branches (Garage Multi-branch is planned with our team and quoted) - Custom development, integrations, or sending WhatsApp messages for you. Reminders are sent by your staff - Accounting opening balances or a chart-of-accounts redesign (see the ERP Set-up and VAT chart packages) - Data that cannot be exported from your old system. We tell you at intake what can come across Support after delivery - 30 days of email and WhatsApp support on what we set up, answered within 1 working day - One extra 60-minute training session on request within those 30 days, at no charge - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
A seller handbook for the Zeyto marketplace: setup and payouts, fee arithmetic in AED, how and when you are paid, listing and delivery, refunds and disputes, reviews, rules, a launch checklist and a weekly routine. Facts taken from the real terms.
A practical handbook for freelancers, consultants, trainers and small businesses who want to sell on the Zeyto marketplace. It follows the real flow of a seller, from first setup to a steady weekly routine, using what the marketplace actually does and the published marketplace terms. Where something is not clear, it tells you to check the seller dashboard instead of guessing. What is inside (30 pages, 9 chapters): - What the marketplace is, how a buyer finds you, and what Zeyto does and does not do. - Before you list: a verified My Zeyto account, your Zeyto Card with its field limits, and payouts through Stripe, including how Zeyto collects the payment and pays your share after a 14 day hold, in the monthly payout on the 10th, once your available balance is AED 100 or more. - Choosing what to sell: services, digital products, consultations and free offers, the 16 categories, the 30-listing cap, and an honest account of what Zeyto reviews. - Pricing and the fee arithmetic: the 10 percent standard fee, the 7 percent fee for sellers with a valid Zeyto Academy certificate, 5 percent on tips and nothing on free offers, with worked AED tables and how to work backwards from what you want to keep. You pay no card fees: Zeyto pays Stripe's processing fee, so what you get is the price minus Zeyto's fee. - Writing a listing: field limits, a seven-part structure for the details, an honest-claims table, and before and after examples for a digital product, a service and a consultation. - Publishing, review and delivery: the listing states, Zeyto's review, delivering files by link, delivering services and consultations, and Mark delivered. - Orders, refunds and disputes: your Orders and Earnings tabs, the 7-day refund window in the terms, what refunds and chargebacks do to your payout, the Problem? button, calm reply scripts and the evidence to keep. - Reviews, tips, free offers and your storefront, and what the Academy certificate is and is not. - The marketplace rules, a launch checklist, a weekly seller routine and twenty common seller mistakes. Who it is for: people who plan to sell on Zeyto and want to avoid early mistakes. What it is not: tax, legal or accounting advice for your case. It makes no promise of sales, income or reviews. All sellers, listings and figures are made-up examples, and the arithmetic was checked. This edition (version 1.1) follows the marketplace terms last updated on 10 November 2026. Fees, payout rules and refund wording can change, so read the current terms before you rely on any detail. Requirements: any PDF reader. Written November 2026, updated 10 November 2026.
A 33-page practical PDF for UAE small business owners, bookkeepers and freelancers: registration, tax invoices, tax treatment, input VAT, the VAT 201 box by box, filing, 30 common errors, a monthly routine and e-invoicing preparation. Plus editable worksheets.
A practical, plain-English guide to UAE VAT for the people who actually handle it in a small business. It is a 33-page PDF with eleven chapters, worked examples with example figures, short exercises with answers, and a glossary. A Word file of editable worksheets comes with it. What is inside: - How UAE VAT works: output VAT, input VAT, the net amount, and the four treatments (standard-rated, zero-rated, exempt, out of scope). - Do you need to register: the AED 375,000 mandatory and AED 187,500 voluntary thresholds, the 12-month and 30-day tests, the 30-day application window, the TRN, non-residents, and what to prepare. - Tax invoices: the 14-day rule (Federal Decree-Law 8 of 2017, Article 67), required particulars, credit notes, advance payments, foreign-currency invoices, and the change to simplified invoices under Cabinet Decision 100 of 2025. - Choosing the right tax treatment, with a decision method, twelve everyday cases and mixed invoices. - Input VAT: what you can recover, what you cannot, records, reverse charge on foreign services, imports and the domestic categories. - The VAT 201 return box by box, with a fully worked example return, reasonableness tests and a refund position. - Filing and paying: quarterly and monthly periods, the 28th-day rule, the next business day rule, stagger due dates for 2027, a weekly VAT pot, records, and the penalty regime (Cabinet Decision 129 of 2025, in force 14 April 2026, no amounts quoted). - Thirty common VAT errors, each with the check that catches it. - A monthly routine and a pre-filing checklist. - E-invoicing: the published timetable and a preparation checklist. - Three worksheets (VAT workings, reconciliation, invoice checker) and a glossary. Who it is for: owners, bookkeepers and freelancers of small UAE businesses, registered or deciding whether to register. Short notes show where each step sits in Zeyto, but the guide works with any accounting software or a spreadsheet. What it is not: it is not tax advice and does not replace your accountant, a tax agent or the Federal Tax Authority. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. It does not cover corporate tax, free zones, customs, deregistration or penalty amounts, and it does not file anything with the FTA. E-invoicing is on the Ministry of Finance roadmap; the guide describes the published timetable only and makes no compliance claim. All companies and figures in the examples are made up, and no result is promised. Requirements: a PDF reader, and Microsoft Word or a compatible editor for the worksheets. Written November 2026. UAE rules change, so verify dates and thresholds on the FTA and Ministry of Finance websites.
A 30-page PDF for small UAE business owners: why profit is not cash, the cash conversion cycle, a step-by-step 13-week forecast, collecting and paying smarter, a 30-day emergency plan. Includes a formula-driven Excel forecast and printable worksheets.
A practical guide to seeing your cash 13 weeks ahead and acting while there are still choices. It is a 30-page PDF with thirteen chapters, worked examples with example figures, exercises with model answers, an Excel forecast with working formulas and a printable Word worksheet pack. What is inside: - Profit is not cash: a worked bridge from a AED 40,000 profit to a AED 48,500 fall in cash. - The cash conversion cycle: days sales outstanding, days inventory and days payable, worked formulas, and what ten days is worth. - A 13-week cash forecast, step by step, with a full week-by-week worked example, a minimum cash alert, a fix for the week that falls short and a stress test. - Collecting faster: credit terms, invoice habits, a reminder ladder with scripts, early-payment discounts, post-dated and bounced cheques handled in general terms, deposits and advances (including VAT on an advance). - Paying smarter: a priority order for a tight week, negotiating terms, VAT due by the 28th day, rent cheques and payroll as a cash event, kept to general points. - Stock and cash, margins and pricing, owner drawings and separating personal and business money. - A weekly early-warning dashboard, a day-by-day 30-day emergency plan, notes for talking to banks and suppliers, common mistakes, and exercises with model answers. Files: the PDF guide; cash-flow-13-week-forecast.xlsx with an Example sheet and a Blank sheet using simple formulas (SUM, plus and minus, MIN, COUNTIF and an IF for the alert); cash-flow-worksheets.docx with eight printable worksheets; and a README. Who it is for: owners and managers of small UAE businesses and the bookkeepers who support them. What it is not: it is not financial, legal, tax or insolvency advice and it does not promise that any method will keep a business solvent. It does not cover debt recovery, the legal effect of cheques or leases, payroll rules or labour law; for those and for VAT, check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. All companies and figures are made up examples. Requirements: a PDF reader, and Microsoft Excel or a compatible spreadsheet program that recalculates formulas, and Word or a compatible editor for the worksheets. Written November 2026.
A 21-day revision plan, 150 flashcards and a 120-question practice bank with answers for UAE accounting and VAT fundamentals. Two 40-question mocks and score sheets included. Not the Zeyto Academy exam.
A self-study pack that gives you a structured three weeks of revision for accounting and UAE VAT fundamentals: a day-by-day plan, flashcards, a practice bank and a book of answers, so you spend your time on practice and not on planning. Important notice: this pack is NOT the Zeyto Academy certification exam. It is not affiliated with or endorsed by any official body or exam board. It does not predict any real exam, it gives no certificate and no access to any exam, and it promises no score or pass rate. The Zeyto Academy is free at zeyto.app/academy. What is inside: - 21-day planner (30 pages): about 1.5 to 2 hours a day, with checkpoints on Days 7, 14 and 21, a study method, an error log layout, score sheets and an exam-day checklist. - Two 40-question mock tests built from the bank, with a topic map that says which question numbers belong to each mock. - 150 flashcards (14 pages), 25 per topic, plus a CSV file of the same cards (front, back, topic) to import into a flashcard app. - Practice bank (29 pages): 120 multiple-choice questions, four options each, 20 in each of six topics, with a printable answer sheet. - Answers and explanations (33 pages): a quick key and, for every question, the correct letter and an explanation that also says why the tempting wrong answers are wrong. The six topics: bookkeeping and double entry; adjustments and financial statements; receivables, payables, cash and bank; inventory and fixed assets; UAE VAT; ratios, controls and UAE business basics including gratuity. Who it is for: students and early-career staff who already have a course, a class or a textbook and want a way to revise and test themselves. What it is not: a textbook that teaches accounting from zero, a qualification, or advice on your own tax or employment position. All example companies and figures are made up, and the arithmetic in the questions was checked in a script. UAE VAT and gratuity points follow the Federal Tax Authority and u.ae as read in November 2026; rules change, so check with your accountant or the FTA for your case. E-invoicing is on the Ministry of Finance published timetable. The pack does not cover every topic of any exam syllabus, so check the syllabus of the exam you will sit. Requirements: any PDF reader and a printer if you want paper copies. Written November 2026.
Pay online to book time with Zeyto.
A 45-minute screen-share with a Zeyto specialist that takes you from sign-in to your first sales invoice: a customer, an item, the invoice, submit, print or PDF, and the receipt. You get a half-page written recap the next working day.
Outcomes - Your first sales invoice created, submitted and printed or saved as a PDF, with you doing the clicking - One customer and one item (or service) added the way Zeyto expects them - A receipt recorded against that invoice, and the invoice found again in the Sales Register - A half-page written recap of the steps, sent by email by the end of the next working day, with a list of anything that needs set-up first What we do - Open with a 5-minute check of your sign-in, the Company Profile name and TRN, and the tax codes - Show you the menu, the Ctrl+K search, a new customer and a new item - Raise a sales invoice together, using the tax code you or your accountant chose, submit it and open the print preview - Save the PDF, and show how to share it by email or WhatsApp where your set-up allows - Record the receipt and open one report to see the invoice there - Tell you plainly what is not ready yet (for example no tax codes or no logo) and which package or Academy lesson covers it What you provide - A running Zeyto (a Windows install, or reachable in a browser) and a sign-in that can create customers, items and invoices. A 14-day evaluation is fine - The short intake form, returned at least 24 hours before the call - One real customer and one real item or service to use, or we use sample ones - The VAT treatment for the item (standard-rated, zero-rated or exempt), decided by you or your accountant Timeline The call takes place within 5 working days of receiving your intake form, at a time agreed by email or WhatsApp. Please give 24 hours' notice to move it. The recap follows by the end of the next working day. Limits - One session of 45 minutes, up to 2 attendees, one business. A second call is a second purchase - The aim is one posted sales invoice. If something we need is missing (no tax codes, no open fiscal year, no licence), we use the time to list what to fix - We do not install Zeyto on the call. If it is not installed yet, install it first - The call is in English. Ask first if you need Arabic and we will tell you whether we can Not included - Company set-up, data import or opening balances (see the set-up packages) - Deciding the VAT treatment, or tax or accounting advice. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - POS, Field Sales, Garage Pro or Contracting - Training for the rest of your team (see the Team Training Half-Day) Support after delivery - Half-page written recap by the end of the next working day - One short follow-up question by email within 7 days - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Three 60-minute coaching sessions around your own month-end close in Zeyto: plan it, run it with us watching, then review it. You do the close and we coach. We do not do your bookkeeping or give tax advice.
Outcomes - Session 1, before your close: we compare your current routine with Zeyto's working order and agree who does what. You receive a tailored close checklist of 1 to 2 pages (Word) with the Zeyto screen for each step, its owner and its due day - Session 2, during your close: you run the close and share your screen. We coach through the checks: drafts, bank reconciliation, ageing, stock, accruals and depreciation, Data health and the Trial Balance, before you lock the period - Session 3, after your close: we read your Profit & Loss and Balance Sheet with you, review what slowed the close and what went wrong, and agree a shorter routine for next month - Written notes by email within 1 working day after each session, with the actions agreed What we do - Read your intake form and your last close: the checklist you used and the problems you remember - Explain the order Zeyto's checks run in, and why: accruals and depreciation before you read the statements, and locking last - Show where Zeyto reports on each check (Day End, Bank Reconciliation, Aging, stock reports, Data health, Trial Balance, Posting Controls) and what a clean result looks like - Ask questions and point out issues. You, or your accountant, decide each correction and post it - Leave you with a closing checklist and the three to five habits to change What you provide - A Zeyto company in use, and a sign-in that can open Day End, the reports and Bank Reconciliation. You do the clicking - The person who does your close at all three sessions, and the owner or your accountant at session 3 if you want them there - Your last month-end checklist, or a description of how you close today - Dates inside one close: session 1 in the last week of the month or the first working days of the next, sessions 2 and 3 within 10 working days after month end Timeline All three sessions fall inside one month-end cycle, within 30 days of us holding your intake form. We agree dates by email or WhatsApp. Please give 24 hours' notice to move a session. Limits - Three sessions of 60 minutes, up to 3 attendees, one company and one close - Coaching only. You do the work on your own books and you stay in control of the screen - Zeyto screens only. If part of your close happens in another system, we advise on the routine, not on that system - A session cancelled with less than 24 hours' notice counts as used - The sessions are in English Not included - Doing your bookkeeping, posting entries, reconciling or preparing statements for you. This is coaching on your own close, not bookkeeping on your behalf - Accounting judgement, tax advice, or preparing or filing VAT returns. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - Fixing errors in older periods, or cleaning up a backlog - Training your whole team (see the Team Training Half-Day) Support after delivery - Written notes after each session, within 1 working day - One short follow-up question by email within 14 days of session 3 - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
One hour online with a Zeyto specialist: does Zeyto fit your business, what would a set-up involve, and which package (if any) you need. You get a one-page written summary within 2 working days.
Outcomes - A straight answer on whether Zeyto fits how you trade, and where it does not - A short list of next steps in order, each matched to the Zeyto package that covers it (or "none needed") - A rough view of the data route: Emeron Migration Tool, Import Center files, or starting clean - A one-page written summary by email within 2 working days of the session What we do - Read your intake form before the call, so the hour goes on your business and not on introductions - Walk through the Zeyto live demo using your own scenarios (a sale, a purchase, VAT, stock, a report) - Compare your current system and routines with Zeyto and name the gaps honestly - Answer questions on licences, where Zeyto can run (your own server or private cloud), users and branches - Outline the set-up and migration route and roughly how much effort each part needs What you provide - The completed intake form at least 24 hours before the session - One or two decision makers on the call (up to 3 people in total) - The name of your current system and what it can export; a sample invoice and sample report help but are optional - A stable internet connection; we use the video tool you prefer Timeline The session takes place within 5 working days of receiving your intake form, at a time agreed by email or WhatsApp. Please give 24 hours' notice to move it. The written summary follows within 2 working days of the session. Limits - One session of 60 minutes, up to 3 attendees, one business - A second session is a second purchase - The session is in English. Ask first if you need Arabic and we will tell you whether we can Not included - Set-up, installation or data work (the other packages cover those) - Tax, VAT, legal or accounting advice. Check with your accountant or the FTA for your case - A fixed-price quote for custom development (we can describe the route; a quote is separate) - A Zeyto licence. Plans and prices are on zeyto.app/pricing Support after delivery - Written summary by email within 2 working days - One short follow-up question by email within 7 days of the session - Refunds follow the Zeyto Marketplace Terms (section 6): write to support@zeyto.app within 7 days of purchase if the service was not delivered or differs materially from this description.
Ask a question, describe what you need or book a conversation. Zeyto replies to you directly.
Scan the code with a phone camera to open this card, or send the link.
zeyto.app/zeyto
Zeyto is invoicing, stock, POS and UAE VAT in one system that keeps working when the internet does not. Open the live demo and try it, no card needed.
Share what you know: a page at zeyto.app/your-name with your skills, free and paid offers and a tip jar, a QR code and a printable business card. Free to start. How the NFC card works.
Everything on this card was written by the person it belongs to. Verified badges come from Zeyto Academy certificates and are checked live against the public registry. Zeyto does not guarantee anyone's work. About Zeyto Cards · Expert directory